Crescas’ Critique of Aristotle: Problems of Aristotle’s Physics in Jewish and Arabic Philosophy [2nd printing 1971. Reprint 2014 ed.] 9780674864214, 9780674864221

Wolfson Harry Austryn : Harry Austryn Wolfson was Nathan Littauer Professor of Hebrew Literature and Philosophy, Emer

204 3 39MB

English Pages 775 [780] Year 1957

Report DMCA / Copyright

DOWNLOAD PDF FILE

Table of contents :
PREFACE
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
EXPLANATION OF SYMBOLS
TEXT AND TRANSLATION of the Twenty-five Propositions of Book I of the Or Adonai
NOTES to the Twenty-five Propositions of Book I of the Or Adonai. Part 1
NOTES to the Twenty-five Propositions of Book I of the Or Adonai. Part II
BIBLIOGRAPHY
INDEXES
Recommend Papers

Crescas’ Critique of Aristotle: Problems of Aristotle’s Physics in Jewish and Arabic Philosophy [2nd printing 1971. Reprint 2014 ed.]
 9780674864214, 9780674864221

  • 0 0 0
  • Like this paper and download? You can publish your own PDF file online for free in a few minutes! Sign Up
File loading please wait...
Citation preview

HARVARD SEMITIC SERIES VOLUME VI

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE PROBLEMS OF ARISTOTLE'S

PHYSICS

IN JEWISH AND ARABIC PHILOSOPHY

BY

HARRY AUSTRYN WOLFSON NATHAN LITTAUER PROFESSOR OF HEBREW LITERATURE AND PHILOSOPHY, EMERITUS, HARVARD UNIVERSITY

CAMBRIDGE

HARVARD UNIVERSITY PRESS

COPYRIGHT 1 9 2 9 BY THE PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE

© Copyright 19S7 by HARRY AUSTRYN WOLFSON

Second Printing, 1971 Distributed in Great Britain by Oxford University Press, London SBN 674-1757S-1

PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA

TO

LUCIUS NATHAN LITTAUER LOVER OF LEARNING IN HIGH ESTEEM AND APPRECIATION

PREFACE philosophy is no longer considered as a barren interval between ancient and modern philosophy. Nor is it any longer identified with works written solely in Latin. Scholarship recognizes it more and more as a formative period in the history of philosophy the records of which are to be found in a threefold literature—Arabic, Hebrew and Latin. In certain respects, the delineation and treatment of the history of philosophy should follow the same lines as the delineation and treatment of the political and social history of Europe. The closing of the philosophic schools at Athens early in the sixth century is analogous in its effect to the fall of Rome toward the end of the fifth century. Like the latter, it brought a dying past to its end, and prepared the way for a shifting of scene in a phase of history. The successive translations of Greek treatises into Syriac, Arabic, Hebrew and Latin correspond, in philosophy, to the spread of the diverse elements of Roman civilization with the successions of tribal wanderings, of invasions, and of conversions. Both accomplished similar results, transforming something antiquated and moribund into something new, with life in it. By the same token, just as one cannot treat of the new life t h a t appeared in Europe during the Middle Ages as merely the result of the individual exploits of heroes, or of the eloquence of preachers, or of the inventive fancy of courtiers, so one cannot treat of the development of mediaeval philosophic thought as a mere interplay of abstract concepts. There is an earthly basis to the development of philosophic problems in the Middle Ages—and that is language and text. The present work is an a t t e m p t to trace the history of certain problems of philosophy by means of phi'ological and textual studies. MEDIAEVAL

VII

VIII

PREFACE

In form this work is a study of certain portions of Hasdai Crescas' Or Adonai ("The Light of the Lord"). In substance it is a historical and critical investigation of the main problems of Aristotle's Physics and De Caelo. Its material, largely unpublished, is drawn from the general field of Jewish philosophy and from related works in Arabic philosophy, such as the writings of Avicenna and Algazali, and particularly the commentaries of Averroes on Aristotle. The scope of this work, confined as it is to a closely interdependent group of writings, did not call for citations from works outside the field of Greek, Arabic and Jewish philosophy. Yet the material is such that the discussion of the history of the various problems will furnish a background for corresponding discussions of the same problems in scholastic philosophy. The notes, which form the greater part of the work, are detachable from the text and can be used in connection with similar texts in other works. Many of the notes exceed the bounds of mere explanatory comments, being in fact extended investigations of the development of certain philosophic concepts by means of a study of the interpretation and criticism to which Aristotle's writings were subjected in two forms of mediaeval philosophic literature—the Arabic and the Hebrew. Hasdai Crescas, whose work is the subject of the special investigation, was a true representative of the interpénétration of the Arabic and Hebrew philosophic traditions. Born in Barcelona in 1340, he died in Saragossa in 1410. He flourished, it will be seen, two centuries after Maimonides (1135-1204), who was the last of that line of Jewish philosophers, beginning with Saadia (882-942), whose works were written in Arabic for Arabic speaking Jews. During these two intervening centuries the centre of Jewish philosophic activity had shifted to non-Arabic speaking countries—to Christian Spain, to Southern France and to Italy—where the sole literary language of the Jews was Hebrew. In these new centres, the entire philosophic literature written in Arabic by Jews as well as almost everything

PREFACE

IX

of general philosophic interest written by Moslems was translated into Hebrew, and thereby Hebrew literature became also the repository of the whole Aristotelian heritage of Greek philosophy. Acquaintance with the sources of philosophy acquired by means of these translations stimulated the production of an original philosophic literature in Hebrew, rich both in content and in volume. I t also gave rise to a new attitude toward philosophy, an attitude of independence, of research and of criticism, which, among those who continued to be opposed to philosophy, manifested itself in a change in the temper of their opposition, while among those who were aligned on the side of philosophy, it took the form of incisive, searching studies of older texts and problems. Of the vast learning so attained by fourteenth century Jewish scholars and also of the critical attitude which inspired their studies Crescas is the fruition. In his work are mirrored the achievements of five centuries of philosophic activity among Moslems and Jews, and in his method of inquiry is reflected the originality and the independence of mind which characterize the Jewish philosophic writings of his time—an originality and independence which is yet to be recognized. Crescas' method has been described elsewhere in this work (pp. 24-29) as the hypotheticodeductive method of Talmudic reasoning, usually called pilpul, which is in reality the application of the scientific procedure to the study of texts. Applied by Crescas to the study of the texts of others, this method is here applied to the text of his Or Adonai. T h e Or Adonai is divided into four Books (ma'amarim), the first three of which are subdivided into Parts (kelalim), or, as the Latin translators from the Hebrew would more accurately call them, summulae, and these are again subdivided into Chapters (perafyim). The first twenty-five chapters of Part I of Book I are written in the form of proofs of the twenty-five propositions in which Maimonides summed up the main prin-

X

PREFACE

ciples of Aristotle's philosophy. The first twenty chapters of Part II of Book I are written in the form of a criticism of twenty out of the twenty-five propositions. The present work deals with these two sets of chapters, with the proofs and the criticisms. Together they compose about one sixth of the entire work. A separate study of Part III of Book I and of the remaining chapters of Parts I and II will be published shortly under the title Crescas on the Existence and Attributes of God. In reprinting the text I have changed somewhat its original order by placing the criticism of each proposition immediately after its respective proof. The text is edited on the basis of the first edition and of eleven manuscripts; it is accompanied by an English translation and is followed by a commentary in the form of notes on the translation. There is also an Introduction, which is divided into six chapters. Chapter I discusses literary and historical problems. Chapters II to V contain a systematic presentation of the main problems dealt with in the text and the notes. Chapter VI interprets some of the larger aspects of Crescas' philosophy and endeavors to appraise him as one of the first to forecast that which ever since the sixteenth century has been known as the new conception of the universe. Translation, commentary and introduction are interdependent and mutually complementary. The study of a text is always an adventure, the adventure of prying into the unknown recesses of the mind of another. There is sleuthing in scholarship as there is in crime, and it is as full of mystery, danger, intrigue, suspense and thrills—if only the story were told. In a work of this kind, however, the story is not the thing. What one is after is the information it uncovers. Accordingly, no attempt has been made to recount the processes of the search. Only the results arrived at are set down, and the corroborative data are so marshalled as to let them speak for themselves and convince the reader by the obviousness of the contention.

PREFACE

XI

A considerable part of this work—the study of the first proposition dealing with infinity, including text, translation, notes and introduction—was completed in 1915. Three years later, in 1918, the entire work was brought to a conclusion and the part on infinity thoroughly revised. When in the fall of 1927, through the liberality of Mr. Lucius N. Littauer, means were provided for the publication of the work, the manuscript was again gone over, to prepare it finally for the press. In addition, English translations were made of all the Hebrew passages quoted in the notes, and, wherever necessary, references to Aristotle were filled out with passages quoted from available English translations of his works. This, it is hoped, will open up the notes to a wider circle of readers. The work could not have been complete without good will and cooperation from many quarters. In the years 1912-14, while I was in Europe in search for manuscript material, I enjoyed the privileges of the libraries of Paris, Munich, Vienna, Parma, the Vatican, the British Museum, Jews' College, Oxford and Cambridge. The library resources and facilities of Harvard University have made it possible to correlate the special studies of Hebrew texts with the larger field of philosophic literature. In the collection of Hebrew manuscripts in Columbia University, through the kindness of Professor Richard Gottheil and the librarians, I was able to find several Hebrew manuscripts which, during the final stages of the printing of the book, it became necessary for me to consult. Mr. Adolph S. Oko, of the Hebrew Union College Library, generously supplied me with many books which I had to use constantly. Dr. Joshua Bloch, Chief of the Jewish Division of the New York Public Library, always responded to my distant requests for bibliographical data. Professor Alexander Marx, of the Jewish Theological Seminary, not only opened to me the great treasures of the library of which he is the head, but also directed my attention to rare books and manuscripts in its possession. Professor Julius

XII

PREFACE

Guttmann, of the Hochschule für die Wissenschaft des Judentums, Berlin, was kind enough to bring to my knowledge the existence of the Bloch manuscript of the Or Adonai, now in the possession of the Akademie für die Wissenschaft des Judentums, and to procure a photostatic copy of it for my use. For help in securing a greater degree of textual impeccability I am indebted to Professor Isaac Husik, of the University of Pennsylvania, Professor William Thomson, of Harvard, and Professor Ralph Marcus, of the Jewish Institute of Religion, who have read in proof considerable portions of the work. Dr. George Sarton, of Harvard, was kind enough to read Chapter VI of the Introduction and to reassure me when I entered on uncertain ground. Of inestimable aid in the final clarification of some of the views presented in this work was the opportunity I had for several successive years to ventilate them in the Seminar on Aristotle in which I was associated with Professor James H. Woods, and in the frequent discussions with Professor Horace M. Kallen, of the New School for Social Research, and Professor Henry M. Sheffer, of Harvard. To all these my grateful acknowledgments. And finally I wish to record my gratitude to two men under whose guidance I entered upon this work and whose encouragement has sustained me throughout its progress. In Professor David Gordon Lyon I have found an ideal exemplar of teacher and friend, through whose broad conception of the fields of Semitic learning opportunities were created for this undertaking. To the teaching and friendship of Professor George Foot Moore I shall always feel myself profoundly indebted. During my labors on this work, whenever I was confronted with a perplexing problem, I found in his wide learning and sage counsel the illumination I needed. H . A . WOLFSON

CONTENTS INTRODUCTION

CHAPTER I SOURCES, METHOD, INFLUENCE AND OPPOSITION

I. Maimonides' twenty-five propositions, 1.—Crescas' sources, 4.—Evidence of the existence of an oral interpretation of Aristotle's writings among Arabs and Jews, 7.—Examination of the alleged influence of Algazali's Tahafut al-Falasifah on the Or Adonai, 11.—The relative dates of the composition of the Or Adonai and the Bi((ul 'Inhere ha-No^erim, 16.— The Or Adonai probably not written in the order in which it now exists, 17.—The Hebrew translations of Altabrizi, 19.—Extent of Crescas' dependence on Altabrizi, 22. II. The logic of the Talmudic method of text study and its use in Jewish philosophic literature, 24.—The Or Adonai probably originated in classroom lectures, 30.—Echoes of Crescas' class-room discussions in Albo's 'Ikkarim, 30.—Opposition to Crescas on the part of the Jewish Aristotelians of the Ibn Shem-tob family, 31.—Influence on Giovanni Francesco Pico Delia Mirandola, on Spinoza, and possibly also on Bruno, 34. C H A P T E R II INFINITY, SPACE AND VACUUM

Crescas' restatement of Aristotle's arguments against infinity,38.—Main drift of Aristotle's discussion of infinity, 40.—The fallacy of arguing against an infinite from the analogy of a finite, 41.—The infinite may be either a simple or a composite body, 42.—The use of the definition of place as an argument against infinity, 43.—Aristotle's definition of place and its implications, 44.—Various views as to the place of the spheres and the universe, 45.—Crescas' criticism of Aristotle's definition of place, 46.— Crescas' definition of place, 48.—Aristotle's contention as to the incompatibility of infinity with rectilinear motion, 49.—Crescas' refutation: the possibility of an infinite number of proper places, 50.—Aristotle's contention that infinity is incompatible with circular motion on the ground that an infinite distance (1) cannot be traversed or (2) cannot be traversed in finite time; Crescas' refutation, 51.—Aristotle's denial of an incorporeal infinite magnitude on the ground of the impossibility of a vacuum, 53.— Different conceptions of a vacuum, 54.—Crescas' explanation of the sense in which a vacuum is said to be the cause of motion, 54.—Crescas' explanaXIII

XIV

CONTENTS

tion as to how motion in a vacuum would be possible, 55.—Aristotle's laws of motion, 56.—Avempaces' theory of an original time of motion, 57.— Averroes' rejection of the original time of motion, 57.—Crescas' reinstatement of the original time of motion and his denial of absolute lightness, 57.—The cause of the impenetrability of bodies, 59.—Crescas' concluding argument as to the existence of a vacuum, 60.—His conclusion as to the existence of an infinite incorporeal extension, 62.—The infinite and the indefinite: the sense in which one infinite is not greater than another and the sense in which it is, 63.—The problem of infinite number, 64.—The impossibility of an infinite number of corporeal magnitudes, 65.—Arguments for the impossibility of an infinite series of causes and effects; Crescas' refutation, 65.—The problem of the possibility of an infinite number of incorporeal beings, 67.—Crescas' conclusion as to the possibility of an infinite series of causes and effects in the downward direction if it is finite in the upward direction, 67.

C H A P T E R III MOTION

The enumeration of the categories of change and motion by Aristotle and by Arabic and Jewish philosophers, 70.—Change in time and change in no-time, 71.—The two subjects of change, the sustaining subject and the material subject, 72.—Change and motion, 74.—The three formulations of the Aristotelian definition of motion, 75.—The various classifications of motion in Aristotle and in Arabic and Jewish philosophy, 76.—Maimonides' definition of essential motion, 77.—Problem as to whether the circular motion of the spheres is voluntary or natural, 77.—Crescas' denial of proper places, of natural motion upward and of absolute lightness, 78.— Crescas' revision of the distinction between natural and violent motion, 79.—Meaning of accidental motion, 80.—-Exceptions to the principle that everything changeable is divisible, 80.—Two meanings of the expression "essential motion", 81.—No accidental and violent motion can be eternal, 81.—Crescas' qualification of the statement as to accidental motion, 82.— The accidental as the possible, 82.—The different senses in which motion may be called "one", 82.—Two meanings of the expression "continuous motion", 83.—Arguments that there is no continuity between opposite rectilinear motions; Crescas' refutation, 83.—Continuity and eternity of circular motion, 86.—The order of priority of the various categories of motion, 87.—The need of a cause for motion, 88.—The immediate cause of motion must be distinct from the object moved but not necessarily external to it, 88.—Avicenna, Averroes and Maimonides as to the cause of the natural motions of the elements, 88.—The ultimate cause of any transition from potentiality to actuality is always external, 89.—How a change in the object does not always imply a change in the agent, 90.— An efficient cause of motion is moved while producing motion, 90.—Different theories as to the cause of magnetic attraction, 90.

CONTENTS CHAPTER

XV

IV

TIME

T h e p h r a s i n g of C r e s c a s ' definition of t i m e c o m p a r e d w i t h t h a t of Aristotle's definition, 93.—-Analysis of t h e r e a s o n i n g l e a d i n g u p t o A r i s t o t l e ' s definit i o n of t i m e , 9 4 . — T h e i m p l i c a t i o n s of A r i s t o t l e ' s definition, 95.—Analysis of a n u n - A r i s t o t e l i a n definition of t i m e : d u r a t i o n , 9 6 . — C r e s c a s ' definition of t i m e a n d its implications, 97. CHAPTER

V

M A T T E R AND F O R M

T h e use of t h e t e r m " f o r c e " b y M a i m o n i d e s , 9 9 . — A r i s t o t l e ' s m e t h o d of d e d u c i n g t h e opposition of m a t t e r a n d f o r m , 9 9 . — T h e i n t r o d u c t i o n of " c o r p o r e a l f o r m " a n d its m e a n i n g a c c o r d i n g t o A v i c e n n a , Algazali a n d Averroes, 1 0 0 . — T h e n e w m e t h o d of d e d u c i n g t h e opposition of m a t t e r a n d f o r m , 1 0 1 . — T h e definition of s u b s t a n c e a n d t h e e n u m e r a t i o n of subs t a n c e s , 1 0 2 . — T h e definition of a c c i d e n t a n d t h e classification of a c c i d e n t s , 1 0 3 . — T h e o p p o s i n g views of A v i c e n n a a n d A v e r r o e s a s t o t h e composition of t h e s u b s t a n c e of t h e spheres, 103.—Crescas' elimination of t h e p u r e l y p o t e n t i a l i n e x t e n d e d p r i m e m a t t e r a n d his revision of t h e definition of form, 1 0 4 . — T h e divisibility a n d t h e indivisibility of t h e " f o r c e s " residing in a b o d y , 1 0 4 . — T h e finiteness of t h e m o t i v e force residing in a finite b o d y , 105.—Crescas' r e f u t a t i o n : distinction b e t w e e n a force infinite in i n t e n s i t y a n d a force infinite in t i m e , 106.—Crescas' n e w e x p l a n a t i o n for t h e e t e r n i t y of t h e motion of t h e spheres, 1 0 6 . — H o w universals a r e n u m b e r e d , 107.— T h e o p p o s i n g views of A v i c e n n a a n d Averroes as t o how t h e i m m a t e r i a l Intelligences a r e n u m b e r e d , 1 0 8 . — H o w t h e d i s e m b o d i e d souls a r e n u m bered, 109.—Aristotle's definition of " n e c e s s a r y " a n d "possible", 109.— A v i c e n n a ' s i n t r o d u c t i o n of t h a t which is possible per se b u t n e c e s s a r y b y its cause, 1 1 0 . — A v i c e n n a ' s idenitfication of necessity per se with causelessness, 111.—Averroes' r e t e n t i o n of Aristotle's m e a n i n g of t h e t e r m necessary, 111.—Avicenna's necessary per se as precluding a n y f o r m of composition, 111.—Difference between " p o s s i b i l i t y " a n d " p o t e n t i a l i t y " , 1 1 1 . — M a t t e r a s t h e p o t e n t i a l a n d f o r m as t h e a c t u a l , 112.—Crescas' denial of t h e p u r e p o t e n t i a l i t y of m a t t e r , 113.—A k i n d of possibility which is n o t in m a t t e r , 113.

CHAPTER

VI

F O R E S H A D O W I N G A N E W C O N C E P T I O N OF T H E U N I V E R S E .

S o m e positive t e n d e n c i e s in Crescas' criticism of Aristotle, 114.—Aristotle's failure t o explain w h a t is outside his finite universe, 115.—Crescas' infinite universe, 116.—Crescas a n d Aristotle on t h e distinction b e t w e e n place a n d space, 116.—Logical a n a l o g y between Crescas' infinite v a c u u m a n d t h e p o s t u l a t e of a universal e t h e r , 117.—Infinite n u m b e r of worlds, 117.— C r e s c a s a n d B r u n o , 1 1 8 . — H e t e r o g e n e i t y a n d d i s c o n t i n u i t y in Aristotle's

XVI

CONTENTS

universe, 118.—Crescas' establishment of a complete homogeneity and continuity of nature, 119.—The characteristic feature of atomism in Arabic and Jewish philosophy, 120.—Crescas as tending toward a revival of atomism, 121.—Crescas' unification of the forces of nature by bringing magnetic attraction under the general laws of natural motion, 121.— The contrast between Aristotle's and Spinoza's conceptions as to the relation of God to the universe, 122.—Crescas' stopping short of Spinoza's conception, 123.—Implications of the expression "God is the place of the world", 123.—The three stages in the history of the opposition to Aristotle as reflected in Crescas, 124.—Crescas, Newton and Galileo, 126.

EXPLANATION OF SYMBOLS

128

TEXT AND TRANSLATION OF THE TWENTY-FIVE PROPOSITIONS OF BOOK I OF THE Or Adonai

130-315

NOTES TO THE TWENTY-FIVE PROPOSITIONS OF BOOK I OF THE Or Adonai

319-700

BIBLIOGRAPHY: I. II. III.

Manuscripts and editions of the Or Adonai 703 Manuscripts and editions of works cited 706 Selected list of works, articles and other items about Crescas.. 712

INDEXES: I. II.

INDEX OF SUBJECTS AND N A M E S INDEX OF PASSAGES

A. Greek Authors B. Arabic Authors C. Jewish Authors D. European Authors III.

715

735 740 743 749

INDEX OF T E R M S :

A. Hebrew B. Arabic C. Greek D. Latin

751 756 757 759

INTRODUCTION

CHAPTER I S O U R C E S , M E T H O D , O P P O S I T I O N AND I N F L U E N C E

I THE power of generalization which is so remarkably displayed by Maimonides in all his writings, whether philosophic or Talmudic, is nowhere employed by him to greater advantage than in his introduction to the second part of the Guide of the Perplexed. Within the limited range of twenty-five propositions he contrived to summarize in compact and pithy form the main doctrines of Aristotle, which, supplemented by some from Avicenna, form the premises upon which are built his proofs for the existence, unity and incorporeality of God. Of these propositions Maimonides says t h a t "some may be verified by means of a little reflection," while "others require many arguments and propositions, all of which, however, have been established by conclusive proofs in the Physics and its commentaries and partly in the Metaphysics and its commentaries." 1 But Maimonides himself did not consider it as part of his task to reproduce those proofs, for, as he again and again declares, "in this work it is not my intention to copy the books of the philosophers." 1 T o the students of the Guide, however, the explanation and proofs of these propositions offered a wide field of research, and among the numerous commentaries which in the course of time have clustered around the Guide quite a few dealt exclusively with the propositions Four commentaries of this latter kind were written during the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries, by Altabrizi, Hillel of Verona, 1 Moreh Nebukim II, Introduction, Prop. XXV: Bjma inud Ninp no ono 1'« noma oVia n«ann naa& NVN ,nm moipni o-nBiD1? hd onoi . . . nunann "fiTBi yaun irmp no isoa onxpi vwivsi yD»n nsDa anxp ,ia pso-

• Ibid. ia O'siD ^"RN HDD p'nyn1? nrn -IDNDH rma J W .

2

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

Zerahia Gracian, and Jedaiah Bedersi.3 It is to this class of literature that Crescas' treatment of the twenty-five propositions in his Or Adotiai, completed in the early years of the fifteenth century, should be assigned. There is, however, a difference between Crescas and his predecessors. None of his predecessors has acted upon Maimonides' suggestion of going directly to the works of Aristotle and his commentators for the proofs of the propositions. What the nature of Bedersi's commentary was there is no way of determining, as the work is no longer extant. Zerahiah Gracian admits that for a complete explanation of the propositions one would have to resort to the sources out of which they sprang, but evidently awed by the enormity of the labor that such a task would involve he decided to restrict himself to brief explanatory notes in which, he says, he would especially endeavor to explain the order and sequence of the propositions.' Hillel of Verona, too, realized the need of a complete and comprehensive commentary upon the propositions and expressed the hope that some day either he himself or some one else would undertake to write it, but for the present, he said, he would give only a brief discussion of certain general topics.5 Nor does the commentary of Altabrizi do more justice to the subject. Though J Friedländer, The Guide of the Perplexed, Vol. I l l , Preface, pp. xix-xxiii; Steinschneider, "Die hebräischen Commentare zum 'Führer' des Maimonides" in Festschrift zum siebzigsten Geburtstage A. Berliner's, pp. 345-363. < MS. Paris, Bibliothèque Nationale, Cod. Heb. 985: ,'JiN )a 'n« .uneon -ion niaiw nun nwan jrvnBiö niy-ra n u n s )n '3 .nimpnn i^n 'Ji'jn by nibya lrip1? ib« .rnmpon njnb VaV -pis» 'b^ .niobyxm a m i"j>D bs *i'ya vn .man .rnmpnn i^k -nro •:« p by . . . nwwn jn nwann p ibd nt'Nai ,ono p nn« ,nmanb n m p it nnV yninS -iai ona »in« 'bim . . . m s p a i » ma'-ma «b nnn« nnbiib niDipnn. » Introduction to Hillel of Verona's commentary on the Twenty-five Propositions: bs b i t e ,-innn .B'j'jy 'J® mmpnn iSn n w a a j'ao babi -|nx '3 ,»™ j n i n'ban ni'« by b'ï ,nmpn ba nsia ,'jwm ,nmpnn nneu p i t s Vn ,noxya nmpnn pbi . . . m i p s r i ß « i w a n pbni .raoo naun rpuDn ivy m b't a-in na jiva lyix -ny o'o'b 'Vimi . . . mxpai viVa'B hd npn'oa -y1"* 'nanai "|bipa 'nyat TKD -]»bj "?mi anno« ri'Van by -p'Dyr ,'jbb Vru in« oan ih *jh ik.

CH. I — S O U R C E S , METHOD, OPPOSITION & INFLUENCE

3

his discussions of the propositions are full and elaborate, they reflect only faintly the original works of Aristotle; his material is drawn mainly from the works of Arabic authors. In the first proposition, for instance, Altabrizi cites none of the arguments given by Aristotle; the three arguments he advances are taken from later sources. The statement made by Narboni in connection with the propositions may be quoted here as expressing the general attitude of all those who undertook to comment upon them. "My object has been to discuss the meaning of the Master's propositions and not to give you the proofs by which they may be demonstrated. Their proofs are to be found in the works from which the propositions are taken, and were I to reproduce them the result of my effort would be a book instead of a commentary." 6 It was left for Crescas to undertake the task from which his predecessors had steered clear and to compile a commentary on the propositions, or rather a book, as Narboni would call it, along the lines indicated by Maimonides himself. Crescas, however, did not start out to write a mere commentary. He was primarily a critic of philosophy. His main object was to show that the Aristotelian explanation of the universe as outlined by Maimonides in his propositions was false and that the proofs of the existence of God which they were supposed to establish were groundless. But not wishing to appear as if he were arguing in the absence of his opponent, he felt it was necessary for him to present Aristotle's case before trying to demolish it. He therefore divides his treatment of the propositions into two parts, the proofs and his criticism of the proofs. In the proofs, as he himself avers, he intended to do nothing but to collect the arguments he had found in various sources and to present them in orderly and logical form according to a scheme of his own design. No such statement is made by him 4

Narboni on Prop. X X V : .»VniDa onnDft1? «V ann hdnd -p'anV 'ran ojbn 'jni nun dk '3 riTB ru dtp h^i .onioipDa dvidikb nom.

4

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

with regard to his criticism. But we shall see that his criticism is likewise made up of material drawn from other sources, its originality—and there is a considerable amount of originality in it—consisting merely in the use made of this material and in the particular purpose it was made to serve, for Crescas uses his sources as the poet uses his words and the artist his paints. In fact, the history of the criticism of Aristotle is inseparable from the history of the interpretation of his works. His commentators were not mere expositors. They were investigators, constantly looking for new problems, discovering difficulties, raising objections, setting up alternative hypotheses and solutions, testing them; and pitting them against each other. What was therefore meant by them primarily to be an interpretation inevitably became a criticism, albeit a friendly criticism, carried on by indulgent disciples in the spirit of a search for the true understanding of the Master who had to be justified at all costs. It was only necessary for one like Crescas to free himself from the bondage of discipleship in order to convert these special pleadings into hostile criticisms. Nowhere, however, does Crescas give a complete account of his sources. In his prefatory statement to the first book, to be sure, he speaks of "Aristotle in his works the Physics and the Metaphysics; then his commentators, such as Themistius and Alexander, and the later commentators, such as Alfarabi and Averroes; then the authors after Aristotle, such as Avicenna, Algazali and Abraham ibn Daud." 7 But this list was not intended by Crescas as a catalogue of his own sources. It is rather a statement of the main authorities who prior to Maimonides had applied philosophical reasoning to the problem of the existence of God. Within the body of the commentary itself Crescas mentions the "Ancients"* (i. e., the pre-Aristotelian philoso' See below p. 131. » O'JlDipn Prop. X , P a r t I; Prop. X V , P a r t I.

CH. I — S O U R C E S , METHOD, OPPOSITION & I N F L U E N C E

5

phers), Aristotle,' Alexander, 10 Themistius, 11 Avicenna," Algazali,13 Avempace, 14 Averroes,15 Altabrizi, 16 and Narboni. 17 Vague references are also made by him to "authors other than Aristotle," 18 "commentators of [Aristotle],"1» "the multitude of philosophises," 20 "they," 21 "one of the later,"" "one of the commentators [of the Guide],"13 and "followers [of Avicenna and Algazali]."24 He names also several books by their titles: Physics,25 Metaphysics,'6 on the Physics,21

De Caelo et Mundo,27 Averroes' commentary and the Conic Sections [of Apollonius].2»

All

these names and titles, however, give us neither a complete nor an accurate idea as to the sources actually used by Crescas in the composition of his study of the twenty-five propositions. On the one hand, the extent of Crescas' indebtedness to other authors, named or unnamed by him, is much larger than one »lBD-iN n'^y npn rmrn nDnpnn rum Prop. I, Part I (p. 134) et passim. Prop. VII, Part I.

10 11

Ibid.

" Prop. II, Part II; Prop. Ill, Part I; Prop. X, Part II. " 14

Ibid.

"ID313N, i. e., Abu Bekr Mohammed ibn Yahya ibn al-Saig ibn Badja: Prop. I, Part II, (p. 184); Prop. VII, Parts I and II. 's Prop. I, Parts I (p. 144) and II (p. 184); Prop. II, Part II; Prop. Ill, Part I; Prop. VII, Part II; Prop. X, Part II; Prop. XII, Part II. 16 Prop. I, Parts I (p. 148) and II (p. 188); Prop. Ill, Part II; Prop. IV; Prop. VII, Part II; Prop. VIII, Part II. Prop. XXIII. 17 Prop. VIII, Part II; Prop. XXIII. '» Bnannno m^in Prop. I, Part I (p. 176). " vise 'tSHBBi ibid.-, Prop. X, Part I; D'anson Prop. VII, Part I. »o D«sol7BnDn lion Prop. V. " U'wn . . . wpn Prop. IX, Part I; n s t Prop. IX, Part II. " D'n-iriNnD Prop. I, Part I (p. 170) and Part II (p. 184). " D'iiison nxp Prop. Ill, Part II. " onnnK D>:>i>Djn Prop. X, Part II. •s Prop. I, Part I (p. 134); Prop. Ill, Part II; Prop. VIII, Part I; Prop. XII, Part I. " Prop. I, Part I (p. 134); Prop. Ill, Part II. " Prop. I, Part I (p. 134); Prop. XII, Part II. 18 jminn noD^ niioa ivn jsn Prop. II, Part II. J » D'Blinn 1BD Prop. I, Part II (p. 206).

6

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

would be led to believe from his own acknowledgments and, on the other hand, many of the names and titles he mentions do not at all indicate sources which he had directly consulted; they are rather names quoted by him from other works. The failure on the part of Crescas to mention his sources, which is to be observed also in other places of his work, has been noted by one of his critics.30 Still there is no question of bad faith involved in it, for in omitting to give more specific information as to his immediate sources, Crescas was simply following the accepted literary practice of his time—a practice especially in vogue in philosophic writings. The scope and contents of philosophic writings at the time of Crescas, especially those which revolved around the works of Aristotle, were limited to certain sets of problems which by constant repetition became philosophic commonplaces and a sort of stock-in-trade. The existence of a large number of philosophic treatises of compendious and encyclopedic nature in which each author tried to present a complete catalogue of opinions on any given question and all the pros and cons of any given argument resulted in stripping philosophic discussions of their individual authorship and to invest them with a kind of anonymity. Crescas no more felt the need of mentioning authorities than do we when we deal with generally accepted views found in school text-books. The information which we fail to find in Crescas himself we have been able to obtain by a close comparison of his work with the entire field of philosophic literature which was available to Crescas and with which we have reason to believe he was acquainted. By means of such a comparison we have been able to identify the immediate sources used by Crescas and to trace the history of almost every argument employed by him. His sources, on the whole, fall within his own classification of the philosophic literature prior to Maimonides, namely, Aristotle, 10

Neveh Shalom

VIII, 9, p. 144b: chdin dío ona-rn -pain ¡ó Dsnn rw om.

CH. I — S O U R C E S , METHOD, OPPOSITION & INFLUENCE

7

his various commentators, and those who expounded Aristotle in independent works. Aristotle was unknown to Crescas in the original Greek. He was also unknown to him in the Arabic translations. He was known to him only through the Hebrew translations which were made from the Arabic. It would be, however, rash to conclude on the basis of this fact that his knowledge of Aristotle was hazy and vague and inaccurate, for, contrary to the prevalent opinion among students of the history of philosophy, the translations of Aristotle both in Arabic and in Hebrew have preserved to a remarkable degree not only clear-cut analyses of the text of Aristotle's works but also the exact meaning of his terminology and forms of expression. The literalness and faithfulness with which the successive translators from one language into another performed their task, coupled with a living tradition of Aristotelian scholarship, which can be shown to have continued uninterruptedly from the days of the Lyceum through the Syriac, Arabic and Hebrew schools of philosophy, enabled Crescas to obtain a pretty accurate knowledge of Aristotle's writings. That knowledge, to be sure, was traditional and one-sided, but the tradition upon which it was based, like the various traditional interpretations of the Bible text before the rise of independent critical scholarship, was clear and definite and suffered comparatively little corruption. In the present work we have shown how often terms and expressions used even in indirect paraphrases of Aristotle reflect the original Greek.31 We have also shown how commentators, who knew no Greek, speculated as to what was the original statement in Aristotle—and often guessed right. 31 In one place we have shown, how the Hebrew word for "limit" has preserved the different shades of meaning it had acquired through its being indirectly a translation of several 3' Cf. n. 16 (p. 337) on Prop. I, Part I; n. 3 (p. 398) on Prop. I, Part II; n. 8 (p. 700) on Prop. X X V . »' Gf. n. 54 (p. 410) on Prop. I, Part II.

8

C R E S C A S ' C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E

different Greek words.33 Crescas' knowledge of Aristotle, furthermore, was extensive. He seems to have had the works of Aristotle on the tip of his tongue, and was always ready to use them at a moment's notice. He knew his Aristotle as he knew his Bible and Talmud. With an apparent ease and freedom he draws upon him whenever he is in need of some apt expression or statement for the purpose of illustrating a point or clinching an argument. 34 He never had to hunt Diogenes-like after a needed quotation nor had he ever to pray for a windfall. The immediate source of Crescas' knowledge of Aristotle was the series of works by Averroes known as the Intermediate Commentaries as distinguished from his Long Commentaries and Epitomes. In these commentaries, the text of Aristotle, sometimes translated and sometimes paraphrased, was interspersed with Averroes' own comments and discussion. To a reader unacquainted with the text of Aristotle's own works it would often be difficult to distinguish within those Intermediate Commentaries between Aristotle's original statements and Averroes' elaborations. Crescas, however, seems to have been able to distinguish between them. In one place, for instance, he reproduces what is supposed to be Aristotle's argument against the existence of an infinite number. The argument, however, though given in the Intermediate Commentary on the Physics, is not to be found in Aristotle's Physics. Subsequently, when Crescas takes up that argument for criticism, he significantly remarks that the argument "has indeed been advanced by Averroes in his commentary on the Physics."3S This is the only time that he directly refers to the "commentary" of Averroes as the source from which he has reproduced Aristotle's arguments and it would have been entirely uncalled for unless he meant to indicate thereby that Cf. n. 84 (p. 358) on Prop. I, Part I. " Cf. notes 3 (p. 398), 79 (p. 456), 96, (p. 462) 104 (p. 464) and 126 (p. 472) on Prop. I, Part II. is Prop. II, Part II, and n. 5 (p. 477).

CH. I—SOURCES, METHOD, OPPOSITION & INFLUENCE

9

the particular argument under discussion was not found in the original work of Aristotle. We have therefore reason to conclude that Crescas had another source of knowledge of Aristotle's writings. As there were no independent Hebrew translations of Aristotle's Physics, it must have been Averroes' Long Commentary which furnished him with a direct knowledge of the genuine text of Aristotle, for in that commentary the text of Aristotle was reproduced in such a way as to be distinguishable from the commentator's explanatory remarks. The same conclusion is to be drawn also from other instances where Crescas makes use of certain phrases and expressions which are to be found only in the Long Commentary. 3 ' In a few instances direct borrowing from the Long Commentary on the Physics can be discovered, though it is possible that the borrowing was made through some intermediary source.57 As for the Epitome, which is a free and independent paraphrase of the problems dealt with in Aristotle's works, there is no positive evidence that Crescas has made use of it. jS Two Hebrew translations of the Intermediate Physics are known, one made by Zeraljiah Gracian and the other by Kalonymus ben Kalonymus. Of these, Crescas seems to have used the latter. Though Crescas frequently refers to Alexander, Themistius and Avempace in connection with the interpretation of certain passages in the Physics,** there is no evidence that he had a direct knowledge of their commentaries on the Physics which, as far as known, were never translated into Hebrew. His references to them are all taken from Averroes. On the other hand, extensive use was made by him of Gersonides' supercommentary on Averroes' Intermediate Commentary on the Physics, and Cf. notes 5, 7 and 8 (p. 541) on Prop. VII. " Cf. n. 54 (p. 437) on Prop. I, Part II. 3 * Cf. list of quotations from the Epitome of the Physics Passages". " Cf. above p. 5, notes 10, 11, 14.

in the "Index of

10

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

perhaps also of his supercommentary on De Caelo, though no reference is ever made to either of them. In many places, in fact, both Aristotle and Averroes are reproduced through Gersonides, For this there is abundant evidence of a literary nature.40 On the basis of many similarities, though not on direct literary evidence, it may also be inferred that Crescas has made use of Narboni's supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics.*1 This work, too, is never mentioned by Crescas. As for the original works of Arabic authors he mentions, there is no evidence that he made use of Avicenna's writings. All the references to Avicenna can be traced to intermediary sources. Of Averroes' original works, Crescas may have used the Hebrew text of the Sermo De Substantia Orbis, for an important point in his criticism of Aristotle is based upon a distinction made by Averroes in that work.42 However, the same distinction occurs also in the Intermediate De Caelo which we know to have been used by him.43 It is certain, however, that he has made use of Algazali's Makafid al-Falasifah (Kawwanot ha-Pilosofim), though the work is never mentioned by title and no direct quotation from it can be discerned. This work, translated into Hebrew many times44 and commented upon by Narboni and Albalag, was a popular source book of philosophic information and was used as a text book in the instruction of philosophy to the young until late in the sixteenth century.45 It must have Cf. notes 91,97,99, 100 and 103 (p. 365 f.) on Prop. I, Part I; notes 13, 16, 17 (p. 403) and 40 (p. 424) on Prop. I, Part II; n. 8 (p. 556) on Prop. VIII. M n r | TJ>n0 iD3i nnDy lnuyni «inn nsiDn na»i «nipn jwVV iDKon iniN. 60 Ibid. pp. 27-28: 1« nm n^p 'b^ 'iODn 'in1? mp nrn myon ^DV -)1? jn nnw isco lnpi^no ]3 urn p« '13131 o ' s d i ^ ' d h n b n ibd3 iDni3N '1313 )"y 13N11DITI3N '13T run iiBD '«iDn 'in rwyv 'inN® 'jn 3ii>nt on1? v D'ts®^ 0JJH1 miiD1?. Cf. Graetz, Geschichte der Juden, Vol. VIII, Note 2. Or Adonai III, viii, 2: n'3n |3ini> nji3»i a'tt>bv ni«o vbtn i1?« ruti» N'ne> nny. This is the correct reading according to the Munich, Paris, Vienna and New 42

18

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF A R I S T O T L E

ters in Book IV bear the unmistakable internal evidence of having been written originally as a sort of preliminary studies to problems dealt with in earlier parts of the work. Thus the discussion as to "whether there is only one world or whether there are many worlds at the same time" in IV, 2, seems to have been written as precursory to the same problem dealt with at the end of Prop. I, Part II, and similarly the discussion as to "whether the celestial spheres are animate and intelligent beings" in IV, 3, seems to have been written as precursory to the same problem discussed in Prop. VI. In both these instances, the problems are treated in greater detail and in a spirit of greater impartiality in Book IV than in the earlier parts of the work. It is thus not impossible that the problem of creation was among the first to have been taken up by Crescas and to have been written by him long before 1398. But whatever value one may attach to the conclusions of Joseph ben Shem-tob and Abravanel, there is no positive evidence of Crescas' acquaintance with the Tahafut al-Falasifah. Even if we assume his acquaintance with that work and recognize it as the source of all those arguments for which we find parallels in it, it is far from being the predominant influence upon the Or Adonai. The most that can be said is that it is one of the many works from which Crescas has borrowed certain arguments which he has incorporated in his own work. It is not impossible that his knowledge of the Tahafut, assuming that he had any knowledge of it, he obtained not from a study of the book itself but from his pupil Zerahiah Saladin who was versed in Arabic and later translated the Tahafut into Hebrew/ 4 Another class of sources of the Or Adonai are the commentaries on the Moreh. Of these the most widely used by Crescas is Altabrizi's commentary on the twenty-five propositions. York manuscripts. The editions and here corrupt readings. •« See above p. 11, n. 48.

some of the other manuscripts have

CH. I — S O U R C E S , M E T H O D , O P P O S I T I O N & I N F L U E N C E

19

The commentary of Altabrizi was originally written in Arabic. Its author was a Persian Mohammedan, who flourished probably in the thirteenth century. From a remark in his introduction it may be inferred that the author had intended to interpret the entire work of the Moreh,6s but whether he really did so or not there is no way of determining. Two Hebrew translations of this commentary are extant, one of which, done by Isaac ben Nathan of Cordova or Xativa, was published in Venice, 1574, and the other, anonymous, is found only in manuscript form. 66 The fact that this anonymous commentary is a translation of Altabrizi was first noticed by Steinschneider.' 7 There is, however, this to be added to the description of this work. While indeed it is nothing but a translation of Altabrizi, there is sufficient evidence to show that the translator, whoever he was, wished to have that fact unknown and to have his work passed off as an original composition or, at least, as a compilation made by himself out of different Arabic sources. The deliberate purpose of the translator to mislead his readers is evident at the very outset of the work. In Isaac ben Nathan's translation, Altabrizi begins with that inevitable jingle of glorifications, exaltations and elevation to the Creator, Causator, and Originator of this our universe, from which he passes to a second topic wherein he gives an account of himself and of his genealogy and concludes with a eulogy of Maimonides and his works. All these are omitted by the anonymous translator in the three out of the 6s

Cf. Altabrizi's Introduction in the Vienna manuscript of Isaac ben Nathans translation: db"tj3] una -i»n p^nn nt .'tnan^K nDnD ]a -oau« iDriD lay ion: :dbi33] iBDno 'aanpn '^tnirn o'n^Nn l a y hpd [pmn :«]du db-ij3] l a a n [in -hd D'aujn intoin1? :dbu3] ninina oienn i d on mm .lnib'jSi nuaS awra if« [O'ibdhd. My inference as to the author's intention of writing a commentary on the entire Moreh is based upon the expression una 1 ? awrn "wk ibdho. It is quite possible, however, that the clause awm 1®« refers to pbnn. 66 Six MSS. are recorded by Steinschneider in Die hebraeischen Uebersetzungen, p. 362. ' ' See Catalogus Librorum

Hebraeorum

in Bibliotheca

Bodeliana,

p. 1143.

20

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

six extant manuscripts which I have examined in Paris, Vienna, and London.

But beginning with the third topic of Altabrizi's

Introduction which contains a brief description of the twentyfive propositions, the translator adds a long statement of his own, the evident purpose of which is to create the impression that his work is a compilation of various Arabic commentaries supplemented by numerous remarks of his own, which, however, he modestly says, are not differentiated by him from the unoriginal portions of the work, as his main object, he concludes, is to impart information. 68

Upon examination, however, his claim

seems to be rather exaggerated.

The commentary faithfully

follows the single work of Altabrizi with a few exceptions where the translator either omits some passage found in the original, or, acting upon a suggestion of Altabrizi himself, expands certain brief statements of the author.

The following examples

will illustrate the nature of what the translator has claimed as his own original contributions. (1) In Proposition I, after the third argument against the existence of an infinite magnitude, the translator remarks that his restatement of the arguments is the fine flour of the lengthy discussions of the numerous commentators.6®

As a matter of

fact, his text is a faithful translation of Altabrizi except for the omission of a few digressions found in the original. (2) In Proposition IV, Altabrizi has a brief illustration of the phenomenon of expansion, which is included among the subdivisions of quantitative change.

That illustration is more

sa pyen .nionpnn dhtibidi mina vpkti ,nDann '¡¡>jnd nxp nnya »non Vy now N'sn lBD'-iw ici« mn '3 .yns inara n^n mar «V a"D ainsn ,pioy iruan dj 'mo« ,anyn jw^a rvn moipnn nuaoD l'Vy 'rnoy nsm pyni ,|hd nrm Va yie^a -pi onV j onxp oj? crisp D'pbnn n1?« dvid h ' t s n1?!)' mm,

1'Vy D.i'Woi Dn'pbn -j^ no«

72 Tata in fiYsn n^iDi ,o'jn®D D'pitb3 D'SI *a l^a^an: loxyo yyunDn PITS OJDKI. " Cf. above p. 5, n. 17. ™ Cf, n. 16 (p. 492) on Prop. I l l ; notes 8 (p. 507), 9, 11 and 16 on Prop. IV; n. 8 (p. 534) on Prop. VI; notes 4 and 10 (p. 551) on Prop. VIII; n. 5 (p. 605) on Prop. X I ; n. 2 (p. 682) on Prop. X I X ; n. 5 (p. 697) on Prop. X X I V ; n. 6 (p. 700) on Prop. X X V .

22

CRESCAS' C R I T I Q U E OF ARISTOTLE

follows Altabrizi's method in expounding the proposition, it is sometimes not clear as to which of these sources he directly follows.75 Besides Altabrizi and Narboni, no other commentary on the Moreh is mentioned by Crescas, but it is not impossible that he made use of the Moreh ha-Moreh and also of Hillel of Verona's commentary on the twenty-five propositions.76 It is certain, however, that Crescas had no knowledge of Maimonides' own comments on Propositions IV, X X I I I and X X I V , contained in his letter to Samuel ibn Tibbon, for Crescas gives entirely different interpretations of those propositions.77 In addition to these works there is the entire body of philosophic Hebrew literature extant at the time of Crescas. Whether any of these Hebrew works is mentioned by him or not and whether it is directly used by him in the Or Adonai or not, we have reason to assume that he was acquainted with it and we are therefore justified in drawing upon it for the reconstruction of the historical background of his ideas. One can speak, however, with greater certainty as to Crescas' direct indebtedness to the Emunah Ramah. Not only is its author Abraham ibn Daud mentioned by him in the general list of Maimonides' philosophic predecessors,78 but one can discover in several places not merely parallels to some of Crescas' arguments but concrete literary relationships.7» Close observation of Crescas' proofs of the propositions reveals the fact that with the exception of propositions I, V I I I , X I I , X I V , X X I V , X X V , all of them start out with an opening based on Altabrizi and that even of those which do not start with such an opening all, with the exception of X X I V and X X V , contain » Cf. n. 8 (p. 534) on Prop. V I ; n. 3 (p. 540) on Prop. V I I ; n. 4 (p. 551) on Prop. VIII. ' 6 See "Index of Passages" under these names. " Cf. n. 3 (p. 502) on Prop. IV; n. 2 (p. 690) on Prop. X X I I I . " Cf. above p. 4, n. 7. " Cf. n. 73 (p. 354) on Prop. I, Part I; notes 7, 8, 9, 13, 16 (pp. 5 7 1 - 5 7 9 ) , 26 and 27 (p. 598) on Prop. X ; notes 6 and 7 (p. 670) on Prop. X V I I .

CH. I—SOURCES, METHOD, OPPOSITION & INFLUENCE

23

some elements which can be traced to Altabrizi. Then also the Hebrew text of seventeen propositions (II, III, IV, VI, VII, VIII, X I I , X I I I , XIV, X V I I , X V I I I , X I X , X X , X X I , X X I I , X X I I I , X X V ) is taken from Isaac ben Nathan's translation of Altabrizi, the text of five propositions (I, IX, X I , XV, XVI) is taken from Ibn Tibbon's translation of the Moreh, two of these (XI, XV), however, containing some phrases from Altabrizi. Propositions V and X I V read alike in both translations, and Proposition X is composed of parts taken from both translations. T h e inference to be drawn from this is t h a t Crescas has taken Isaac ben N a t h a n ' s translation of Altabrizi as the basis of his own commentary on the propositions, departing from it only when he finds it unsatisfactory or insufficient for his purpose. In most cases his departure from Altabrizi consists merely in amplifying the former's discussion by the introduction of material drawn from other sources. But sometimes he departs from Altabrizi completely and follows entirely new sources. An example of this is the first proposition, where the entire structure of the proof is independent of t h a t of Altabrizi, though within it are incorporated also the arguments of Altabrizi.

It is not im-

possible t h a t the collection of material and especially the abstracts of literature used in the composition of the work were prepared by students, for Crescas informs us t h a t in preparing the work he is to avail himself of the assistance of a selected group of associates 80 —"associates" being a polite Talmudic term applied by teachers to their advanced students.

This may explain the

inadequacy of some of these abstracts, the unevenness of their style and their occasional misplacement in the text.' 1 ,0

Cf. Or Adonai, Hakdamah, p. 2a: omryai o n a n n nDjonai, and p. 2b: ay onartn 'awn. See, for instance, notes 104 (p. 374) and 107 on Prop. I, P a r t I; n. 6 (p. 611) on Prop. X I ; n. 6 (p. 699) on Prop. X X V .

24

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

II The research into the literary sources of Crescas undertaken in the present study was not a matter of mere idle play or even of intellectual curiosity. understanding of the text.

It was essentially necessary for the Crescas like all mediaeval philoso-

phers operates on the whole with conventional concepts of his time which to a large extent are foreign to our way of thinking and to understand which we must acquaint ourselves with their origin and background. But there is even something more than this in Crescas' method of literary composition.

He not only

re-echoes the ideas of his predecessors but he collocates torn bits of their texts.

The expository part of his work is a varie-

gated texture into which are woven many different strands. Mosaic in its structure, it is studded with garbled phrases and expressions torn out of their context and strung together in what would seem to be a haphazard fashion.

A t times the text is

entirely unintelligible and at times it is still worse—misleading. We read it, and think we understand it.

If we do happen to

come across some ambiguity, some abrupt transition, some change of point of view, or some unevenness of style, we are apt to attribute it to an inadequacy of expression on the part of the author and try our best, by whatever general information we may happen to possess or may be able to gather, to force some meaning upon it—and trying, we think we succeed. B u t sometimes by a stroke of good luck we may happen to stumble upon the immediate source of Crescas' utterances and at once our eyes are opened wide with surprize and astonishment, ambiguities are cleared up, certainties call for revision and what has previously seemed to us meaningless or insignificant assumes an importance undreamed of. The critical part of Crescal' works offers still greater difficulties to the modern reader on account of its adherence to what may be called the Talmudic method of text study. In this

CH. I — S O U R C E S , METHOD, OPPOSITION & I N F L U E N C E

25

method the starting point is the principle that any text that is deemed worthy of serious study must be assumed to have been written with such care and precision that every term, expression, generalization or exception is significant not so much for what it states as for what it implies. T h e contents of ideas as well as the diction and phraseology in which they are clothed are to enter into the reasoning.

This method is characteristic

of the Tannaitic interpretation of the Bible from the earliest times; the belief in the divine origin of the Bible was sufficient justification for attaching importance to its external forms of expression. The same method was followed later by the Amoraim in their interpretation of the Mishnah and by their successors in the interpretation of the Talmud, and it continued to be applied to the later forms of rabbinic literature. Serious students themselves, accustomed to a rigid form of logical reasoning and to the usage of precise forms of expression, the Talmudic trained scholars attributed the same quality of precision and exactness to any authoritative work, be it of divine origin or the product of the human mind.

Their attitude toward the written word

of any kind is like that of the jurist toward the external phrasing of statutes and laws, and perhaps also, in some respect, like that of the latest kind of historical and literary criticism which applies the method of psycho-analysis to the study of texts. This attitude toward texts had its necessary concomitant in what may again be called the Talmudic hypothetico-deductive method of text interpretation.

Confronted with a statement

on any subject, the Talmudic student will proceed to raise a series of questions before he satisfies himself of having understood its full meaning. If the statement is not clear enough, he will ask, 'What does the author intend to say here?'

If it is

too obvious, he will again ask, ' I t is too plain, why then expressly say it?' If it is a statement of fact or of a concrete instance, he will then ask, 'What underlying principle does it involve?'

If

26

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

it is a broad generalization, he will want to know exactly how much it is to include; and if it is an exception to a general rule, he will want to know how much it is to exclude. He will furthermore want to know all the circumstances under which a certain statement is true, and what qualifications are permissible. Statements apparently contradictory to each other will be reconciled by the discovery of some subtle distinction, and statements apparently irrelevant to each other will be subtly analyzed into their ultimate elements and shown to contain some common underlying principle. The harmonization of apparent contradictions and the inter-linking of apparent irrelevancies are two characteristic features of the Talmudic method of text study. And similarly every other phenomenon about the text becomes a matter of investigation. Why does the author use one word rather than another? What need was there for the mentioning of a specific instance as an illustration? Do certain authorities differ or not? If they do, why do they differ? All these are legitimate questions for the Talmudic student of texts. And any attempt to answer these questions calls for ingenuity and skill, the power of analysis and association, and the ability to set up hypotheses—and all these must be bolstered up by a wealth of accurate information and the use of good judgment. No limitation is set upon any subject; problems run into one another; they become intricate and interwoven, one throwing light upon the other. And there is a logic underlying this method of reasoning. It is the very same kind of logic which underlies any sort of scientific research, and by which one is enabled to form hypotheses, to test them and to formulate general laws. The Talmudic student approaches the study of texts in the same manner as the scientist approaches the study of nature. Just as the scientist proceeds on the assumption that there is a uniformity and continuity in nature so the Talmudic student proceeds on the assumption that there is a uniformity and

CH. I — S O U R C E S , METHOD, OPPOSITION & I N F L U E N C E

27

continuity in human reasoning. Now, this method of text interpretation is sometimes derogatorily referred to as Talmudic quibbling or pilpul. In truth it is nothing but the application of the scientific method to the study of texts. A similar attitude toward texts and a similar method of interpretation was introduced by Jewish thinkers into the study of philosophy. One need only look into some of the commentaries upon Averroes, or upon Maimonides, especially the commentary of Abravanel upon the Moreh, to become convinced of the truth of this observation. It is well-nigh impossible to understand their writings and to appreciate the mode of their reasoning unless we view them from this particular angle. It is still less possible to give an accurate account of their philosophy without applying to them the same method that they applied to their predecessors. The mere paraphrasing of the obscurities of their texts is not sufficient. Still less sufficient is the impressionistic modernization of their thought. We must think out their philosophy for them in all its implications and rewrite it for them in their own terms. We must constantly ask ourselves, concerning every statement they make, what is the reason? What does it intend to let us hear? What is the authority for this statement? Does it reproduce its authority correctly or not? If not, why does it depart from its authority? What is the difference between certain statements, and can such differences be reduced to other differences, so as to discover in them a common underlying principle? We must assume that their reasoning was sound, their method of expression precise and well-chosen, and we must present them as they would have presented them had they not reasoned in symbols after the manner of their schools. In the case of Maimonides we have his own statement as to the care he exercised in the choice of terms, and in the arrangement of his problems, declaring that what he has written in his work "was not the suggestion of the

28

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

moment; it is the result of deep study and great application."' 1 Similarly Crescas declares that everything in his work, though briefly stated, was carefully thought out and is based upon long research.' 5 Now this Talmudic method of reasoning is intelligible enough when it is fully expressed, when its underlying assumptions are clearly stated and every step in the argument distinctly marked out. But in the literature in which this method is followed, owing to the intimacy of the circle to which it was addressed, the arguments are often given in an abbreviated form in which the essential assumptions are entirely omitted or only alluded to, the intermediary steps suppressed or only hinted at, and what we get is merely a resultant conclusion. This abbreviated form of argumentation is characteristic of the recorded minutes of the school-room discussions which make up the text of the Talmud. It was continued in the rabbinic novellae upon the Talmud, reaching its highest point of development in the French school of the Tosafists which began to flourish in the twelfth century. Shortly after, it was introduced into the philosophic literature in the form of novellae upon standard texts, resembling the Talmudic novellae in their external literary form even to the extent of using the same conventional phrases by which questions and answers are introduced.' 4 Crescas' work belongs to that type of novellae literature, conforming to the Talmudic novellae literature in all its main characteristics, its attitude toward texts, its method of text interpretation, its abbreviated form of argumentation. Again and again Crescas declares in his Or Adonai as well as in his Bi\\ul 'Ikkere haNozerim that whatever he has to say will be expressed by him >' Moreh Nebukim,

Introduction: ]Dira

D'-iain u iVsj N1? nin lONDn '3,

n i t rn'pnoi ^ni pnpia

'' Or Adonai, Hakdamah, p. 2b: rm m'pin ^n: p'ya djdk nn. E. g., such expressions as

oni, nwpn^ ®m, etc.

CH. I — S O U R C E S , METHOD, OPPOSITION & I N F L U E N C E

29

with the utmost brevity," 5 and to this declaration of his he has lived up faithfully. But it seems that Crescas' vaunted brevity was too much even for those who had been used to that form of expression. It often bordered upon obscurity.

Joseph ben Shem-tob, the

Hebrew translator of his Bi((ul 'Ikkere ha-No^erim was in one place

compelled

to

give

a

free paraphrase

of

a

certain

passage in order to make it intelligible, justifying himself for so doing in the following declaration: "This is how the words of the Master, of blessed memory, are to be understood here. In translating them I have expanded their meaning, for his original words in this passage are all too brief and all too abstruse, so that I have not met anybody who was able to understand them. Hence, in this passage, more than in any of the other passages of his book, I have allowed myself to overstep the bounds of what is proper in a translation." 86 A student of Crescas, in a marginal note on his copy of the Or Adonai preserved at the Biblioteca Palatina at Parma, has the following characterization of his master as lecturer and writer: "When I studied under my Master I could not fathom the full meaning of his view on this subject . . . The Master, of blessed memory, was accustomed to express himself with the utmost brevity both in speaking and in writing." 87

This statement would also lead us

to believe that the Or Adonai had its origin in class-room lectures and discussions.

We know of other instances where Hebrew

philosophic works were the result of class-room lectures. It was while thus addressing himself to a group of initiated students, expecting to be interrupted with questions whenever he failed *» Cf. Prop. I, Part I, p. 178: j^bid mpa; Bitjul'Ikkere airyi o n m man« *7D, nxpm i r ^ a n n^ana rrn< rrn.

ha-Nozerim, p. 11:

u Bi((ui 'I^ere ha-Nozerim, Ch. Ill, pp. 27-28: 'im uav® >un |Einn nr by Dipoa piayi nxp uirV 'a ,DniM *npnyna - w a n 'namn .nin oipDa ^'t ain i'iond ih»o m r nta npnynn pn »may .inj'a'c See

Introduction to Book I (p. 135).

CH. V I — N E W CONCEPTION OF THE UNIVERSE

125

legal portions of the Bible, it was rather in utter disregard of such logical consistency. In one place, in fact, he argues quite to the contrary that the philosophers cannot derive any support for one of their views from certain literal expressions of the Bible, for those expressions, he says, are to be understood in a figurative sense.30 Tradition, according to him, is a guide only in matters theological; he does not employ it in deciding problems concerning the nature of things. Only once, in connection with the nature of space, does he quote Biblical and rabbinic passages in support of his view,31 and then, too, he does it rather hesitatingly and uses them only as corroborative evidence and not as a basis for his knowledge. The method employed by Crescas in his opposition to Aristotle is of a more subtle and more effective kind. He carries the battle to the enemy's own ground. Like one Bible hero of old, he tries to slay his Egyptian with a spear plucked out of his adversary's own hand. He employs reason to show up the errors of reason. And yet for himself he is not convinced of the unlimited power of reason. Reason was well enough as a tool to be used in his attempt to upset Aristotle's scientific dogmas, but he does not consider it sufficiently reliable as a means of setting up new dogmas of his own. He is thus quite willing to employ reason in order to prove, in opposition to Aristotle, that the existence of many worlds is not impossible, but he doubts the power of reason to help us in attaining any knowledge of what is beyond this world of our experience and therefore counsels us, by suggestion, to suspend judgment and keep our mind open.32 With reason thus limited in its function, Crescas sometimes calls upon empirical observation for aid. He does so toward the 30 Or Adonai IV, 3, in connection with the verse "The heavens declare the glory of God" (Ps. 19, 2) commonly taken by mediaeval Jewish philosophers as implying that the celestial spheres are animate and rational beings. J1 Prop. I, Part II (p. 199). Prop. I, Part II (p. 217).

126

C R E S C A S ' C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E

end of his discussion of infinity.33 Again, in the discussion of magnetic attraction, in a passage the reading of which is doubtful but of which the meaning is quite clear, he says something to the effect that any rational explanation of that phenomenon is at best only hypothetical; what is certain about it is only that which is vouchsafed by observation and experience.34 But experience as a guide to knowledge was to him still a new and untried venture. While forced to turn to its aid occasionally by his own skepticism as to the validity of speculative reasoning, he knew not what use to make of it and what its far-reaching possibilities were, and unlike the two Bacons, he did not attempt to build upon it a new method of science. Every experience to him was a single experience and was to prove only a single fact. It was never to give rise to a universal law. Again, an experience to him was something given, not something that was to be produced. It never became with him an experiment. Crescas, for instance, doubted the truth of Aristotle's theory as to the existence of naturally light objects and of a natural motion upward, and thus when he observed that air goes down into a ditch without the application of any external force, he concluded that air was not naturally light and had no natural motion upward. 35 But when Newton began to doubt these Aristotelian laws of motion, while he may not have received his original inspiration from the falling of the celebrated apple, he certainly did observe and study the falling of other bodies and after long and painstaking research established the universal law of gravitation. Again, when Crescas wanted to prove that something was wrong with a certain conclusion which was supposed to follow from Aristotle's theory that heavier bodies fall faster than lighter 33

Prop. I, Part II (p. 213). « Prop. IX, Part II (p. 257). Another reading of the same passage would imply that Crescas did not consider his explanation of magnetic attraction as conclusive until it had been verified by experience. See n. 11 (p. 568). « Prop. VI (p. 239).

CH. V I — N E W CONCEPTION OF THE UNIVERSE

127

bodies, he resorted to a hypothesis of an original time of motion. 3 '

It was subtle, but it led nowhere.

But when Galileo

wanted to prove that Aristotle's theory was totally wrong, he climbed up to the top of the tower of Pisa, and let two unequal weights fall down at the same time and watched their landing. It was simple, but it led to an epoch-making discovery in the history of science. In a larger sense, we may see in Crescas' critique of Aristotle the fluctuation of the human mind at the point when it began to realize that reason, which had once helped man to understand nature, to free himself from superstition and to raise his desultory observations to some kind of unity and wholeness, had itself in the system of Aristotle gone off into the wilds of speculation and built up an artificial structure entirely divorced from nature.

A new way of returning to nature was sought, but none

was as yet to be found.

Crescas had passed the stage when man

condemned reason; he had reached the stage when man began to doubt reason, but he had not yet entered upon that stage when man learned to control reason by facts.

J« Prop. X I I , Part II (p. 271).

Cf. n. 13 (p. 403) on Prop. I, Part II.

EXPLANATION OF SYMBOLS

s—Ferrara edition, 1555. X—MS. Sulzberger, Jewish Theological Seminary. a—MS. Munich. b—MS. Jews' College. ?—MS. Paris, Bibliothèque Nationale. 1—MS. Vienna. -I—MS. Rome, Vatican. l—MS. De-Rossi, Parma. p—MS. Oxford, Bodleian. a—MS. Bloch, Berlin. N—MS. Adler, Jewish Theological Seminary. l—MS. Bamberger, Jewish Theological Seminary. ( ) = omission. [ ] = addition. ] = different reading.

T E X T AND T R A N S L A T I O N of the

Twenty-five Propositions of

Book I of the Or Adonai

LIIWNN -IOKDÍT «im

nvnnn

nuinNn

bo1? n"?nnn

«inty

jitPNin

ttnaa

.-parv ^ « n n w s o ruiDN ,]iB>«in :o*3" 357 v w a lb'to ,-in«n L"3YN I « Ü D

nray NAAN' nonpnntp no"? DMN

nnNn Dm ,'3®m ,na D ' ^ b u h o ^ i a n

iik'2

«im ;I3ÖD IN 1 ?' 1 ?!? IN «RU 1 ? Nieon avn ,-IDND

Neun S u n t » ,nxd3 m^Nntp i n o » IDI 1 ? n x n .riNrn nonpnn • p a m VNHI» nNiao Nim ¡nxdct Nin Nitwm TINT p y

m^an »in r a

i'N nan ;DB>n m m

NA'tp isa . D ^ y n n n ^ a n ûb'YJ

nt^i .NNXDJ niNxoan ^ A 1 ?

n"?nnnm naDnœ N"?N nonpnn

unmoy

]BIN

Nim .na"? ' w n

ÎINBD nrn tntpn nriDN

ima

nrn t n a a

yryn

mn

î n o y DN -iipmtp 'INN ntVi .innoNa

|vyn ÎINBD na unny DN IN .rrn'JNN m i n n Nim NA^» n"?apn .]a D3 n-vpnm 1ÜD-IN Nin nmpnn DNBD mann A ' m n t p 'DD iWNnnp 'B^I DVÜDDD loa , I H B D NTNBDI .yatan nnNtP noai nvyataa . i n s o a , m n N D ' i a n o m , 1 » " ! p N i n x J U N i o a . O ' a n r i N m .-imDa^Ni

nanon ann m m ,niNn p N o m a N 'm nomaNi NVD p N ma nx ^y amniDnpn a n a VÙTWÌ L^«NW-»^nw3D)->»(N3)8 rrrpmis-i«

m i o «-»pan N S O A

.» rrbw-»»"->"'>» CIDI1?mero 7

.»i3--HDN> - » - p a n ' . ^ K X D J I O

* DITDDN1 3 DVDDM&FL — A 11SD316 lais

D'aian

NI®:1?HINAN«

(abyì)9

.» »TO3^TIRTO - ' = HDD 16

.»»mn'p la^HD^ï^pl-r-a«:^3H-1»p•|" m:D3V«iMi7

.»'^nn .'»"»»IVP .'»vnDRon

-«Miry p » tua 'j la-i^i» n^n p_» -orna»« v lONrraKi->too'i » » « ' d nxpn -ra by i«!1? 19-1

trjicnpn [nrrmmpn - » anpan) 1« 130

•>» nvn [nam

INTRODUCTION TO BOOK I OF THE first of those principles of belief designated by us as Roots, which is the source of all the other principles designated by us as Scriptural Beliefs,1 namely, the belief in the existence of God. The purport of any proposition can be made clear and the proof thereof established by the explanation of two things: 2 first, the meaning of the terms which constitute the proposition, and, second, the relation of the terms to each other, that is to say, whether the predicate is to be affirmed of the subject or whether it is to be denied. In the proposition under consideration, i. e., 'God is existent,' it need hardly be said that the subject is 'God' and the predicate is 'existent.' Furthermore, it is generally admitted, as will be shown later, 3 God willing, that God is absolutely inscrutable. It follows, therefore, that the proposition is nothing but an affirmation that the Cause or Principle of all beings is existent. The study of this principle of belief must thus be confined to the second kind of inquiry, namely, to show how we know that the predicate is to be affirmed of the subject. 4 The task before us then is to inquire whether our knowledge of the truth of this principle of belief rests upon tradition 5 alone, that is to say, upon the authority of the Scripture, or whether we may also attain to it by way of reason and speculation. Of those who discoursed in detail upon the question of God's existence from the point of view of speculative reason, the first was Aristotle in his works the Physics6 and the Metaphysics; then his commentators, such as Themistius and Alexander, and the later 7 commentators, such as Alfarabi and Averroes; then the authors after Aristotle, such as Avicenna, Algazali and Abraham ibn Daud. 8 Finally Maimonides, in his work called The Guide of the Perplexed, has made use of the main teachings of 131

132

C R E S C A S ' C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E

oy

a m

n u n

.D's^nno c o n :

nrn cntpn iNa1?

-nxpn

n a « V i « i d n 1 ? i n v m i n « - p a r r i n v n a m . a n p ' d ' b h p 'ats> n r ^y n a n

riDNn o'ania a n

O K , v n s j i D *?y - n p n 1 ? u ' t n

b b i a D'mp1? Dnif's1?

a1? dip1? i ' « w ^ i r a

nrn

nan

a « n " ? N n •,t£?-it£?n n v h w i

-i»«at» n o

"?ai . a ^ i o t o n

D'as

d ^ i d ^ s h .v^y

tptna

n'antp

.nbun

o n a n

n m t p n

onwyi

,nvriD« .tibid

nan

Dnn -ii«a

D"iaa

n ' n ' nan

,'nsiD

rnonpnn D^itfn

n a a

nn«iao

rraaeo

ono

,'atpm

n « a n n

. o ^ a

'iNi

,ona

m a »

no

dn

'sa

,nionpnn

.t •> D " i a [ o n ] 7

. ' i » [onm o ' s r w r m . i n n n 16

. " i

.-man

n n x n o

TiN'a

b»«

-naa

m a n n

»'dbid

n a a

n m i a o

'93 n w

nrn

jvym

n r n - l D N o n p " ? n a p ' i n - i nr"?i

.»« 'jdo [WaD - ' n'rayn v h v i *

D m [dm k i t t o - •• n a t u «

o'entpn

p"?nn

/nsio

n i s u :

-npna d n 'a , a n n 'nsiD m « a i

- 1 a 11 i> m o ) g

t i b d q 'atpn

o n K i n » .tihjid n « ' a n n « n

.-iDiNn

m-imao

(

vnsiDtp

a n a wnnrn - \ m onn mo-rpnn qk

n i a n x n rnonpnn vn o'Entpn

*?y

'aea nra j v y n h d

n ^ a n D'cntpn n « a a

n1?

m

.•>< tnm pnvm -

1

.* vbyib j w f r

.jiis>tan .Q'SiDi^'sn

v^y dip1? 5 - 6

aV

.»=? • > ' » ( n " ? « n ) - >

.«n«an'i2

.»= i 1 ? « p u n - •>» o v m & n 0

n a n a

n r n - n c m i t V o «irn [ a n u

« r o a r » 10

nDiNn-•> c r n ' ) -

^ a n

n a n • nt i nta

nnain - ^ n r n



orb 5

[nta

n1?«!n

intn-»i":ji.ni»ivyiu

INTRODUCTION TO BOOK I

133

these men,' restating them briefly in the form of propositions, out of which he constructed various proofs to establish this principle of God's existence. Furthermore, the Master has deemed it fit to add thereunto two other precious principles, namely, that God is one and that He is not a body nor a force inherent in a body.10 By reason of all this, we have selected the proofs advanced by Maimonides as the subject of our investigation, with a view to determining whether they establish the truth of these three principles in every respect11 or not, for his proofs alone are derived from the generality of the teachings of the first philosophers, and therefore nothing that has been said by others on this subject deserves consideration." Inasmuch as Maimonides' proofs are all based upon twentysix propositions which he has placed at the beginning of the second part of his work, our investigation of the subject will have to deal with the following two questions: First, whether the propositions which he has made use of in proving the principles are themselves established by demonstrative reasoning,13 for if the propositions necessary for the proof of the principles have not been established by demonstrative reasoning, the principles, too, will not have been conclusively established. Second, granting those propositions to be true and to have been established by demonstrative reasoning, whether the principles can be shown conclusively to follow therefrom. In this twofold kind of investigation we shall reason from the opinion of the affirmer.14 In accordance with this plan it seems to us proper to divide Book I into three parts. Part I. A commentary wherein the propositions are proved in accordance with the arguments employed by the philosophers in their own writings, and also a restatement of the Master's proofs [for the existence, unity and incorporeality of God], for intending as we do to subject both the propositions and the proofs to a

134

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

M T D 'B 1 ? , p B D

D " p 3 1 D"1^31 D n N U O 131? D ' 3 a i D Vn'tP .ann

on ,ann

'nsinai

nionpnn

nxpoa

la m p m

.vwn

^ a n

.'flBID TIK3 n « 3 D 3 ] B i « 3 i , n m n n v n n n t p h d ' S 3 D'tintpn n i t r a a .np'Vtpn I 1 «!» t o r n , n r n n o N n n

1*n noa nr

,n«u3n oy

nxo

ntarr

nans -man'

niD^pa

d3oni

.n'rapa

dpi

^ a n

.ana

unn'ny

D'ttnpn

nDNnn

nmnn

moy^

v^y

nTynt?

.jvyn u

D'JD'tf

Jltwnn .D'BiDib'Bn n a n a n n « i a o l t a t p n o ' s a , r n o n p n n

n«aa

1

^ a n

u p ^ n nr ?! . d ' s i d i ^ ' b h ' - i o n o d D ' m p ^ n a m nto1?

Dntpyi w n

D'ntpyi n w n

. n ® » one> a m

vibid

lironn

'nsioai

d^1?

.D'pis my n w i

nrn

,mmpnn

p i s n

n n « m y t p "?ya m n ' S D » m o w n

m f t n n

nonpnn

niN'33

1

.nptp i ? r v ^ a n D'B^nno nioipoa •tibid

N'am

it3D~i« n ^ y

;-in«tf

n»ai

npn

.ahym

rmrn D'atpai

. r r V a n " ? y a ' n ^ a "?n33 b n n m « ' s s m y s o n d«i .rv^an

^ya

'n^a

nonpnn

'db>3 "?m3 m n ' s o

nam

,yDtt»a

,vibdd

-nxaa

myson

n«aa

r r a u D n y u n n , ( ? a n "?ya ' n V a y y u n o niN'XD m y s o n n ' b ' a n "?ya ' n ^ a o » 3 n i K ' x o n i y 3 » n a ^ l a m « a a o n i *3'd

"ibddd

D'3'o

nysnN1?

nrn

pnsn

up^n

oto n«aa in

nr*7i

.^ysa

.D'DBlDn ...'nBlD3l)12

1DD [H037

.1 nDlD3 [T1D1D "11104

-H3 D W n i - n V1BD3 •< (VTBDD) 19 .> a p'

.'5 mDipHH

' mDlpn —1 nXpD3 .a "IDNDO -

10

(D'OIDI^'DH

"ma n'aa - 1 -n» - > > p ' i-i i v»(•«) - 1 a p t i h i nr ^j? [n'^y 20

.»»» D'31'y [D'3'Da4

.lapr^o yjDTO23

..P' 'DOT

fl'33 - "

.»o^iyai ['BW21

P R O P O S I T I O N I, P A R T I

135

critical examination we must first endeavor to understand them in a manner clear and thorough and free from any ambiguity, even as the Master himself would have wished them to be understood. Part II. Wherein we shall inquire into some of the propositions and also into the Master's proofs with a view to determining whether they have been conclusively demonstrated. Part III. An exposition of the same principles in accordance with the strict teachings of the Scripture and also a statement of the method by which we arrive at them. Therein the main contention of Book I will be made clear, namely, that it is impossible15 to arrive at a perfect understanding of these principles except by way of prophecy, in so far as the teachings of prophecy are directly testified of in the Scripture and indirectly corroborated in tradition, though it will also be shown that reason is not necessarily at variance wth the teachings thus arrived at.

PROPOSITION

I

PART I .

the first proposition, which reads: 1 'The existence of any infinite 2 magnitude whatsoever is impossible.' P R O O F OF

An inquiry into this proposition has been made by Aristotle in several places of his works, in the Physics, De Caelo et Mundo, and the Metaphysics,3 and in support of it he has advanced arguments to show the impossibility of an incorporeal4 infinite magnitude, or the impossibility of a corporeal infinite magnitude, or the impossibility of an infinite body having either circular or rectilinear motion, or again to show, by means of a general proof, 5 the impossibility of any actually infinite body. In correspondence to these four classes of arguments, we have divided this chapter into four sections.6

136

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

jitwnn p a n .rv^jn "?ya 'n^a ^ - q j ^-ria niN'xo m y » n HN'aa n'n'» dn .npiVno ]"3yn a^o' t ò idn . p nsinn n m d n i .npi"?nn V a p o ' n ^ a i n npibnn "?3po "?na3n nrn V m n n'^sn "?ya 'n"?3 Nin»a -inw' nV mn .npiVnn Vnpn n'n Nin» nNioai n ^ a n 'n1?^ N'n» m i p u no«'» nVn p d « ca^D' «Vi .npibnn ^ripo n'n'» p d n i n » 3 .yo»3 'n1?^ . • ? 3 » m » 3 3 3 .O'bnnsn D'osyn p oxy 1« "?n33 noD n'n'»o VapD i3'N «in» non Vnasn» no"? ,"?-i33 oxy n'n'» "71331 .npi^nn "?3po min nasi .npi^nn .p^nno ir«» i n p^nno Nin» n o N 3 » d n taVo' nV» myi n'n'» 3"in .o'p^nn nonna t yjD'tB^D' 11 .»nxjJin'n'»] ""^»•syin'n']-""n'n'ifa .»"i J):D' n'aa [pi]i6 .mapiiu^D ^gm pVnm3 a'Ti-1»381 nonnoi-1«3?'-1'1"1* .» D'Nin: [DHEHJ22 .» • iTn'0 DM [OH ìTrPf - « 0 » JJJD' [Q^D' 18

PROPOSITION I, PART I

137

T H E FIRST CLASS OF ARGUMENTS

Proof for the impossibility of an incorporeal infinite magnitude. Aristotle has framed the argument in the following manner:' There is no escape from the disjunctive proposition 8 t h a t this incorporeal magnitude is either divisible or indivisible. Now, if it were indivisible, it could not be described as infinite, except in the sense in which a point is said to be infinite or color inaudible. It must, therefore, be divisible. If so, however, it must inevitably be either an incorporeal quantity or one of the incorporeal substances, as, for instance, soul and intellect. But to say that it is an incorporeal substance is impossible, for the incorporeal qua incorporeal is not subject to division, whereas the infinite is now assumed to be capable of division.® Again, that incorporeal substance would inevitably have to be either divisible or indivisible. If it be divisible, since it is also incorporeal, simple and homoeomerous, it would follow that the definition of any of its parts would be identical with t h a t of the whole, and since the whole is now assumed to be infinite, any part thereof would likewise have to be infinite. But it is of the utmost absurdity t h a t the whole and a part of the whole should be alike [in infinity]. And if it is indivisible, which, indeed, as an incorporeal, it must be, we can no longer call it infinite except as a point is said to be infinite. 10 Hence, by the process of elimination, the infinite must be a quantity. But then, it must inevitably be either a quantity subsisting in a subject or an incorporeal quantity. 1 1 It cannot be an incorporeal quantity, for number and magnitude, of which two infinity is predicated, are never themselves separable from sensible objects. And if the infinite were a quantity subsisting in a subject, it would have to be inseparable from corporeal objects, for since quantity itself is inseparable and finitude and infinity are accidents whose subject is quantity, like all other accidents, finitude and infinity could not exist apart from their subject."

138

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE

OF

ARISTOTLE

n y p rnyaan n a v n a n rtD-rpnn *?y 'îaa nrn n s i a n nvn"?i r r n ' n a o .îniN'XD D"pD "jnaa p m a nai&tm .niipma 1 ? H a a niyaana m - i a o

- j d i d «intf n « T nrVi . » m n b y - p y a

"?iaa - n y » niN'XD yaa'

w i N ' x a a î a n i n d*w n n

, i y w E > nwB» naaœ no 1 ?

a'^rp ^ i n

no 1 ? ^»aa . n a a n ' j ' o a -irm p p i n ^ n a u v n s i o « u n 1 ? î r t n nr^i .nrn n s i a n nn

v^y

naa

.nipm ,rmma^

íanaa n a ^ r n

.uiik'xd

p'mnw

,'3»n ^ a a , o n a npnatp n a ,nrn i ' a a n x p n n x b>y .dbtí m u a ,d'Jd "73 } y n n o « n D'ania

i i H f D » ' n ^ a p n y n n nyiantp î a n m p n a o n a i N n t » 'B 1 ? nam ' î a n n n n p t f - n t r a a n"?'nn np"? « i n . « x a a n i p m ¡ r n t ó . m p n n n i N ' x a ^îia'aa o t b i b n y a - i N n o - n y

.tonn

.nyiann n a D n i p m n ' n dm . p « i n ' l a i n n n p » n i x a nam T V V . r r ^ a n IN ^ y i s

"73« . n ^ a n 1« ^ y i s n ' n ' » a " i i v

no 1 ? , - m i a a D-np 1 ? - p a a n n i p a n n n a v n nam . o n i p n - i n i D "pyism n m x m n a i n n o m , n y a - i N D n a m niaDt? n«anntî> . n n m t ó i nyiann n a i n n i p m rW no Na1 xb UDDIP no yao ib n'n' NV» IN VVNE» no yna IN UDDW no JIDD lV IN 8

.P (DD) D rro» [nD- 121 " 11 '^ 0 uran [raimo

.DYATI II^N IXD N"?N niyi:nn «ji^n

.1 N'NF [RRRRO -» IN

.1 nob> « i n nan , n a

m p i a i k d d « i n ® n o 1 ? ! / y a t a n l o i p o 1 ? "?isup n y p n n

nmm nnm

- n a n a y y u n o n m r t p n " i m n a n , n y u n n ^ u p "?y n j i n vnb> . » m a n a m ® n o i s n torn . n n a o n nnDtf Kim , n i » n p n w ,"?npDn ^ n on

"?y

v m

' jt? n n s i a n

ik . y i o n ^l^n Kin . o ' y y u n o a m m ^ m

, - v n D m v m m prn -inv y ' J D n

T i t o - ^ u p n

prn n n v , n y u n n n

-|l'n:n'*3pTHD3'H™n(pDK4 .»• TIB' [jiyurv 9 q»i3

' tt>'

[i3i2

,nr n i o i

-ib>n y r i D o n m m

.in:m[n'm3

p

.i'3")[p2

nimnDn .omit? in .^apon -]WDjn)i

.» trao: [NXDII 7

nfN^i p®« - T m-ona) - •> yyuno [yyun's

.'"'nrn'iu

V a p 1 ? [ ' j n p 6 $ » - » D (Kin) - p runourm) 10

.p raw» 14

.«nn 1 ? - *•> * nan trio - 1 vhsdhd «yasn i m s o n - •>

PROPOSITION I, PART I

143

the consequent can be established by sense perception; and as for the cogency of the connection between the consequent and the antecedent, it may be shown in this way. Motion is either natural or violent. Natural motion must differ in direction, and this is possible only through a difference in the nature of the places from which and toward which it tends.16 Since the vacuum admits of no difference in the nature of its parts, there can of course be no natural motion in it. And as violent motion is so called only with reference to natural motion, which is prior to it in nature,' 7 for an object set in motion by some external force is said to be moving by violence only because it moves away from the place toward which it has a natural tendency,' 8 it follows that by proving natural motion to be impossible in a vacuum violent motion becomes likewise impossible. Furthermore, if there existed violent motion in a vacuum, the motum would have to come to rest as soon as the motor which had set it in motion was removed. In the case of a shooting arrow," for instance, it is only because the air on account of its lightness is endowed with the capacity of retaining this impelling force [imparted by the motor] that the arrow, having once been set in motion by its impellent, namely, the string, [will continue in its motion], even though the string has come to rest, for the air will continue to propel it until it comes to its natural locality.30 But as it is clear that the vacuum has no capacity of retaining the impelling force of motion, an object moving in it would necessarily have to come to rest as soon as it has parted from the motor. But this is contrary to sense perception. The second and third arguments31 are based upon two propositions. 3 '

First, the swiftness and slowness of moving objects

are due to the difference in the motive force33 or in the receptacle34 or in both, that is to say,35 the stronger the motive force the greater the velocity; likewise, the stronger the receptacle, i. e., the medium in which the motion takes place—as, for instance,

144

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

. T n o i n i ' i d DJ n ' n ' - D ' D H D h a p n p r n m v « i n » h w o - ] - n "?y .yaon nan

y j n n nan Diva n y u n n

yaaneo ^ u p n na

n y i a n n Dn'ty ,'3Pni

^ a p n n a D n o i n n n t * yxiDDntpa

"?upn n a m ya»n na

y^aon n a o - i a i n o D m a i n n n «

-IBD3 i K a n n - i a a i . D ' s ^ n n n D ' y n o o n i D ' y ^ o n t t o , " ? n p n n a inaine -into . - l a m o n Dn'n n n ' p V

-|-n DT^pixV

nmD'n

^apon -ixd -man n s i o n v i d . p x y n n n N u o a mo-ipnn .yaon i x d

nn«m

a " m v ,n:£D3 m p n n n ' n d n . p n n D b a p o n - i x d -ibw o x ,-ipty « i n ]or n " ? m n y i a n m ,]or n V u a y y u i v n •man'

D-np"?

-jpoan

nipa-rnn

nam . o n p n

yyianont?

idid

a"nrr

nan . n i p - m T i t o , y i T ^ - m , n n « y s o o m « y y i a n n ìan'ana « i n n ? a n n « m n n ' n o n n a D P 'D1?

-iNanntp i o a ^ a p o n

T i t t n o n ' a « i n nra n n ' N n i n i T n n n Dn'i .naitptnn n o n p n a D ^ a p o n 'arca i « u a p

on a"in

T'iJin

N i n i . r r a a a -iNanntt» i o a

,nipnn

"?ya v i V a n b n n ^ a n ^ y a n o r n a n o n ' » n o V ,-ipG> « i n i

. p r n"?ira r n p n a n y u n n n ' n n t ?

p^nn'ty n " n n ' i . p ^ n n o ^ - m n n v n 1 ? , p r n h r a ' m a a

nyian

. u nyiann p^nna p r n ,i3dd i ^ v i t » « n e i o n n a i n a n t n n s i o n t y ,-ittn p « njrann nam 10

> nn«UDn 7 0

(«ini) 15

.3 man) 2

p m t h d -inv - »

."[5?iT] y'3DDi2

Kinunmn

-id«i - = òy> 1 .»pi-"^»

145

PROPOSITION I, PART I

air which has a stronger receptive power 36 than w a t e r — t h e more rapid the motion. Second, the ratio of two motions is equal to the ratio of the powers of their respective motive forces, when the medium is the same, or to the ratio of the receptive powers [of their respective media], when the motive force is the same; or to the compound ratio of the powers of their respective motive forces and receptivities, when both motive force and medium are different—the rule for manipulating compound ratios having already been explained in Euclid's Elements.31

W i t h these two

propositions assumed as self-evident, he has framed one argument with respect to the receptacle and another with respect to the motive force. A s to the one with respect to the receptacle, it runs as follows. 38 If a v a c u u m exists, an object moving in it will have to move in no-time. B u t motion in no-time is inconceivable. Hence it leads to a conclusion which denies the antecedent.

T h e connection of

the consequent with the antecedent m a y be explained b y assuming an object moved b y the same m o t o r — a certain m a g n i t u d e — both in air and in a v a c u u m . Since according to the first proposition a difference in the velocity would have to arise in consequence of the difference in its respective receptacles, and according to the second proposition the ratio between its respective velocities would be equal to the ratio between the air and the vacuum, and as it is furthermore clear that the ratio between

these

two receptacles would be equal to the ratio between a

finite

and an infinite, 39 it would thus follow that motion in a vacuum would take place in no-time. 40

B u t that is impossible, for

no magnitude can be conceived as being moved in no-time, since every magnitude must be divisible, and the time of its motion must consequently be divisible along with its motion. 41 Averroes has remarked here that the force of this argument is like that of the argument b y which it is sought to prove

146

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

yyian'tp 3"in'tí> .'a^vn n'^sn ^3 'n^a yao n3 n'n dnb> .pr n'jm iaoo yyianon mpm n'n on .p nno yaon nso

nsion oaoNi

niKUD nnvn ay ,namon nonpnn nnp® 3"nn' ,K2£oa hin D'B^nno .D'yao 'atpo .o'yyiano 'atp ían'ans nn .noxys -vno-ini' nnxntc nacían nonpnno 3"nn' nam ;nipi3 ,yrr ,mpB> no 'bí? ,mp-i3 yyiano "733 inuo «intf 'sh patyno .nyiann ^nnn

yaon ^l^nnty 3"nn' run ,nny3 yyian't?

unoNo 3"nn' nrn nptpm .nacían nonpnn 'b1? nptt> Kim .Nxoa mpnne> 3 " n n o n'n .«xoa m p n n n'n dn

d«b> ,yaoa Kirr

. p n n o ' y ' 3 -1 n n s i o n

a t f ) 3 o c a Dasn "?3Ni

x j t f 5 3 o p a D33n n n t y s N

nipnnts» tVv .^mn i'nn obnyn D33t'p ntPBK n'n 'B"? .p nian' amp"? -|it>oan mpsnnn 3vn nam .«soa .D'^nsa o'pm ntf"?ti>n niK'xo pi -i3i ir« mpnn nwsD® DHpo ün3

D'otyj oaw no1? ,p dk nan ;Dct>an p o'tDPBio

D33'tí>3

ooipo lTO'tP

Dn3

ICBN ' N nan , 1 3 1 3

D'KltM

dm nan .pn n 3 i n 3 i^veo npitP3 -wn o'on wyw 103 ,Dtt>an nan ,'nts>BN Kin oto .mpnn 'pm3 otfan 'pm 1D333133 p Dtpj D33n3 n«T ntpt* niyaonn '3 nn .ntfB« 01033 dim Dasn "?y3 tói ,ntoo "?y3 mvn -txd n^i ,Dxy invn nxo laa'N diwq W>7

ntonn i'nKan'[3"nn'6 ,

,

,

-.i'rrn [n n-P[piTni«'7'aT(i 7 0[p]

.«»iNVrn-«p,'5HDn-"'¡T¡V[n'm .í^aau

[Kin] DW3320 .'n'n »»«in »Dm[n:ni6

.-''»run [n'n 11

djd'p a^iy - d w

PROPOSITION I, PART I

147

t h a t if there existed a corporeal infinite moving force, the object set in motion by it would have to move in no-time. 42 T h e argument with respect to the motive force runs as follows: 43 If a vacuum existed, it would lead to the falsity of the first proposition, despite its being self-evident. For suppose two objects in a vacuum were moved by two unequal motors, differing from each other by a given magnitude. According to the first proposition the velocity of one of those moving objects would have to be greater than that of the other. But an object moving in a vacuum, as has been shown before, would have to perform its motion in an instant. It would thus follow t h a t though the motors differed, the velocity of the motion would not differ. This, however, is impossible according to the first proposition. And this impossibility will of necessity arise once we admit the existence of a vacuum. T h e fourth argument runs as follows: 44 If a vacuum existed, it would follow t h a t one body could enter into another. But the interpénétration of bodies is impossible, for, were it not so, the world could enter into a grain of mustard seed.4S Hence it follows t h a t a vacuum does not exist. The cogency of the connection between the consequent and the antecedent may be explained as follows: The existence of a vacuum means nothing but the existence of three abstract dimensions, divested of body. Since those dimensions are not bodies, nor accidents inherent in a subject, 4 4 they could not leave their place if another body were entered into them, as would happen, for instance, in the case of a trough full of water, if a stone were thrown into it. Hence the dimensions of the body would have to be considered as penetrating the dimensions of the vacuum. But if t h a t were possible, the penetration of one body into another would likewise have to be possible, for the interpénétration of bodies is considered impossible not because of their being substances or of their being endowed with color and other qualities, but rather

148

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

otpj oaan dk , p dx mn .nwbwn v p r n -T^D K1?« mn .Vían nptf Nim .ntPBN d»j3 Dt^a .i1? n n n

D^iyn -pn

djdh nxoj

.'-iipsn D ' p m a mpm

fN

p a»

na -rsa oipo

a w n -icpnd my nynn nr prn mm

D ' p n m p m îa-iDX' p

dni

,na mi' n t ^ p o ' p m b'ya

Ninp

nv^an a'pninty myi .rr^ori viba"? nn , D ' p m no»

^-nvp

u

-ie>sn

.p^nn»

vi^a Nine? noa «rr^anm

."7-133 p n n niK'so m y w n p

a"nrr .ir^an Nintp

'nVa Vmj m ^ s o niyjon - i w a a v"?y -]dd

mD'n Nim

.|itî>tnn )'Dn Nim ,nrn nsion poa |na -ipn Nim .n'^an Vya 'n'ja

niN'so niywn n w a a nsio nnan 1 ?« n o my

"?ya Ti^a ip umn -lawa» nn . n i p a i n nsio Kim .rvVan "?ya u"?nnm . n ^ a n Vya 'n^a ip r ^ y upam ,-rn« "txd rrbon ip mmp a"nrv .rvban "?ya «in ntt>N ipn nspa nn« nmpjo Hint? ,"iptf Nim .n ,( 7an *7ya 'n^a ipo

rr^an "?ya 'n^a

. n ^ a n "?ya Ti^ao "7m n ,( ?an "?ya 'n^a i w yimn id a"in [a'Tirr m l^nnm n'bon Vj?ai3 * wan Vn < nan d .•> n"a in"aa (i'«w yi-rn id)->=pi'yrr [yiTn qD)i6 .-> Vnin'aip 14-15 .» tor®

149

PROPOSITION I, PART I

because of the three dimensions which they possess.

If it be,

therefore, maintained, t h a t these dimensions, [i. e., a vacuum], can be penetrated by a corporeal object, all other corporeal objects would likewise have to be penetrable by one another. But this is an impossible falsehood. 47 Hence a vacuum does not exist either within the world or outside thereof. 48 He has further strengthened his view [by two additional arguments]. 49

(1) If a body requires a place for its existence, it

is only because of the three dimensions in which it is posited. [Now, if incorporeal dimensions or a vacuum existed], these dimensions, too, would require dimensions, and so on to infinity. 50 (2) Then, again, dimensions are the limits of bodies, and a limit, in so far as it [is a limit], is indivisible. It is therefore inseparable from the object of which it is a limit. Hence the existence of an incorporeal extension is impossible. 51 This is the premise upon which he depended in trying to prove the impossibility of an infinite magnitude, and this is what he intended to prove by this class of arguments, namely, the first class. Another argument to prove the impossibility of an infinite magnitude has been advanced by Altabrizi, namely, the argument of application. Si

Suppose we have a line infinite only in one

direction. To this line we apply an infinite line [which is likewise infinite only in one direction], having the finite end of the second line fall on some point near the finite end of the first line.13

It

would then follow t h a t one infinite, [i. e., the first line], would be greater than another, 5 4 [i. e., the second line]. But this is impossible, for it is well known that one infinite cannot be greater than another.

150

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

. n ' ^ a n ^>ya ' n b o ' » » a "7-na d i k ' x d m y a o n V y a ' n ^ a "7113 n i N ' x o n v n ^ l a "73

. p nsion -hdi nto» n

n'^an p

i w a a

nN'aa

n"?'nn ^ n n n nam

.yaoa .'-no 1 ? i n n ' n ' » » a , " ? y i B a n ' " ? a n

* i ' p ' » h d V a i ,o'nt3ti> 1 « n n N n t a » l a * i ' p '

"7ya otya "?a p

d n nan ¡ n ' ^ a n

^ya

«in

n 3 n

nm

d n nan . n ' b o n "?ya o » a "?a n v n i b - i N a n n n » « a i

]ai

.D»an p

^ya wn® ^ y s a

o'ntatp .nnana

i"?~rav n1? o n » 'B 1 ? . n ' ^ a n "?ya 'ip ^ a i

• ? a » 'b 1 ? , r n a n a n ' b o n

D t w

no»

n s D o a 11? - i N a n n

, - n s a o n i air o n " ? y s a t i b d "?ai . ^ y s a t i b d « i n " ? y s a - i b d d . n ^ a n "?ya i b d d ^ a p •?-na n i N ' x o y a o n n t o a

c y a o

o n nan

o ' n s i D n y a -1 n v t d

my

. n ^ a n "?ya ' n ^ a ' D » a "?ya ' n ^ a » » i d d

o»a n'n on

.p

n n D

j i p r t h

nsion

m a n a n ' n , n ' n ' » -|'Ni . a a m o i n d i » b m a n a » i n nan . n ' ^ a n yaon

-iNann»

m «

,"?niaa n ' " ? a n ^ y a

'n"?a

vnniD'o

-mN n'n dni

. y D » n o p » N n a n ' b o n "?ya ' n ^ a n m D '

^yai

Nin»

»»idd

m N

,"?-naa

n'"?an

no"? . n n i D ' n

-in» t d b d i

,n'inn

n"?i . o n ' n i a ' N n v y x n t o

Tonn

"?ya 'n"?a n n « n

n'n o n »

[no — ^ (run) ° nin [run 5 wr\

. p n n o

' 3

p

p'Vya

n'n

. p

n n o

nsion

' w

"?ya

b w n

no1?

,-inuo

nr

• n a n (V«oti>ni I ' O ' m n n « m

.poa

n'Van

'Vya

nsion moipon ,n'Van

moipontp

o ' i s m ntanm n V y o n Dm

.o'Vano

. n ' V a n ' V y a v n nV onip no1? , a " i n o « i n ,my'E>a n ' V a n .^poxna

«Vn

^ V m o

nao

nVi

.a'Vano ,oipoa Vya

tt>mo D t f j V a

ooipnon

own

n'n

aVmo

nVyo

o"yaon

on

. p

mn'ti> a " n n '

fNaa

a n a m

n n o

mn

' y a m

n a m

*i'p' o i p o n p ,nnNn

,n'B"Vti>m ,n'ya-im nra

imr

Dsy

Vy

. u o o p V n U ' n i V n a 3 Nintp , n ' J B > m .oipon

VyaV

D'otiuntp , n ' t i > ' o n m irn'oy

naw

«in

.nuo p

[anen-DB

nn«in

.» (L^TTID HDD ^ 1 ) 1 3 ."(Min)2o

.n'Van

Nini

Vya n o

. o i p o iV

Nm-WN

,ptPN-in

oiponty

13001 n V y o iVn

oipom

m o n p n tpon

.ipny

DB: ». c r a i "731 ' DBJ 'JS [Qiwn 8

p i l l a i vn'CT

. m a p - i n i ^ o DDipDni6

,-mvon

monpnn

mnipon vrrw [mDipnrro 10 vni2

mtf

umto

.nnana n'Van

.oosya n m i a o

nV

nsion

« i p m n t » n o V , i o x y a n N i a o -]tt>03n m p a n n n a v n n a m n r a , * i ' p o n « i n D i p a n a i N a r i ' -]'N o V i n i

'Vya

nN-n

,*i'pon n'Vann

dni

vi^aa

.attua * i ' p o n n ' V a n n Nin m p o n t p -iNanne> - i n «

omVnani»

nam

, n V 7 p i"? n ' n

" ? y a Dtpjn m m t p a " i m n a n , - n y n p a i p o a n ' V a n ' " ? y a •Vini

noa

n'n on

.n'?an I ' m , D i p o a t p m o d p s "?a n ' n o n

onti>

n

oipoa n'n , n n a a

.ri'Van

. - " noa

uoo vVni

mponp Dipon

.-"»win [nan 1 pi •>">•>*

.» n"3 [l^J I'D >=P"» ttl'^Ml

.i^nipainnn-i'mn

»avn)-p°nini7

153

PROPOSITION I, PART I

of the elements were infinite, it would be infinite in all its dimensions, for, being a simple substance, all its dimensions would have to be equal, and so there would be no room left for the other elements. The second argument runs as follows: 65

Every tangible body

must have either weight or lightness. Consequently, if the infinite had weight, it would have to be in the lower region and separated from the upper, 66 and if it had lightness it would have to be in the upper region and separated from the lower. impossible in an

But all this is

infinite. 67

The third argument runs as follows: Since 68 every sensible body is in a place,6® and since places are finite in both kind and magnitude, 70 it follows that every body must be finite, for place has been shown to be the limit that surrounds a body. 71 T h a t places are finite in kind is evident, for their differences are limited in number, namely, above and below, before and behind, right and left.

T h a t they must also be finite in magnitude follows as a

logical conclusion, for if they were not finite, there would be no absolute up and no absolute down, but only relative.

B u t we

observe that the natural places are limited. 73 The fourth

argument runs as follows:73 Since every sensible

body is in place, and place is the surrounding limit, it follows that the body which occupies place must 74 be finite. The cogency of the connection of the consequent is self-evident, for that which is surrounded must of necessity be

finite.

But how can it be

proved that place is that which surrounds? laid down five self-evident

propositions: 75

T o do this he has

First, that place sur-

rounds the object of which it is the place. Second, that place is separated [from its occupant] and is not a part thereof. that first

place, 76

Third,

i. e., proper place, is equal to its occupant.

Fourth, that place has the distinction of up and down.

Fifth,

that the elements are at rest in their respective places and toward those places they tend to return. These are the propositions which

154

CRESCAS* C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E

m a n a

DipDn

n^ann

. p

n n o

, p ? n n » '«an œpn nwy n y

d«i . ' ^ v n n dni , n n x n

N-ip'

ami

,Tpnn n s n

-ma

rv'jann

irai

-iNair

.«l'pon

"]'« oVini

,-inud

«in

n ^ a n n

ton

n'n'P

mixn

.n'^an

«in

.ir^on

ne«

pnnn

. n t p ^ n n n n « n'n* m a n a p

pki

.ni^Vn .ni^nni .nœWno

~rn«

D r » i ,-ia-in n i o x y n

nnxntp

u w

.«l'pon

n n

trvtbvno

umn

no«ni

dm

.rvj^n

.«vpDn i r b o n

.D'-ipts» ,(

ibd-ini

'jtt> i : d d

îa^nri'

.ni^nn ,DD^ya

u w

dh»

'd1?

nonpnn «b»

. î n ^ a j r n ^ r n 1 ? n , ( ? a n «intf no1? noNDntf ,nra

n«T

dni

a"in'

dn «in

djdn

,ud» D^naa

ION'

j'a

.«rpon n ^ a n n

'^rnm

d n a riD«nn

on .nya-mo -m« wn®

nv'jan

^ v n m nmxn m b

.mpon

*)pion n'1?an

- i K a w -mtpj n r r onoiy

œprn

n n

? y a ' n ^ a - i r r D ' a n n i o i p o m x y a - m a n na-r1? n ' n ' P ,iitp&an

.mpoa

o i p o n r r r v t i n D ' y y u n o n i o i p o n v n ' t p ,'3ti>m

l'a t v «

pnnn

,o^ya mpoa n n

n ' n nfcw n n o ^ n

. - i d i n p n a ' s a ?nr a " v r t «

iu'kis

.« min 1 inDKnns

,-ikud] -iDKan» » iDKDn [iDKDn»i2 i n t » - ' n ' n ® m ' n ' » 14

otwntp i o a o

nn

.i 1 ? n i ® p n n a i n v n 1 ? . m p n a v p ^ n o n n » "?a

n n w - » (K1?) - » n v m [mSVn4

» {tòis i3®"nn® na»,,n,f - » 19 . > = [ e m - p ° mpnniMs .» nn .n'^aio ,yxo«n in y x o « n p « ' n m e n nyunni , n ' a i 3 D n o "?y3 ' n ^ s "?-m i « 3 3 n ' n d « i , y x o « n 3 ' 3 D « ' n

n'auoni

. y x o « ] « 3 3 n ' n ' «"? o w n ' p ^ n ] ' 3

«"? •?« nn ,n?o n'ryo1? nr m .ta^nioa ntaoi n"?yo

]«33

«

bo mpott> no«'tt>

n'n'

«"? , p

m n n

n'^an

-ioi«1? v « i

n'n

o«tp

¡n'bon

n"?yon •?« ono ,D'yyiino nyan«n nniD'n n « u unm> 'b1?] ntaon

n^yon "?« onoi .amnios neon i?« anoi ,amnion

«in» ,i3sn nan ,"73110 t^nios ntaont? n«*u una«! ,*]m3 .tprnon ir^ana on D'asnnt? nn« ,73)10 ,amnios n^yon rv^sn *?y3 'n^a dim ni«'2£oatî> ,n'n't? -|'« )3 o n — 1 3 P ' (Kin run)5 [DK-nirnî

'ism p ^ n n - = oiponps

m » - ' r n ' i o a v n 10

. ' n ' V s n t « ^

nni6-i7

avns

0« n«3nn n v r » " " * n'n 1 m ' m

.-> vn® [Vn7

.'«PT»^ ' p ^ n r v a i a c o

.•'•"''Kin 13

JIN

.13 p h i n ' n [n'n'17

PROPOSITION I, PART I

159

If an infinite body existed, it would inevitably have to be either of similar" or of dissimilar parts. [In the first case], if it were of similar parts, it could not have [rectilinear] motion; for according to the second self-evident proposition, the place of the part and the whole is [generically] one, and furthermore the proper place must be equal to its occupant; consequently in whatever part of the [infinite] place of the whole any part of the body finds itself, it will always be in its proper place, and no object can have [rectilinear] motion while in its proper place.' 6 [In the second case], if it were of dissimilar parts, those parts would have to be either finite or infinite in number.' 7 If they were finite in number, one of them would have to be infinite in magnitude, and, as in the preceding case, would be incapable of motion.' 8 If they were infinite in number, the kinds of places would have to be infinite in number," in accordance with the first self-evident proposition. But 100 the kinds of places must be limited, for the existence of natural places is derived from the existence of rectilinear and circular motion, and rectilinear motion is from or toward the centre and circular motion is around the centre"'; but there would be no centre if the sum of the parts of the body formed an infinite magnitude. 102 It cannot be said that the places of the elements are one above the other and so on to infinity; for if that were the case, there would be no absolute up and down." 3 [But104 we observe that the four elements are moved, one absolutely upward, another absolutely downward, and of the remaining two, one relatively upward and the other relatively downward. We also observe that absolute lowness is limited; consequently its contrary, absolute height, must likewise be limited, inasmuch as contraries are those things which are most distant from each other.105] Thus it has been shown that in either case the existence of an infinite bodv would exclude the possibility of rectilinear motion.

160

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

•tt>a ;ti>ina r r t n a m » ' n

nyiann V a «

.mt^n

.xsaa 'nVa p , N x n a r i ' V a n V y a ' n V a ae>a m n DM . p Vya

viVa

rrVan

mVp

Vya

IN n ' V a n

'nVa

1»D3N m p a n n n m m nana

uriJNtp

Vya

niVpi rrVan

'sV)

'atpn

nnana

'nVa

n a n

'nVa

nsion «sa'

VaN

-pnn

Vy

ntan'

,nrn

.yaaa

opna

ompa

ano .D'yyiana n y a n a n

nana ìamai . ^ i n x a ntaan V N I n V y a n V N

nan

,ri'Van

. y a a a r r V a n V y a ' n V a DB>J I S ON

.nrn

Dnai ,taVmoa n V y o n V N

V N

pVnon

DK r v V a n V y a n n o

'nVa naia Vya

nyiann

nniD'n

onoi .taVmoa

ntaan

, V a a i a . t a V m o a n V y a n « m a ' , i a s n nan , V a a i a t a V m a a ntaantp D « , a " i n a «ina» n a t o i

.(pnnan n'Vana

on o'asnntp

~in«

n ' V a n V y a ' n V a - r a í a r v n ' t p , N S D 3 n ' V a n V y a ' n V a DB>a n ' n Vya p

N « m m , n ' V a n V y a ' n V a n a i a i V « s a ' «"7 DNP

n a n a

aim

,n'Van

taceri n r V i s a a m y inaiai «in

nn«

Vya

Vyan

H a s

my

lnrnaai

,n'Van

.n'Van Vya 'nVan naiaa p p n a i a

,n'Van

n'Van

DE>a i a a a

.trcaa

Vya ot^aa

n'Van

Vya

'nVan naiaa Vsannty

mnt?

]iB>Nnn

naiaa

m m »

.Vicaan n ' V a n a nr V a i

Vina n a i a

ntoaa

Kim

Vina n n r

.n'Van

Vya

n'n'B» n y

nt^sN

DipaV

naia naia

-paan nipannn p

DN n x a n n

Vya 'nVan

ny

' n V a n Dt^an V a n a i a a V i n a , n ' V a n V y a « i n i , o t i > a n a p V n naia ,Nsaa n'Van

.n'Van

mmt?

mn'B>

.iaaa Vina n n v i , n ' V a n

Vya

V y a ' n V a DB>a n ' n DNP , n r n t p p n a

ampa

,«2£D3 n n a n a n ' V a n V y a V y a ' n V a n a i a Nsa'tí» ntPSN '«ty K i m ,iti>»an n n i D wbw

rvaap n r o * n ^ a r r

nr . n ' V a n

Vya

'nVa

niVp

inyian y y i a n ' . V n a n n v n a i a iV w w yyiananti? , n n « n -11(MIPA)7

NIPAINNN-I®

N^YO - 1 » A P 111 D J NTAON 10 NA«N»IBP[N*3N®J^»INAIRI5 N«ANR» 21

P O«)6

> NMNI [NOON Ò«D 9 .-"RRN' [NXD'I3

LAIAV N'N'» NAIA N'N® 18-19

.» (KIN) 17

'n^a

aaa«i IN

n'Van

.manpn

.< N'AA CBJ 3*KU-2 .» 'B^I - » I N -

I«3NN

.13 AVRNO-^^TIHIBT

. < p p PPM N'AN Q®IN

N'AA MVPI N"AA NAIA MANA KXD' N:N [KSD: . . . NAIA22-23

.» MIPO22

YYIJNNN» - » NIMPNN 26

(MANA>23

.P NI^PI KSD'^ [MVPI]

1

V -

.» .N® »

P R O P O S I T I O N I, P A R T I

But rectilinear motion is a matter of sense perception.

161 Hence

an infinite body does not exist. T h e second argument runs as follows: 106 If an infinite body existed, infinite weight or lightness would likewise exist. But infinite weight and infinite lightness are impossible. Hence an infinite body does not exist. The connection of the consequent with the antecedent in this syllogism may be made clear as follows: (For 107 we observe t h a t the four elements are moved, one absolutely upward, another absolutely downward, and of the remaining two, one relatively upward and the other relatively downward. We also observe t h a t absolute lowness is limited, consequently its contrary, absolute height, must likewise be limited, inasmuch as contraries are those things which are most distant from each other. 10 ') We say it must follow t h a t if an infinite body existed, infinite weight would also exist, for if the infinite body could not have infinite weight, then its weight would have to be finite. Let us then assume a finite part taken from t h a t infinite body."" T h e weight of this finite part would of course be less than t h a t of the infinite. Let us then increase the magnitude of the finite part until its weight equals t h a t of the infinite, since the weight of that infinite is now assumed to be finite. It is also evident t h a t the finite part could be continually increased until its weight became even greater than the first finite weight of the infinite body. But all this is absolutely impossible, namely, that the weight of only a finite part of the body should be as great as that of the infinite whole of the same body, nay, even greater than it. Hence the connection of the consequent with the antecedent in this syllogism, namely, t h a t if an infinite body existed, infinite weight and lightness would likewise have to exist. As for the proposition which denies the consequent, namely, t h a t infinite weight or infinite lightness cannot exist, it will become evident after we have laid down three propositions. First, an object of greater weight, in the course of its natural motion,

162

CUESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

.yyianon y y u r r » n a o tayio -inv ) q d ,-rn» p n i D . r r y a a n 'iwn Divtp , r r w n

. w y a Minn pnnon , p p m v n a i a i1?

-lewai . p r a n y u n b>att> .nnt^ípm . n a i a n

-raían on' D'wr

^ y a n a i a i rv^an ^ y a ' n ^ a naiatp n'M .monpnn i 1 ?« u w n a prn

p r n Dm n'n'ty a " i r v . i r y a -ina p n i o í y y u r v n ^ a n

r r ^ a n "?ya v i b o n i ' a orr j w 'b 1 ?! . n a i a n a^nrr ,prn

n n y a i ípn

mipaa

n a i a n Dm n,l?an ^ y a m

p r n o -pnn'P -ny a ^ n m .-iípbn ' n ^ a « i m , n n y a y y u r r » •?ya 'n'ra 1 ? csyio no p r unan dni .im Dn' p p n n a i a n

n n y a « i m ,niB>a p p i

iDm "tn« n a i a nxd'íp i t ^ e x n'n »rr^an

m o p r a y y u r r n , ( ?an "?yan n a i a n nr n'n'i , p r n

prn

^ y a n n a i a n y y n r r i n i « ^ísaitcai . n ^ a n Vya 'nbon -raía 1 ? nr "?ai

.rr^an ^ya vi^an naiann uyio m i ' p r a rr^an

^>ya 'riba n a i a un runo ia"nna o ^ i t a a m

."rmn

n^ana

"?ya 'n"?a n a i a m»'XD niyaon n « a n n nttwai . n s d j n'Van n ' ^ a n ^ y a 'n"?a db»j niN'so niyaon ]a dn "i«ann .n'bon .D'mtpen D'Dtwa n , l 7an b>ya ' n ^ a d«>3 niN'xo n i y j n n

,0'aa-nna

'rib'a o n a n o ¡rn'tp on y w n W m m .npi^nn -kcd i n u d , - n y p a ntfsN w

. n n x a i » ,-iBDDa 1« , - n y ^ a n , ! ? a n '"?ya

. n ' ^ a n ^»ya 'n"?3 a ' t j w s n D'DWjn - n y » myaon n « a n n naatp .»o*» on'n'am n'aan T26-7 .-"3"iT5 ia»"rm * pmD [Vy] 1 n'^sn^yan 12-13 » [n'ann nao1? me> iota] yyiin' 12 .»131211 .«noimo D'33niDni8 .'3*J[pD«16 n"33ni4-15 .'U'Tin'M n"3 n'n» 19

PROPOSITION I, PART I

163

will traverse a given distance in shorter time than would be required by an object of lesser weight moving over the very same distance. Second, that the ratio between the [shorter] time and the [longer] time is equal to the ratio between the [smaller] weight and the [greater] weight. Third, every motion is in time.110 Having laid down the propositions, let us now suppose two weights, one infinite and the other finite, to be moving over the same given distance. It would follow that the ratio of the time required by the infinite to that required by the finite would be equal to the ratio of the weight of the finite to that of the infinite. But infinity has no ratio to finitude except as a point to a line and as an instant to time. It would consequently follow that the infinite weight would traverse a long and a short distance without any difference in time, that is to say, in an instant. 111 Even if we were to allow in the case of the infinite weight a certain fraction of time, some finite weight might still be assumed whose ratio to the former finite weight would be equal to the ratio between the time of the infinite weight and that of the former finite weight. The time of this new finite weight would then be equal to the time of the infinite weight. Furthermore, by increasing the new finite weight it would follow that that finite weight would perform its motion in shorter time than the infinite weight. But all this is most absurd. And these absurdities have arisen from our assumption that an infinite weight existed. Having thus shown the impossibility of an infinite weight, we have thereby also shown that there can be no infinite body among the simple bodies. In the case of composite bodies,112 however, the impossibility of an infinite body can be demonstrated by a disjunctive syllogism. An infinite compound body would inevitably have to be composed of elements which were infinite in one of these three respects: magnitude, number, or form. They could not be infinite in magnitude, for it has already been shown that the magnitude of simple bodies cannot be infinite. Nor could they be infinite in

164

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

itiWDnns» n x o ' a , n s D o a r v ^ a n ' V y a ' n ^ a onvn 1 ?

- w b « p i

on® n n « ,iyaon n a a n n p . r r ^ a n "?ya ' n ^ a m y p oVia i v r . m i x a n ' V a n ^ y a ' n ^ a vn'tf ntps« n«na iana«it> m y i

pi

. m m

o'nn«

. n ' ^ a n 'b>ya ' n ^ a n i o i p o n vn'tp a ^ n ' t ?

"?ya 'n"?a oca « s o *

- i k u d Kin nr^i . r r V a n ^ y a niyiann

.nyiann n x o oao« n n .23-110 n ^ a n V y a ' n ' r a otpa n ' n 0 «

dwb n ^ a n

.p n n e

nsion

0 « » m o ot»a "?a "?a« ."?yBnnt>i 'jyB'P i1? ^ y a v i ^ a otrati> « m i . o n i p n m i o n ^ v

nan

,xxoi

.^ysno o«i ^yis

, | d d ntp« n i ^ y s n n m ^ y s n a n x n i oaoKi .«xoa ' n b o n ^ a n no1? ,tt>isna - i n u d nr ^ y s n o 1« "?yis » m o ot^a Vatf nam "?yis o « .D'D'own o'o-ian i o a .na1? V y i s o k ® m o oti>a ^ a » ' n ^ a n DK>anit> o ^ i n i . o ' a a m o n o'opam n n i D ' n i o a ^ y s n o i whw n'aaoa - i « a n ' .^ysn'tpi ^ysnp 11? -ib>bn l ^ y s n ' citp o ^ y s n o 'acw , n n « n

n^an

?ya

. p x y a n n « i a o nionpn

-inv p r a woo ^ y s n ' p p n V y s n o n ^ i ,nitt> |ora n n « ^ y i s o Dn' . D ' ^ y s n D 'aco D'B^nriD o ^ y i s lbyB'tiotp . n ^ m .nui^pm

.^yisn

*?yiBn

. m o n p n n lb»« lacuna® n n « i ."rysnnpi ^ys'tp iV - i p s «

on'a

i?ysnon

^ysnon

. n ^ a n *?ya p r a ^ y B ' ^yisntp n ^ a n i?ya 'n^antf n « n o ton

. n ^ a n "?ya ' n ' r a a b y f v i1? ntrsN • n ^ a a n'"?an V y a ' n V a n

.pp

n ^ a n ^yantf nn

. n ^ a n ^ y a a n ^ a n Vya vibon . n ' b o n "?ya

, - m i a o « i n n ^ a n ^ y a ' n V a a ^ y s * «V n ' V a n Vyantp d j d « ^»ya n'33i .naio no p r a 1a ^ y i s n'n't» n'3J ,ia ^ y i s n ' n 0«® NXDn^ »Ttw [NXD' - » V y D ' i n [^jJBn'fi a 13^3- * ^ IK [OK 12

n«ann pas®] 2 13 7 .''Kim [mm 11

."•spin ^yonS IK [Vj!BnOH3 ni3n , i

19

nr g

.P

> tecoiV

•• ksd^

= VjiBriDl (OKI) - »••

IK [OKI 9

»p > .11K[QK

."P DM [IK] 1 IK [DK-'SP""' D'BTD (103)-»''^*

'jn [fi'B^wmia > p [13 -

'an [rn»mi7 13 [1325

.u D'^jiEnDi» 03»®)15 V [^yon'BTl]



P R O P O S I T I O N I, P A R T I

165

number, for being contiguous" 3 to each other and one in form, their aggregate would make [a continuous, simple], infinite magnitude, which has been shown to be impossible. Finally, they could not be infinite in form, for were they to be so, they would require an infinite number of places. Moreover, we observe t h a t the motions are finite."4 I t is thus clear t h a t an infinite body, whether simple or compound, has no existence, and all these are indeed arguments from motion [proper]." 5 T h e third argument runs as follows:" 6 If an infinite body existed, it could neither act nor suffer action. But every sensible body must either act or suffer action. Hence a conclusion which denies the antecedent, that is to say, an infinite body does not exist. By acting and suffering action we mean here an action or passion that is [completely realized] in time." 7 T h a t every sensible body must either act or suffer action may be made clear by induction. Every sensible body either only acts, as, e. g., the celestial bodies, or both acts and suffers action, as, e. g., the elements and the composite bodies. T h a t unlike these, an infinite body could neither act nor suffer action will be shown after we have laid down three self-evident propositions. First, two equal objects are affected by the action of one and the same agent in equal time, and a smaller object will be affected by the same agent in shorter time. Second, when two unequal agents affect two objects [in equal time], the ratio between the two objects is equal to the ratio between their respective agents." 8 Third, every agent must complete its action in finite t i m e . " ' These propositions having been laid down, it becomes clear t h a t an infinite could neither act nor suffer action, for it can be shown t h a t a finite could not impart action to an infinite, nor an infinite to a finite, nor, finally, one infinite to another. T h a t no finite could impart action to an infinite is evident, for were t h a t possible, let a finite act upon the infinite in some given

166

CRESCAS* C R I T I Q U E O F A R I S T O T L E

. m a n a yiiwinD j a p m r m ,-in« p r a xv^an "?yaa ^ y i e

ivVan

Vwton

*?yan

'piBaJi

-itonntp m a

,nr - i p b k t o n »

.naion

n,l?an

"?ya

'n^an

^ysirt?

p

^yano

n,!?an

"?yan

^yen'tf

a"nn'

ni» | o d

a " n m mtp

.mart

| o d

^ísaa

nonpna

n ^ a n

DMi

^ y s u p -jy ^ y s n o n r r b o n

"?yano

.npp

Kim

.rr^an

^yano

rr'jan

"?ya

viban

.rr^an

Vyana

n'ban

*?yan m o y a n a

p p

dn

m^ysn1?

^ y s n o n "inv

m v

p?a

n ^ a n

.-rao ruua

D«tf . r r ^ a n no p r a bmj

rv^an ^yaa

i n «

m n ó

pra

.rr^an

^yis n'^an

rrbon

"?yaa

on a " n r n

"?ya ' n ^ a n "?yan

ñaua Nim

my

"?yis

. m e a

^ y s n p no1? r w

iv'pan

"?ya

rrm

,mio

.iiiPfcona

- m a n n t p i a a - i p b n d t p ,]dt n ^ a n

"?yaa

rrVan

.ruine? n o

"|sn

.n^an

"?yaa

' n ^ a n D tjyio m v

p r a

^ysn»

a^ruv

^ísai

.ri'Van ^ y a

p i

"?ya ' n ^ a i t m ,ia "?yis r v n

m t p p r a "?yBUP n y " ? y i B n r v ^ a n " ? y a n "?iB33i

^»yan "pysnp p ir^an

" ? y a ' n ^ a n V y s 1 n"7B> a " n i v

"?yaa r r ^ a n

nn

dim

pra

. n ^ a n

"?ya ' n V a a r v ^ a n ' r y a ' n ^ a n ^ y s ' k ^ p a ' v u v

n ^ a n

" ? y a ' n ^ a a i?yiB n ' b o n " ? y a ' n ^ a n ' i J , i a "?yiB n ' n

on»

rv^an

"?ya T i r a n a ^ y s n a ^ y s n e n a

pra

n'n'tp n y ' r y a n a n ^ í s a j i a " n m

.rwrr

nonpnn

.•"''[n'aip^nM

. p p nan

.1 cinq) i7

]ai

p"?n n r u i . n n a n o

nnv m a n a

¡rrm ,pra

byisn

-ipb'k n n ,roi»n pr"? n w

.*nn(mmi6

.»rrin»«

pa]

p r a

ty»'«

PROPOSITION I, PART I

167

time, and let again another finite act upon a finite object in some other given time. The time in the latter case would, of course, be shorter than that in the former. Let us now increase the finite object so that its time would be equal to the given time of the infinite object. This, according to the second proposition, could be done. It will hence follow that an infinite body would be affected by a finite agent in the same time as would be required by a finite body to be affected by a finite agent. This is contrary to truth. Furthermore," 0 if the finite object were still further increased, the result would be that an infinite would be affected by a finite in less time than a finite by a finite. But this is very absurd. It can likewise be proved that an infinite agent could not impart action to a finite object, for if it could, let the infinite act upon a finite in a certain given time and let again a finite act upon another finite in some greater time than the former. Let us now increase the finite agent so that it would complete its action in a time equal to that of the infinite agent. This, according to the second proposition, could be done. The result would be that a finite would impart action to another finite in the same time as would be required by an infinite acting upon a finite—contrary to what has been assumed. Furthermore," 1 if the finite [agent] were still further increased, the result would be that it would perform its action in less time than the infinite agent. This is very absurd. Finally, it can similarly be proved that an infinite could not impart action to another infinite, for if it could, let an infinite act upon another infinite in some given time, and let again a finite part of the infinite object be acted upon by the infinite agent in some other given time. The second given time would, of course, be less than the former. Let us now increase the finite object until it would receive the action in the same time as the infinite object. This, on the strength of the second proposition, could be done. The result would be that an infinite and a finite would be

1 6 8

C R E S C A S '

C R I T I Q U E

OF

A R I S T O T L E

i o n i n « byiso rvbon byam n'ban bya 'nban "?ysnn? rr'niT ^ y e n o n -ny bisaa DNI .mint? no ^sn «im ,-mN EayiD joja n'ban bya 'nbano n ^ a n bya 'nban .n«D naua torn .n'bon bya 'nbano inibysno "?ys'B> n ^ a n bya 'nVa^ ntwm w

-manne» -in«i

DJDN nn .Nxoa n ,! 7an bya 'nba j w a"in nan .Vysnnp .nyiann p j'o « m 'irtfnty nn .nyiann niyaon n x s o -mann nr^i ,-jen

"jeno on'aBW no1? n - w n nyun1? *inntt>n naai

. m e n nyiann myaon "rxo inaintp D'nsioa nrn nsion i m D ü'hdid ntptv m o Kin nan . r r a u o n nyiann n « s o . n ^ a n bya 'n"?a otfaa nyaoa K'ntp -ma1? rrban "?ya 'nban D^n DK . p n n o jitPN-in nsion n o p 'xn nvnatf , a " m r .«sna ,anDa yyunon ,'aiaDn nr nam .v 1 ?« y r a o , n n n a p 'xn by pa-pp ,auDa yynno yyiano 'nba 'aiaDn n ^ a n bya 'nban o w n » *vl?v ;yaaa nvn1? ,io^ya -mían m i p a i»D3n nipannn nam D I D « I

D'ip

. D ' W

m a n baa «rpon

ranon p

O ' N X V N

.aiaDa D'ipn

ba i'atf pmonty 'iba Nintt» nD1? ,a"ino "jcoan nniD

vnt¡> 'sbi .D'ipn nsDina «pirm *)'p»n bx r a í a n p o'Kxvn B Y A

' N B A

O N ' R A

p m o n n'n

-IB>N

p m o "pnn'tp yyuno 1 ? napn 'xna pann1? ib nn [«inn

-IPBK

IB>BK

. N ^ A N

' B Y A

' N B A

-miao ninty 'sbi

D'ipn .n'ban

-mía» mn . n ^ a n "?ya 'nba

. » p " » ^ ufan» n'aan* (n'aan» n"aan3 nn [ » a ! 1 3 [RIDION 9 I N N » ' I »JNN®D » »JNNWN S nyunno Q M - •> ' W N I U ' » R W 7 * ° N'aan - > = DTIDTOD ^ -MON D i 3 , D .)»5pni a"in 3"inDni8 n'aa » P" ""^ (n'aan) 15 .>»20» n'aau

PROPOSITION I, PART I

169

affected by the same agent in equal time. This is contrary to what has been assumed.

Furthermore, if the [finite] object were still

further increased, the result would be that an infinite object would be affected by an infinite agent in less time than a finite object by the same infinite agent. 1 " This is very absurd. Having thus demonstrated that an infinite could neither act nor suffer action, we must consequently conclude that an infinite has no existence, and this indeed has been proved from the impossibility of [rectilinear] motion [in an infinite], for change is a species of motion, and, furthermore, it is analogous to rectilinear motion, inasmuch as they both take place between opposites." 3 It is in view of this consideration that we have included this argument among those derived from the incompatibility of rectilinear motion with the existence of an infinite." 4 As to circular motion, he has framed six arguments to show that it would be impossible in an infinite body." s The first argument runs as follows:" 6 If an infinite, spherical body moving in a circle existed, it would follow that one of its radii" 7 , assumed to revolve on the centre, on reaching the position of another radius, assumed to be at rest, would have to coincide with the latter." 8 But this is impossible. Hence an infinite spherical body could not have circular motion. The connection of the consequent with the antecedent is self-evident, for the lines extending from the centre of a sphere to its circumference are all equal. As for the proposition which denies the consequent, its validity can be demonstrated as follows: It is well-known that the distance between any two lines emerging from the centre to the circumference increases in proportion to the elongation of those lines." 9 Since in the case under consideration the lines would be infinite,130 the distance between them would likewise have to be infinite. As it is obvious, however, that no moving object can traverse an infinite distance' 31 , it must follow that the revolving radius could never coincide with the fixed radius. But we have

170

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

u r v n o « s ' n r n n p o n v - m i a o K i m . i a p a n l n u m n n a a i .nan .yyuno im« '¡sna p a n ' - p m :-IDKBO , n r n n s i o n ptritp m i l e n m .ranonD D'nxv o'ip

D'annwnoi

w o n -IB>*o nam ? - i a p n

' n ^ a o ' i p n d n nan , n i y ! ? x n mts> b ^ w d t i n r v n n ' D ® lpn p

j'jya

DN . r r ^ a n ^>ya ' n ^ a o n v r a -IB>K p m o n . n ^ a n ' ^ y a

- p a x ' T P no 1 ? , i n « n l p n ay p a m V I1? - I P B N y y u n n n

man

' n ^ a n v n l o x y a y j D i N i n o n y . r r b o n b»ya ' n ' r a p m o -pi-in 1 ? *]piD i n v n a n o « o n ' a . v m x p w o o'lp

o ' i p ' W D *|pio rv"?an ^ y a

^ a a NI a " N N ' nam . W S J M I D -IDND RR?an ^ y a » n ' j a i

n o ^atp p B D I'kb? , r r V a n ' ^ y a ' n ^ a v n

ranon» o'tucvn

n v n 1 ? ! , - i r r D m p o on 1 ? « i n -ION . p m o n ^DU D ' i p n IBDWB? b»ya ' n ^ a o r r r a ~\m

pm»n

¡vn rvbon ^ y a

VIBO o n p n

,"?itjan - I « U D « i n i , m a n a a i a D a y y i a n o n ' a u D n o w n DN

.p n n o

p m o r r V a n "?ya i o t a y y i a n ' t » a " n r r a u D a yyiano n x d '

n^an

>aiyn n s i o n r r b o n "?ya ' n ^ a

a " n i r ,yjD3 K i m . n ' ^ a n b»ya v i ^ a

l n i p a - m m . l o x y a - m i a n i ^ o j n i n i o nam . n ^ a n ^»ya v i ' p a yxai

. r a i D D NXV r r b o n ^ y a v i ^ a i p y x w a i t o n '

amp 1 ?

OIPOTP - i r m . N ^ A N ^YA 'N^A m m » -INUD K i m ,IA M ' D ]A DJ ]D K x v n l p n yyian'TSA nan .na i n y ^ n 'xna paT nopn t « I 3-4

.' n n pxm - P n » ® 3 - 1 »=P

.»n?a a"nn'» - ' n o t « » 10 «1*33)16

rain

.»ip [lpn l

.>=P

npttf Kim .iv'jan "?ya p í a ,naion n m o n Kim

.rvban B>ya p m o a mma> a , v i n o r r ^ a n ' n b n a n D 3 yyianon ats>an

DK

byi p i n

.13 n n o

-IE>K

nyiann

nsion

'BP^ÎST?

nnKn cr'naa D'ip 'atp nnan n m s K a ^ n m ,Ksoa n ' ^ a n "?ya a m p intpasn i n a n m i ,ma] i n K m ,aiaDa n a n naa yyiano nam . m i p n myaon p DK a , v im .yaoa nn .ipn n x p î r w a a 'at? m a i n t o p ,iD^ya i K i a o Kintp n a ? ^ " î n o - p o a n myaon n x p a ití>K naitPKm nmpan tsnas'tt» a " n m . w i n ni "?y o n p p

aa Dnip"7 i m p a n n n aaoNi . m v y s o K anas'tp a m p ipn

I'Ki . n b n n m n x p i1? ]'K mVan "?ya 'n"?an ipntf

nob

,-IKUD

1

. n n p a n'as ? m m K^P nmpa ia n , ! 7an "?ya v i ' j a n Dtpan DK "?ya 'nb»a r r a u D naion

.p n n o ' y a m

nsion

b>' nan ,rraiaD nyian yyiano

yyiano rnVan "?ya 'n"?an Dti>an fKt? -p^v .yaoa Kim . m ^ a n oaoKi ,naionn

.loxya DPI-IO

-IKUO

amp 1 ?

"ITFOAN

n i p a n n n DaoK

.aiaDa

n a m ni ,mVan "?ya ' n b a m a i a o naion myaon

iK "?iaa n a ^ ' p '

NTPK

K'ntt> , n » a n a Dianon n a

.n'"?an Vya Kin ^iaan u

-IOK'

-IB>KB> ,-iKiao Kim

n ^ a n n n y m , D n a m 'raa n m x n n x o Kin n ^ a n n

-IPK

.o'Viaa ^aai

Kint? -WSK 'K , n m s n K'n naionn nmntp -mKi ,~ionn naso .rn^an "?ya 'n"?a bj? 'nDDin [rais . ' » ^ " i nn»atu [nnfD«7 .•< n"an prnnas = .> (n'a) p?a4 nnxya 10 .« mm « n'm [n:rri9 lanrr» - .^unn 'OTTS ,mj?i>n's 1D -11 in:iDni6 .»-" n n"33i3 . imysoN ^p » ín'yxDNií .map-m - > 3 » 1 < nyi:n [n3»n - = nyjon 19 .>= n'aa - » n«i [Kim 17 nyim » 3 p i dw

*iDiD

nyunnti»

.tfina

n'K-ii

itfK

. p

o w n

onpe> n o a

n n o

.kxdj

Ti'ja

rr'jan

n s i o n

n ' ^ a n

^ y a

"?ya

TiVa

n ^ a n

a i a o a

y y u n o

amp1?

i a v m

.loxya

a w n »

i"?k

ia

"?ao

.rv^an

"?aK

.ia

Ti'jan

. V y s a

n

, !

?an

i?ya

.dtibid

T i ^ a

d w

* a ti> n t a

"?ya ]a

oj

o w n

n D i

yaona

.o'D-npn

,K2£oa r r V a n

"?ya

T i ^ a

nan

dki

-n-iE'"'

ik

n u u D

nyian

ntt>K

Kin

u u D n

'a

,ivaiaD

. y x o K n

a u D

•upn1?» a«13

aiD'

m n

.» N ' m P I P ' 5 1 0 N'2TIJ03 IP

inn ] d - m i a o

nyjoj

» » ' o n n

"?ya

'rya T i ^ a n

. ' y ' p m

.rr^an o w a

K i m

n'M d k

.nptp K i m

iPKa

n n o

i r ^ a n

T i ^ a

n ^ a n

y y u n o n

i i n n ' »

m i p 3

. p

t w o

,yjoa

n o b

^ y a

-iKiao

n'n d k

, v i m p

-noyntp

a i a o a

p m o

o w n

ARISTOTLE

t a i o n o •ip k ' x i j k o , i a - i t t > s K n ' n , a i a D a

m m

Ti'ra

CRITIQUE OF

d k

. p

. ^ l a

-iiKaa

o T i s i o n n n o

p

n a a ty « i

yyiarrtp

,yxDK

i"?

e

d k

K i m n m n

r n a n a

N'XIKO ' 3 > M ' S U ® - ' N'n [n'H2 qs nnD)7

. ^ p i ya ' n ^ a h » n n x p i 1 ? w . y x o « i 1 ? w

o n n«ti>3 . i r a u D n y u n p

" ? y a v i V a a n o n n « * ? a . n i o i p o 'Jt¡> m a n a n o i n ' n n a n 1 ? 'Jtom nnV

,nnana

main i a a i

.nsDoa

oipontp m y i

a« yyurr -ptax' nam

'^ya

vn'

,cntp

mmpon

d'j» vn'P ntps«

.rr^an

dki

.nao»

rv^an ^ y a

no1? » n ^ a n

"?ya v i ^ a

'n^an»

n ' ^ a n " ? y a v i ^ a Dtpa n x » ' o k

•731 , B > ' n o ' n " ? y a n ' n * i D x y o y y i a n * o n i byi

«in n « n n nra n e w ,ia D'e'po p r o

^ya

'n^a

dpj nnana

ít¡t ,pro

'n^a

r p r r » 11? n t ^ e «

• T p o n r r b o n n «mtp w a y o

(

.nntp'

. m » ' n y i a n ] a d k y y i a r v k1? . n , l ? a n ^ y a

- i n « ,^aaio xintf

yyiarw dn

nan

run rvyatan nyun1? n n « n

n,!7an

am

-iNanntp

. j a n n o ' ie> n .in^irn in

losyo

D ' t t m o iV

t^aio

invito yyian' dni

.n^an

o x a i p » n ' n ' í f no1? ,-iptf n n . i v ' r a n ^ y a v i ^ a out? v n ' i . n ' b o n n o » V n a ib» r v ^ a n rrbon

,(

n o n ' n ' i , D n o n n « b»3D V i n a n n v

? y a ' n V a d ' y y i a r o i D ' y a o n r o a ^ n i v t p o y ,1"? r v b o n ."pniaa n ^ a n

. m a r onp i m inb»in

[DBian]io

ítaon«

neDa

.« n ' ^ s n - p i

" ? y a ' n ^ a o n o n n « "?a , n s D D 3

D'nsion n a a on a n a n a nin

» m a

iK3B> D ' n e i o n

> o S

. » o n ^ y a rpn*) 11

,3'an

PROPOSITION I, PART I

177

body around a centre, and if it had a centre it would also have extremities. But an infinite has no extremities. Hence it could not have circular motion. It must, therefore, have rectilinear motion. But if so, it would need two places, both of infinite magnitude, one to account for natural motion and to serve as a terminus ad quern and the other to account for violent motion and to serve as a terminus a quo. Now, since these places are to be two in number, they must be finite in size, for two infinites cannot exist together. But they were assumed to be infinite. Hence it must be concluded that an infinite body could not have rectilinear motion. Moreover, place cannot be infinite, since it must be bounded, for it has been shown concerning it that it is the surrounding limit. The second argument is as follows:1®0 If an infinite body existed, it would have either to move itself or to be moved by something not itself. If it were to move itself, it would then be an animate being endowed with sense perception. But a body endowed with sense perception must have perceptible objects outside itself to surround it,161 and anything of such a description must be finite. If it is moved by something external to itself, the motive agent would likewise have to be an infinite body. Thus there would be two infinites. This is impossible, for since the sum of the two will be greater than either one of them, it would follow that one infinite would be greater than another. Besides, if the infinite were moved by something external to itself, there would also follow the possibility of an infinite number of movers and things moved each infinite in magnitude.1'1 He has further strengthened this class of arguments by the application of the reasoning contained in the arguments already mentioned.163 Such then are the arguments with regard to this problem which are to be found in the works of Aristotle and of other authors as well as in the works of Aristotle's commentators, but lacking in

178

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

, ] " y D n

w o o

1

^ n a n

, o m i s a

?

D ^ a ^ a o

D m «

roñan

i

m

o

, D i n a r

. n n y o n n

v b

n i o i p o i

« • ? « ,IHBD

i«at5>

nr"?i

,D ' y t a o n

a n a n a

n i y a n o

a n x p a

r m « n

1

?

p-1

n « a n n

0 «

o n r i n « a

a " a m

f

,at2>n

m

, a - i n

p s D n r a m

n n u a

r

m

' t ^ t p n

v a n «

o n

? b > a n

i 3 p ^ n

n r n

^

a

' n s i o a i

^ i s '

n w «

a ' m

n o « o a a

, r \ m

n a

' t m i

m p r o

n n ' p n n

. r v p n n

, m m p n n

' n i

o n a

o n a

r a n

b w n

ntt>«

o n

DM

, 0 ' j v y

, r o i e > « n n n y a n «

1

n o n p n n

?

n r n

n o «

p n s n

1

?

n o t ?

p " ? r o i

. d ' j b

m « ' * »

'OBID

' a m

m

' « n

T a r n

r a m

m o n p n n

a

^ a a i

' n s i o i

, m t t > y

o n t p y

u n s i o a "?a

o ^ y r r

p t w n n " ? n a j

n i p r o

1

?

n r n

p n s n

. o c

' n ^ a

n n



' a m

, n " a m

n t ? «

n o

l a

. D ' p i B

j u w n r r

m m » ' n ^ a ^ i

.«•?

' r m

^ y

i a

n a

m p r o

n o « n

o n s i o n

' r o

o ' j n u n s o o a

] v y n

m y w n

m « a a

n n D P

n s i o a

n n ' p n a . r r V a n

n n

. e n m n

. " ? n a 3 , v p ^ n « ! ? «

"?y

- n y t f b'y

" r ^ a

- p y n

n w x o a

p n * ' í a

n

, !

n a a n n

" « y o n

n o i «

? a n

« i n

. n ' ^ a n

^ y a

a ^ n r r

m

p i n

n x p n a

' a

i

m s p a

« W J

u n a »

'B"?I

' n m

" ? i s n

D ' J B

n r a

n i o n p n n t p

« i n

,J"?SID

p i r o i

?

. p n s n

a n

o n a n o n o

i n »

u p r m 1

m a . n o «

m « a

' « n a m

n i D i p n n n

« i n n

b » y a

n V a

n b o n «"71

n s i o n f ' j n a a

a " n m

. m o ^ n

i p a

n r

" ? y a

n o « J i

b m a

«•?

rnjonty

p

a " n r r

nrb»i

DJ «"?&>

i o a

. v p " ? n o i o a

, m p - i n

onxpDa .>apnS»

onxpa nrn

[ h e n 13 P ^ r m - i ' " I D « - »

n i y j o n

*?y

' i n

, n « n n p

n o

'B

.» o n m s a - = ' » D ' y u a n [ c r y t o D n 2

3

pnoa-p

n i D '

- 1

"»*

13:113» -

o n a m ' p n n 12 ( m ) 17

. » ( o n ) - - '

.-"-»>N[OKI6

rinsim

,c n o b p T i ' ^ o ( n o ) - '

• ( n n > 6 .» ' n b a b s -

' ' M o n a c o ' s

5

1

a"rr

, n i w

« • ? «

ronaonmn

-

*

. » n w a n ' - ' n m p n n D i ana n-rpnn -

nDiDai- » ?" ""'^ rob)27

?

.» p y n n o > P ( p y o n ) 1



.D ram [ a r t ] 1

1

m'pnn2o

ubi [3"rav

.» 0 3 ' D ) 1 8 25

1

* Vinn .""»

. » V - n j i - «

P R O P O S I T I O N I, PART II

179

orderly arrangement they tend merely to bewilder the reader in what is one of those topics164 that easily lend themselves to misunderstanding. 165 In view of this, we have recast these arguments in their logical form,' 66 restating them in exceeding brief language, strengthening some of them with points not mentioned by any of those authors, our main object being to have all their arguments well arranged and classified, in order to be able afterwards to distinguish truth from error and to detect the loci of the fallacy—and this without regard for anything but the truth. This is what we intended to accomplish in this chapter.

PART I I .

we shall inquire into the arguments which he has framed in support of the first proposition with a view to determining whether they establish the truth thereof in every respect. We shall divide this chapter into four Speculations, corresponding to the four classes of arguments which have been set forth in the corresponding chapter of Part I. WHEREIN

T H E F I R S T SPECULATION

Examination of the argument which he has framed to prove the impossibility of an incorporeal infinite magnitude. We say that the argument is fallacious and a begging of the question. For he who assumes the existence of an incorporeal infinite magnitude likewise affirms the existence of an incorporeal quantity. By the same token, it does not follow that the definition of the infinite would have to be applicable to all its parts, just as such reasoning does notfollow in the case of a mathematical line. Nor would there have to be any composition in it except of its own parts. 1 The argument, however, as has already been pointed out in Part I, is obviously based upon the negation of a vacuum, for if

180 Y W

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF IÓ

ir-nn

LMN'^OA

nob .iniN'XD 3"in'

NN

.p®*nn

^a«

'r®D nn'i ]cap i« ,

DN®

ARISTOTLE I ^

!?-ttJ ny® niN'so

13 i n » « nowvi ,-iyi®'®

-I®SN

s'?i .nrn nsion v^y nan mi«'*» p'nnn® noV

iwn 1 ? i r t o

.WIN'XD

Gitana

DIP®

P'SDD

.nosn

n s i o -inn® no ^33 p«®

toy o i r « n"?yin n n ® 's1? ,onn D'nsion n n p ®

.on^y .nam n o s n a

n3D K'n nip-in® ,inyn's 1 ? j d i nip-n anniNn® 's1? nam ."«yean «in

n n p ® -i«3"? n®yn nsion®

'ID'-TH

nyunn n3D nip-in rrrv® n'nn N1? OÍ

NSDJ

nr3 n r y n

m p m rrn'

,D®J3

mp-13

IDI

N1? D K ®

D®J D J D H

-IDIN

.nyiann

d'-IDINH®

nn

n®n on® nn . m p o 3

yann1? , n n ® s « pnynn nyun

103 ,Dnn« D"ionm nv®pom nvnsDm *pnnm nn'oxno p Vy m p D 3 nyunn n3D m p m nvm .yo®n nsD3 i"?3 nr «3® .mbon in ^yis m p m nvn 3"rr N1? nrn i n n ^tsal? n®y® i i ® N - i n n s i a n

nxo m p m mpm

DHDI»N

vn

ON®

nn ."?iD3n

I « U D

QJDNI

«in nyunn m«'SD

"73« ,«inn nsio 1 ? oipa n'n nyunV o s y s n3D invn D u m a 13'«» Vm [taya irtt-» O B S - » -ito^s .»P p'rrT®-» no3 4 ion»it .P(nn> 10 .1 «in wnn»(«in) 9 .> Pnm- >pnoi«n®-»'s^n - 3TTn'>n,n[n,n,-iKl70-i(DNtw--'oN0«'3 -» n'JisDmi rvraBxni [nvuBDm -1 1 -jinni0 -yin'rim [-]innni 13 .»" ip nyun VN is .» (nrt) 17 .>=P nip-in

. ' 1 1 1 3 DIPI*? n ' 3 1 3 0

»3 ÍE> n

n s i o n DJONI

DITS n y u n n "?N n y u n n DÍTB> M O W N N ' M .NANA INO NNNNTY

no1? o

nn .o'B^nnD D ^ a p o n

vnt?3 ^ a p a n

Vapon

"lNtp* "?3pon p"?nDmtp 3 " n i v .nmoxy 1 ? jar 3 " n n nyunntp DDNn' nr"?i . y a o n prn's 1 ? , y a a n 'pxn y r r .nyun1? 'Bnp p r DITS ri'ttntpn nyunn n r p N *?N n'tntpn nyunn -nri'N Divtp nyunn -nn'N DRRTP DNO y r

- p i "?y noNntp i n s . ^ a p o n "?N "?apon

- i n v INRRA NIRTN B>'N3 n y u n n N N ' N "7N y r n B>'N3

.n'tfitpn nyiann INBTI n y i ' n I3P"?D DNI » n y r n "?N n y r n NTN NOIDN

5-6

. ' « P 1 1 ^ DION 4

.1 N'M * RVN [NVN-» O I NNVNJ Y » ' 2

- 1 Í PRN11V O HD «VI [HDL - » LJDDF HDD 7 ,»I'»NDKNNI3

(¡TO1?) 6

P^SPRON (OOSPERM

P DBIDH HI 3'TP »•"'»» .MAPWI» A"RR 11» ,»I^MJ HIT

PROPOSITION I, PART II

183

as has been stated, it was never considered by them as a cause except in an accidental sense. It would not be impossible, therefore, for the [sublunar] elements, though interspersed with a vacuum, 7 still to possess an affinity 8 to their respective natural places, nor [would it be impossible for the vacuum to possess within itself] a distinction of parts, one having the nature of a terminus a quo and the other of a terminus ad quern, this distinction to be determined by the proximity of the vacuum® to the circumference or the centre, or by its remoteness therefrom. 10 Hence, with the assumption of a vacuum, neither natural nor violent motion would be impossible. Much less does this argument prove the impossibility of a vacuum outside the world,11 for even if there existed outside the world a vacuum in which there were no distinction of terminus a quo and terminus ad quem, it would not be impossible for a spherical body [existing in it] to have circular motion." This is self-evident. As for the second and third arguments, they are based upon two propositions, one of which is false, namely, the one which states that the ratio of one motion to another is equal to the ratio of their respective receptacles, when these latter are unlike. For since every motion by its very essence involves time in its process, it will follow that even by eliminating the receptacle there will still remain an original time of motion,13 required by the nature of motion itself,14 varying only according to the power of the motive force. It is only true, therefore, to say that the ratio of the retardation of one original motion to that of another is equal to the ratio between their respective receptacles, as, e. g., the ratio of the diminution of the natural speed of a person when he is fatigued to the diminution in the natural speed of the same person when he is more fatigued is equal to the ratio between the two states of fatigue, in which case, if the fatigue were to be eliminated, there would still remain an original speed. Averroes, to

184

C R E S C A S ' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

- t o a n «

v ^ y

m y n

-13303

,peDn

T n n V

i n n

.•?3n d ' 3 - i d D n 3 T

y n o n n t p noNtto n i p m - a n Kim m^pm

i D K n

i^ks

nins3 , a n 3 3

D'tPinn

D'nn nai3

iras

lana« ' j

dn

nr o n «"7

-ipsn -nstpa

.D'ysiDD1?

. n m

n3i3

I'Nl

is^nrvtp i n v n

r n s n

D3D1?

IK

no

m o n o t s d

,nr n t n '

h v d mio mo'tp

ot^a o i n a d^1? m r 'n^3D

n"?y

i33i

n3i3

a'on

,an33

-pn

,mp-i

m v ,(

m p n n

o^iy1?

"133

D33n y a o n p n n o i t t n n o n p n n n i D '

D'innNDI 3

nininn nr"?i4

pin

n y i a n k 1 ? « i y a o ' «"7 a n n yyiam

d'to'?»

o'yyianon miNno

anvn1?

.naon

?ini , H « n niya»n

1

?

n t o n n

otw

mmpo

oipn m s n

k"?i | " n y

n'n

n1?

-idk'p

-jin m v n 3

.ronon ny

.o^iyn

'ton

D,yyi3nDt?

n^yo"?

m m

'«an yxioontp í n m »

yyiami

131D3

a'jnnMnoi

,y3C33

.*iN3rr

nan , n y i a n n n i t r a t o s

,nxp»3

.-iton' k^i -ltunn

DH3

. m i « in d'q K ^ o n ' 1 3 3

, * m n

nam

mniNn1? nn , n y u n n n i K ' s o s

i3i3nti> n o « ' »

nr'B^i

p N

n a i m

m y a o n - 1 N 3 1 ? 3tpntp ' a

. v ^ n p no1?

"ItPBtW

nan

myi yao'

tt 1 ?

o'nsion o

,3UD3

atííjn

b»3K

,mpi3

. n « o -IN13D n n

.ioipo

n n s n

y ' 3 n n n s i o n D3ot*i

1 3 3 13« * 1X313« P 3 3 1 3 N - » » ' J i a p n e p 1 1 3 « [ 7 1 1 3 ] pDDH 1

.» y n o n n i o - 1 ' ^ ^ 1 ^ 0 i d k ' B 3 - = 'd [ksd:]- - »'

» 1DJ3H 0013 D0J [DCT3 D M D33H19-1

( n « 3 n ' R^l ]'HJ?) 13

a»E>KB>> -

1

ra-° ^"pX 6

P R O P O S I T I O N I, P A R T II

185

be sure, attempted to answer this objection, which in part 1 5 had already been anticipated by Avempace, but his answer rather answers to the description: 'Manv words t h a t increase vanity'. 1 6 Among the later thinkers there is one 17 who proposed to prove the impossibility of a vacuum by maintaining that the medium is a necessary condition in the existence of motion, 18 and this because the medium has in its nature something akin to a terminus ad quern.19 But this is an assertion which has never been demonstrated and never will be, for it may be claimed, on the contrary, t h a t the movable bodies have weight and lightness by nature, and have no need for media. 20 Or, it may also be said that all the movable bodies have a certain amount of weight, differing only secundum minus et majus." Accordingly, those bodies which move upward are so moved only by reason of the pressure exerted upon them by bodies of heavier weight," as, e. g., air, when compressed in water, will tend to rise on account of the pressure of the weight of the water, which, being heavier, will seek the below. T h a t this is so will appear from the fact that when we make a hollow in the earth, even as far as the centre, it will immediately fill up with water or air, though, [it must be admitted], whether this is due to the impossibility of a vacuum within the world or to the weight of the air has not so far been demonstrated and never will be.23 Furthermore, even if we were to admit that the medium is a necessary condition in the existence of motion, it is still not impossible for a vacuum to exist outside the world 24 , and in it for a spherical body to move with circular motion; for all these arguments show only the impossibility of rectilinear motion in a body assumed to be in a vacuum, whereas a spherical body may have motion in a vacuum without changing its place. 25 This is very evident. As for the fourth argument, it is based upon the assumption t h a t the impenetrability of bodies is due exclusively to their

186

CRESCAS* C R I T I Q U E O F A R I S T O T L E

"inud

nptp Nim

.n3"?3

n t ^ n

' 3 b o "73« . d ' e w b i o D ' p n i n '3bo

myjnnn

]'Ntt> n ' n

oni

,-ioin

k1? m i , o i p o n n t a '

«V ,~ioin

DNts> k 1 ? «

myjon1?

D»n n'-iü'

ion

h

ono

D'pmnw

.DIpD

pm

nioipo

p n x '

o'pn-ine> - i d k b o m y

"?y n s n y o K i m , 1 3 m i o

-an

mn

i (o'iskbid) 2 nn 1IN15

vn

ipt*'

,DtfJ3

Dt^a

10«»

no

"?33 j w

pmtp

noi

u'N ^ 3 3

p m a

noi«n

,-iKann

,"?n33 p n n

xintp n n . r v ^ s n

D'pmnif

133

n3n

"?iD33 v"?y

nta'

n33i

" ? y 3 ' n " ? 3 ati>a n i N ' x o d n i ,aa>3

abiyb

? d " d b > j D ' p n n V s p 1 ? i n y s o ' -ib>n n r n o y n t o i n '

,'p

(n^n)-

.lapio n ' T B ' [ T t b m

.«id m y ) - » «in n i y 11 - » ^íea^n

oa

wyn

o t f ] ' « a t o , ' 1 ^ 0 a t » i ' t * n 3 n de>3 d p t « nam

nonn

. a m e i

D ' ~ io i « n , a n - i 3 D 'b1? 3 " i n o w i n ' s o p

n'n' t*W 3"ino

o ' p m

a ' p m n

D'anx

131C32Í' D ' ü t P B I D

. n i N ' 3 1 ? 133113tf n o t o r n

my3on3

o'-ioin1?

on .D'pnin p

noi"? n x n ,33-110

opj

. a w n aiP3 D 3 3 n y 3 0 3 N ' n n x n n r o - i t » « , m p o n

nan ,D'otpan n v ^ a n

3*7 d i c 1 ? ' i N i

ott>33

ont!> n o 3

vn

-into

.1KO -IK130 n n

. » m n

Kin

no"? . n a 1 ?

. n ' ^ j n '"?y3 ' n ^ a

'"?y3

n o t u v n1? n r V i

'^ya

i1? n ' n « V

D'pm

n'n

nxo

'aso ysonn yxw ,nip-Q

nan , m p o

n W

v p m o

1

'o

ipm ? ipim « " i v p m [rpnio i

.»[on] V a N - 1 ^ 1 ' k 1 ™ [^at«-'D'tiPDian

n«D)io

. « p - » ' * j'K ' a n w -

.3 O'TDlKn [DPI] - T [nWXD) ini«'XD®15

1

.ma Pi" ?» n i N ' 3

n ' n ® - 1 » 6 1

• nD«nn n t u n n 13 i n W 3 3 - i (HQ)

=> (}nn) - ' a w n -

1

* cnm'so) 1«

P R O P O S I T I O N I, P A R T II

187

tridimensionality. But this, according to those who believe in a vacuum, is obviously not true, for according to them, the impenetrability of bodies is due not to dimensions existing apart from matter, but rather to dimensions in so far as they are possessed of matter. 26 Matter alone, to be sure, could not account for impenetrability, for were it not for its dimensionality, matter alone would not occupy place, but neither would the dimensions alone occupy a place were it not for their materiality. This being the case, one could not argue, [as does Aristotle], that the dimensions would require an infinite number of places. The fact of the matter is, while neither of the reasons mentioned is sufficient when taken separately, that is to say, neither of them by itself is sufficient to render the penetrability of bodies impossible, they are sufficient when taken together, 37 that is to say, in view of the fact that material dimensions occupy place, it is impossible for bodies to enter into one another. 38 Hence it does not follow that the dimensions even when they are immaterial, las in his argument], would require a place for their existence. This is very evident. As for the statement by which he reinforced his view, namely, that dimensions are the limits of bodies, this, too, will not be admitted by him who affirms the existence of an incorporeal interval.3» It is thus a begging of the question. It has thus been shown that in all he has said there is nothing which merits attention as an argument to disprove the existence of an incorporeal interval. This is what we intended to do to his proof. Furthermore, it would seem that the existence of an incorporeal interval is implied even in the view of those who deny the possibility of an infinite body. For according to their view there can be no body outside the world, and if there is no body, there is no plenum, and if there is no plenum, would that I knewJ° what should prevent that which is outside the world from being capable of receiving corporeal dimensions. But incorporeal dimensions

188

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

Dipon m a x i .atw *pm b i p b 'nsn aipon ar'jy D'^ina ,otP3^ mtpn 'N3sn «in OÌM^? 'noan Dipani; nKTtp na1? .'usn .DB»n mrca iDipoa -ifcU3tt> IDD ,De>3n HT-IB' -IB>N .n"ino '^ik h i » ,iD2£jn jno3 ir« "?-n3 h i ® -i*ann nr^i - i j w o «ini , p p in b n i u m « ' naa losya '«ism iòoru i ò i ,-i'iKn p p n n n n y p 'bo nann ibw .udd p"?nn -lywn «ini , p p in

u -idn' Ninn ' w s n nan

p»3 t i «

«in njn ,pannDn noon m i v"?y pnx'tp nn«i .un» p b m . p r 133'«» i n « ,Wi3 n u n a onoiNn ,an-uD 's1? atw D^iy1? p n i n a i .'«3s ni3nn 1

's ?! Dtya

dni

,rigori ^yn 'n^a DB>3 niy3on:a

W 1

Vni3 ni« *» p DN n«ann ,irm NinB> n«nnnty n^s'if n"in» «ina* no"?

,'i3£3

in« p

rrbonn m«'SD y3»3 «ina;

n^o' p a« n3n ,otw Vk n^o'P -ipsk 'ki ,'i3B 1

1« 1

•7-1:13 "?ni3 niN'xo a r n a o 's ? p dn n t a n m .rv^on 'n^n ? idi .rrbon "pya 'n^a .n^sn

'n1?^ ^tw m t t ^ o m o n a n t a n n .n'n'i» -pai

.]itt>tan ]vyn u mnn1? u'tatp no inn 3 - n 3 1 « n'n db>3 «in .nipmnnn nsio i t n p new .unan 1 ?« nsion ^yn

DV»I«I

n r n niysontp nn .apri» no 3"nn' t ò » i « u o

aoxjn 'tuoni) 5 .»,i]sn[,Kisn-«nxT®nDl7)-»,u£)2 qap ito-'(«inn'iosnnn) 7 .> = myp'irTnyp-^pVna 6 .isp-i-m^o 1 'WB14 .inspiro (noDn) - » irfy;[l'Vy - « p i o pbrb a ny^ pyi»a 1 - P T-QÌÒ 19 oinnV P-ita ? irmi 'INI»] noinma .upu (run) -»['«] DM - » . » 'd ino 20 ^ mn [«in -1 ^ nipmn1 » ?1 ropa-inn 1

P R O P O S I T I O N I, P A R T II

189

mean nothing but empty place capable of receiving corporeal dimensions.31 We have advisedly used the words 'empty place' because it is evident that the true place of a body is the void, equal to the body and filled by the body, as we shall prove in its proper place,32 God willing. Thus it has been shown that an incorporeal magnitude is by its own nature not impossible; nay, its existence must inevitably be implied. Arid why should it not? when the void itself, [without any content], may be described as great and small" and may be measured by a part of itself,34 for when, for instance, you imagine a closed vessel from which the air has been cleared and into which no other air was admitted, the void within it will be described as great and small, and will be measured by a part of itself. Since the definition of a continuous quantity can thus be applied to the void, and since it is not time, it must of necessity be a magnitude. 35 We thus conclude: Since according to the view of those who maintain the impossibility of an infinite body, there is no body outside the world, there must necessarily be there a void.36 Since the void has been shown to be a magnitude, it has thus been shown that an incorporeal magnitude exists. But this incorporeal magnitude outside the world cannot have a limit, for if it had a limit it would have to terminate either at a body or at another void. That it should terminate at a body, however, is impossible. It must therefore terminate at another void, and so it will go on to infinity. It has thus been shown that on their own premises an infinite incorporeal magnitude must exist. However that may be, it has been conclusively shown that an infinite magnitude, be it a body or something incorporeal, must exist. With this we deem fit to conclude the first Speculation. As for Altabrizi's proof, which he terms the proof of application, it is obvious that his alleged conclusion does not follow. The impossibility of one infinite to be greater than another is true

190

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

inn'33»3»

,-nynpn -rxo Kin r r ^ a n

K i n i1? r r ^ n

l'N» noi . n y n y n

"?3» 's1? , n n « n o

^na nnan

D«i , i n « n »

urn

.îoxys

nrVi

-i«uD nn

^yn

'n^ao

'rna

^ - n a 13 n 3 i i 3 n « i n ' x a

î p n n*n

nr^i

.lb'b'oa - n y » n

'rna

.nyi»o

'nVa

'papo ' n ^ a

nn«

. r r b a n ^ y s t o n » n x n o »^dij

- i d i k 1 ? ,|Dfn i " 3 j ? o n « u a « î n t f no^> , » i n n p

nr nDNrr

i r b o n "?y3 in K i n o n x n n ^ D i n o « i n p r n » ,i3"3y n r » myi

rr^an

n'n

-usi .min^a

. i m o n p n n o i x 1 ? , n n « n n x n o r r ' j s n ^»y3 ' n b a i n v n

» n n a

nviDNn

wnaiD«1?

*]«»

o»n

nnraa

«3'»

nD3

Dy

ntorr

.13 p s D ] ' « » n o s nr s ^ n r v

^ n '»»3

"7113 n i K ' J c o m y s o n

]vyn

n « 3 3

mD»

D'nsiD3

n~i'pn3

.n'^DD "?y3 , n ^ ' B 3 n 1K13D Kin n ^ n n

13 ^ n n n »

"?"?i3n

, D ' n t o » i n n t a » 13 * p p ' o » a " ? 3 » m o w n .n^sn

"?y3 ' r t a

,n3apn

D»3 m « , x D 3 n o i « n a n n

"?ni3 m y 3 D n 3 iV w m n

dn p i

. » m n

niton

^y

n3m

nonpnn»

^ys n ^ y nsnyo

n o

- 1 3 3 » n o 1 ? . b - m s n a n » n o 3 " n r r n"? . j v b o n " ? y 3 v i b o 1DDD3 n s n i

.n3y»

n»3

13-110» i d s ,D»3n p

v t a

1^13'»

p^in n3m '»»3 -i»bn

. o » n m r 3 3 » 3 ' » n » 3 13 - a n 3 nn 3

Kim » win) - 1 ' l'Hïn n ' t w < n D i ) - » i ' " ^ m ^ m i - i W n [^1112

nDKnn«

.iiXD-'»Txno[n,mn«nD]«iDi35

- 1 TXD — ^ (Kin>-= p y n Nim [rum 17

.»pVni6

7

(n'n) dni 4-5

.»n'rrn'n-»

.•"» pina->»=pT'"'"> qD) — ist) 1 ? n o « ' »

.» p ' n i 1x13014

.»n«ann9

.»»mmpas

- 1

.» njm [ p i - » r m y a n - 1 *

P R O P O S I T I O N I, PART II

191

only with respect to measurability, that is to say, when we use the term greater in the sense of being greater by a certain measure, and that indeed is impossible because an infinite is immeasurable. In this sense, to be sure, the first one-side infinite line [in Altabrizi's proof] cannot be greater than the second one-side infinite line, inasmuch as neither of them is measurable in its totality. Thus indeed the former line is not greater than the latter, even though it extends beyond the latter on the side which is finite. 3 ' This is self-evident. That this is so may be demonstrated from observation, from the case of time, which according to those who believe in its eternity, must be conceived in a similar way, that is to say, it must be conceived as capable of increase on the side on which it is limited even though it is infinite on the other side.38 Furthermore, it will be shown subsequently, God willing, that this distinction will have to be accepted beyond any doubt even according to our own true belief in creation.39

T H E SECOND S P E C U L A T I O N

Examination of the arguments which he has framed to prove the impossibility of a corporeal infinite magnitude. As for the general argument with which he begins his proof, its unsoundness is obvious, for the minor premise, namely, that every body is contained by a surface or surfaces is contradicted by the opponent who affirms the existence of an infinite body.40 He is thus arguing in a circle. Furthermore, even if we agree with his conclusion as to the impossibility of a corporeal infinite magnitude, that conclusion of his must not necessarily be true with respect to magnitude in general, for dimensions, as we have already shown, are capable of existence apart from body. A s to number, we shall discuss it in a subsequent chapter,41 God willing.

192

C R E S C A S ' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

. n m m

n a i n n -TDBJ ] I1? « -I N N A N , O P A C A N O ' n s i a n D^INI

' n V a - | t y a n n i p a - m n t t n , n m a ' n V a n i a n p n a n a i n a «into n n ' n b o n n i D ' m N ' x a m j j a o n a m a i « n nanpnntt» n n .rmyta ' i w a I'K nam

yawn» ptPtna m « a n n

.nyv

u

*]'pn

.a"ina

t ò . n ' V a n '"?ya

n ' V a n "?ya ' n ^ a n ' a

,nn«n

- i k u b « í m . m y r r i n v n 1 ? n i ^ n n n onto n a a m ^ n n n n m a n o n'n n ^ a n

'"?ya v ò a

aa-iia u m n a ,(?ya

n n i D ' n v n dkb> , r i ' 3 t p m

nrVi . » m n

mm

.ìaxya

.n'bon Vya 'n^a

aana

' n ^ a n m D ' n w s a m y j o n - i « a n ' x b n ' V a n "?ya 'n"?3

i s a d ^ i « ! . n o n n x a n o s a tppnn n v n ]a a « - m a n n

.n'bon

n ^ a n V y a v i ^ a n n i D ' n o i n « u n ^ n a a " n n ' K1?^ no 1 ? n a a t y no 1 ? , n i 3 ' K V y a n ' n '

f

imix

-WBK n a a ' a , - i * w n T D S ' t p

t o n n x n n r a i .I1? m a ' « i ' « r i m a r i V y a ' n ^ a otoa nave» -MAN .TID' an 1 ? t o n i . a ^ a a W w a

i n v n n s a , n i ' 3 ' K n "73 V a p a

D ' D i a a p a y a , a r n a D 'B 1 ? , r n a ' N V y a v i ^ a am

«xaa naai

nratp p t p "731 . n i ' a ' N n Vap 1 ? n a a m n 3 iato ' n ^ a D^iyV pin n n a

,D"a'atpn

DIM n i N ' x a n i y a a n - m a n n

nsian

. n ' b a n "?ya 'n"?a n ' n 1 n ' V a n *?ya ' n i ? a n ' n

, i n y i m y prntf n a i

n ' V a n ' n ^ a n n ' n DNB> . n r a " n n '

, i ' p m "?aa n ' ^ a n

n ' V a n ' n ^ a n DK V a « , « m n avn"? o i p a n ' n . c p m 1 ? a"nnn p"inD 3

'axy

.•> mpa-innrren » nipainn» - » nmo [nniD - •> ' niDipna 2

3fn»B33[iDxj;37 - •> ' mwxD) - » -itann 9

unvrfrs .* P ' * » aamDn B

- » 1 n a n - 1 « ? - " » nraw na» 16 'nb»an2i

Vya

p y n 15

."»napas > (n'n)

1

.MKVM

.3 *TID' 1» m e n u

.» mm vpmi? "'Dxy nao ''n DK»20-21

.'«=

«in [n'n - 1 (nniD'n) - 1 ntuxru

.• n n w n .1 (nam)

n'an [n'nj 10 n'Van b>yan [n'Van

PROPOSITION I, PART II

193

As for the physical arguments, the first is both materially and formally defective: viz., it consists of propositions which are inadmissible 41 and the connection of the consequent with the antecedent is not necessary. The proposition denying the existence of an infinite number of elements has been demonstrated in the first book of the Physics43 only by two arguments.

The first

of them is that the infinite cannot be comprehended by knowledge. But it is not necessary that principles qua principles should be known.44 This is self-evident. The second argument is that if the elements were infinite, there would be an infinite composite body. But this is what was to be proved here. If we assume, therefore, the existence of an infinite composite body, there will be no argument for the impossibility of the existence of infinite elements. It has thus been shown that the syllogism is materially defective. As for the defectiveness of its form, it does not necessarily follow, if we assume one of the elements to be infinite, that it would cause the destruction of the other elements, for that element may be conceived as being devoid of any qualities, inasmuch as it is possible to assume an infinite element without any qualities, which, on account of its being devoid of any qualities, may be the recipient of all the qualities and act as their substratum. 45

Such a body, devoid of any qualities, is to be found,

according to their own admission, in the case of the celestial bodies, 46 —a body endowed only with a capacity and predisposition for the recipiency of qualities. Still less has this argument proved the impossibility of the existence of an infinite spherical body outside the world. 47 As for the statement by which he has reinforced his contention, namely, that if an infinite existed it would have to be infinite in all its dimensions, this, too, is inconclusive. If infinity were essential to dimensions as such, there would be some ground for his conclusion; but since infinity is to be only one of the properties of

194

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

n n . D ' p m n "?33 nr 3 " n r v N1? .i1? ' o x y ' n ^ a i vrtpoo a'®» .~R«D " I N U O

w o m n Q mp 1 ? « i n . m ^ p m n a i s n H I D 1

,'JTPN DJBNI

*?y3 'n"?3n o t m n o i a n D"?ini .^¡tan n n n -IB>N a m n i o n D'om

- i » « ' » m a . n i ^ p N ^ i n a i s 11? T»® n o » '

jr^sn

.1UD-1N ny-r1? •"O'DB'n u m n d « nan ,Dipnn n x o i m nn .3B>nB> i d s n o « n urv

n1?

y ' a -1 n 1 '

'"? b> n ojdni

njn , n o «

oipon

n t w n x o ] « i n impotp n o x ' ri'^an V y a ' n ^ a n

-iDi«ntp

' n ^ a Kin l r n n a j I S D I . r a i o n f p o n ntatpn « i m ' » ' o w n Dtpam ?«*? -pro . « ' n n n « B 3 Dipo i1? *ppo m p a i1?

na

.inmyp

. n ^ a n 'rya

' i i x n , n « i n nr IDD-I« n y n ' s 1 ? "73a * p p » n .•qpio

nsn 1 ? ' n o « n mpone> , n « T t p no'£>"? , i o x y 3 nDNntp N1?« IEJD-IK 3 " N - I P N o n p t p m . * p p o n N V ^ S N p a NTY« p m n

«in

- p n a -IB>K D'pmnty "?y OHDVD onts> ^n 1 ? p o y p « n y n n nr1? Dnpe>n c r a ^ n n D v n r«i , ' ^ a n p n y n 3 D ' p n y j d'D

^an

v t a m p - i i ' u s a DHDI« 1 ? o'pn-ino ,DDN u'to , ' r r a « m i . o n n . o n n a ^ i t a a n u " n r r k1? nr1?! . D ' y y u n o .NVI3) i a " n n ' cnpoa IBD-IN nnao 1 ? NAM mpo

nn . m p o a i s ^ n / v D " o , D » n D'onntp , a n n

.»(njra-i'inDNtna« s .>=n"33i»n'an(ri'VonVya'rtarM-s ncj»n nn * ne&> «in -»imnyp 10 .^ann 'WTD ,my»n'D .•> D'IM 20

.»podi«™* 'nDDin nxo] 9

.'«• IDVD Kinif 16 . ' " ^ » O ' P M N «»''pmn [pmn 15 .»innaj- =

ia"nrv [lE^nir - •»' D'oun 21

PROPOSITION I, PART II

195

the infinite and unessential to it, it would not follow that all the dimensions would have to be infinite.48 This is very evident. As for the second argument, based upon the consideration of weight and lightness, it is derived from an analogy of sublunar sensible bodies. But he who affirms the existence of an infinite body conceives it to be without either weight or lightness, as is said to be the case of the celestial bodies according to the view of Aristotle himself.4' As for the third and fourth arguments, based upon place, even if we accept his definition of place, they do not sustain his alleged conclusion. For he who affirms the existence of an infinite body would maintain that the infinite has place only with reference to50 the surface of its concavity, 51 that is, the surface which surrounds the centre,53 whereas with reference to its convexity53 it is infinite and therefore has no place on that side. Why should it not be so? when the all-encompassing celestial sphere answers exactly to this description, according to Aristotle's own theory, namely, that it has no place which surrounds, but one which is surrounded.54 The truth of the matter, as it seems, is that the true place of a thing is the interval between the limits of that which surrounds.55 The impossibilities which, according to Aristotle, would have to ensue from this view,56 are beside the mark, resting as they do upon the assumption that the dimensions within a vessel full of water will be moved together with the vessel, whence indeed, were this true, the alleged possibilities would have to follow. But the assumption is a figment of the imagination and is not true. The dimensions, according to those who believe in an empty space and a vacuum, are immovable, and so none of those supposed impossibilities would follow.57 Furthermore, Aristotle's definition of place will give rise to many absurdities: First, the celestial bodies will differ with regard to place. All the [internal] spheres will have essential place, that is, the sur-

196

CRESCAS' C R I T I Q U E OF ARISTOTLE

. o x y a m p o i1? n ' n ' k 1 ? " ? a a T p o m u'N nu'jaaa axya

,*i'pon n o o n ' n x n

- i p n ntatpn ' a ^ n a j m »

T p o

mp»

i1?

no"?

-ipn . u n »

"7133

n w

1

noi ? p n V j nr m a y a

,Dxya

.mpD3 m t f « i ' p o nm

urx

«mea

1

.D'p^n ? n n r o n aipontp n n

-IPN - n a n »

. m » ' n y u n o ' y y u n o ' ? an

n ' n ' t ? p i t u " 7 1 3 3 mtt> * i ' p o u r n . ^ a n n y u n a a x y a , - m n

Dipoty n n

,B>«n n n n y p a

,ûnai

D'yyunon

. n n n ntPNa a i p n n 'p"?n b s b i v o n «vpon

TiNn i» ' y s o a n

ntatpn « i n

p"?nn m o w

many

's1? , b v a

imaD

d o d o

i n

1

.p'Dm n m y

nn1?

ob> i ? w v

-îtfN , ' y a c a n i D i p a a u'Ntp o n , ' y a c a n i o i p » a «înty d n ca^ni xV impôt? 3"niv,'yacan î m p o a «in dki

.no«

'yacan Dipa1? ^ n n '

rr'rana w m .bih

nirmnn

b

p ^ n 1 ? -ib>n ' y a c a n .nujn

. n n p o a i « n ' n D x y a ,"D'Dtî>n D'ODipaa

n o «

.ncann

-\m

ommxn 1

many

i? w

p'om

mm«nn o"D'D¡2>n

n t o N m p o n dnb> , D n o i u

pri'

D'mia

,o~ion T'ix'

«i'po

nVsp n n

.^Vaa

n s n m » n t m ,n"?yDn a n n - r ty«n t i d ' o p p

many

n'n'

-|'N " o ' n t o n

«m

•nanB'i ,*i'p»a

^ai p'oni

.ncaon

."PtmwiiBixa?

.^Vians

,':>p->i''' = ^3Nn®N3

' V D a n - ^ a p n oyntan laipaa ron® a « t ^ o : k S h 1

- » niniKn - *=p •>» * 1V [W] 12 1

nao ? - 1 6 ^ 3 3 ) 17 [^N —

-

»

,'=mia!

.'(-i'i«n|D)io

.»(«i'ponn .»p= Dipon»8

-kpk inob] -•> e y a u n impon i r « » n«) -

.» aaipan - » niniNn - » n ' n iron 16 m ' n ' - ' » ^ P " " ^ «a ' a

"?aa

. o i p o n

"?yi

n u a

a m p

invn

ay

'a

nx-p

^naa

invn

nvriD'ai»

ma'yn

-iid'

«in»

"jina

n o «

]"jyn

m a a

]VDnn

» n p

wbwa

dtyn

l a n y n

p

.nioboy

nan

lBnno

,«i?E>3 n r n

-parr

ae>n

« ^

e m

n'nw

nsnn

noi^a

,ott>n " ? «

d«i



. m a n

'uan

n'n'i

- 0 U'nia« - 1 1133 [DlpD - 1 1 ' > t 1DSJ)3 2 ' n n ' * - " 1 ^ o k t t i » ' ^ ™ ™

dutids -

3 1

' c r m - D lrnmN 5 .lap-i-i1*

.l»=M-iniN)-i»=pnjnin[-|njn--'Nl?i8

.''•IDltO-'i'D-IOtOn-IDtOII .P invn1? 1 mm 1 ?« [invn

-i«ina>

loipoo

n r - i a p i n » nn'Bi l ^ a j a i l i n n o * l^naai linrwi n r r n 7 n"3] D i p n n - » ' D n y i [i:nyn9

ana

. « i ^ ni31D [J7131D - = lDipa® [lDipOO1

.» rrn [ K i n - ^ p n ' y n w 3

1' 1 ^ 0

rnix->" nwn

[lDipD nVlJJH I'Kl] oVlJJ - • .1 inn'® D nun'» u i d t ® .» n«in Vn -idww lVto [iKinif .»laipaas»-1»3"1'311

201

PROPOSITION I, P A R T II

tively to the form and essence of a thing, as, when they say: 'It is proved from its own place;' 83 'From the place from which you come,' 84 that is to say, from the very thing itself; 'He fills his ancestors' place.' 85 You may note how in the last-quoted expression they have indirectly testified that place is identical with the void which an object occupies, thus accounting for their use of the word 'fills,' for if by 'place' in this quotation were meant 'grade,' 8 6 they would have said, 'He was in his ancestors' place,' which would mean, 'in the exalted position of his ancestors.' Accordingly, since the Blessed One is the form of the entire universe, having created, individuated and determined it, He is figuratively

called Place, as in their oft-repeated expressions,

'Blessed be the Place;' 8 7 'We cause thee to swear not in thy sense, but in our sense and in the sense of the Place;' 8 8 ' He is the Place of

the

world.' 8 '

This

last

metaphor

is

remarkably

apt,

for as the dimensions of the void permeate through those of the body and its fullness, so His glory, blessed be He, is present in all the parts of the world and the fullness thereof, as it is said, '[Holy, holy, holy is the Lord of Hosts], the whole earth is full of his glory',» 0 the meaning of which may be stated as follows: Though God is holy and separated by a threefold holiness," alluding thereby to His separation from three worlds, still the whole earth is full of His glory, which is an allusion to the element of impregnation, which is one of the elements of Glory.»3 Of the same tenor is the conclusion of the verse, 'Blessed be the glory of the Lord from His place,' that is to say, the 'Blessedness' and 'Affluence,' ascribed to God is from His place, that is, to say, from God's own essence and not from something outside Himself, and so the pronominal suffix 'His' in 'from His place' will refer to 'glory.'»3 If, however, you prefer to consider 'Glory' as an emanation, the verse will be taken according to its more literal meaning, the pronominal suffix referring to God, the meaning of the verse thus being, the 'Glory of God' is 'blessed' and is

202

CUESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

.imoxy í o i p o

-iDi 1 ? n x n

,at?n

t i n ' s IB»« m n

oipoo

ystnoi

í p i t s 1 ? -jntflX'

.Dwn

n m o

'Br^pn

'n

n a a e »

,uoo ^ x w

wvn1?

orv^ ' í m i'n o

.'awn ] v y n nr u

rvban

*yna

, i n m o

mnn1? ía'totp n o

nn

]vyn

»n^a y y i a n o m y a o n a

^ d b

D'nDioa

nTpna

. i r a u D 1« m » '

nyian

" ? y a ' n ^ a n Dtpa1? n i t y n y i a n m y a o n a -nDB> o ' n t n o n nan ^ ' " r a n .'pbn

"?ya ' n ^ a arnn

dw

n'n'

n w s o

myaon nto a " r n

nr 1 ?! . ^ m o n

o p a n "?y

abo

.m'jan

o"iaa

. o r n o ' n ^ a m ^ a n ^ y a ' n ^ a dim n i K ' x o m y i o n y n y . d o b b s b y d d n h D'jrm 'n"?a DNxoa D n a

"mam

npnatsop .fmo

-ioitó n"?yon

-idiV

nbyab

nr o n

nro m p '

e>' , n a « n n m

"?y n o r o n

.j'oa

D'^aaiD

]itf«-in onvn

oy

neian» ,na«n

m o i p o n t ? n n .{»'«a o ^ a a i o ' n ^ a , t 3 ^ m » a n " ? y o dip

dni

Dn

.mbon

atpaa nn

moipotp

an

.nooni

'n^a^

nro

. » m a m & n a n * w n n y i a n n p n ' n d n i .bncj'a maatto n a n , m b p m n a i a n b y n o v a n , D'avnn ia"nm

->03)4

.mb'pi n a i a

t,n,i DB>n3

piaiv a » n ' » a"in'9 .maiVr^DaiS

'apn

oaoNi

"?ya m ' p a n "?ya ' n ^ a

. i i s p n i i » « iDipoo —

.>=' n'aas-s

nsion

pi nvn^2

D'nBwai6

."lIim'Dn HDl'DIl 14

catpan

.» yottno m m

n n ^ p i - m »

* D"H3 0^310

=

P R O P O S I T I O N I, PART II

203

poured forth in abundance 'from the place of God,' i.e., from His essence,94 inasmuch as it is an emanation. There is no need, therefore, for the Master's interpretation of 'His Place' to mean 'His grade,' 95 for it is an impropriety to ascribe to God any distinction of grade. This is wherewith we deem it fit to conclude this second Speculation. T H E T H I R D SPECULATION

Examination of the arguments which he has framed to prove the impossibility of an infinite body having either rectilinear or circular motion. As for the arguments which he has framed to prove the impossibility of rectilinear motion in an infinite body, whence he infers the impossibility of an infinite body, they are all based upon the analogy of a sensible body. His reasoning, therefore, proves only one particular case,96 but there still remains to be proved the impossibility of an infinite body which is imperceptible by the senses. Moreover, upon further inquiry we shall find that his arguments are not conclusive in any respect, even with regard to a sensible body. In the case of the first argument, based upon whereness, his opponent may contend that the places toward which the elements tend, though limited in kind, that is, the above and the below, are still unlimited individually, that is to say, those places exist one above the other ad infinitum,97 The fact that there would be no absolute above will give rise to no impossibility, even though rectilinear motion is perceptible by the senses.' 8 As for the second argument, based upon weight and lightness, even if we admit the infinite body to be endowed with weight and lightness, the consequences he saw in his imagination will not

204

C R E S C A S ' C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E

-itPN ' y x a K n n K s a

dk . n n »

13 d k

.pra

3

. n ^ a n

, ,

nn'

"?ya

kVi 'n^a

n a i a 1 ? mti> p r a

nyunn

naiaa

p p

nKBai 'yxaKn

-ity«3 n n y a n ^ a n

nvn

p r a

yyuno n ^ a n

n K s a n i p n w no"? ^ í a a .nyunn

]ar ni^pi 1313 Va1?» nn nun

1

yyuna

?

oki

.nan»

.yyiarv

mVan

"?ya

naia

Vya dpi naia nvn a ^ n m

nra m p

nKsa

k"?i

1

. r n ^ a n "?ya

-i»k ,'mtpn

p m

,

ia

"?3«

n 1 7 3 Dt»a

n-ra»

m a n

Vya 'nVan naian yyurrtp a ^ m r

nr"?i .attn

avnn

,ni^ysm

by

"?ysn

i ^ tf'tf n a y r t y n ^ a n 'n^aa

in^iys

m a n n

p

mnnif

rvbwr]

iDvan

V y a v i ^ a n acu1? -ib>sk w 'iKn m m

. a m u

dki

.naia

,pr n^ira m » a i

nwa m m

p



,"iaK'if

laiK^i

.nar» nuD1? 3UD3 o»:a

f]k Dna

na«n

.wk

nyun1?

,»man

,pr

m m »

nan

,"i'K3

«"71 . ^ l a a u a a

nip'

nyrnn n a s a

d j Kin nan , n u u D n

"i»k

.m'ran

n a *?aa ] ' k » i K i a a Kin

.3"ina n - w n 'n^a

a»n

nn

Vyis n,!7an 'jya 'n^an n v n a

'nbo dcj niyaan iKa1? i n n »

ww

nabw

n y u n n m a on ,^-itf p r

.»man

,3"ina

(

nam

Dm i ' t w no1?

K i n , p r a k ^ k n y u n 1 ? nttfSK w

n y u n n mi

nsian

nyunn

atwn ^y

p

ni^i

rn^an

nKsa

"?ya

ojbki

dj D"ua

Dnvn"?

yyuna

'nba

Kim ,n'Van

'pya ' n ^ a

obn

D^nu

'nba

DKsaj ,ona

n p i w a

nam .»ma

.» njron^ pi?] 12 ,ik=i KSB321

a v n n [hbb a'Tirv í ó ] 9 . ® n : ® B - i ' « i n [ran 14

.MJ-Dt I t » « 2 "IDr "TO 20

.'rnwie

.s^uns

. » ^ a p [W7P1

.¡»ap-ini? n w u runa [n:t3 o n

dni

/i*n»K7

v t a

pnion

nn

.yyuno

opjV

n'3i3Dn

o'nBiDntp

Vy3 'nVsn

."»n^snins

m"ITÍ> • i3"rw 1

. - " p i n n [»idi: - 1 d'i [ p

.» D'un' > » ne:' 9

.•> aVij?^ »jpiDi3-i4

.» nn'::i8

Vy3

> Him [Kim - * (13) -

.» n r a w » ) - * » vv - 1 ' rem 10 ."n"ji3--" l '(-n5;)i4

" t d ^ s v n n n * n dnb>

rr^on

-nDP

.n^on

.» T £ D - » p i i D'ip->=p (']»)2

n:m [«m 12

.rr^sn

«mi

« b » « . d p h r n r a a u n s n o - n y - i t o n n p 1031 ,*ipio

,-rrr i r b s n

Vitas

Vy3 'n^s

ni«'SD

HIH

^Din'»

"?y3 ' n ^ s p m o n t p ,-vtoîn n o « n

c h y ^ p n - i o n nvn"7

u

, m p i v

.13 -iidíp r r ^ s n n ¡ r r m . o ^ i y 1 ?

,0'ip

,nr

."ON13

-tobn ' k c .in"33n-t"1»

.« a'nBionwi - « (nn> ' m m [nn 17

.3 nn'

PROPOSITION I , PART II

207

In the first argument, he proves the proposition which denies the consequent [by contending] that the distance at the circumference between any two radii [of an infinite sphere] must be infinite on the ground that the distance between radii increases in proportion to the elongation of those radii, concluding from this that wherever there is an infinite elongation of the radii there must be an infinite distance between them. To this the opponent may answer that distance increases [infinitely] in the same way as number103 is said to increase [infinitely], namely, without ever ceasing to be limited. That the possibility of infinite increase is not incompatible with being actually limited may appear from the case of infinite decrease, for the examination into contraries is by one and the same science.104 It has been demonstrated in the book on Conic Sections,os that it is possible for a distance infinitely to decrease and still never completely to disappear. It is possible to assume, for instance, two lines, which, by how much farther they are extended, are brought by so much nearer to each other and still will never meet, even if they are produced'06 to infinity. If, in the case of decrease, there is 107 always a certain residual distance which does not disappear, a fortiori in the case of increase it should be possible for a distance, though infinitely increased, always to remain limited. What we have just said is wholly in accordance with the truth, for an infinite distance between lines has no existence even when the lines themselves are infinite, inasmuch as a distance must always be bounded, as will appear in the sequel, God willing. But first we shall endeavor to show that if the reasoning by which he established the minor premise which denies the consequent were true, it would follow that the distance in question would be both infinite and finite at the same time—and this even if we do not assume that the infinite is capable of motion. For, according to him, the arguments are only meant to show that an infinite body could not have circular motion, whereas were we to assume an

208

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

-lKanat? -in« pe>

."jitaa u a a m p ' «"7 yyuna 'n"?a n ^ n n

^ y a ' n ^ a p m n'n't» -pro ,mp-i IN 'l^'a m a n a o^ny^ pin» u pano'ty nx ^y inn'Hts> U'^y . k s d ' 1'K

D^INT

n'^an

.Q'tntpna infirm ,D"naun D'ipn

B>ya ' n ^ a p m a n rprvtp a"nrvON

dk

NAN .~IOINB>

NO«

TTQ

iwytp a v n n n'n

DKSP

Dinan noNiv

no ' s a nan . i n ' n ' ^ a n "7yai n ' ^ a n

Dn'J'a p m a n n ' n ' » ranana o'NXi'n n'i?an '"?ya ' n ^ a D'ipa jpnnsDina

p m a n nvn1? .n'^an "?ya 'n"?a *)'pan n s a

. p i r n n'ir ir'Nai .ranana o'trcvn ü'ip 'ííp "702 nr a " n n ' nan .n'^an "?ya ' n ^ a on'3'a p m a n -IPN *]'pan nxa T ' x j newai uV -wsNtp pBD

, m i p j y n ' n y p a m a n ipn bxx mtnsi

|a Nintp na1? , r a í a n rmpa nmpj

naitinn n m p n a íp K'nn"?

a - w ip N'nn 1 ? -itpstw n u w N m r n y r n

*?ya p m a a *i'p»n nxa vn oxi , y r p m r p

a n m .mips

i t r m ' p i r n n'ir i r « a o'Nsvn D'ipn ^atp nam naai . n ^ a n n'Van "?ya n'n p a « ^ ' V a n "?ya ' n ^ a p m o *]'pan u r a ,'NA«

a v n n U'nmna a " n n ' nrn

NPTPM

.-TIT

n ' ^ a n "?ya 'n^ai

N1? ,rv^an "7ya ' n ^ a ipn nvn aytt> majn na«na> Nina» nn .D'ip 'jb> ]'a n ' ^ a n b»ya 'n"?a p m o niK'sa a " n n ' .»»Drain» - » (•«) - « i » is [«]Ni 3 3 p' prim ¡pm -»n'n® nn«i [n'n'» I'm 2 .>='D3(™n)6 .i1» n'n» [n'n'c — ^ roNnns .= ' > D'majn-» m a - " (D-nnDn>4 .o Q'ipa [D'ip -» boa nr> - •> [•«] nan 9 nvn1?! - P i'ponDs > n*aan7 ...rrnpano) 12-13 = .> ipn N'xin^ 12 .1 "> [iiron nn nxT] nn«n - * aitfmi [Di»n:i 11 - •> n'aani" n'aa 17 mn [n'n -.»(p> 16 íznnn' ni'Ka 15 .>= op .« •'ípn-H-'n^'an [':»19 lni'nis .^pi nown • 'no«n

PROPOSITION I, PART II

209

infinite body incapable of motion, he would find nothing impossible in the assumption of an infinite body. Moreover, according to what has been shown already, there must be outside the world either a plenum or a vacuum, in either of which cases there must exist an infinite distance. Or, if it does not actually exist, we may still assume its existence after the manner of the geometer who makes use of infinity in the definition of parallel lines,108 and in the other hypotheses.10® But how it could be shown, as we have suggested, that if his reasoning were correct it would result that the distance would have to be both infinite and finite at the same time, I will now explain by the following: If it were true that the distance between two infinite radii at their intersection with the circumference were infinite, on the ground that the distance between two emerging lines must increase in proportion to the elongation of those lines, that, of course, would have to be true in the case of any two radii emerging from the centre at any central angle whatsoever. Let us now imagine that, on the circumference between the radii which are infinitely distant from each other, we take a point at a certain distance from one of the radii. A line can undoubtedly be drawn from that point to the centre, for it is one of the postulates 110 that a straight line can be drawn between any two points. This line will make a certain central angle with the aforesaid radius, and at the same time the two lines will be at a finite distance from each other at the circumference. But the assumption is that any two radii, making any central angle whatsoever, would be infinitely distant from each other at the circumference. Hence the distance would be both finite and infinite at the same time. This absurdity will follow if we assume his reasoning to be true. The real truth of the matter is that even if the radius in an infinite sphere is assumed to be infinite, it need not necessarily follow that there would have to be an infinite distance between two such radii. For it is evident that whatever point we may take

210

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

mttnatp - w e « irmi

, m » n jo N x v n n ' ^ s n V y 3 ' n ^ s n îpntf j u t

. n ' " ? 3 n ^ 3 D - i o m m i p a n i'3it> i p n n ' n ' n 1 ?^ , n m p a 13 *n!?3 n v n 1 ? n i p s « ' n c n p n |'3tp

n'^sn

pmontp

T « N ' n n n m p a m ,n'"?3n ' r y s 'n"?3 i p n n a ¡vrrtp n n i p a ]'3tt> n ' ^ D D ^ y n ' n " ? 3 n p m o 1 ? p i n s «irbon ^ys

d n n i N ' x o j ' N .n1? n i ^ s o

Nintt> i p 3 " i d w b o p ^ s s i

. D ' i p n 'aw

1

•?y3 ' n ^ 3 p m o tœoa n ' n i ^ n i , n ' " ? 3 n i n x p i ? ]'Ntt> 13 i n o « p m o nan . n s p n ^ i t p o « i n i , n x p 3 n ' n n ? ' i t o n ' n ,n'"?3n o w n » n ' n o t o .i1? n i N ' s o iaoo p"?n y y i a n '

o'ipn j'3 n ^ s n

"?y3 'n"?3

nan . n ^ s n "?y3 ' n ^ s K i m , y y i a n '

i^ss

"?3ti»n nan , - i v x n i d p i r n nr n ' n o n i . n ' b o n b y n i p b y «"7« .i3"na o ' i p n 'at? ]'3W p m o n n v n ,i33"ne> n r n 3vnne> y i n » ' i n t i n v n 3 " n ' , n ^ 3 n *?y3 r s n o n i d o ' K X v n n ' " ? 3 n ' ^ 3

'n"?3n

. m ^ p 3 n t o n ' n n . r r ^ s n V y 3 n r n y y i a n o s n x o ' p 3 U D n ^3 ni'ir u n n

- i p n n ' " ? 3 n " ? y 3 n n'irnty no 1 ?

u p í o ,D-ion

nvn1? , n i 3 n 3

- i s d o 3 n'"?3n ' ^ y s

nan .i 1 ?*« ò

vn

,n'"?3n b y n - i s D o n n ' m . n ' ^ s n "?y3 D i o n

nnti>

-ipn p m o n

. r n s n s n ' ^ n *7y3 p m o n n ' n ' » 3 " i n 1

- p o a n m i D u s ' ^ ? 3tt>ntt> 3i'nntt> n « 3 n n , p nr n ' n n w t o i . n o « ia'K n r n n s i 0 3 .[' b> ' o n n i n s i o n "7D3na n r 3 i - j i n n "?y o h d v o ]'35

.pop mi

' t y ^ m

> n"3an-i (lpn)-i f ' f 1

» Min»!! ?!'«»? - m D'ipn ['3»]9

mipjn [rmp34

.T '0NIP3 13 p 11 ^ .

ia5

pnmn8

'ae>n n s i o n n a m

- i

.» n"33

in«2

[V^ZI^l - P D'lp 6

j^p-mS n"33n7-a

P"n^2o nrn1?!->= (mam) 17 .>«3 d i d h d h V'JH mapi-mox» 'in ['gCDnn 22 .'»= lU'K [13'K 21 .'^«n ' í h t b

.pniD* 1

prnnn-< a ? ]'«») w n "i®«i3 .» dwh (U) - 1 U'TlV » 3TIT^ ,nij!»n 'B by ti'j»

P R O P O S I T I O N I, P A R T II

211

in the infinite radius, the line between that point and the centre will always be finite. Consequently, since the distance between two radii cannot be infinite unless it be between two points in those radii at which the radii themselves are infinite, and since there are no such points, it must, therefore, follow that there can be no infinite distance between those radii. Generally speaking, when we say of a line that it is infinite, we mean that the line has no extremity or limit, whereas an infinite distance [between infinite radii], if it existed, would have to mean the distance between the extremities of the infinite radii. But an infinite radius has no extremity. Hence there can be no infinite distance between the radii. And even though the sphere as a whole is capable of rotation, notwithstanding its being infinite, any given part of it performs its rotation on a finite axis.111 This, to be sure, is remote from the imagination, but reason compels us to assume it. 1 " You may further know that the conclusion we arrived at, namely, that the distance between two infinite radii must always be finite, leads also to the conclusion that any distance which these radii may traverse in their revolution must likewise be finite. This can be easily demonstrated. If [in the argument in question] we draw around the centre a certain number of angles, each of them being equal to the finite central angle [formed by the infinite radii], the number of these new angles will have to be finite, inasmuch as the distance around the centre is finite. Now, since the number of the angles is finite, the distance [traversed by the radii] must likewise be finite. This being the case, it is evident that the reasoning by which he tried to establish the minor premise in order to deny the consequent in this argument [i. e., the first] is unsound. This also disposes of the fifth113 argument. As for the second, third and sixth114 arguments, they are based upon the intersection of the infinite line by a revolving line,

212

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

nam

. n ' b o n ' j y a ' n " ? a n l p 1 ? xb

"?a

no1?

nawm

nmpa

n ^ a n

*?ya

.nyiana

niN'so

pawn

a^mr

m y ^ a

1« m n ' n a a , a i a D a y y i a n o i p

lpn

p"?n

«V

oias'tp

myaon

naannty

nan

.yyiann

pinn

laa'N

naa

nr^i

no1?

yyiano .ncasno

.]or n ^ i t a n y i a n n n ^ n n n n x p m a n ? n n . n ^ a n "?ya

nyiana

ooantp m o w n

nam

1

nonpnn

*?y t d v d

a i m . n ' a i a o n a i o n "b ,nnxpn

p y ' 3 -1 n i n D i o n

aiaDa yyiannn n

n n y a Kin nan , n ^ a n

"?ya ' n ^ a

naion a i a o a nyiann n n a n o n'n a « o naion

"?aa

ntt>BN n a a

"?a«

,pso

,!

nn

. n a i n n ib yx

mpo

nr 1 ?

.rraiaD

.anDa

yyiannb» .naionn

n a n nnDtp D ' n s i o n " ? a a i ' « » n r o n x a n n

naa

l a n a n o n t o n n ^ a « . n ^ a n V y a ' n V a n Dtt>aa n ' a i a o n arn my n«an' naai

. n ^ a n V y a ' n ^ a n catpaa n y i a n n

a n D a y y i a r v ' x u r a n otpan n t n a u n a « » n n •?ya

'n"?a

yao'

'nx'an nan

,ia

ipn

nona

Dnanon

nyiann nines«

.tfinno nnntPBN

nt£>na n a m

tt>ont£>' n t p u a

nr^i

n'n

ON a " n n '

.n'bon ^ya w v n p

»n^an

otMntP - i n t w ,nptt>

l a o o i a p ^ D n a n , r i ? i a a Dtyann l a p ^ D n i s w a i

pi"?D a " m

? a n "?ya

.n,!?an 1a

b>ya

tt>»nts>ai

ion

.n'ban

n a a d n i , n ' ! ? a n "7ya p r a n , ! ? a n ^ y a ' n ^ a n m y i a n yyian'ts>n "?ya 'n^a1? n i K ' s a

m n dni

.n^an

'nVa1? p x ' a n

y i s ' a n y a o ' k"7b> m i a ' ^ a t p n n a n , a n n ^ y a n n a D ' d 1 ?

3"nnn»a"nn3

.•>'

-

'nn w a i n s

]i»tnn p^n . = 1 n x p - " > nr

.•>•>' n M a n s

nyion [ m i e n 7

u p V n [i:p"?D 11

d a s ) - = nt"? p s o m p a 10

- n

n"33-iapi'^|,s

17

ii&tnn p^nn - • n y w n s nrVis

.'Vann ' » i t s

['n^aVio

3UD3 -

.r^an

.»ipai .^tnitras)-»

,n-iy»n'd Vy w w

p niiona

(nro)-" 1 ^ 133113

Dunon 1 3 - " »Dn®: [WDn»' 18

.»ip4

"j»»'

^ «in

[ m u i ] njinn 9

.>•>' up^n [i3p^D-'pi">

.» m y ) - » " " » i t u n n - 1 3 1 * n"3316 .»n'aisonin'^n^vs'n^nis

.«i«3n'

PROPOSITION I, PART II

213

whether that line be assumed to be parallel115 to the infinite line at the start or not." 6 Since, however, it has been shown that there can be no first part of motion, because every object that is moved must have already been moved, it does not follow, as he claimed, that there would have to be a first point of meeting." 7 It is not inconceivable, therefore, that the infinite line [in question] should meet the other line in a finite distance" 8 with a finite motion,11'—• and this may be accounted for by the fact that the extreme beginning of motion must take place in no-time.120 As for the fourth111 argument, it is based upon the proposition which states that an infinite body moving in a circle must necessarily have a spherical figure. This, however, is untrue, for if a body is conceived to be infinite it has no extremities, and thus it has no figure."2 There would be some ground for his objection if circular motion required a spherical figure, but an object of any figure may have circular motion." 3 By conceiving, therefore, a body devoid of any boundaries, we conceive it also to be devoid of any figure, and so it does not follow that it would have to be finite. All this has shown that among all the arguments he has adduced there is nothing which proves conclusively the impossibility of circular motion in an infinite body. Quite the contrary, our discussion has made it clear that motion is possible in an infinite body. This possibility may be further demonstrated by an argument from observation. We observe that a luminous body may complete a revolution in finite time. If we assume a ray of that luminous body to be infinite, allowing ourselves to make use of such an assumption after the manner of the geometer, we may conclude that it would not be impossible for that ray, though infinitely extended, to complete its infinite motion in finite time. Though according to the view of our opponent an infinite has no

214

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

"iNua nn

. r r ^ a n "?ya ' n ^ a i n v n 1 ? n n i » s « r r n dm ^ y u n n 1 ? » .ipsaa

nan . i r ^ a n "?ya ' n ^ a p x ' j n n o - u n 1 ?^ n ' n a « o "?ya ' n b a n

^nn

inyuna

-nyi

n-npj d i p t

d^o'

n o u " W t o nr"?i ( m p - n i n '"i'roa a , v i n D m v n u n a n o nsp n n ,mio y w b .'sis'jn . n o

ntonn»

' n a i ,iv^an 'jya 'n^a íp «inn

r r r o i ipa rnipj d i p t

.yynrveo

ntPN D ' n s i o a i n a " n t p n o i s n n i ^ p a n r o

h i u .pix'an

-mam

.'tp^tpn ] v y n n n

T a i n

jvyn

T t u -iNa 1 ? - h d p D ' n s i D a

otw n i N ' ^ D y a o n

m

ni'pna

.^ysa rv^an ^ya ^ l P t o n

nsion n n

^ w d Kintp no 1 ? o yyurvtp no n a n

nn

-ib>bn n a a

. o ' o n p n D'nsinn naa on

. y * » « i1? w v a i a D a n y m n n

.ntpn

nsiom

.yxo«

. D ' B ' p o y i n o D'tfrno i1? v t p

ib

i'n

a"nxv

v t a dm 3"nxv

,nnspn .iDsya

. n o w » n o a ~i«ud D i n n , u notop n « r n n o n p n n no« 1 ? atynty n o "?aa j w

,nr ^ a »

n n « t f m y t a n "7« « ' a n n i ^ n n n a w m y i a n f ' b ^ i - *TD3iriTiDJ- p i " jijiun' neto7 ' y » iy:Dnn .i^'ysoi> ntsD1? nDii3

,!

'n^a

.?

.«p•>> u n t ò n o i u .•mjj®3)20

^ (neoi

> a"in' i s p n u a"rv - 2 iwb«7 yin Kin®i2 .» nam

pina 1 ?

.'»p-"nn«)i9

nD

.i myion o'» 1 ?

na 13-n

>ejj'aTn>-»

217

PROPOSITION II

principles," 6 the implication of this proposition has led him to conclude that there are not any other worlds." 7 For having first proved to his own satisfaction that outside the world there is neither a plenum nor a vacuum, [he argued therefrom that there cannot be many worlds], and he [further] argued that if there were many worlds the elements would move from one world to another," 8 to which arguments he added many other fanciful speculations and 'words that increase vanity.'"' But since the error of his initial premise is manifest, for it has already been shown before that an infinite magnitude must exist and that outside the world there must exist an infinite plenum or vacuum, it clearly follows that the existence of many worlds is possible. Nor can it be contended that the elements would move from one world to another, for it is quite possible that each element would move within the periphery of its own sphere towards its own suitable place.130 Thus everything said in negation of the possibility of many worlds is 'vanity and a striving after wind.'131 Inasmuch as the existence of many worlds is a possibility true and unimpeachable, yet as we are unable by means of mere speculation to ascertain the true nature of what is outside this world, our sages, peace be upon them, have seen fit to warn against searching and inquiring into 'what is above and what is below, what is before and what is behind.'132 With this we deem fit to close the fourth Speculation of the first chapter. PROPOSITION

II

PART I. PROOF OF the second proposition, which reads: 'The existence of an infinite number of magnitudes is impossible, that is, if they exist together'. 1 Having shown in the first proposition that magnitudes cannot be infinite in measure, he now shows in this second proposition that they cannot be infinite in number.

218

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

,naits>*nn n o n p n n

'riEnna

ya'

nonpnn

rmr m n n «

n ' n , - i r m H i a v ^ y i a s p i n - » c ^ t o i , n o m y ' t p 11? w n ' ^ n

^ y a

^ n a bsw

' r i b s o ' ^ m a *i'Di' - w t o i . b n a n n v o n y t f

. l y a o n - i t o n n ntt>N . n ' ^ n

'n^a

'atwi p t s n rrbon

d3»ni

, ' w n

i'« D'^nu niK'^ow m o w n

ny'tpn n'n'

nn

psipo ,-isdd3

b ^ n

rvatpn n o n p n s

m ' p n a

.-ipti> D 1 S D D 1 ?

,naii2>N-in n o - r p n n m o « N ' n n s r n n o n p n n - i i d ' p n m p n n noNnn

Vitoa

rn"?p3

-idik1?

n"7B>3

.rrVrm Vy3 ' n ^ i n «

-ifcon' .naitytnn

"73 - n s a m

D~rp

-isdo myaon aitm , " n s a

o n i air o n

nr j w

n1?«

i s d d

-wioi

. r m n

n'atpn n a « n n

n a m . n ' b s n "7y3 - i b d d ^ 3 p

n o n u N oa , 3 - i n n y i

"71133 i K n n n

tP't?

t s d

Kim

n«rn

.naitfton

"73 n D M t p a

dm . r v ^ n

bnna

"7y3i

V ^ s n o ' t p ' ^ t p n p n s 3 ub» .IDy D'O'SDO Kl'D

'itnis> n o i

.yoti>n - i s d 1 ? m N ' 3 3

nr3 -imyna n u n p N

, i b d d db>3 o m s D n m i 1 ? n x n , ^ 3 3 '"7y3

"?3N , m 3 n 3

rr^sn

03^)14

jcnp[mpi3

]Dr[iDDDi2

.i Y a

nn

^y3

noNnmo ,

nam

neDDntp «in n n

"73310 ^ s i

.D'^aio

idnup Dn

.»n'n[n'n'4 ,

pNI

.= D aDDlDJ!-»»D"3l=»=t« D]3l15

nan

«£>')2 .atV

219

P R O P O S I T I O N II

As for the truth of this proposition, it can be established by the arguments employed in the proof of the first proposition.

The

reasoning may be stated as follows: Every magnitude is of a certain size. Now, if to any given magnitude we add another magnitude, their combined size will be greater. Consequently, if an infinite number of magnitudes were added together, their total size would be infinite. But a magnitude of infinite size has already been shown to be impossible.2

PART II.

EXAMINATION OF the second proposition, which reads: 'The coexistence of an infinite number of magnitudes is impossible'. It is obvious that this proposition rests upon the proof of the first proposition. But inasmuch as the falsity of the first proposition has been demonstrated, this proposition, too, can be easily shown to be false. One may, however, argue that even if the first proposition cannot be conclusively established, the second may still be demonstrated independently on the ground of the impossibility of an infinite number. That number cannot be infinite may be shown by the following reasoning: Every number is either even or odd; even and odd are each limited and finite; hence every number must be finite.3 In answer to this we may refer to what has been shown above, in the third chapter of the first part, [Proposition III, Part I], namely, that this absolute negation of infinite number does not represent the view of the Master and that both Algazali and Avicenna are in agreement with him.4 The argument from odd and even has indeed been advanced by Averroes in his commentary on the Physics.s

But in refutation of

it, the following may be urged with telling effect: Actual number, i. e., things counted and numbered, is indeed limited, and every thing limited must needs be

finite.

But things which only

220

CRESCAS* C R I T I Q U E O F A R I S T O T L E

o m s D

oj'k

^>3«

nsD'tf

i« nr n ' n 1 » m m

i"7i , o n a

d h - i b j 1« n ^ j n

,!

•nsj

a s n a

y3»3 n , l ? 3 n

"1331

^ 3

n x n

'nban

,"IBDDn

f «

.tysn

1

? y 3 ' n ? ^ O ' s i r n o « ' » -itt>B« -i33tt> n n

"?«i a n "?« - I S D O 1 ? n p i ^ n n o

"?jn T i ^ n

i»!1?

n®«

ibdd3

"73«

«in

,"?a3ion

. T I B 3 1 31T3 " 1 « i n D T l V s

niosn no«ni»

rr'rsn

«in

^yan

,-ns3

«"7«

-ibdd3

,"?331D 13'»® U ü b

Kin

.IT^Sn

. - o w n p i B 3 n r 3 131-pyn

^ D ' ^ y i

rnby

n ' n ' ® , n r bwa

p

n

p i s n

ni«'*»» ,!

,"7113

V ? d t \

,jitwnn

mDi«n

n'tt^Bn

nonpnn

~n«33

7 y 3 v n ' «V d « i ,~ipp d i b d d " ? i v ^ a n

i'«

' n " 7 3 "7« p i r w b v '3t2>n n 3 D i ,'3® "73® 1 0 3 D b w n - p n ^ a w n n ? . " 7 1 D 3 n " l « 1 3 D 1 3 Q3 HT . X l ^ S n *7y3 ' n V 3 n i « ' * » my3on

niy3on

-i«3 .D'^-mn

mtpn

,3XD3

rtmpru

-TTD o n 1 ?

-i«3® i n «

n®«

nsn

o n m a

n ^ a n

n ^ y n ' 3 ^ ^ l V y i n i 7 y 3 , y 3 £ n - h d Dn"? n ® « D n 3 n 3

idin'sd

l

- i " ! ^ 1 «"7 n - n y n

T'ix'

d«i .Vi^yn

nsd'

n«xon3

-itt>«

.Vi^yn ^ y n t f

nn

.y303 n ' b o n ' n ^ s 1 ? h ^ y i n"?y n i W ^ n i p n

y-irn

"7«

i n x

• m £ U ) 3—4 [vim

«im

ri3'n33

. ' » o t o - « ( r v ^ o n ' b y n tiVs) - > > rmir,»' ?1^»n'Jir

k u r o r t [un'Sffii

!TTJD20

n w x n n

1

> TIE: 1 » - h b j I

l

Vl^y ? [ ?l 7j;i19

-110:2 IN 7

1DJ» n t O » 1 4

«'n

mK'XD nr^i

h p s «

«in

- » v n ' ® [no«'® 3 .' m ' ^ o n ' t y a ' n ^ a

.13110 ' » ' ^ 1 2

.»Vil

P R O P O S I T I O N III

221

possess number, that is to say, which have the capacity of being numbered but are not actually numbered, 6 even though assumed to have the distinction of even and odd, are not excluded from the possibility of being infinite, for infinity may be predicated of even numbers or of odd numbers. 7 The real truth of the matter, however, is that the division of number into even and odd applies only to a finite and hence limited number; but infinite number, inasmuch as it is unlimited, does not admit of the description of even and odd. 8 We have already discussed this distinction in the aforementioned chapter.

PROPOSITION

III

PART I.

PROOF OF the third proposition, which reads: 'The existence of an infinite number of causes and effects is impossible, even if they are not magnitudes.

T o assume, for instance, that the cause of a

given Intelligence be a second Intelligence, and the cause of the second a third, and so on to infinity,can be likewise demonstrated to be impossible'. 1 Having shown in the second proposition the impossibility of an infinite [number] with reference to objects which have order in position, namely, magnitudes, he now shows that it is likewise impossible with reference to objects which have order in nature, namely, causes and effects, 2 for by a cause is meant that the existence of which implies the existence of an effect and should the cause be conceived not to exist the effect could not be conceived to exist. 3 It is because of this relation between cause and effect that an infinite series of causes and effects is impossible.

The argument

may be stated as follows: An effect by its own nature has only possible existence, requiring therefore a determinant to bring about

222

CRESCAS* C R I T I Q U E OF ARISTOTLE

nr*?i . l n ^ y « i n « i n n y n a o n i m

, m y n by l m « 1 * » y n j '

o n v n n a b b ^ d 1 ? » ' «"? n ^ s n v i ^ s 1 ? o ' ^ y i rn"?y m ^ t ^ n o n n t p s « a n nan . a ' b b y

o ^ j v n o«i

"?y a m « ' * » y - D ' y n s o vn

«V d « i

.man:»

.«"7 d k a ^ i ^ y

vntp 'a 1 ?! . n i K ' x n n

•?« a o n s

nVi^y

o"?o

an 1 ? nan

' n ^ n nby

,o-nyn

D ' ^ s n « i n i t ? « . n ' j i V y ' n ^ n n ' j y o n o i n « nan 3 t a n npty nr . r v ^ D n 11? ¡ r n «"?» n a m n a a i

D ^ y .m^tyVncnn

.dibdd1? r v ^ s n r « a ^ y i m ^ y u r v r a 3"nnn nin -ippni «*?« r r b o n

"?ya

niVya

.yacaa

.yncan

«Vi 32iD3 - n D

.n^nn



'n^a

"?ya T i b o

niyjDn a " n

.o'^-nin

nn1? ] ' «

o m « ^ »

m y j o n n n«-p -rtn p «

.axoa

y w

d"?i«i

«*?&> , - m y r u t p - r d

-w«

onm"?

n n m a

.D'^i^yi

.nonu«i «ro p «



a ^ a c a

n y n «in

nn

, - n o on1? i ' « » o n m a

dj

- i i b d "731 ^ y s a " i i b d « i n " ? y s a i b d d bsv r v b o n byz

on1?

«"? n a n . n i t p s n

"?ya « i n " ? y s a -iBDantp - i d « « i n o

- p x i

nn

. n u n a

rr^an

« i n t i d j 1 « air « i n » n o i , - t i b j q « i n r • « « i n " ? y s n .nnana

. r r n o « « ' n - i b d d 1 ? n « r n n p i ^ n n t p , « i n n r a 13*7 n « T B > mrn

in«

>ya

Ti^an

«in®6

.rrVan

"?ya ' n ' r a n

] ' « nr"?i . n - n e m

.»I'n'-o'-»•»•nH3B4 3

> urvjnD - « m n " n n n , 3"nnD Kin - r D'aiHS-"1?» NJ'D p » WD '113 »imenmao

iBDan nvmra

noi

,n3DD t a ^ o n -i«uv

«•? ,"?a:n»

r « 'n^a

m^y 1 « i n a o n i n - « • " r v - o n n - « i n a ' 1 • " n n ' ,P -> a " n n o .'O'-m^ll

. ' » " • " i ' i m i s >» n e n ' ]

3"nn38

.»i fl'IT

.> ' r t m 7 3"riIV [3"n9

IDNP UKI ' -innrraNi

PROPOSITION III

223

the preponderance of existence over non-existence, which determinant constitutes its cause. Now, it must inevitably follow that in the aggregate of an infinite series of causes and effects either all the members of the series would be effects or some of them would not be effects. If they were all effects, they would all have possible existence. They would require some determinant to bring about the preponderance of existence over non-existence, and so they would necessarily presuppose the existence of a causeless cause [outside the series]. And if they were not all effects, one of them at least would then be a causeless cause, which one would thus mark the end of the series. But the series is assumed to be endless. Hence an impossible contradiction. And this contradiction ensues because we have assumed the existence of an infinite number of causes and effects.4 We must observe, however, that the possibility of infinite number is denied by the author only with reference to objects which have order either in position, as magnitudes, or in nature, as causes and effects; he does not deny its possibility with reference to objects which have no order either in position or in nature, as, for instance, intellects or souls.5 This is in accordance with the view of Avicenna and Algazali.6 Averroes, however, finds it to be impossible even with reference to objects which have no order whatsoever,7 for he maintains that actual number must necessarily be finite. He reasons as follows: Every actual number is something actually numbered, and that which is actually numbered must be either even or odd, and that which is even or odd must necessarily be finite.8 For our own part, we will say this with regard to Averroes' argument: While indeed the division of number into odd and even is true and unavoidable, still infinite number, not being limited, is not to be described by either evenness or oddness.' And so an infinite number is not impossible in the case of intellects and souls. It is for this reason that in his propositions about the im-

224

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

'n^an nsDon niywna ,yacan m pi

a n n pnp-itt> n a nr"?i

.D'^-mn .aicoa - n o

w b w b

'wb

n'ry

.ia yjoa n,l?an

o n 1 ? t»'» D n a n a in«n

n'n'ca

n,!?an

. o ' ^ y i

ni"?ya

.n^an

w ^ p n

p i s n

, ^ ¡ 1

D ' h ' j y i ni^>y n i N ' x o t p m » w n

"?ya

'n^a1?

^ s n

n'tî>,l7tj>n n m p n a

nTpna

.npti> DnDDD 1 ? n , ( 7 a n ] ' « vVy

u i - p y n ity« ,nra

nBDD

'rown

~iD«Da

vnan1?« nomi

T I D -ib>K n s m n t p

,ptt>N-in

bbino

-ioini

'tt^œn

pisa

a " r r h 1 ? Ninty n n . a m n y n ' s 1 ? p ' b d o ' n ^ a ,nn«t¡> n o a i y o p n -no

o n 1 ? b>'b> o n a n 1 ?

n"?y

n'rrtp i n «

xtin'xo niyaon

boaa

k1?« n ' ^ o n -ipbk

nt"?i . y a c s a

axoa

n m m

n n « n'py'? i o s « n ' n d n , n n N n"?yD n ^ a n ' V y a ' n V a

o'^i^y

nvni?

ni1?'*«

a"n'

p

i'tw

in«i

n^an

myion

o^aty

niyaon

.iSDoa

in

nBDD

?ya 'n^a

cr^y"?

l'N ^ a a i

"7ya ' n ^ a

,!

.-m« ^ y o

m v

QH n i n . o ^ a 1 ? n " ? y d h 1 ? d m , n , ! 7 a n ^ y a

'n'ra

nr^i .D'biby^? n ' ^ a n " j y a ' n ^ a n m y j o n u b b d b n ^ y n n i R ' ^ o rwbwb 'wm

n"?y n n « n n ' n ^ a . o ' ^ y i m " ? y m u n t m a

a " n ' i 1 « , n n « n V y i 1 ? « ^a"? n ' a t t o , y i « i j n ' ' » . a b n y 1 ? nn

cs^)-«' 1 1

.D^i^yi m^y^ n ^ a n

v a e m n i C i f ,» "inurusio

.» ni^y IN [m'i'x« 15 .«'* rrrr - m w a

.» a " v r - ® »

^ya 'n^an n i y w n

-incas

nniN'XD

.'«- t'pya] 'nW?4

(«in»)-»pn 1 ?

- t r a m a nnt»n rvn'ïois

pi

-op"*

di7i733,i11 (o'îW?)™

.» myjDnn n w x D [myicn nniN'XDîo

PROPOSITION III

225

possibility of infinite number the Master has specifically confined himself to objects that have order either in position, as magnitudes, or in nature, as causes and effects, when these are so arranged that the first is the cause of the second, the second of the third, and so on to infinity. PART I I .

the third proposition, which reads: 'The existence of an infinite number of causes and effects is impossible.' EXAMINATION OF

I say that the argument framed here by Altabrizi, which has been discussed by us in the third chapter of the first part, and of which there is a suggestion in the eighth book of thePhysics 10 and in the Metaphysicsis not altogether sufficient, considering the particular view espoused by the Master. For the Master, as has been shown, does not preclude the possibility of an infinite number except in the case of things which have order and gradation either in position or in nature. According to this, it will be possible for one Intelligence to be the cause of an infinite number of other Intelligences. On general principles, it must be admitted that the emanation of an infinite number of effects from one single cause would not be impossible, if it were only possible for a single cause to be the source of emanation of more than one effect." And so, inasmuch as it is evident that there can be an infinite number of effects, despite their all being dependent upon a common cause, it must follow that the assumption of a common cause for more than one effect would not make it impossible for those effects to be infinite in number. This being the case, assuming now a series of causes and effects wherein the first is the cause of the second and the second of the third and so on for ever, would that I knew why, by the mere assumption of a common cause for the series as a whole, the number of causes and effects within that series could not be infinite? That their infinity is impossible on

226

CRESCAS* C R I T I Q U E O F A R I S T O T L E

o ' ^ y

l a n m n a « i n c . d ^ s 1 ? naitPN-i n*?y n v n n x o n t

- i K i a o Mini . o b s b naia>M-i n " ? y a m i ) - i a a r r b o n "?ya ' n ^ a y a o n mm

nnM

7ya

'n^a

' ^ y a ' n ^ a o n v n y a o ' m"?b>

. y a o a im a s o a n o

Dn"7 i w

n"?y n n M "73 r r ^ a n ^ y a y-D' im1? o o n s

,(

a"in'

Dnana

nsDoa

'n^an ann o ^ i ^ y n p

iaMti>

rr^an

m

maaao

d i p n r o m p < m1? n a n 1 ?

1 3 3 ianaMi » n i M ' x o n n t P S M o"?atp i n » . D ' V i ^ y n o nn^ir"? n , ! ? a n n a ^ n r r

, a - n y n Vy

oniM'xo

- w m naitPM-in n ^ y a

m u

.aniK'XD ny-iaon M'm nr ,-ioMtt>a D N r n n o n p n n n o « 1 ? D ' e n s o n n x p - i n n nan sjiD 1 * 7 j w n o n o ' - r p a

nasi

dm o x y a y r m ^ p n o ' a naitp1?

, r r a o r n o n p n n r r n dm n a m . | « a n y . k x o ' b » - i p s m 'mi , y r ianaMi n o 1 ? , n p i " 7 n o n "?apn n a a dmi , n « r n nayta 1 ? D i p o

mn

, y a ' nan i"7 ^ i d t m p n o n o n p n a «"7 dm y \ r m"?b> not? n « n a m"? dmi , y a n l a ianaMi n r n o v n t f , b m - p i ^ y , n o « n .D^iyn monpa -ipm m y a o n a i

dhdik^ mpoatp

i^ms

.i 1 ? p;id i ' m p n o n o ' - t p a m^m nntt>BMa

n-nae>i , n n p o a

yan

nrtc m^m

- » a V i d ? [dVd1? - > 1 * r u i » * n n - n n ! ' » » n^yn - 1 « 3 p 1 1 1 * (nt) - * 3"nrv . ^ » » r n ' i .i'nni3Dn9 -• , l TIJni2

nna' -•>' (oip>6 . ' n a n n«aiV»]lD11

"tm [ ^ a - » mnn>5

rnwmn

.Pl-|DMi'3-» J ii^D , ®"IDDnD-i= I innniO

. » n o n p m ° rumps [nonpa 16

=r ' * eta h

.1 n'nn tnrvn

PROPOSITION I I I

227

the ground of the dependence of the entire series upon a first cause is without any justification, for assuming, as we did before, the existence of an infinite number of effects, [which are not interrelated among themselves as cause and effect], we likewise posit a first common cause for all the effects, and yet, we have shown, that those effects can be infinite, inasmuch as an infinite number is not impossible in the case of things which have no order in position or nature.

B y the same token, no impossibility will

happen if we assume those infinite effects to be each successively the cause of the other. T o be sure, it will be necessary for us [to posit at the beginning of the series] something [uncaused] to bring about the preponderance of the existence over the nonexistence [of the causes and effects within the series], since [by themselves] they all have only contingent existence. But still, we have already admitted the possibility of a first common cause which would not necessitate that the effects proceeding from it should be finite, even though it would bring about the existence of those effects. 13 A certain one14 of the commentators has attempted to prove this proposition by an argument which we quote verbatim: 'That which cannot be realized15 by itself, unless it be preceded by something infinite, will never be realized and cannot come into existence.' 16 Now, 17 if the 'precedence' [implied in Maimonides' proposition] were of a temporal nature, there might be some room for this reasoning, 18 though, I must say, even in temporal precedence the argument is not wholly immune from criticism.

For we see that

that which cannot arrive except by the precedence of what is infinite does actually arrive:

thus, for instance, the present day

in which we are is here, even though its arrival, according to the view of those who believe in the eternity of the universe, had to be preceded by something infinite. Indeed, it may be rejoined that in that case the precedence was only accidental." But still,

228

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTI.E

-WN n o ' i p a

nrn

o

,]»n

nn«

nm

pi^na

m i » D

"73«

.nnoNn

ant? -in« ,n3D3 - w k n a n p n

mman n n w

myaon 3"n

-p-is

1*7 m p a

osys



, p a

,-rrm i o n i n ' a n s - i n t ?

i n « .o'Vi^y d^d a n v n n n m s w

i n «

nnttV n*?y

.nm rrVsn 'Vys viVs Nin

,mna

'Vys

i o n s

'nVa

i3níí> n » i

D^iVyn

vn

,nmpnn

. n ^ y

.n'bon ^ y n

,nnsn

nxo*

'lj'pntp

,nitfitynn

i m n

m*a

Nim

moiNn

,-pMn

'irrcn nr

m w i n

,]nptnn

-iD«D3i , - i D s n m m i n n

nsd'i

viba

insane*

«"7«

n*?y

niN'xn

i n n n n V nb>y n n «

p i s n n y m x n

nxro

nanpnn

Kim ,D^yn

id«D3i

n ^ s n

^ s n

rryrnn

,pnynn

-10N03

,ynDnm

nyun

-iiN32 ,nn0K0

nrrnxn

Nim . m a n .cnsfr

'írrcn np^'tto , j m n ^ i n ,nosy3

r n « u o 3

oxys

' w m

torn , p n

anvn

uddi p n .nonpnn

«in m«3i

u d o 'irtflntp no1? n«t

nDKnn

-p**31 n » 3 3

«im

-iDNnn nyunn mn

.rrbBQ

'»no

new 'iri»n

.nosnm minn i b d 3 ntanntp ids ,pr n V m ,nnDRB n y 3 i « n 3 p 11 ^ d a » n D [3"n ' a 3 . « • " c r t y ) 19

.» ™«m

'3 «in

i"?k n n " n » 1 ? , v b y - n i y n i t p - p n x t p n o i .> t ca) - ' » " ^ » n 1 ? pV 2 r«wi7

npV'sois

.» nonpnn n n [ n o n p a nrn 1 .•> rn'® in [Vn7

.-> 3'ino

P R O P O S I T I O N IV

229

to admit that something is possible when accidental and to deny its possibility when essential, needs to be demonstrated."Granted, however, that the distinction between accidental and essential holds true in the case of things which precede one another in time, it has no place in the case of things which precede one another only as causes, but co-exist in time. Admitting, therefore, as we must, that things which co-exist in time can be infinite in number, by what show of reason can we confine that possibility only to things that are all equally the effects of one cause and deny that possibility of the same effects when they are arranged among themselves as the effects of each other? But what this proposition really means to bring out, and what conclusion thereof is actually needful for our purpose, is the fact that there must exist a first cause, which is uncaused by anything else, regardless of the view whether its effects, when they are one the cause of the other, are infinite or finite." PROPOSITION IV P R O O F of the fourth proposition which reads: 'Change exists in four categories: in the category of substance, which is generation and corruption; in the category of quantity, which is growth and diminution; in the category of quality, which is alteration; and in the category of place, which is the movement of translation. It is this change in place that is called motion proper'. 1 Inasmuch as some kinds of change are in time while others are in no-time, by taking the term change in an unrestricted, absolute' sense, the proposition will have been proved to be true. [That the term change is to be here so understood] is quite self-evident, for change in the categories of quantity, quality, and place is in time, whereas that in the category of substance is in no-time, J as has been shown in the book De Generatione et Corruptione The following argument, however, may be urged against the author. Why did he enumerate only these four categories, when as

230

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

,-io»n 'nc

,nnoNon

'ir»

,-i«n

bobv

bu

- i n b d n x o ' - 1 3 3 'U'tpntp - i k u o

no1?» n1?« .^yerren

~i«na m n w o n

d « i ,]dt n b n n nrraai

'ir®

pnyn

rom

.nnoNon

,n»ai nia'tai mo33

nrn ] v y a miD

rom

Kim

^ye'Gn .twin

"inbq

nxo ron

,-ioNn

'B 1 ?

nra n u

-pm

.'iron noin u

norotp

.nnD«D no

pan

nya-mn mm

-iono3



nron

.nirrn nrnaai

,'irtfn i n n n®« n o N o a

i V í u n e w nyun1? q p o j a x y 3 -ipn 'irtpn m m -p-r

axon

i1?« m n

.nn«»

ron

.nron nn"

nan

Nim

-rso nron

nrnsn

,nnoNon

nsD3

ibd-in

.nroinp no ,pnynn in« ,p nvn1? '3

ron»

' w e n i n " no1? .nsa 1 ?

d j m t a 'U'tpn ,-id«i

ron

nynnnp

noss

nrD unan 1 ?« n i y n a

-inípw nn« , m B 3

nVn nyun1?

.no pnyn

naai

u p

'3 .nn'Dxi? nrn« nm «"71 ,nyunn ib» nm,emtio m«a pnynn pnyn

u

,nn'02£3 n r o v » no

.»mo

im'n

n3 pnynn

«"7 nrh ,vnt3p "733 «in noixs nmosntp yi-rtp nob» . m t u nm nrbi .m«

n w o pnyn 13 norovp v1?« non p"?n -iropj .n3«3 pnynn

[«im-«3 neo [HD39 .* pnynn [pnyn 13

.1 n'n'i ^p^ N'm [n'rru .>a Minn pnyn [pnynn 14 ,»pnyni8

."vioip

P R O P O S I T I O N IV

231

a matter of common knowledge change exists as well in the other categories5, as e. g., position6, action and passion?7 [The solution of this difficulty may be given as follows]: Every change has two aspects 8 . First, it may be regarded with respect to the substratum, in which case change means the transition of that which underlies the change from one accident to another®. In this respect, change exists in the other categories10, and is in no-time. Second, change may also be regarded with respect to the matter of the change, that matter being, e. g., quantity, quality, and place". In this respect it exists in that category in which the matter of the change is to be found". It is change in this latter respect that the author has in mind in this proposition 13 . But inasmuch as change in the category of substance is consequent upon the motion existing in those [three] categories14, the author has enumerated those four categories. In this he has followed the path trod by Aristotle in the Metaphysics.IS This would seem to be the right 16 solution of the difficulty. There still remains for us to explain why he has restricted the use of the term motion proper to change in the category of place, that is, to translation, when, as a matter of fact, motion in the category of quantity is likewise a change in place, inasmuch as it always entails some act of translation. 17 This question has already been raised by Altabrizi, 18 in answer to which he says that the term motion proper is applied by the author to locomotion because the act of translation therein is perceptible; but he does not apply it to growth because the act of translation therein is not perceptible. It would seem, however, that in growth there is no translation in place at all, for plants, as is well known, grow in all directions, and consequently there is no definite part therein of which translation from one place to another can be truly affirmed." It is for this reason that the Master has restricted the use of the term motion proper to translation in place.

232

CRESCAS* C R I T I Q U E OF ARISTOTLE 'Bronn p n s n

n K ' X ' i 'U'tp n y u n

bsv

,]i»&nn

nnoi«n

^ a n

n^'onn

no-tpnn

n w a a

. ^ y s n "?« n s n p «*? "?3K ,Q"TpB> n o ' S 1 ? 1 « 1 3 0 K i n '13'® nj?13D "?3tP 1 1 0 « H3H rrn'P

13DD ' U ' t p n t p n o 1 ? , n y i 3 n

it£>N , n « n ^

.nr

-|snn'

n « n o « p u n p n y m n D s n m n ' i n n i d s ,]»r n ^ i r a

-isp« 130D 'i3B>n " 7 3 « ,my-n

"?3 | ' « t p n n

.ns1? n y u n n

.^ysiran

^ys'tp

db> p n : r u

-i0«03

D33' n s n

nro

n e w 'U'tpn n o n D 3 ' n n a

ton

.•'SDVsnon ]iono pi^nn n n

w a i n

«V

'3

no 1 ? 1 ^ 0 3 « i n ,"?ysn "?« n o n ]» n « ^ ' «int? n o « ci3o«i n3m . n 3 3 «inte no n x o n33ti> no nio^tp «'na» n y u n n m3t2> noi uootp n o ]'3 nyunntp no 1 ?

«intp v V y p n r

. v ^ p n o 3 n'n'tioi ,n3 « m i -1103 n a n n ' n ,13002» n o 3 n ' n a o i m o W « m n3n ,|'3B> n o s «intP3i ,n3 « i m 1103 m o W i 1 ? n ' n nr"7i ."1103 nio^tp i 1 ? i ' « nr^i r n 3 3 v ' n y «mtt> - r s o ^ 3 « ,no ."?ysn "?« n a n p n«'2£' nyunnt? n o « n n n"?i3D02> n o * 7 , n y i 3 n " ? ' n o « 133'« n r n - n s n t ? n « T 1 3 3 o " 7 i « i 'sVi

,nsion

-ie>d3 n « 3 n n B >

,nyi3n n ' n ' » p

» -WK UDB .i - p e s ' = p n r ® i

103

,-i"T33n "?y

d« 3 " n n ' ,ny3n3 p

-jsnnnn

as p n x ' 1 3 3 n r n

- m n -nan»

Aato •"> ntw ojdd ' B T I Van » « p n * -1»« CUOD) w n p

N'nisoi [n'msom »0^) - 1 'i n:n [ ¡ r n n

n

x

'

n

w

.Mnyunn] v 1 ?«®^

»

s

"73x7

i f « warn 'u®rt 6 3 « )

.>=pt' mm [«in 10

[ n y m n j v ^ t w - ^ (ra wmi -

.«»p^nn [ p i ^ r m

"> N'n [n'n -

13

p* n ' n ' i o i

.3 ID 03(13 DM->a h d ' s b ' n o a n ~ n i n r v n

niD1?» n o » m m HD3 h d k i

' n ^ nt^i

. y y u n » « m » n o a y y u n o n m o ^ i f Nim , r a r

. n o n i o 1 ? » ! b ' y s i 1 ? w v "72N , n D 3 r o n î a w . - n o a n i o b w i V y s i1?

ni'tf n y u n

m v

.rvnoK n o i p n n

m v

y y u n o Nintp

, - n i n rrrrty

l'Ni

. • ? y s n "7« n s n

w n .moxya

on»

,moxya

ipn

idk'p

niyunn» o^in

103 , m p o n oVini

it»«

p-isn

,mpD

,|nwnn

rnoi«n

^ s n

n w n

noipnn

.p^rta onoi . r r o m

oipoo

pnyinîf

d"7ini nr V y n n n 3 ' n ' - i 3 » 3 n ^ y n n

-ïin33

onoi . m p o a

ntsw d V i n i ^ i p o 1 ? mpDO

p

db>;q

Qtyn Nina»

p a n nyura

anoi pnyro

nnnBQ . r r o m

» n r s D n n y y u n n - i í p í o ' 3 . n r s D a - i d d d h n y u n a , p ^ r a -ib>n îVboa

yyurv

-aino

"731 , p

ai iDDon y y u n n

133»

m*«

. y y u n n -133 ip^nty -ion1 a«

nn

.nu'na

n1?

nyunntp

n«rn

nonpna

pison

p n y n 3 ,ivii2nn nr3 Disn . r r r r o n in n r r n rryata l'Kty - i 3 - i " ? n y u n n o r ™ , n n p D

3

niai n a a u r w w s

[yjîunDn] maV®

o n a - 1 » ' n n o - 1 " 3 onon

.» nyyuruifo - » n ® t o ) - » nj'soa p » « ] h m - * îp^n

.rrninxy

i s î a i p D ^ s D i p a D O f j n

- » i-iDKi - » (ram) - » 1 wn [Nine> - 1 3 p m a i * u-dm -'n^yau

mn

1

10003 -

1

- ' ip^nn 17

(nyuro) 15

w n [Kin»6 ."> m n n y

»n-i3inon-»'?3piis

P R O P O S I T I O N VI

235

require a motive agent for its motion. But that second motivity will likewise be motion, and this will have to go on to infinity. 10 It seems to us, therefore, that the true definition of motion is the other definition mentioned by Aristotle, namely, that it is the actuality of that which is movable in so far as it is movable." His use of the term 'actuality' is meant to indicate that motion is not complete potentiality, but that it has some degree of energeia and entelecheia." His use of the qualification 'in so far as it is movable' is likewise meant to indicate that it has not a complete energeia and entelecheia. But, however the definition may be phrased, the proposition remains true, namely, that 'every motion is a change and transition from potentiality to actuality.'

PROPOSITION VI of the sixth proposition which reads: 'Of motions some are according to essence, some are according to accident, some are according to violence, and some are according to part 1 . Motion is according to essence, as when a body is translated from one place to another. It is according to accident, when, e. g., blackness which exists in a body is said to be translated from one place to another. It is according to violence, as, e. g., the motion of a stone upward brought about by a certain force applied to it in that direction. It is according to part, as, e. g., the motion of a nail in a boat, for when the boat is moved we say that the nail is likewise moved; and similarly, when something composed of several parts is moved as a whole, every part of it is likewise said to be moved.' 2 PROOF

The purpose of this proposition is to show that motion is classifiable.3 First, essential, 'as when a body is translated from one place to another' 4 , which may be either natural or violent, and voluntary motion, too, is to be included in this class. Second,

236

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

y y u n ' t p 1133 , m p D 3

yyurvt?

îosyo yyurrip

istid

nrrn rrrnDxy .rrn-on ont ;otwn n y u n n o t m -ipn nnntpn n ' m s n .p^na -ib>n D K i ; n ^ y D V i 3 N n n y n n 3 , n n p o in nnpontf, p ^ m -ib>ni n n p o n ]'3 nttw tinsnm .rrynto ik nirn new,yyiannp o t t d paty nsn 1 ? m p o a i e w n y u n n Drrïzo n t i .yyurrtp d i i d i j - m 1 ? p V n a nt?« n y u n n orra» « m p"?n3 -ik>n nyiann "?ti>D3 n o «

bzx

,v"?y - m y n n 1 ? - p x t p n o

. a i p o 1 ? o i p o » d p an p n y n s

.mo^yn

m p » n t d ' n 1 ?^ nob .mpo 1 ? oip»o ^ a n otpa p n y

^an

nyiaratp 'e^i

iV^d"? n'osy n y u n n n'nn «V nan ,vpVn î p n y d3oni , 1 ^ 3 3 o n K'n b&b

nyunn o

.ntn'tp n o

n n .vp^n1? d n

o

n n .la1? ntrvtp n o V rrystî d n i i d d - i n n y n ' s V rvpitwi m i a n D'Dtî'jn v m ^ V s a

rrysta nyunntp

u r m ? nobw

a'yyuno m b p i - a u '^y3 d ' h i d ' h ^sVan n n n -îtm D'tawsn ,m^pi n3i33 -iNino i m w

^ b a n aœa n3n . m c

nyun

^ a 1 ? n ' n n D n nyiann nrrn nrèn . n ^ u o n îb» n'ynun n y u n n ,iV?33 m p o

m p » o "pa^an p n y

rrn o n t ,n"niDsy

.3in n 3 i a n»Ttf n n sp'rrn »3

.N^YON

,NV3BN

NVYATO

1

L A N , P « N N I M , O N » - M « ? . N Y A N A N NRND'NTP ,NR 'JBD ÍOSTTN / S M

M^PI

ÑAU

D'O^I T I K ^ I

-ID!« 1 ? vrw NN . - M A N ' D'B^NNA

I M

,NBYOB

N S N -PN I M

NO1? ,N"?YBN .D'DN

- I N 3 N N K1? NTO'TP NO >SB NRN NY-RM

DNTF KVK , N A N 3 I 3

NSO1?

TI«N

RNVP TMVI , TAENIA

MN

NMD'NA

INX

RIYNN NRRN D J D « I

BJBW

N O W

.NM

RIINS3

P « 1 ? M P ' ITFTO . N ^ Y A 1 ? W I N N M ' -IB>N

YYURVTP 'N » P A IN - [ M O M S I Y

-MAN

N I P ' NR NIANAI

,-I'INN N T S N A -RV , Y - I N 3

IRIS

IN 3NR

N

.INN"R M S N A N NAIATP

N NTPTOTF NO 1 ? ,NR N « T

I33I

YAAN1? UAA NRW IIYTS'TP LYICS^ -IÍPBK» N'N DNI .WON RINVANN O^INI NID'N 1 3 1 3 1 ? NR N ' N ' » YAAJ U R « "73« . ^ J N

-PN M P - I N

, N N A A D N B D D'JB *?3 "?Y NAN , N B Y O B P A N NYUN N'NNTP - P N

.bmZL HOD1? INDA ^«7

NODN

-1« A P IN U S EINRN [WK^I 9 NVN [NN'N-O -INI'112 - 1 TETAN [N:NI9

.MAP

[«IN]6

. > *=P NVYON

N3TP 1D3

. ' " P 1 1 " 1 " M A M [NINIS

[NVJ? ob -

•>

- 1 ' ' p V'-IAO - ' « 3 P 1 O NOI» [N«DD - =

[^Y-I KIN

239

PROPOSITION VI

Again, in his illustration of accidental motion, he uses the phrase 'blackness which exists in a body.'

This would seem to

imply that there can be no accidental motion except of something residing in some magnitude and capable of being translated from one magnitude to another." But as a matter of fact accidental motion may apply to the point at the extremity of a body, even though it does not exist in a body but at the extremity thereof. 13 As for his illustration of violent motion, which he finds in 'the motion of a stone upward,' he follows the well-known theory of the Greek, 14 namely, that the elements are endowed with natural motion in opposite directions, as, e. g., the motion of a stone downward and the motion of fire upward, whence it is inferred that of the four elements, one, i. e., earth, has absolute weight, fire has absolute lightness, while air and water have only relative weight and lightness. IS But this theory seems never to have been demonstrated and never will be. On the contrary, one may argue, that all the elements possess a certain amount of weight, but some possess more of it and some less.16 T h a t fire tends upwards may be due to the pressure of the air which pushes it upwards," as happens in the case of a stone which, upon being dropped into a crucible in which there is molten gold or lead or mercury, comes up to the top, because of the pressure of the metals which push it upward. The same may also be said to happen in the case of the elements air and water. That [air possesses some weight] is moreover supported by observation. For when we make a digging in the ground, the air immediately descends into the hollow and fills it up. 18

Though the opponent might claim that this last

phenomenon is due to the fact that a vacuum is impossible within the world, still it is not impossible that the descent of the air into the hollow is due to the weight which that element possesses.1»

But, whatever may be the explanation [of natural

motion], it is clear that the upward motion of a stone is due, as has been shown in the illustration, to some external force.

240

C R E S C A S ' C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E .pnsn n n m y n n n n

» y a w n

p i s n

n r ^ i . p a r i n o n a n t p o bow tò

p ^ n i r «Vc

,]itwnn

^ s n

maian .rvyaen

HD " ? 3 i . m a n a

bow

Vilano •yyiw

nnttn

K1? p " ? n n ' ì ò p

own nmpnn

.parino yyuno no

bow

rvy'mn

on

y y u r i D bow

.psyo n n « u o

.pbnm

.mana

am

]n i r w o n m i r y m n

(

3"niv . r w n

.nnp'Dnn dki

.rvymn

d3dni

n o n p n n N'm

.-ino n u n s n a n n ' i b d - i n p 'sb

,onnson

na

m a n » ,p"?nnD

« i m ,yyi3n'

.pmnon

p^nrr

noon inrm

itaanns ,n3it2win

D"?i«

n3 « i n i3ddb> n n a w r n a ' 3 n n . v ^ n í p n D a i n s p m -itfDK ' t o , n 3 n í f n -i\oo n3 « i n v V n p n o a t o n t t o i , i " i y

.»qroio

.i*3pT» no' n n ' - » - " d:dk [o^ikis

awn

nmtPN-in 03dni

n o n i n s p n n'n'B> 3 " i n D n s n t y o n t ? n o 1 ? ,yoti>no ' » » a

.^"HonriD'«ierran

Kin

nwonn

n « a n n -ib>*ob> n n . m t p n D i n i D n " | s n a

x1?» now ,-iniDn i i s n o •h3d m a n o

nm

m e n

. • t p j i r « p ^ n r r « V t f n o bow . r r y m n

bo

db>j r r r r « V i , y y i 3 n '

.nionpn eon n ^ D

nnfVtpn

nmpnn

Kim . p ^ n n o y y u n o

am

.bbo n a n t f ö bow

' a n

nsion uddp nantwj

.•>'>ntnpnDa»n '31 D "?A ^BNA n a n t p o n 'a

,"|'K3 nantpon ® T D » n o a

•» ran [n'n - "

» o1?) 1

.> *=• nnbv - -> * (NIK'SD) - > A DVODHDÍI I DI-PBDNDJI » NVODDKN 9 '1

p [ p M - 1 ^ TflUN ' IXtOUN H33UN11

.in«ai" ita-'»>p^i»Dni6

.»'i i « « » p i p « i s

.«I' mrwon» - -> * "ECJU«' -IXÉOUK »NAISUK PAAN« IS

.» (l^N) .»» j's^n mm

PROPOSITION VII

243

pletely changed, and as the whole thing cannot be at once both in the terminus a quo and in the terminus ad quern, it follows that it must be partly in the one and partly in the other. Whatsoever is thus conceived must necessarily be divisible. Inasmuch as this demonstration assumes only things that change in time but cannot be applied to things that change without time, as, e. g., the terminations of the processes of change and motion, the demonstration will thus be only of particular application.7 Compelled by this difficulty, Alexander was led to believe that everything that is changed is changed in time; and that if anything appears to be changed in no-time it is only an illusion; in reality it is in time, but the time is imperceptible on account of its brevitiy.8 This view of Alexander, however, is erroneous and self-evidently false.» Themistius, on the other hand, admits the existence of timeless change, but, inasmuch as change in no-time is always consequent upon change in time, he finds the demonstration to be of general application." A different interpretation is given by Avempace. While admitting the existence of timeless change, as, e. g., the change from non-being to being, which occurs instantaneously when form settles on matter," he takes the term 'changeable' [in the proposition] to refer only to change in the category of quality, as, e. g., the refrigeration of a hot object or the calefaction of a cold object, which changes must always take place in time." Averroes makes a still nicer distinction. The final points of the various changes, he says, are not changes in the true sense of the term, for by that time they have already come to rest. Aristotle's demonstration, however, deals only with cases of true change, and in that sense it is of general application. Thus, according to this interpretation, the term 'changeable' [in the proposition] will include all the categories of change.13 I am, however, at a loss to know what Avempace has gained by

244

C R E S C A S ' C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E

,]dt n V m D , , i 3 , t f n v ^ s n on"? - p a n n o « c r ' i r o n o n « u »

«in

•lor n * ? i n i ^ V r p n , i n y i a n n ' b o r a , p W i o n m n o n o n n nr^i .-run p « n y n ' e d lnp1? a n n o n « T

nan , n ' n o - p « i

hd1? n n . p ^ n n o y y u n o bow p"?nno n a n o o b o n o « D nonpna n«'no iddi .•"won t d

naa

hi

n"n

nanoono .n'ji'ain

. m a i o « n n r n o n p n n ' n o i n o « n a nr*?i . n « o n n « n o « ' n , o o a y y i a n o bow n o « ^ ' o ' b o n

qVi«!

, n a « 3 n y n n n « ' n o a n n o v s o i o d , 0 - i s a n y i a n n npa d « o n n n « " a o « i n ,Doa"? n n v o « i n m p n m , m p o n n " n a « n o n o 1 ? n v n 1 ? , ' i a ' o n 'a'o bo n ^ V i o n y u n n n p a a « i

.aoa y y i a n o n o

.•oa « i n n a n o o n o a n a n « u o « i n , ' o o a « o n "?« i ' d h s .niaio«nn nionpn oVon lV« p n n . o s y a y y i a n o n , y y i a n o bo n o w

nn

abo

a « ino«na

nanvty - p s o

«"?«

«'no nmpan o

. p ^ n n ' « V n n p o n y y i a n ' n o « « s o a iana«o

lpm

«'no ipn yyiannn

.i^ n'^Dn

"?3« .aoa na'«i

pb>nnn « ^

yyiann n n s . i p n

nmpam

, D o a m ncoon

n'^on

yyiannn

.oxyo y y i a n a n n a n o n .oonn nionpnn nb'Vun n ' y n o n nonpnn p rrrr m ' n - 1 3 nvbora [ n ^ o m - •> p ^ r w [pbn»n2 .»(p^nnn yjmnD bo») - » [nn] mm) 12

.'mpj)9

- 1 biv

,< DIP: [Kin] 8

.i

»3*3 us ok - 0 inDRnm • 1 inDKnn 13 - » vb [133 16

-

. » - " r f r m - p - " ^ i t d w '31 .dd Y 3

4 3

d« nn«anai

itin p 3

W o ' 1 2 3 o"iB>n TD bo -D c m 5

.is pn n * (wn> - 1 ' yyiinonB [nirwDnm - '

yyunD [¿lyunon - ^ [p^>nnD] yyuriD-' - p i s *» q n s w M .0 (Dwm> 17

.0 n ' ^ n

- * nyyunn [yyunn

PROPOSITION VII

245

restricting the application of the term 'changeable' to the category of quality, for in quality, too, the final points of its various changes are timeless. When a black object, for instance, turns white, it becomes completely white only at the end of its motion, and that is in no-time. 14 However Aristotle's proposition may be interpreted, it is quite evident that the Master has taken it in Averroes' sense. Consequently, from the premise that 'everything changeable is divisible' he logically infers that 'everything movable is divisible', inasmuch as he takes the term 'changeable' to include all the kinds of change that he has enumerated in the fourth proposition. Thus have been proved the first two theses. As for the third 15 , namely, everything movable is a body, it is very clear. For if we take motion in its proper sense, which the Master has explained to be locomotion, then, since locomotion implies a certain place, and place is peculiar to bodies16, it must necessarily follow that whatever is movable is a body. And if we take the term motion to include all the kinds of change, again, since they all require some corporeal subject 17 , it also follows that in their case, too, whatever is changeable is a body. Thus have been proved those first three theses. The following qualification must, however, be stipulated: When the author uses the phrase 'everything movable' he means only that which is moved essentially, for that which has only accidental motion we sometimes find to be indivisible. Take, for instance, the point at the extremity of a line. It is moved with the motion of the line of which it is the extremity, the line in its turn being moved with the motion of the surface or the solid, and still the point is indivisible and is not a body. But as has been said, the term movable must be taken to refer here only to that which is moved essentially. 18 Thus has been proved the seventh proposition containing those five theses.

246

CRESCAS' C R I T I Q U E O F A R I S T O T L E y m n

pnsn , ^ ¡ 1

^ a n

. p ^ n n o ¡untPD "730 m » i « n r v y a t p n n o n p n a

n-vpna

n i b o B n o n p p a nsntra N'ntp , m a - r o n B » o a k s o 3 u n a « » n n ,nvB>D3n n i y i a n m , p r

n"?in v n '

-IPN m o n o n i

mtymono

. p a v n ' "its>N , n 3 t n m n n o t i o nanant? n n n a

,nrn p s D n n - i n y n 3 v - i a n V N

n a n n N a a 1 3 3 U « ny-r 1 ?

nton

rom

.o"db>3 n v a ' t u

na

n y i " ? d ^ i n i ,pti>«"in ^ a n o ' y a p p n s a u i T y n " i c k d . i b d - i n , n v D t f 3 n i y i 3 n i n i o ' t o n n nsiantp . w i t s ' s 1 ? , - i n « a ncsn p N no«

-nrv2i

,-iniDi

"?sa n N r n

nonpnn

"?a p

n « r n n o n p n n o k p - n y i .db>3 « i n nvotpa n i y u n a

on

yyunontp

H30D trantpn 1 ? "?av «"7 n3n ,nvDB>3n n v a ' K a m n v o i . ^ a a n3nit>Da u n ' y n ® ' w n n 'ea « i n nto'tp n o ' s 1 ?

rrn'i

psDn i n n »

.rrp^n noa k^n

id«3 p i

. o s y a y y u r r n n 1a m 3 n n l 7 j o n x m t p n n . y y u n o a

[0"D®37

.»* |DI3 [p"l] Vn' [K^J "IBM 5

n u ' t o - » -i"3 >«= [jjyunonis

13 9

. l a p n i * («iron

.» nlOnOHOH

n j n S .« ^ 2 1 3

.Jxapini ni^3»103

a"DtMn 1 1 D'Diwn 1 crown yjranos> [yyi:nDn»n

p-1 •>

.sptiiVB yyunoa

P R O P O S I T I O N VII

247

PART I I

of the seventh proposition which reads: 'Everything changeable is divisible.' EXAMINATION

[Against this proposition the following criticism may be urged] : We find in the case of the rational soul that it suffers a change in the process of its acquisition of intellectual conceptions out of sensible perceptions and forms of the imagination"—a change which is in no-time. 20 Likewise, the motions of the soul," as pleasure and care, imply a change which is in time." [And yet the soul is indivisible.] Altabrizi has already called attention to this difficulty, to solve which he has suggested that the term 'changeable' in this proposition should be taken to refer only to corporeal qualities 23 . It would seem that Altabrizi has followed Avempace's interpretation of Aristotle's words, the nature of which we have discussed in the seventh chapter of the first part. But even if we accept Averroes' interpretation, we may still say with Altabrizi that the term 'changeable' should be taken to refer to corporeal qualities and motions. As a result of Altabrizi's explanation, however, the entire proposition will be tautological and redundant, 24 and especially redundant will be that part of the proposition which, according to his explanation, will be tantamount to saying that that which is moved by corporeal motions is a body. Furthermore, if this proposition were to be of particular application, referring only to [change] of corporeal qualities, Maimonides could not have used it in a subsequent chapter with reference to changeableness in general.2S It seems, therefore, that the solution of the difficulty must needs have recourse to the condition we have stipulated with reference to the term 'movable,' according to which we have qualified its meaning as referring only to that which is moved essentially. Likewise here, with reference to the term 'change-

248

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

tpsin

nvn^i

.Dxy3

n3ntt>an

,n'3^vn n n v n m p ' i f

,n3nt£>a3

n-onan «"?

t o ' » n o n - i t o r v , « " 7 o n ' a x y i n v n ^ - w b n d k .n"?

y y w t ?

,]ironn

no ^op nnaitu

^ d h

rrro^n

nanpnn

n y u n n y y u n ' «"7 n r 1 ? ! . m i o x y a i n y i s n ] w

m «

n t o a

,m3n3

.Ton

kWi

.n,l?3n "rys

trezj'tp

u

p n

nip»3 "?yisn

nx'

.ni3't¡> m p a s

n'n'tp

mr

nnpan

' j ' o o a 1L3D1« n ' s n t p n o ,nNTt&> n o ' s 1 ? , n « r n n a n p n n .trea'

umt*

.n«rn nanpnn matt

TDtpn p i s n m p o 3

n x n

n o b «"7« ,Dxy3 n 3 n » a v i ^ s

n m p n ' í r w n dm n i t o n » .•ti>n m m

.-íai1?

no'

no»

,yatt>na

13 ' l t n t «

Hasten

y y u n o s 3 " i n ' 1 3 3 nr"?i

»Bronn p i £ ) n .^tpn

^ D H

n n p a s y y u r v » n o bow r n a i N n r v r a p n n a n p n s

m ' p r a .m3n3

3 " n n a n'n' nVbo .tuca' n1?» m y

m p a s

,Tan

- 1 3 3 nr*?i

m p a s

yyurv»

otra

DW H3»n ON-P 'ot>b ' niDK1? J -IIDV [niDK3 -

nonpnn n«r9

«xa't» n a »

ni3'

nn

.oxys

. p t i h ^ d n'JuVrn--»^ no1?®2

. » [ ' m D » n - 1 •>"*"> - i t o r r inn - n P

l l l l i

.1 i m a n a ] mr® - » 3 " i r i D 12

nvn^ .» DXT®

^ 'íwn

PROPOSITION VIII

249

able,' we may say that it refers only to that which is changed essentially. Consequently, since the rational soul is never changed essentially, but only through the contingency of its being material, it in no way contradicts the truth of this proposition. The question, however, whether the change that is contingent to the soul can be essential or not, will be discussed in some subsequent chapter, 26 God willing.

PROPOSITION

VIII

PART I

of the eighth proposition, which reads: 'Everything that is moved accidentally must of necessity come to rest, inasmuch as its motion is not in its own essence. Hence that accidental motion cannot continue forever'. 1 PROOF

The basis of this proposition would seem to be the principle laid down by Aristotle in the eighth book of the Physics, namely, everything that is accidental has in itself the possibility both of being and of not being.2 But that which is possible cannot be conceived as not becoming actually realized in infinite time. 1 Hence it follows that whatever is moved accidentally must of necessity come to rest. 4 PART II

of the eighth proposition, which reads: 'Everything that is moved accidentally must of necessity come to rest.' EXAMINATION

[The criticism of this proposition is as follows]: [The statement that] everything that exists by accident may possibly cease to exist, is true only in the case of a thing which is not the necessary result of something whose existence is essential. It may, therefore, be possible for a body to be moved accidentally

250

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

tp«n i n s 1 ? ^

n

no1?

nyun ixa m a n s yyuno

«in»

m «

'nacy p i . n n ' o n n ^ i n

I'D « i m

3"nn'P

mpnt> i d s

,n'D2cyn

nyuna

.r'TO n o i p m

yyunoD p

m p o a

l^tpaa a m

D'yynno

npbw

arrp^m

m p o a

yyunono

ao"1? a t m 'Jia-nn 'a n y j n V i n ' n a n 1 ? « hid - i n y n a

nasi

n o a , m p » 3 y y u n ' t p n o "?atp u

nmpnn

^ti>Q - | - n ^ y

n^i'tf n n t o

- i a « n i"7«a , m a n a

mr

,n«rn

,rnp»a

yyuno

«in»

n r « i n n y a n a r n p a s n y y u n o « ' m , o - i « n n y i o n D - r « n tpsatp na 3"in' m p o a

n y y u n » n n y n a t p no1? nan , o : : y a

nyyuna

m p a a n y y u n a « ' m ,1*7 n y a a n b a ^ a r i p s a a - i a « n p i bnaa m «

y a a dip » p o x m ? «*? • « . m a n » n"? a " i r r

.man» ,nnyna

. r n p a a i"?'bn y y u n a

Diratio

'a

nn

.a"ina

'n"?3

lnNxai

nr3

^-miMBO

. V j 1 ? » m t p p n t x "?y « " ? « U ' « ^ ¡ t a n »S3 1 ? r n p a a m«i

.Dxya yyuna

- • yyunon p 4 (U) 6

.

« i n -1»« , a n ' y

'n^a

nam

myyunnn

n » p n 1« n i « ' x a

itypn

.» m p p - ' * » yyi:nD [ y j r a n o n - ^ m p - 1 yyurp» p ' w » i - » n » D 'an» > P •> • * m m 1 * nvo"n =» nwn® [ ' 3 5

l ^ a a pVewa

— ° 'B^ [hd^ — [ r n 3 , , in , i run9

.map-in1? ni'K DWirn'Ri-» cn« wdjws

_ 1113 p 11 r ^ 0 nnyjnV -> (nnjnrn) 11

,i«a -mi t*0 njiyunan - » n a m i«'m 10

hxd3 -1»3 p Vsnsrow i n 1 ' ^widmo [ ^ - m r a « 13 m y y i n n [niyyunnn 14

.« Dn'MO»< Drvuw .)»3 p n > 0

.> p i n « n -

1

.» 3"inn

(dbo - > ? «pax'»

Drrruio-l"pi"'> ca)-» n> - 1 royunn3 niyyunon

PROPOSITION VIII

251

forever, inasmuch as its accidental motion may have to be continued forever as the necessary result of something that is moved essentially. An example of this is to be found in the case of the globe5 of fire whose motion is violent, being brought about by the perpetual motion of the [celestial] sphere 6 ; or in the case of the superficies of the [celestial] sphere, and the parts thereof, 7 which are moved accidentally by the essential motion of the sphere [as a whole]. 8

Motion of this [latter] kind is a species of accidental

motion according to the illustration used by the Master in the sixth proposition. 9 This difficulty has already been raised by Altabrizi and others 10 , with the result that he of Narbonne thought of setting the proposition aright by putting upon it the following construction:

Everything that is moved accidentally in so far as it

is moved accidentally, must of necessity come to rest, as, e. g., the human soul, which is the principle of motion in man and which, though unmoved essentially, is moved accidentally in the process of its causing motion. This motion it is which according to the proposition must come to rest, inasmuch as it is only the accidental result of its own action in producing motion. B y the same token, the soul that moves the celestial sphere would likewise have to come to rest, for it, too, is moved accidentally as a result of its own action in producing motion in the sphere, were it not for the fact that there is an additional cause for the motion of the soul of the sphere, namely, an absolutely separate mover which is not moved even accidentally. 11 If we examine", however, Narboni's reasoning with regard to the soul of the sphere, we shall find it inconclusive.

For if we

ascribe to the soul of the sphere any accidental motion at all, it is only in consequence of its union—a union either of inexistence or of admixture 13 —with the sphere, which is itself moved essentially. Since the motion of the soul of the sphere is thus brought about only through its union with the sphere, it is obvious that this

252

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

H3DD yan «b'ty JVNXJ

I«DD

n1? nyunn

«in ,nxn nr "?y

nynn ^ J 1 ? n y a o

NRRU -ITYFCOTF

nn .nxn

jw

HTD M « 1 ? N1?

•7« - p a n -133 n1? D m -IPN n n p n n nyunn DB> n n .oxys nia r n p '

. T o n yyunnœ -ipskp unan -1331 .rvoxyn

D"TDn .D^D^y"? D'a^nna .D'npo o ' - m xxm "73« .Viaa .•»o^yn m » n n a

' y ^ n n p i s n ,]nwnn

^ s n

djdn DtP3 y r œ atfj \>d o moiNn rrytwin no-ipnn -iiN33 .înyjn ny3 «in DJ yyuirtîo î n y r rvrvty n3 runvtp - p x

DISK

. n o x y s m a n o nxrn nonpnn

tPNrw ,-iD«n î ^ t o ,n'^3nn i n "?y y j » n "?3N ,"?yisn yaon Ninn mpDn mm«nl? .intae?

n"?yti> TiNn y j n

n x T ,am yrti> de>j n o « rrn nr"?i .yynrr t ó Nim î n y r 133 .RO'IPOS

N " M 3 ON Î N Y R »

y r p DB'jjon |3NriB> ,tpiri3 n t a jb> n»o nr ^y itt>pn 1331 : D ' J B 'JI»3 NT3 U'TI>N N M

.yyurv

I1?*«

IRDPD'TIO

^RAN

inn - > P nn -> * nr by [nra -1 2 .«P^^ j

o

^ d h

mDi«n n'ytfnn nmpna

m'pna

.inyan n y n « i n m yyiari'tto Dt3'3JDn

nj'PDD n«TiP

n x o t P D aro b r a n «inti> n o V nroi

nap'»

.Vna

.j?3D3"? a n p

'3

my»

pirn

nDD r o r .noxyn

'jno

no

«in ,n«o

kpn

d'Jb ' w n

n"?'£>an n « u o nn«

bob

m y r nan .^nnn

-ie>« .Dts'aaon

n i ^ y e n n 'tpp o n v n

aa"ayo

. í m y a ' i " ? r n n i j p d ' Dü'aaDn» w a r n u n r t p i « D p i r n « i n n x n •'«xrn - p x

.D'y'jon

n » m a

onn

nam

d'dwh

.n"ma

nvno i«

v'ayn

ns'tPDa

b^d1

lVyenv

-nyi .Dta^jano

i n K ' a ' i " ? n 3 n in-rtt> n y a n v a e n n i y i a n D'otpan í y y i a n n p rnyian

o'Dtpan

» rup'Bo map'» '3 a .'« nwp ' 'Enpn

lyyiarrtp

rnp' irop' 2 . « D 3 " } y o 10-11

.•0 iijja 33pi -rya «* ny [ r y a - ' niyian^»

- p x

nijiin1?

p

oa

na'tpoa

d«i

.DD'aann

.»(Kin) - « 1 ^nan '3 - » idikh - ? ra 1 .1 ms't/a [myian 15

i n n a n - i r " i njp'zo '3 .mapn •wva' [lzwn' 12

nnn djjd nvsun myun^ •> nrsonn nijmnn mapn rnvsen niyian) 16-1 moon

255

PROPOSITION I X

First, one may say that the iron is set in motion by itself, and this indeed is due to a certain disposition it acquires from the stone. Second, even if we admit that it is the stone that sets the iron in motion, it may still be explained as being due to the effluxion of certain corporeal particles from the stone which come in actual contact with the iron and set it in motion either by drawing or by pushing.5

PART I I

EXAMINATION of the ninth proposition, which reads: 'Every body that moves another body moves that other body only by being itself moved at the time it moves the other'. The two explanations mentioned by the commentators with regard to the phenomenon of the power of the Magnesian stone to attract iron are self-evidently groundless.

T h a t the iron

should acquire from the magnet, through its proximity to the latter, 6 a new disposition [and thereby move itself toward the magnet], either one of which acts would imply a natural force of considerable strength, 7 it being clear from the nature of the case that both these acts are very difficult of performance, 8 is a far-fetched assumption and well-nigh impossible.

For the same

reason, it is likewise past comprehension that corporeal effluvia should flow out of the magnet and pull the iron and thus set it in motion. Furthermore, we cannot escape the conclusion that the particles issuing forth from the magnet and causing motion must inevitably act either by drawing or by pushing.

If by pushing,

then those particles, when they begin to push the iron in order to bring it to the magnet, will have to move in a direction opposite to [that which they took when moving from the magnet to the iron]. If by drawing, then the particles will likewise have to move alternately in opposite directions, namely, [first], toward the iron,

256

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

.DD'jjDn ns 1 ? îoy îyyiarn iniatPD' - p -inMi .brian •?« , n v a s n .rran r i c a n a ni Vai .-lytPMi ]rv ' a ,nr rrrr -pMi ,Dt3'HDn i a « »

RIMTP

ma ,yatDn

yrr

"7XN

non njiajn naiti>nntt>

D R V A . D T A ' U O N "?M

HMV

rryats nyian

nr"?i ^NA'JTP

aipon !?M i"? -IPM niniMn"? DM .ntaon *7M rvyata nyun n1? ®'ts> .annn înnDMtP N 1 ?« -iypj

M1? -IB>M

n

n^UDA

DMI

n ' î f y n pnsn ,]nwnn bbon «inty -IDM'îp no ^a o nmiMn nnupyn noipnn nMaa DM . o n p o a ,00:1a î r r r o y rrnntp DM .D^Vn ^ VM pVrp otPia .otwa na omtpi .rryatan m i s a ,ia ocan n-poy rrnnti> naain

ÎA

]'M

DPJNIY RIM-PP ' O

D'Jioipn

P

RVN

naa

run , n a a m ona t^ruty rrn DMI , m n îoxya iriM Min VaM îan m s D

'ÎÎPIBDI IDD-IM N R N

.D"Dsy T I ^ a

D^PDI

onpna

'Jîpû dîm ^ a a oben l'Mtf naMœa ,nNrn MiaDn T p i p "?y D'OMAN HM-IJ U N I M » N N

,mnn

.MISM

N A I N ^ A P ' M1? I D S N

lann

-ia-inp ^ î

BN [ ^ X N - 1 1 JÍ1T3-" 1 1 DIT - » DO'ÏÏDRH

DM

.I1?

O ' M Y

.D'TDSH

D'BJINN-» 13«D3

ann

onai ]MAAT» 13»N'1

j (n:n)i2 = .> dm onposs .» ny] «^«e nyiwi - ^ niiNnnV [nirma1? 5 .10 D nDDJ - 1 » 3 1N33 "ItfN 1 * i 16 .* 1 Him [Dm — * (lV) 15 i D'NM»! 13

257

PROPOSITION X

and then drawing the iron and moving along with it toward the magnet. How that would be possible, would that I knew.' All this is of the utmost absurdity. It seems, therefore, that the true explanation of the phenomenon of the Magnesian stone is that iron possesses, according to a certain relation to nature, a natural tendency toward the magnet, just as it possesses a natural tendency toward the below, which tendency is due either to its affinity with its appropriate locality or to some natural property inherent within it10 of which we do not know anything except that it is warranted by sense perception."

PROPOSITION

X

PART I PROOF of the tenth proposition, which reads: 'Everything that is said to be in a body falls under either of two classes.1 It is either something that exists through the body, as accidents, or something through which the body exists, as the natural form. Both accidents and the natural form are to be conceived as a force in a body'. 2

Among the ancients 3 there were some who held that body has no composition in any sense whatsoever, but that it is one in essence and in definition. If we observe in bodies, they say, some kind of composition, it is only with reference to accidents and [other] unessential properties 4 . Aristotle and the commentators upon his works,5 however, knocked this view on the head, 6 by demonstrating conclusively that every body must inevitably consist of two essential parts, matter and form. For we observe that all the mundane bodies are subject to generation and corruption; and as that which no longer is cannot be the recipient of that which is coming to be, it is necessary to postulate the

258

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

.'^vn «-»pan

nonn

Kim .omatp riK 'rap' Kin 'a

«in ^apontp 's1?! . i k p u

.onan

ia

new

mrt1? -pta*'

.mn"?

'oxy

nKiao

torn

anm

m n ^ a i p o n n^ir

nan

vmtp

«in»

Kin .Dxyna u i "?33ioi mm nanntt* -idk' ia "?aipontt>'s^i îoxya

mm»» - w b k

nKiao Kin

'K kîpictb;

k^k

's^i .mm1? 'oxy Kintp nKiao

min mnn

k1?

Vysa mn

^yDa

okîp

.Deacon nmsn Kim ,"?aipon nana Kin wmoyi nann ovpp -ikud

Kin

,db>3 ^ a a

ono ta^on y» nt»K ,onpon

d'tiki

Dn1? mn okp .rvotwn nnsni nonn ^ l a n Dtpja nnmoyp .D'oxy i n noxya mroyi ovp I1? vk ,nnpom nmsn noi1? n s n ,i"?k 'wo nnK "7310 's^i Den

.nKannt?

10a

"?k v a n s

omwi

,ioxya

niK'xo

.Dtyaa n a n m w t p n o w n a

Kintp . n ' y a t a n nmxn

Vk

misa

Dma

neon

.motpjn

i n m o y i iovpts> j ^ a a

nmoyœ

nmsm

noK

noinn

inanntp ^laty

nana

-pxi

,Dtt>jn

np1?

n m s n "?k n o n n D m a . n n n v o n m y a t a n

.na .111 7 D e n »

>"»

DBW012

.»mrPDni6

.»3 (DKW9

nop-fuSc

.1 > DH3 - ' * P (O'lpDH) 8

«înwis

^ (n«)1

.Tmxau'mixnH

PROPOSITION X

259

existence of a substratum which is to be the common underlying recipient of both of them. called hyle.

7

This substratum is matter, the so-

That matter must be essential to that which comes

to be,' is self-evident, inasmuch as it is its substratum. But still the recipient must be something distinct from that which is received, it follows therefore that in every body there must be two principles. Again, as it is that which is received through which a thing is said to come into being, by which it is limited and in which it has its essence, it is evident that this, too, must be essential to that which comes to be». But the substratum, it is quite clear, cannot have actual existence by itself 10 , for if it had actual existence, the process of coming-to-be would be an alteration rather than a generation." Hence it must follow that the being and existence of a thing must depend upon that which is received, that is to say, upon the natural form." As for accidents, which no body is destitute of, it goes without saying that they can exist only in bodies composed of matter and corporeal form, 13 for if accidents could have being and existence by themselves, they would be substances. 14 Since neither of these two, namely, form and accidents, have independent existence, both, as has been shown, requiring some substratum, the author, making use of the term 'force' in a special sense, says that 'both accidents and the natural form are to be conceived as a force in a body'. 15 You must note that the assertion that body exists through the natural form indicates that Maimonides has taken the term body, which includes both matter and corporeal form, in its relation to the natural proper form as analogous to the relation of matter to form in general, the former of which has its being and existence in the latter. 16

260

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE ^ a i y n

a m »

p n s n

.»atwr

i D N ' t f n o "73 ' a m o w n

.Dnpoa

inn'oy

^ d h

n'Ttpyn nonpna

n ' n n t p dm . D ' p V n ' w

nTpna

Vk pVn'

ot^aa

.n'yatan h u s d ,ia o w n n n ' o y n'nnt? dni D ' » n vn D n n n « o'atpajm nnmaNi w d no"? ,tr,»,ott>n D ' D i n

^ni

^aa

D ' D n n n o D'pnn ntt^tpn m p n pmnonw w

n

no1? , p a n n o n

p t w

m i x m

ynntp 'i&n nonn

n®7iT n r « d 1 ? * « r v o t p n n m s n t p

n^ir m p m n w ' s ^ i

. m a x a n v i r "?y

p

d k -p-ix .pi^'nn "?apn

m p 3 i m

• n a n

'3»

am

.rnpanm

anntp

no1?

n a a n m ' m naann u

p

an biwn

d^ini

. n n s m

"?aa n r r

,ntn

p «

la

n«T

diw'sdi»

,"?ysa

nonn

pi^nn

pi^nn

^apo

pi^nn

D m ,1"?

^ap' o^Dxy

"rap'

"D'Dtpn

a " r v b^wnw n1?« . n i K ' s o a nrnt o w n ' a n n

,n'inn Vap'

n D s r w 'B1? , - i D s n m m n n

n x o «ic^ai N a n a »

'nxan o w n , i i » t n n ^ a n o n'tpyn p n s a n w a n a a n n 1a ^ a r c n n r r

. ^ a

uV m p ®

,~rDsnm r m n n n n n bns'

i»ai

,p

.nmn noma now n W

ana

n i o ^ n

i^no nahnn

nanno

vidk »(pa-man® n o S 8 ojdki [ d V i k i - » o n u -'PtnwaMs

m b

b

nxn

.DHDsani

nn« bob rnnvon

D'inn o ' a w a nmsn

.1 n a V i - - ' ' ' o'oiwn [avie

trn

m n n 1 1

-fa-r®i|zi -

pnjn 1 ?

-

mixni

14

J pa-ron®

.»Ya-«tn p - 3

* ["D'aeri] 'nxin - = a » » [nran pcb1?)

- »rums

p

.» D"a® « h t d p p s

."p-'-»'''pia-rmmpa-tnm-'6ap')9

_ 11 \ 1 v i n n mnn - 1 ">

16 «

^ a

. y n w i n 1 ' » , n n a n n n o , n t t n p N n y n 'sb» n a m

.mown

-

on

.i*=»(n-nsi)i7

.»-m1? DHDS3ni9

* own p'Mi] .»

.»mana1 nun

PROPOSITION X

261

PART I I EXAMINATION of the tenth proposition, which reads: 'Everything that is said to be in a body falls under either of two classes. It is either something that exists through the body, as accidents, or something through which body exists, as the natural form.'

It behooves you to know that Avicenna, Algazali, and those who follow them are of the opinion that the distinction of matter and form obtains in every body, including also the celestial spheres.17 For believing that the corporeal form is nothing but the continuity of the three dimensions,18 intersecting each other at right angles, 1 ' they reason as follows: Since continuity must be something different from the thing continuous, seeing that the latter may become divided whereas the former may not 20 , there must exist a substratum capable of receiving both the continuity and the division. Reason therefore decrees21 that in every body there must be two essential principles, namely, matter and form.22 Averroes, however, contends that inasmuch as the celestial sphere is not subject to actual division, it is not necessary to postulate in it any plurality and composition. For body, he argues, is one in reality. It is only on account of the phenomenon of generation and corruption, 23 seeing that that which no longer is cannot be the recipient of that which is coming to be, that reason postulates therein the distinction of subject and something borne by the subject, as we have explained it above in the tenth chapter of the first part. But as the eternal [celestial] sphere does not come under the law of generation and corruption, there is no reason why we should conceive it to be composed of matter and form.2« In view of Averroes' theory, however, would that I knew33 what prevents us from maintaining the same with regard to the elements that are subject to generation and corruption, namely, that their matter be corporeality, and their form be the proper form of every one of the elements, which is related to corporeality

262

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

- j ^ n D n a ' n n n ' n n » . r r o t M m i x i ^ x n N i p r t . n i D t s o m .niDtp: 1 ? n n x n

nVin

nonn

,D'Dn»3

nn®

n n

."?ysa

nam

p

nam

dn

n'n'i

.^yea

.mnvon

nmxn

NXDJI o i p n

"?N

-pax'

NXDJ , - i a n N"?3 o s y j N i n »

nnnn

rnnvon

."D'Dtpn

man»

. n u n » no"? ' ^ v n n y a a a - w n m a n n i s n o i n i p t n n v t t n p n'n'

rnnvo

m i x

m a y o m

^yea

nnnvan

n m x a

N»ian « i n n ' a m n

i"?N3 . n n p a n a o'^apa

i t o a i ' N » p y e o ' » jyico 1 ? n a n , N i n p

nai1? ana

'ini

mixn

]'N» n ' n

l^nav

o m n '

aa'N»i a ' - r n r a m a i p a

ana»

n n x n

no"? , D ' n p a

nnvn

on"? n n n r a n

n m x n »

a n » o n a n o « ' aaaN nan . l ^ t o n x v s i p - i o n m

m i x »

no1?

n n x n

m'ayi

, ^ 0 3

lavpi

o»an

nxp

'3

,mpD3

a'p^na

msDinn .a"axy

n N x a a a^iy"? N'n ,N»ian N ' n »

,nia»an

.13 N ' n iniN

nabwan

maiNn rn'i

naNn

"?3N

nipy -Tn«n p n s n

• n a m

n'n1»

m » y

,a»an

m ' a y

ovp

.mnvan

o n a n

,u

DNI

*73N , i a o » a n

qni

n n v

.jitwnn

nnNn

p*?nn3

^ j n

nanpnn

ip"?n'

a»as

n i T D y o n n x p p i , a » a n "?33 n i a » s n a n n i n s n - i n » i

niNaa a m ' a y » n'Nnaa 1

. " ? 3 » 3 1 » S 3 3 ,D'3E) 0 1 » 3 l p V n ' N ? D » 3 ^

1 n n n n i [ m a u j i - i n y r ^^ l-inin 5 TDK'11 ip^nn'17

i H a ' - 1 o ' i m ' o [D'-niT9

or© [ o m - = lViaa .» recpa - p n n - j - n o o n » n « T «in '3

.npi^nn

«

b»3pon

. n p i ^ n n ^ n p ' n1?

p d j d n o « -IN3 1 ? -p-ixtp n o i

.atwn n p i ^ n n íp^n' « b * ] i n

niBtpeno

no^i.»p» nj

.DB>n m ? » m e 1 ? n t - i K a n ' - n y i "> -itfpn

-itppa n a p n b s t s w , n r * ) i ^ n : i n t a ' í D D n K

.»pin y y u r v e o m p o n y y w . n n p o a yyiaiv n ^ i

n 6 i , a w y ntppn n V n i N ' x o

y w n « i n "?-a3n

. w s j n x B O y y u n o b & m * n p ' nr"?i

- 1 'Vvnn - » D'otwn [awn 5 - = n t a S -»no ? [nDi» - 1 m y V prafc io

.»i«n 9

n t a ' nt^i

.ipdi » i n í y i o invn^i

. » ' a r n n - « i p m [ipm]4

1

o

.»nipVniv-p'''>-nypm3

. » o'n-on nvpm -1=p=mown 6

. » - q i - °

* rwu - » bstn m m •> w»m byrn»' wb»i

3 P nD ^»»a n«rn nanpnn -i«'a iudi« nan "?a« ^'^an "?ya 'n^a 1« n'Van ^ya n'n'® a« a m ^a .p .mptf noa -i«anntt> ina ,yaD3 n,(?sn "?ya 'n^a dim niK'xn 'nVa na niK'xo nam .n'^an ^ya otfia nan n'n1» p •« -i«»j nn« n m p n u r m

in« .yaoa «in» n « T la n^an "?ya

D'p'pnnD o'otpn i»« D'twennn ninan» «'ni .noxya m « i a D ...-in"ii3-4 .'»3pT1-ilann®n«'3®-aniJ»ntl7[m3,?3 .^-por[ly^ni2 .»iim «" n"a iVyiD [rvVsn lVyss .'Vann 'pitb py ,my»n 'bty'nooin [n'Van nibi -»lp^nnra -« p^nnnf p pbn'» 1 * pbnra> -» n'^jn 'nVa i^ijjd •> n'a ^yio ap->in>*miB3- = P""'">*nBDD7 pTU iV o nDD6 i MJJ'JDil - >»3""' p^l .i>(DP»13 .la-m-Kim-" HOTpnil

PROPOSITION XII

its own soul.

267

As against this, the Master maintains that the

Intelligence of the sphere is, [like the hylic intellect in its relation to the human body], a force inherent in the body of the sphere, in consequence whereof it is moved accidentally with the motion of the sphere.

It is for this reason that he advances a special argu-

ment to show that the Intelligence of the sphere cannot be the [first] mover of the sphere, for inasmuch as it has, [according to his own view], accidental motion, it would have to come to rest, as he has stated in Proposition V I I I .

[Previous to this he had

already shown by another argument that the first mover could not be a force distributed throughout the body of the sphere, for a force like that would have to be finite], inasmuch as it must be divisible with the division of the sphere, and thus its action would have to be finite.6 He thus concludes that the [first] cause of the motion of the sphere must be an Intelligence which is absolutely separate from the sphere, all as may be gathered from his discussion in the first chapter of the second part of his work The Guide.

PROPOSITION PART

XII

I.

PROOF of the twelfth proposition, which reads: 'Every force that is distributed through a body is finite, that body itself being finite.'1 Aristotle has demonstrated this proposition in the eighth book of the Physics.1

His argument runs as follows: Every body must

be either finite or infinite; but, as has already been shown before, the existence of an infinite body is impossible; it follows therefore that the body in which a force exists must be finite. T h a t in such a finite body no infinite force can exist will become manifest after we have laid down the following self-evident proposition, namely, that forces distributed through bodies must participate

268

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

í n y n na n'n' nyn

i n v 0 0 m n'n'tp n o bocn . D ' D t p n p"?nna

"?na m v

n s » ' dk

^mn

p"?na n t o a -litwa . ^ n a

m r

. ] d t p p n n t i d , n r a t t ^ n n -»tswai . n a o » p p n pb>nnD

, D n m utyo i n « 3 " n n ' . r v ^ a n " r y a D t w a n ^ a n "?ya ' n V a n a n a i n ' ^ a r i ^ y a 'n"?a n o v n ' t y i n , n n y a n o y y u n o y r v

an

. ^ í a a n n « U D a n ' w i . n y j n a •"•lty n , ( ? a n ^ y a n o ' s a ,nr a " n n ' | d d n o y y u n o y r n ' ^ a n "?ya ' n ^ a n a u ,«inn y y u n o n yj'tp n'^an ^ y a y w a pBD

-kpk a t m

n'H

- i í p s n n a a nan

.no

. r r ' p a n b y n y u a n i n y r t p n y t p a i n u n 1 ? u'^ytt> n » 1 ?

. n , ! 7 a n "?ya v i V a n y a o n o " 7 m m v n n y a inyj'tt» o n n ^ a n .^ru m r n prnn y w

pr

ppn

-pax'tp

"?ya ' n ^ a n y ^ D n b ^ d ' n b n a m

p"?n m a n a n ' n ' , p r a m y r d n i

n ' n 1 p"?n n , ! ? o n "?ya v i b o n otpanD n p w ."man p r n

w y m

.pra

-WBNtf y r r torn

p r n on' n n « n n'Van ^ y a n

. m a n a n ' V a n *?ya Nintf . n ^ a n "?ya v i V a n p"?n p .rv^an bya 'n^an nan

iDn' ok

nvn

nyana n w

n x d ' o n p K i m . n m p 1 ? itpjoan n i p a n n n a v n p

ok nxann

.i D3»'

.«= ^ m - = ^ h r o t

>

ya n a i x v b o n b>ya ' n ^ a

t o w i xxai .n^an .Dnpp

na

bot?

^ya noa

m o w n

p i s n

,'3»n

mtpy

nhtaa

-itunn

iaa

nn

nan

na a " m v

nan otwa

-iíí>k n a D n t ?

ü^eno -ioini

nn

. t p p n a o n p 1 ? - | B > o n 10 'ehíp p r n y u n

bobw

n a n Dn'tp no"? . n ^ a n " ? y a m n ' ^ a n "?ya ' n ^ a n y r r n 'tntpn p i

b»yam , ' t n t p n p i n o

ty^nn

prno p n

• iDin j « 3 pt 1 ^»jo? . « n » « a j o r r o u n a n ® 17

b»y * p i y n p r a

pin , p r n b n n

, ' t n t p n p r a í n y ' J ' r r b o n "?ya y j o m i n yyianoa o n ' r a

y r

n'^an

. n o prb> n

n x o 1 n a a t p no"? . ^ í D a u o o

na"? n'n' ^ya

-pea*' m p '

í n y a n a p r - p u s ' n ' ^ a n "?ya y ^ D n t y

— •>»cia> 15

5

3 t i a t o n » n o i t o , i n n ' H "?a«

.uoo a^on

'n^anp nn ,yaun ' « n n^an

m'pna

V y a ' i i ^ a o w myjonts> n n

no^> , p r n " ? i r a n y u n n a " n n n prn 'no p

notpna

b>ya t o n mar

• l ' n y i « a n n «b» n ^ a n mpa-rnn avna m u

bbDn

o w n

nvn1? . n ' b o n

own

na

. » » ' i r ® n i ® - - " O w d ) 11

.» r n p ' i6

.p nVi •>

.»a"nnrno

vb > ib» [i 1 ?! - ' i n n - •> p r

15

271

PROPOSITION XII

force were possible, the following alternative conclusions would have to ensue, namely, either the infinite motive force would have to effect its motion in an instant or an infinite force and a finite one would be equal in their motive power.

PART

II.

EXAMINATION of the twelfth proposition, which reads:

'Every

force that is distributed through a body is finite, that body itself being finite.' I say that the basis of his argument may be refuted on the ground of what has already been said,4 namely, that the impossibility of an infinite body has not been conclusively established. Granted, however, that an infinite body is impossible, I still maintain that his reasoning is inconclusive, for we do not admit the cogency of the connection of the consequent with the antecedent in the syllogism of the agrument.

In the first place, the

conclusion that there would be motion without time does not follow, inasmuch as every motion has that original time from which it is never free. s

Nor, in the second place, does it follow

that the finite and the infinite forces would produce motion in equal time, for the ratio of one force to the other would be equal to the ratio of their respective lengths of time in addition to that original time which may be assumed to exist by the nature of motion itself.'

Thus, for instance, the infinite would effect

motion within the original time only, without any other time, whereas the finite would require some additional time besides the original.

Even in assuming a finite mover which would

likewise cause motion in the original time only, the alleged absurdity would not ensue, since a difference might still be found between such a finite mover and the infinite mover if the size of the object moved by them were increased, in which case the finite mover would require for the effectuation of its motion some

272

C R E S C A S ' C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E .ta1? 'tntpn p n

^ c n m e » - p - r n inr

i n y r rigori Vy3

'n^am

.nmon 'nb»3 1 3 3

pvtt»

,risina

n ^ s n

by3

byz

n y u n yrw

nói

. p n

'n^>33 3 " n n '

.nnuDn

d"?i«i ®?573

a«i pnns a « ,ni3'm 'neo

no«'

. n ' b o n ' r y s n d c m s ~\m

m w

-p-ix

.pnn3 n'bon

nan , p n n 3

n 3 D í V ¡ v r p «"7tP3 . n ' ^ s n ns'tpos

,-mynntp

' n ^ n t p - i n u d Nintp n n

neinn 3vn m i m rr^on

m w a u

is

"?y3

^"733

n 3 3 -ib>e>n - i 3 3 t p n n

"?y3 7 1 ^ 3

n y u m

n^on

pr

-io«n

pnra

i"?«3

. p n

n^sri

,nitòm

by3 nyj'n

1 3 3 ' « ® DHD D 3 D 1 H 1 3 3 B > . " D ' D t P H D 1 3 3 p t P ^ D l . n ' T T O

N1?!

D ' D c n 1 S D 3 « 3 » i d s , n 3 p ? m n t p b i n n i1? m p ' n ^ i . n i ' y t t " ? y 3 n ' y s t a « ' n o n n u D n n y i s n s - i D N ' t ? -ib>bn -i33tt> m y i

.abnym

. i « i 3 D » i m . n n i D ' 1 ? r r y s t a n - w n n y i s n n ~ib>«3 " D ' D t p n d ^ 1 ?

- w y i3T

rwbvm p n s n

n'n'tf -itye«

.ri3DD n n u D n i

,13"?

moi«n pnynn

. j u w n n

^ d h

m t p y tt^pn n m p n n nyi3n

n1?« p 3 i n o

n « 3 3

'iron

'3'dd

n x n ,,i3,ts'n ' 3 ' D 3 n o s « w

nsn n « r n n o i p n s n s n s n d3dni

-)33tp n n

n'n'i» . D ' ^ n p o n

'3»3 nsm

.npsno

nyi3n

d'3'd '3^3

. D ' B ^ n n D omid a m , n n D N D n y 3 i « 3

'wntp

-idi1? Dip

1 S - Q 3 P 3 7 . i a r n a - * p m r n a a - « p cn»3)5

.p 7 t í ®

nn [Nimi3

.» n n D - > p r [ira n y i n j prims

.• rren^nrm

n y ' T n tnjn'ns .a nya-wa [ten?) 19

» < - p » - P " » rm:®D3

. • ' r a 1 a v r a [O'ra w

.>«=p°

273

PROPOSITION XIII

time in addition to the original time, whereas the infinite would cause the object to move in the original time only.

Thus the

proof has been shown to be refutable. Y o u must, however, note that even if we accept this proof, the term infinite in the proposition is to be understood to refer only to infinite in intensity.

For it is evident that the term infinite

may be used in a twofold respect, with regard to intensity and with regard to time. 7

Hence even if we accept the conclusiveness

of the proof with regard to an infinite in intensity, the same will not follow with regard to an infinite in time. 8

In the latter case,

it is quite possible that a force residing in a finite body should produce motion of finite intensity but of infinite time, providing only that the motion is of a kind in which there is no cause of lassitude and exhaustion, as, for instance, circular motion, which is caused neither by drawing nor by pushing,» and all the more so [the circular motion of] the celestial sphere, 10 about whose substance the philosophers are agreed that it is devoid of any qualities, and is not subject to caducity and senility, as is to be found in De Coelo et Mundo.11 Furthermore, circular motion may be said to be natural to the celestial substance in the same manner as rectilinear motion is natural is to the [sublunar] elements."

This

is evident. PROPOSITION PART

XIII

I.

PROOF of the thirteenth proposition, which reads: 'None of the several species of change can be continuous, except locomotion, and of this, too, only that which is circular.' 1 The purpose of this proposition is to show that there can be no continuous motion between two species of change, that is to say, between two opposite species.

For as has already been stated,

change exists in four categories, and these constitute different genera. 2

Now, that between two of such genera, as, e. g., be-

274

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

i^to ,npano ,rtJN

nn«

nyian

ots> j ' t w - i n u d a n a n m n

na«» yyianom .nnntpn bn p i ^ n o

nnnt»n

p i ^ n D -|'K3

nx-itp n o i n n

narwon

io«n

. m x y s - m « aiD3

. p s n o 'ire? w «

i n » ] ' » 3 n o t e » -idi«1?

quid

'3

p

na , p i ^ n

nnniynoi

. ' i r t»n ' r » D

13T

,no«3

l a o o i ]DT3 l i n o na'tpntp n i l , p 3 - m o m m » -itt>sN w lorn nvn1? . p s m o « i n n n nansntp

m s n 3

Kin p ? 3

ipn

'U'tpm , p r

.mnyo i3ina prn mn

n^ira

a « i ;p3-mD

. ' m c a T o n p s n n o n o N 3 mntt> IN . o ^ ' s p o n

n y i a n n » no1? ' 3 ,-iDNtm i b d - i n m « 3

p

T D '3^3

n«rn nonpnn

nam

nnntpno y y i a n o s n o w una« '3 .nyiann v b m n o d » 3

tnpn

n ' n ' f 3 " i n ,-viDa v 1 ? « ^ n » D n o p ^ n n y i a n s i . p ^ n n p i " ? n no m n k^i ,n33 ] n n » n n i o W n m n - m n

mm

nyunntp nn

,nn»

nyian n i ^ ' s p o n

.min3 p s y s n

[pairiai p a - m o - * n x i D ' ^ a p o n 9 mapinSD -nnnens

n » 3 na

niyiann v m

i^ayntp n1?«

p •> ^ i n « n - ' 03) - 1 11DND3'»riDiia 5

dni ,moa

.-tm p ^ m

v1?»» inn»'

.1 n x T » » m n j p - 5 pmno [pnnn 4 1 (Kin)-»(rn>8

.« H'm3 ram [rrmn

.»'nVa [nSin? .>3

(rra)-i p^nmi2

.»a^ .» mi-in»'

PROPOSITION XIII

275

tween one object changing from whiteness to blackness and another object moving from one place to another, there can be no continuous motion is quite evident. But even [between two changes] within one genus, as, e. g., the changes within the genus quality, from whiteness to blackness and from blackness to whiteness [of the same object], it must likewise be evident that there can be no continuous change. 3 That is what the author means by his statement 'none of the several species of change.' For to say that he means thereby to deny the possibility of continuous change even within one species is impossible, and for the following reason: Change is either in time or timeless, and change in time must of necessity be continuous/ inasmuch as time is continuous, for if change in time were not continuous, time would be composed of instants. 5 Hence the proposition must be assumed to refer only to change between two opposite species. Or, [if the proposition is to refer also to change within one species], the term "continuous" must be understood to have been used here by the author in the sense of perpetual, eternal.'' Aristotle 7 has demonstrated this proposition by the following argument: 8 Motion is named after the terminus toward which it tends; thus we say, for instance, with regard to an object that is moved from blackness toward whiteness, that it is whitening.' Furthermore, in motion there must be a certain part which is an absolute terminus ad quem. It therefore follows that motion must come to rest on its arrival at the terminus ad quem, for if that were not so, the ultimate completion of motion would be potential, and there would never be a perfect terminus ad quem, whence it would follow that opposite motions would be one motion, and a thing would be whitening and blackening at one and the same time. The case of qualitative motion must therefore be analagous to that of generation. For in the motion of

276

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

djdni . n o s n n

p

n n « y y u r n ,n3 . n i n n i n e ? * «

. m ' i d b ' i ninn'ty n nyuntp na"? , n « i 2 a nini

T'is'

12 m i n

.]n'nt£?a m a n i a

-iipn

,'ysaN nosnm p

n'inn

OÌ p n y n n n y u n a

i k n ' 3 U D 1« m » *

oVini

n'nrw ok

,pnynn

m ' a s n n i y u n 'ntf V a v a a"nn'B> i w a o n a n n n - w n -iiyi

.-irv n t a a n Vni n V y a n Vn y y i i n a r r n

:Vysa dki n a a dn

no^n «Vi n m p M

dm

' w a Nsa' naa

12 o i t t n ' fcò n i p a n n n a

no y y u n a

nyuna ;nmia

"732 y ^ a a n t p

12 y y i i n n ntPNa N i n

- D i n a i r « ipnty n a V , V y s a i p i n

n t p n r r n d n i ; V y B a ì p i n n n p j 12 o t r i , n a y

'a

nmpi

ntfNai ; o ' i p a

¡vn't» a " i n a n ' n . n i p a n n n a y y u n a N i n a o . V y s a ì p 1« n n i p i Vn y y u n a

ìnvntf

-liana

Nint? n n

;yxaNa

•ni ¡nisVnna ninan t i p on yxaNn p

n a y

pr

y y u n a invni

ona

yxaNn

r m i a n n n v V a n t i p vn'tp a " i n a n ' n . V y s a i p n in n m p i n ,-itf'n i p a nr ~ i « a n n n P N a i nn

.'nrVnn « i n

naam

nVyan

.ninya naina p r n n'n'Pi

yyun'

122

,panna

ìnmi

.D'ampn D'Vman u a a i2"nn'i

r u p a - i n n a - 1 « (U)8 - . » n'^sn òyBnm

,Vysa

,'aiaDni i P ' n a a a m a n ìpa a " n n a Vn V y s a

nvrv^arm 'iir'nms

amsn7

.•''ìpÓ'Ms

-rewa [twrcon .«-izn'rns

«in

ntPNat?

.mpannna

oa)3 .»urto

n'n

mnn»2 .» m p a m n o •

.pni:i3nn[ni3^nnn]°nijun» - >8

.ibd-in

. ' j - m n n ' V n n n v " ? y ^ s n ~im n ^ y o n

.-> m p m n n a

n n ' n n n - " nDD®*« nan [nn®2

l - n n n m « -nnrw'i >P (-nnnc 1 !) - * a"rv » a n n - ^ ^ p n - n r W 9 v t y [nTo->»=p'»-nnrw'tni

> no [ n o a - p n u ' r a a i o

rrVy p-> S i - o n - 1 nm> » » ' m p m i s

i d » » yyun»

.>»3 Kin [ ¡ r m .13 -iinwm .p* e n r a ) - » »

."> Viean »= , '" > ^0312

279

PROPOSITION XIII

From all that has been said, it is evident that continuity is impossible except in locomotion, and of this, too, only that which is circular, 17 in which case both the terminus a quo and the terminus ad quem are identical, 1 ' for which reason continuity and eternity are possible in it.1»

PART

II.

EXAMINATION of the thirteenth proposition, which reads: 'None of the several kinds of change can be continuous except locomotion, and of this, too, only that which is circular.' When Aristotle's arguments in proof of this proposition are closely examined, it becomes evident that they are all mere fancies and conceits. For even if the black object which is moved toward whiteness returned in the direction of blackness without first stopping at whiteness, it would not necessarily follow that at the juncture of the two motions the object would be both whitening and blackening at the same time.

No, its whitening

and blackening would be only two aspects of the same motion, that is to say, in so far as its motion is first toward whiteness, it is appropriately described as whitening, and in so far as its motion afterwards turns towards blackness, it is appropriately described as blackening.

And so, no absurdity would ensue therefrom. 10

In the case of rectilinear motion, it is still less conclusive that there must be a pause between the two [opposite] motions, for they may as well be one continuous motion, though they are not perceived as such by the senses, as has been said by Aristotle." Nay, opposite motions must necessarily be continuous.

Sup-

pose, for instance, that an extremely light object is moved upward, and an extremely large object of the size of a mountain comes down upon it. There is no doubt that the latter will cause

280

CRESCAS* C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E

,NMAA N V A S N N MYIANN 'NTT> V A RRN DNI ;NT3AN

MYA'TP

.L^NA N ^ A N A Y NA I N N M A Y ' T P A " N R R N I S ^ N N A MYIANN N V N A A " N N ' «"710 . " « Y O N NANI» A V N N I N D S N N N ^ A N KIN -IBW N N Y A -INARV NN . " ? Y S A NNY DB> K X D ' P .RNNXRID RNINN N " ? N N M N A - N P RNINN N ' ^ A N 1 « , N ' I N N N ^ N N M M N N NYIAN NAM LAB T K I

. " ? Y S A NNY « X A ' K W A " I N A

«IN»

DKI . ^ Y S A « S A A LAA'K N V A ' X N VAT? N N Y M , - P N N NYIAN 1 ? NATPAA NIL

. N M ^ N D 1 ? N ^ N N N 'ARCM N A M P RN'IN N ^ A N IITPN-IN - | ' « N .-FKD

NYA-IAN PNSN,PTERIN

ISUO

^VAN

NNV N P N Y N N NYIANTP M O W N M T P Y Y A N « N N A N P N N M « A A • N P ' I D S N N I N ' I N N ' A , Y A A A ANA N A W I N N I ,MYIANATS> N M I P J'TO ,NANA>AN P

NATPAN N A N P NV M P ' MANTPNM .NIANWNN N"? . - T D S M M M DN 1 ? D I P ' » N 1 ? DK J N D N «"71 N M A X

NANPN

NA P I A I , P I A N A LTAON« N - M A N«TN N A N P N N NAN

- I K P 1 ? N A M P M A I A D N NYIANNTP , 1 1 ^ 3 NA ^ D I M

MN'XON [N'INN 5

.^P NUWN

NUUNN [NIYUNN 3

1

MN [MNN - » N^NNNI N^SM INBNNNI IN^NNAJ 13

1

.» CNP [DIP' 12

CIND) 9

MIPN

.PIAI YAAA

.» RRONN [RO INN 2 NMIPN - 'NITVXN 1 '

.« N'IN [N"?NNN A

NYUN® [NYUNN® 16

.3 JNDN I'NI H

.>P RVIN«2' .3 ROAWNN

P R O P O S I T I O N XIV

281

the former to change its motion to the downward direction. Now, if there were a pause between these two [opposite] motions [of the lighter object], it would follow that the mountainous object, too, with all its size, would have to stop in the middle of its downward motion." Again, the conclusion which he has fancifully deduced is fallacious; for from the assumption that the motions are opposite, it must not necessarily follow that there is an actual instant [of rest] between them. It can be shown from an analogy of the instant which marks the end of corruption and the beginning of generation, or rather the end of an anterior generation and the beginning of a posterior generation, that there must not necessarily be an actual instant. Why should it not be so? Motion of generation is always consequent on motion of quality, and still the instant between the opposite qualities does not exist actually,' 3 even though the first quality is the end of the anterior generation and the second the beginning of the posterior. This is very evident.

PROPOSITION

XIV

PART I. P R O O F of the fourteenth proposition, which reads: 'Locomotion is prior to all the other kinds of motion and is the first of them in nature, for generation and corruption are preceded by alteration, which in its turn is preceded by the approach of that which alters to that which is to be altered, and, similarly, growth and diminution are impossible without previous generation and corruption.' 1 Aristotle has demonstrated this proposition by the method of induction,' and has made it clear that he meant to establish the priority of locomotion both in nature and in time. 3 He has furthermore proved that circular motion is prior to all other

282

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

yyianom

naa'P' « V i ^ s n

.moan ^ y s n

p i s n

nyianb> m o w n

no1?

myiann

,'ia'B>n "?y no 11?

n o n way

H ' » y n npnynn

-jeno n a w

na

^ a n

n-wy

yanxn

nonpna

nmpna

n D s n m n ' r n n ' 3 , y 3 B 3 o n o n a w t n m ,myian3ts> r o m p n n v . n a n t p o n ]D n a t i o n m n p

n1? o n p ' n i a n t p n m . n i a n ^ n n n1? o n p *

. n D s m n ' i n Dn 1 ? o n p ' t f k 1 ? d n ] H D n •?y

nn'ox

, n « i n n o n p n n n o » n n nstpoan n ' m n -|-n b y

nan ,-iKan'

-ib>k3 , - o n

noon

niyiantfi

«"?o

nn'n

,myiann

,iyyianntp a m p n i o s i n w n

ux

,n'inn

-inb^ n o m p

'"rya r n »

nan

nb»nnn

nnnntp

no"? , p n y n " ?

Ifoa m p o n1? , i n « n

pin vi^ao

; r o n n

p i s n

'3 m o w n

.jiiwrin

n o "731 , n y i a n o y n V n p r !73t£>v

kxo'

momp nosni

n1? , n o y .pra dn o

m«33

pam

nyian1?

nyian

. | o r n n n n V s i a i a w n y i a n i1? « s o n

•nDMnmo

.-> rrnn [nrvn9



^ d h

m t s > y tt>onn n o n p n n

on'atfo i n «

i n

notuv

amp mVea

- w y

«

. » i D o n m r r i n n - » r b [nrt^7

axon vbv

nr»M

15

P R O P O S I T I O N XV

283

motions, 4 by reason of the fact that it does not take place between opposite boundaries, 5 that its velocity is not subject to variation, 6 that the substance to which it is peculiar is incapable of change, 7 nay, that in everything it maintains the character of perfect actuality. 8 PART

II.

of the fourteenth proposition, which reads: 'Locomotion is prior to all the other kinds of motion and is the first of them in nature, for generation and corruption are preceded by alteration, which in its turn, is preceded by the approach of that which alters to that which is to be altered, and, similarly, growth and diminution are impossible without previous generation and corruption.' EXAMINATION

With reference to relative generation,' the proposition may be accepted as true. With reference, however, to the first generation, if it is ex nihilo, in the manner that will be explained, 10 it can be shown that it is generation which precedes all the other motions," and that qualitative and quantitative motions precede locomotion, for things must have possessed qualitative and quantitative properties before they began to be moved [in place]," and, finally, that absolute quantity precedes quality. 11

PROPOSITION PART

XV

I.

of the fifteenth proposition, which reads: 'Time is an accident that is consequent on motion and is conjoined with it. Neither one of them exists without the other. Motion does not exist except in time, and time cannot be conceived except with motion, and whatsoever is not in motion does not fall under the category of time.' 1 PROOF

284

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

.nnpa p r n nvn ,nn«n .rnanpn yanx n ^ i a n«rn nanpnn 'n^a Dna nnN Nxa' tóty p i t a nyun^ pan inrn , r m m .rryunm

.nyun ay nVn p r ^otpv n^p

n ^ a r r mm

. p r n nnn

.nnxn

wn nyun ia « s a n n^íp naa> . p r n nm n w a a

«pVn DrnaDa D'3ianpn u ís'rnnntp rnn dni ,ibd-in dmni Nintto m i nan ,nDsnn h « ü d onvn1? anar^ - p i x t « ,an .nyuna nnxnam ompn -isdd . ^ a naiy 'n^a invni? ,ki»13 V« íanoxn psD nn .nb>i3 V« lanD*'

o n a n n íaa íaxya naiy mmty pt£>

'nVa Nim ,nny Kin mnn o ,n'ny nrVi

nn

nay

p^m p r n p

. y n u wt* mnym ,nDQ3 naa naym , p r im'ki

n 31 b> « n n nanpnn N'm .iasya i k h d «ttm "7« lancasn n3n .yan^n i"?nb nnmaam nn'nan nyunn nytw urn«» ntoa una«» ' s h niyw na yyvinan yyuiv it»« trn nn'nan nyunnt? nn , p r a ,nyi3n otn pint? -i«ann n3n , m m « a n a nxp nnv p r a y m nyi3na nin'Nm ni-vnan n v n h .iaxy nnaa p r n np1?' t ó

o

naNH3 ,iara am« nyttutp mm ,maa nns3 vi^ai na pan nnpa . n ' i w n nanpnn Nim ,nyi3nI? pan nnpa «inty nyunn o^iy1? nytpa p r n mm , p nr n'n ntpjoi nnxnam Dmpn nj'naa on nn'Ki mmna w n a a dn .nnpi1?^ nnanam ompn n s o a «inty n m a una« pnx' naa ,n3aa .incDDns .'»(13)6 .»n«arn-»',^iV[u-»'KSD,4 .»isnax'a3 m p a p r n ' a m a i N n m t p y tt>ann n a - r p n n a n i ' p n a ab

, - i n N n ' n b a a on'atpa i n « n x b ' nb

"731 , n y u n n o y «b»« p r ^ D t p v

,nay p3-n

,|aa a«

nyun1?

nyian N x a n

. j a m n n n "?Bi3 w k n y i a n i 1 ? K x a n ya~i«n n i a n p n n

treaa ] a r n n a a

. n u n s , p t P i n n bbzi

pip"» -wtoi»

Mb D i p » i a s , n « r n n a n p n a

na naiNi m^aan

- i t f « a n " ? n j n n u a a i b x ' -iaaa> , i a s y a i K i a a torn? na 1 ? ' a p r n t ? - i k u b nan , t a y i a p i na -iti>«a natapi n y t w n'n n«i

}ar n a t a n na

. ^ y s a n y i a n n n i N ' x a n ^ i r a n m a a a -jj?"»^'

.» dhd D'yyunD-T (DnD)- D vn onD8 .» (nnn d'Vbu)6 ]ar b s " 1 ^ p i 2 1 .i ?* n i ^ j i s nyun n ' ' njruna [ n y i a n n - n ^ tnj?) —» on o ik^nis raapni (ratJpi) - 1 p r n p [pr nD20 ^ * [N'n®) nrnjm - •> 1 1 v b u pnxjn 19 . a n i i * [«in] n : n - ° oyD-n' 1 ? [niupj oyiD--> p r n p [ p r - n ' l > n w i p » t o - 0 .1 m 3 p i n 1 nyian -»n^irai - •> * nm:o u [nnuoa 21

P R O P O S I T I O N XV

287

is thus included in the definition; hence it proves the third premise, namely, that time cannot be conceived except with motion. As for the fourth premise, namely, whatsoever is not in motion does not fall under the category of time, it will become self-evident when it is made clear that the expression "falling under the category of time" applies only to an object which is comprehended by time and transcended by it on both ends. 1 ' Consequently, the eternal beings are not essentially in time,1" inasmuch as they are not comprehended and transcended by time. If they are sometimes said to be in time, it is only accidentally, and that, too, is true only of some of them, namely, of those that are endowed with motion,1» Thus the movable [eternal] beings, on account of their motion, may be duly said to be in time, inasmuch as motion can always be made to be comprehended by time, as when, for instance, we take any finite part thereof." The separate [Intelligences], however, having no motion whatsoever, are neither essentially nor accidentally in time.31

PART

II.

of the fifteenth proposition, which reads: 'Time is an accident that is consequent on motion and is conjoined with it. Neither one of them exists without the other. Motion does not exist except in time, and time cannot be conceived except with motion, and whatsoever is not in motion does not fall under the category of time.' EXAMINATION

I say that when we closely examine the definition of time, we shall find that the four premises which this proposition contains, as has been shown in the first part, are all false. For it is selfevident that rest is described as long when an object remains at rest for a long time, and as short when it remains so only for a short time, whence it must follow that time is measured by rest without the presence of actual motion. Even if it were admitted

288

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

-pis

nDKrv n n

,na y y u n o n -nytp ì n v x a

ì r i v x n"?ira .nmaontp ptt> "?ai

,p?a

nnuon

n y u n n niN'xo

nan , p nr n ' n nts>Nai .taynai m a "jysa *)"?nnn naa . n y u n a n ? h . n y u n n m v x n^ira na p r n n y w n1? no1? j h n i in' 'D nnuon in n y u n n n i p a n n n n y p NinB> , n N T p r a p a n m a n . n y ' t f « i n pi 1 ? 'oxy i n v n Jion^ n N T n a a i .niny 'ri» p a p iniN un'in n'n . p a n n a n o nsoDm p a i n o n noanD invn"? ' a

nab .nnuoai n y u n a -iyitt> djoni .]iìpn-ii 'Dsy 'nVa jid i s d o m«'2£D n v n n N T nrb»i . p ? n Kin onipannn n y t p a mi'jctp N'm , n J i B > N n n nonpnn nan , p nr n'n -WNai .csaa p r n a w . n ' n o N N ' n . o s y iìi'nb»ìa u'x-ibo , m p D p t n n v n n m i N n n"?na Nini» no1? .nana N'n .pb:1? pin nxd:i m p o i n v n ìa ì r x n niK'SD pNi .njjunn n y n N'n nnuoni .nyuna i » a nnuDa n i p a n n n - n y ® m v x a n"?nj p r n n ' n ' » a " n n ' nr"?i .-nyn 1 ? .nitap i n n ^ m nnN ^ a a n o « ' » nnN , n n u » a dni n y u n a on p i N a nyun 1 ? p a n p r n n v n m o i N n N'm , n ' i t i » n d'pini p r nxd' -aae> , p dj n a n a . m a n 'n"?a ano nnxn nxd' n'n dni n y u n n -ivxa in .nnuoa - i j w o n Nini ,nyun rigira .•?ysa Nson N1?® .» Byoi - 1 p^nnn "= i^nnna u i-nj;,®3-'>i3n,S9

-p-ct - • > [ìnijwa] unrsa » ìnijra [ìm'xa 1



non-» noocns

.'"pi»^!]^! inKi7

.o nj?wui6

pr- 3 lnvnu

.mapi« njopi oh) 15

oimo7

.mn'ìm

."(ninno

> ny®

.i -|»d: [tecD:-i (rnpD) .13PTD

litis

289

PROPOSITION XV

t h a t we measure rest only by supposing a corresponding measure of the motion of an object moved during the same interval," it would still follow t h a t actual motion is not necessary in the conception of time. T h e argument is all the stronger in view of the fact t h a t rest, without any supposition on our part of a corresponding [actual] motion, can actually be distinguished as long and short.

Such being the case, would t h a t I knew, why time

should not be measured by rest alone, without our supposing a corresponding motion?

Hence it is evident t h a t the correct

definition of time is that it is the measure of the duration of motion or of rest between two instants. 23 It is, moreover, evident t h a t the genus most essentially appropriate of time is magnitude, 24 for as time belongs to continuous 25 quantity and number to discrete, 26 if we describe time as number, we describe it by a genus which is not essential nor primary. 2 7 It is indeed measured by both motion and rest, because it is our supposition of the measure of their duration t h a t is time.

It seems therefore t h a t

the existence of time is only in the soul. 28 Such being the case, the first of these premises, stating t h a t 'time is an accident,' is true only if we thereby mean t h a t it is not a substance ;3» b u t if we mean thereby t h a t time is an accident existing outside the soul, it is false, 30 for time depends as much upon rest as upon motion, and rest is the privation of motion and privation has no existence. It thus follows t h a t time depends upon our supposition of the measure of the duration of either motion or rest, inasmuch as either of them may be described as great and small. As for the second, stating t h a t time is joined to motion in such a manner t h a t neither one of them exists without the other, it is likewise false, for time may exist without motion, namely, that time which is measured by rest or by the supposition of motion without its actual existence.

290 oy

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE «•?«

pr

^aem

« ' n n m a o n ® no"? o «•?» ^ a «

«"?»

m o w n

«'m

,nD«w «"?« ,nxn m o n a n s p

. n y u n n ^'otw .nnuoa p m

nyian ia « s o n

. n ' P ' V p n

d®71«i oa , n y u n

n y » 3 » a ,nyiann

nnyn

.«•? nan , n y u n o y m m t t a « " ? « p r

^an'

«"?» n o » m o w n

«'m

,n ' y ' a n n

oh«!

- l a a . o ' y y u n o ' n V a r n a m . o ^ n a n nan , p r n n n n ^ b u

ir«

no®? . o n 1 ? o m p m n p r n e o y i n n a » n o « m n » « a , p r n n n n

l^sa

nyiann m y » nvx « ? « . ^ y s a n y u n n n w s o p r n m a n o

]'«»

, i m » B a p o ' D ' a n n a n m m ' a n n o « D n o « m nrVi vb

dît

n o «

«mi

a

o m p

o ' ao t n n o

,nmna» p»«nn ainaa

,nnioi ^ s a m m

n ' n »

.nmaon

n o "? o n o «

ann »imsa

nao» .n^nnna way m m »

pmn1?

« n a

n ' » « n a

n«n» no^i

n a o i n V n n n m n nan i « n a

,nrn n y n n o

a n 1 ? i1? n ^ n

.na^a

.nionpn

mn»

^»y i u D n « n i ' « n " ? i o a a m a n n a ' n n m - | n « n

m p ' s o o m a y o

n^nnnn [n^nnna 12

Kim -poar

mn n « n a n

naDi n ^ n n n

in

.-" m o m . u p n? [rrrr

.1 * ny-rn - » n'rp® [rrm>

291

PROPOSITION X V

A s for the third, stating that 'time cannot be conceived except with motion,' it is equally false and for the same reason.

What

we may reasonably maintain is that, since rest is the privation of motion, when we measure time by rest, we inevitably conceive of motion; but to say that the idea of time cannot be conceived except it be connected with motion must be denied. As for the fourth, stating that 'whatsoever is not in motion does not fall under the category of time,' the Intelligences, though immovable, may still have existence in time, 51 inasmuch as it can be demonstrated that time existed prior to their creation on the ground that time does not require the actual existence of motion, but only the supposition of the measure of motion or rest. 3 '

In

view of this, the passage of Rabbi Jehudah, son of Rabbi Simon," which reads:

'It teaches us that the order of time had existed

previous to that,' may be taken in its literal sense.

Nor will

there be any more need, [if we admit the existence of time prior to creation], to go as far afield as the Master in the interpretation of the first verse of Genesis and take the words Bereshit bara [.Elohim] to mean that 'In being Himself the principle, [i. e., the cause], God created heaven and earth, 34 —an interpretation which renders the verse tautological and redundant, for, if He created the world, He surely was its cause and principle.

T o say that

[what the Master means is that] the manner of creation was suchwise that God was nothing but a principle and cause 35 —far be it from him to entertain such a view, for previously 3 ' he has already discoursed at great length and in full detail upon the refutability of Aristotle's proofs for eternity and has also adduced convincing arguments in support of the belief in creation, as will be shown later, 37 God willing.

292

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE r w m

onn

u w

no

niron

w k

y

p - i s n ,p é t r i n

D niDiNn m p y

ua'i

»»pn

ro

¡t;t

^ u r t

m n

n m p n n

dn

kVn

n t u a

,]"jd

n

.D'irram D ' r j y n ni - n a y m . o n w i J ik dh1?^ o n o n n o n v r a «"7«

«in

1SDD3

xbx

nsDo . u

p j o a m

D's^nna

D't»'«

I

o m o n

w m

*p"?nD

,Dipon

"73310

a^tyn p n s n

n o "?3 ' 3 m o i a n

onn

' c k

niron

11^312

^ t p n

m n

n'n» d k

o'3"3yn m H 3 y 3 i . o n w u

.mpty

n»3

. « i n a [1^-« n m ' ( D m " i D 3 [nean

sp^n1?

10

,]orn

.onpono nsdjh

^ s n

n m p m

m ' p r a

. y m

n

in an1?» a n o n n

.•"> C1SDD3) - » ( f a n ) 7

mn

n o nvn1?!

ni^y a n v n a «îni ,03

rrwy

ia»'i ,*p33 n 3

(Q'SI ]'D3) - * » 1D3 [|'03 8

'n^3i

5

i ' D 3 -TI-IK

- i n u d m n nsn

. D ^ y i

t f b *p3 u w

nvn"?

1« p r n 1« m p » n

k ^ i *p: u w

D^naan

- w y

mno

« i n ,-ISDD3 D ^ T

o n p o n o m p o

nuorn

r o n ^ i *pi d ^ m i f «

71?'Dn l ' o n

,"7133 " p i n m

11? D m "

. o ^ n s n

^ î n

1 3 ^ D P V N 1 ?:? - i k u d

nnn m p o

^oœv

bowv

15

"?3tpv r m o m

DHD i (0H3) 5

nVI3

[no] m p D 9

.»^i»

.>3011313

293

PROPOSITION XVI PROPOSITION PART

XVI

I.

PROOF of the sixteenth proposition, which reads:

'Whatsoever

is not a body does not admit of the idea of number except it be a force in a body, for then the individual forces may be numbered together with the matters or subjects in which they exist.

It

follows, therefore, that separate beings, which are neither bodies nor forces in bodies, do not admit of any idea of number except when they are related to each other as cause and effect.' 1 Inasmuch as the quiddity of a species which embraces numerically different individuals is one in species but many in number, it is self-evident that no number can be conceived in that quiddity except with reference to some distinction arising from time, place, or some other accident which may happen to exist in the particular. 3 Now, that which is neither a body nor a force in a body is called a separate being, 3 and this, according to the preceding proposition, does not fall under the category of time, 4 nor is it bounded by place,5 nor can any of the accidents be attributed to it. 6 Hence it follows that no numerical plurality can be conceived in separate beings except with reference to some distinction which is appropriate to them, and such a distinction may be found among them when they are related to each other as cause and effect. 1 PART

II.

EXAMINATION of the sixteenth proposition, which reads:' Whatsoever is not a body does not admit of the idea of number except it be a force in a body, for then the individual forces may be numbered together with the matters or subjects in which they exist.

It follows, therefore, that separate beings, which are

294

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

o n v n a kVn bbo

a n a V a t p v n"? .«qua n a k ? i »113 d 3 » k p .D'^yi

nits>B3ne> n » V . n a n a p ej^d' k ^ p n n

03 m m

~iaa

noa

nn«n

nan

- i n « - i k i o t n'n'tt» d k K i m

.npi'jno

napan ^ a t s r t

n'mtp i n

. v n i n a i v t n n r n y x o K a din1?

« m oki

naa

. m a n a | " 3 d a n a Vatpv n a a m e n i n « n i - i N t m

. ^ a t p n B>B3n D x y m a n

nwrw

no-rpnni» n « T

rnVy

niB>B3nD

nn»

bo

nnvn

naa

n r » n » nai . - p a n ' Dea m p a i n o

,e>B3n in

osy

niVatínonn

i3D' -wto 13»' naa nr^i .mnKn nrtpntp noa .nnK nmon nvn oy inrrn" onpo nn« ?al?B> no1? .osyn nup3n nibopiDnc -iKian Kin .napan

Kin - w i n dki

T^ao i3D' naa nrbi .mn«n VB& msVnnn naa nn«n •y pamtp naann Kin -íNtwntp -idií?i

.o^iVyi ni^y vn'tp

ny-tn ,y3D3 ana ]"3on n*n' nth ,ioy nnKnni ^yisn "?atpn a i 1 ? iV n b ' V m , - t d s 3 d ' 3" 3y

nyn Kino

Ka'tf

n n » K a a m pía» nK*vtp

kVk

noa

nKan'

naa ntn

.nynn nr "?ya inrno

.nayts> n»a 113a nina vn Kh (D^na3 nhy1? vnw •' ...m^sfiDnD)« [»)Vnn'9

.»CT'n'f) 1K6

.i ^ [pym B^DM

ivn»i7

.» n o n o s * n m t a ie

.'«= nvKiBK [Dj'twi

q - a m - » mp:nn [mpaino-< a r w r w

- 1 nnrvon [ninDn - 1 » » i m n " - 0 hd^i 10 ^ pmnne-o njsn--"''tdi^

n a3n

[TDi^ii3

-iriNn m r o -

«i^nnn ^ * íp^nrv

. » ¡ p i n i " nn»i2

wn [«in» 15

n j n n ['3j 14

.» nn« nnw pmnn

295

PROPOSITION XVI

neither bodies nor forces in bodies, do not admit of any idea of number except when they are related to each other as cause and effect.' This proposition, too, can be shown to be false, in view of the fact that the souls which remain immortal after death must necessarily admit of the idea of number.

For the following dis-

junctive reasoning is unavoidable, namely, that the part immortal is either the substance of the rational soul itself® or the intellect acquired' by man by means of his senses and faculties. 10 Now, if it is the substance of the rational soul itself, then each soul is possessed of an individulaity according to its attainments in intellectual conceptions or in its union with God," blessed be He, for the attainments of one soul must differ from those of another. This being the case, souls should be numerable in the same manner as individual corporeal substances," which, though being all one in essence, are numerable on account of their each having accidents by which they are individualized. And if the immortal part is the acquired intellect, the case is still clearer, for the intellectual conceptions acquired by one soul are different from those acquired by another. Thus the souls of the departed may be numbered even though they are not related to each other as cause and effect. To say that the part immortal is only the predisposition which unites with the Active Intellect and becomes one with it,' 3 whence indeed the souls of the departed could not be subject to number—to say this would be to maintain a view which will be shown later1« to be erroneous, and far be it from the Master to espouse it.

It must, therefore, be concluded that in

using the expression "separate beings," the Master means only to refer to such beings as have always existed apart from matter and had not been previously forces in a body.15

296

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

• w y nynttri p i s n

^ s n

y a » i1? y y u n o "730 n i D i N n n - w y yat^n n o n p n n niNaa Dtí>» , u í y j n n ' n ' IN , T H n y a n p N 3

y i n DM . r n s m

u o d - n y a i n n -itt>M3 nr^i , y y u n o i y i o o - a i n o « i n ' 3 ,'nn ,n'nB> i n a Dipoa .otwn Mini . y y u n o n nNP' .tfsjn Mini . y a o n M2£D3n y a o n n'ntp no 1 ?!

.nyiann nniM y y i a n ' M ^ Mint? M^M

'nVa yyiano Mint? ' r a atpna .t^in1? nN-ia 'n"?a a^ya y y i a n o a yyiano Nnp' -WM Min nan , a i y a o n'n' y y i a n o ^ s i

.yao

Nxoa . n i o x y a iaoo y y i a n o no^" y a o n nana» w a y

,nxo .i^aa

'D1? nam . y a o I"? B>' y y i a n o ^OP 1M31? nMrn n o n p n n -HD' DMI ,ntJon "?M p M n nyiana , y a o a yyian'tp DM ,yyianontp •?yan nyiana , n - i ' n a a DMI . n ' j y o n "?M p M n n y i i n s . n n a n a yaonts» -1M13D a n a n a n n n n ' n a a i m a n a D'yyianon nan ,'n no^> ,nro i M a n ' y a a a y y i a n o n D^IMI "?M p M n nyiantp n n

. y y i a n o n n"?ir Dna

D ' e b n n o y a a a D'yyianon LNXOATP

n o a i1? nyiann ]'níí> a " i n o Min . n V y o n b»« ttwn nyiani ntaon , D ' b ' a p » D ' T r x a D'yyiano v n M1? p n ' n DMP , m W a opa Mint? yjorto*

.»n,n,®--,i:j?,Mi»i'ny,3nn»«]-liP}nnD3

->nj"3j?i-«i'»wsyD[mD9

.«pawm 'a»n'7

.«•" p«m irbycb wm nyunau PAI»[P«nnyi^WI6

.•>' rbya - ' ntao 17

[»»]2

.' - n y i my: - yyunom

n«r» murro 11 1 15

.t^

0

.»N^YOU

." yyiano pun» " P 1' yyunn

PROPOSITION XVII

297

PROPOSITION XVII PROOF of the seventeenth proposition, which reads: 'Everything moved must needs have a mover, which mover may be either without the object moved, as, e. g., in the case of a stone set in motion by the hand, or within the object moved, as, e. g., the body of a living being, for a living being is composed of a part which moves and a part which is moved. It is for this reason that when an animal dies and the mover, namely, the soul, is departed from it, the part that is moved, namely, the body, remains for some time in the same condition as before and yet cannot be moved in the manner it has been moved previously. But inasmuch as the mover, when existing within the object moved, is hidden from the senses and cannot be perceived by them, an animal is thought to be something that is moved without a mover. Everything moved which has its mover within itself is said to be moved by itself, which means that the force by which the object moved is moved essentially exists in the whole of that object.' 1 The main purpose of this proposition is to show that everything moved has a mover.' For every object in motion, is moved either by nature, as, e. g., the motion of a stone downward, or by violence, as, e. g., the motion of a stone upwards, or by volition, as, e. g., the motion of a living being.3 Now, in the case of objects moved either by violence or by volition, it is evident that the motive agent is something different from the object moved.4 But that the same holds true in the case of an object that is moved by nature will become clear from the following consideration: 5 Objects which are moved by nature are found to vary with respect to the direction of their motion; thus, e. g., the tendency of a stone is downward, whereas that of fire is upward. This seems to indicate that the motion of each element is not simply due to the fact that it is a body in the absolute, for, were it so, the elements would not each move in an opposite direction.

298

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

onvròi

.atpjn n? « i n » n o a , n n « b s b m n v o n

N'n r n n r o n

i n »

* n p j n Nini , n a

"?a m i x

p

nyunntp

d n run .motiva D'snitpoi

oe> - i p n n a n r n y s o K a

,«'nn nyunn

nyaon

. y a o n Nin -im* Va y a o n ' n n r h

-itfj? r u i D t p n p i s n

nan p

. p r o n n

uod p n

n N a a

Nini ,inVir i k ' x i d V y e n

" ? y o 3 n ' n V a N , - r n « n y n a a «2:03 n ' n t ò TDDtf

, y i i D dbf n ' n ' t ò i

p s D i ' « . n D i n i y a i o iV n ' m ,13 i k ' x i d n ' n d k i

nonpnn

onm

.Vysn

nan p

"id«'b> n o ' 3 n n

n m

. ^ y e r m

n'ina

.oxya

i k u d

«intf

-

dki

didki

.»iena

m i » N'xin n®« «in

Vyiea

» n ' n ' t ò •r™'™p111

ok

.D'-ipoa

n o 1 ? ,an®?ir

no«nn

dn

ana

(rrri) i ò s

n'n'

nan

. ' » o k [1^7

fiBKnn=1 * nnDKnn » 1 ' rrawu 12 n ' i n a » nDBnai n ' i n a » n o s n m n ' i n n 14-15

nut 11

n«rn

n s m

n»~tpnn

nan

, i m

naa

n'n'tí» d n

N'xintp p e o

u

yjian

naa

oxya



. t d d

.n? p m

l'^y

.ya»

^ d h

N S ' t p n o bots» n m i K n r n w y n a i o p n n o n p n n

« ' x i ó n n ' n ib 'a . m a n a

D'i»

«ini»

.Vysnoa ]'«

j y n o o [yjDrM .•" cnoi [Qnm 10

.nDeni

.»(ny'jDn>3 ••r-uni» nrw

.» > o n p n a ik > = ^ m p » a dki 14 .nosna

PROPOSITION XVIII

299

It must rather be the fact that each element is a particular kind of body that accounts for its particular motion. Now, with reference to corporeality all elements are alike and they all share it in common. Consequently, it is their respective proper forms that must be assumed to bring about their diverse natural motions, 6 and that, indeed, by means of a force implanted in form, which force is called nature.' The nature of an element may thus be considered as its motive cause.

PROPOSITION XVIII PROOF of the eighteenth proposition, which reads: 'Everything that passes from, potentiality to actuality has something different from itself as the cause of its transition and that cause is necessarily outside itself, for if the cause of the transition existed in the thing itself and there was no obstacle to prevent the transition, the thing would never have been in a state of potentiality but would have always been in a state of actuality; and if the cause of the transition, while existing in the thing itself, encountered some obstacle which was afterwards removed, then the same cause which has removed the obstacle is undoubtedly to be considered as the cause which has brought about its transition from potentiality to actuality.' The author concludes this proposition by saying 'Note this.' 1 This proposition may be proved inductively as follows:3 Whenever it is said of anything that it is potentially a certain thing, it means that it is either potentially an agent or potentially a patient. In the latter case, again, the potentiality to suffer action may refer either to a substance or to accidents. 3 Now, in the case of substance, as, e. g., the process of generation and corruption, 4 there can be no doubt that the cause that brings about the realization of this potentiality of generation or corruption is not identical with the substances themselves, for it is well

300

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

'U'BO . o n p o a DJDKI

-LAMP

,KÍPU Í?K OA-iBxn 1 ? nan .NNOKON -IKB>I Y K A I n n a a

PBD

D^INI

. i n x y T D B ' K"?I i D s y NIN'

, ? y e n "?K NON P

OK'XVI D ^ y s ' Ktpua -ipk nant&>

V « , n a a nan 1 ? "?YIS KVIIP NANA -IDKJBO n n . ^ Y I S N n r n a a ron ,UDD p n « i n OKI

.UDO y i n IK i a n'rrtp DK nanw P S D

5

r r r p O K .bnys 1 ? ia nantt» no 1 ? nan , u « i n DKI . i n h r IK'XID VB DK n 6 i

. T o n "?yea n v r n n ,'KJTI i a i D n ' « b i yaio i1?

KIN y n o n T D D ni"?i ,yjio i1? n'nt? vso

Kin , T » n "?ysa n'rr

.K'xion

, * p n a a Kintp n a n a u i d n o , n a m nra p a r w

n a n n \ T DK . b y i s a DJOKI

nm

10

. m a n a V y s n o a ' U ' P a " n ' nan

y n o n TOONIF N'N DK N N . ^ a p o n n x o yjio i1? » ' i ^íyB 1 ? i a

IDIOB [TDKKO-«ni*" natura paj—i^B (nn> 4 1^6-7

n'Dn]

unan'»1 a»pun'» 10 a

P rvn'»

^yiDÍ?»óiyB 1?) 6 ' rriTB>•> wv [irn» s

DKI-P' 3"nn' - •« 11

tmfr - 1 ' ae-mn1? [tu-m nV 2 .P^ («in® nana)13 nana) -13 p 1 .»n'Dn... nrt>w 7-8

.1 rnr

nana iron - » r a - » nam [na-in -

PROPOSITION

XVIII

301

known that nothing can generate or corrupt itself.5 Likewise in the case of accidents, as, e. g., the change of quantity, quality, and the other categories, 6 it is clear beyond any doubt that since all these accidents must needs have a subject for their existence, it will be the force contained in that subject that will energize them and cause them to pass from potentiality into actuality. 7

In like manner, in the case of a potential agent, as,

e. g., when we assert of something that it is the potential agent of something else,8 there is no doubt that the potentiality must reside either within the agent itself or without it. If it is without the agent, then it need hardly be said that the cause which brings about the transition from potentiality to actuality is likewise without. And if the potentiality resides within the agent itself, then, if the agent is assumed to encounter no obstacle nor to be hindered in its action by the lack of some required condition, it would have to be permanently in a state of actuality, since the capacity to act resides within itself. As the agent is not, however, permanently in a state of actuality, we must assume, of course, that the cause of its inactivity is due to some kind of obstacle, and so whatsoever causes the removal of that obstacle must be considered as the cause of the transition.® We must, however, bear in mind the following distinction: When we assert of anything that it possesses a certain potentiality, if that potentiality is one to receive action, then the thing in question, [upon the realization of its potentiality], must indeed undergo some change. In the case of a potentiality to act, however, it is altogether different. For when an agent has the potentiality to act, but is prevented from acting on account of some obstacle on the part of that which is to be the recipient of the action, then, though the remover of that obstacle may still

302

CUESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

nrf?i ,^yii>a 'li'tf a^n*

,^ysn

nan p *rxion «in

. n i p m ,"iotwa n w n n o n p n n o n m n i n o i p o a Tyntt> n o

nyifnn p n s n ,]itwnn miN'xo^ -upn b i w m o w n mtpy y p n n n o n p n n -liNaa , v n u D i n x o j o n »a . w i o x y n r n a a r n « ' s o n - w b k K i n naD 3 " n D n d d h ' ntfitpn i n , m y :

n1? o n i

in

,nxoj

.NXO' tib o n i N ' x o V n'n'tf o n , m D w i n ' x o W n o ' a , n o x y a m w a o

N'm

. a " n p npi^nn y a o ' a ,-ipdn 1» 57302 i n i o x y n r n a a a " i n o T'i2C' n^> . w i o x y V a " i n o Nino n o ' a . l m o x y V a " i n D u j ' n i a " i n o m y n nan ,naD íniN'xo^w n o i

-nyna

myn

yaoa wnw n o ' a . v n o x y ^ yaoi p

.1x1 a d

nyna

m wni

n w t p p o k a " i n o .naD íniN'xo 1 ? n'n't? - w b n *n .miN'So 'n^a i « n ' n ' n x j . w i n ' x d » ,-ioiV n x n , i o x y n r n a a u p o n . í n a o - n y n a - n y n n T ' i x o n ' n w -ib>bn . m a [myn-»nn proi 11 [iniDxj!^]im«'XBi3

.3

p"iiT] • a"in' m r 10

.»im«'XD[i«]y:o: 12-13

pnynn-» n'nw m'n'Pis

.» lDxyas

myna... rroi) 11-12

.>«» inaD poxy-» nao [-iotmh

* a"rr 1 .»myn

.»n'n® inw» - = > .-"> m y n

PROPOSITION X I X

303

be called the cause of the transition from potentiality to actuality, yet this fact does not imply that the agent in question must itself undergo a change.10 It is with reference to this distinction that the author has made his cryptic remark and concluded the proposition by saying "Note this."

PROPOSITION X I X PROOF of the nineteenth proposition, which reads: 'Everything that has a cause for its existence is in respect to its own essence only possible of existence, for if its causes exist, the thing likewise will exist, but if its causes have never existed, or if they have ceased to exist, or if their causal relation to the thing has changed, then the thing itself will not exist.' 1 This proposition is self-evident.' For a thing which has a cause for its existence must in respect to its own essence be necessary, impossible, or possible, these being the only alternatives conceivable. Now, in respect to its own essence it cannot be necessary, for whatsoever is necessary in respect to its own essence cannot be conceived as non-existent, even were there no cause in existence ;J whereas that which has a cause for its existence would have to be non-existent were its cause not to exist. Nor can it in respect to its own essence be impossible, for whatsoever is in respect to its own essence impossible precludes the possibility of there being a cause to bring about its existence. Hence in respect to its own essence it must be only possible, that is to say, its existence, be it eternal or transient, might be conceived as non-existent were its cause not to exist.4

304

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE o n w y n b3t$>

a"inD

D'asiwno i s i « a

p"isn . p r o n n moiNn

^ u r r

D'-wyn

mi«'*»1?

m D

noipnn

i'K r u n

-iiN33

jniosy

nrnaa

.0'3"3ynD '3 nn

.nniDn i b h d . m e

n u n a

3"irp

^iN'son

«V

nVbhi

ay m a n

1

? ^

d d k h r p ' i ^ rmrn

3"inD

i33'N

n3D

noipnn

íniK'^D1?

. m D ini«^»1? ]'« n w s o n

3"inDntt>

.rntpy

•ntpyi 'jtfD 33-110 vby

i n a n

"?3íí> r n o i N n

« i n t f n o by iíiik'xd

p i s n ontpyi

,]iBttnn nn«n

,iniaxyb

n w x o n

nmpnn

u t o s

3"ino

ir«i

- m m

vp^n

, n a i n n i ^ b a n"?ir l a n n ' p b ' n t y no"? n : n

131? D i p 1 3 3 1 , n 3 D i r m ' X D 1 ? 33-11DH p 3 " i n D 133'K p

o^ay .mana

.Diuo-imi »in i ^ j d

ytwin

^ j h

íniN'xo m D K'n n 3 3 - i n n nniN nan '3

-ib>k

0 « 3311Dn

DN H3H , 3 3 1 1 0

. n i N ' X O n 3 " i n D 133'« H 3 D w i n ' x d 1 ? .niN'xon

* rror irnan7

. « i » K n:n . a m e n o 'nVa anoi m e ' k"?p ,-pKn -I0N03 -ipk .mionm .in^it atwn T'ix» k"?b> ,0'ip iK ip n ^ a r -wk K'ntp nnonn own mne? no1? .attun p . p n o -wk a'OB'jn Vki nxp "?k anxp vpVn Dm Kintp ,3x0m -WK Kim .aiwno a m e n o 'n"?a onti> noV .i1?» n m m nam n o s n trrei . n n o n s

o ' n p o i m r t p ' i ,i-idk3 insn .3Xoni

nnonni

min1? »iDsnm mnnV* nosnm rvinn-13» wnn-» m«'XDn6 .-> a'j"jj>n 'j»3 imin" > nn"-'»5pni>» qa^ws .P nDon1^ mrfr •>< nDenm rrin^» «' IDBHI wm 1 (Kin)-' non 1»=p-t 1 nan 9 .»ir®'®' ' imD'»'i-' imparl-» ímx-iu = .> »irisar h ckpn)12 .*»«rano 6to -«•>• ía-iaxn n mom .-> (®tbi mana) -»onpon -»rrcn •

PROPOSITION XXII PROPOSITION

307

XXII

PART I .

PROOF of the twenty-second proposition, which reads: 'Everybody is necessarily composed of two elements, and is necessarily subject to accidents. The two constituent elements of a body are matter and form. The accidents to which a body is subject are quantity, figure, and position.' 1 The existence of matter is deducible from the necessity of postulating the existence of a subject underlying the process of generation and corruption. Matter, however, is itself absolutely formless, for if it had any kind of form, substantial change would not be generation but rather alteration; it follows therefore that it is form which confers upon matter individuality and definiteness and renders it a 'this' in actuality. 3 It has thus been shown that matter and form are the constituent elements of every body. 3 Accidents are likewise in need of a subject, and there are some accidents which are separable from their subject while there are others which are inseparable. 4 Now, those which are inseparable are quantity, without which no body can be conceived, figure, which belongs to the category of quality, 5 and, being defined as something bounded by any line or lines,6 is inseparable from body, and position,7 by which is meant the relation of the respective parts of a body to each other and the relation of the body as a whole to other bodies.8

Thus these three accidents are dis-

tinguishable from the others by reason of their being inseparable from the body, and it is these accidents that were meant by the author when he said that a body 'is necessarily subject to accidents,' as he himself immediately makes it clear by mentioning 'quality, figure, and position.'

308

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

Twhwn

- w y

'awo a s n o «in owa

p n s n

»^»n

Dnwyi D'nwn nonpn3 rrvpra

n a n on new ,im« D ,_ royon D'a"ay 'aw am ,n~on3 D^ay .ímixi 13« nyn's 1 ?! .nrn b»b»3no ' y s w n p~iS3 nianpn n « r nan ,nmn nomo 33-110 'ribo otra kxd' *i33 b»3«i ,ni3io íaa'K ntn .n«rn no~rpn3 n uw no aw ía-on n33i ."»'own onan Kini

o n p y i

rwbwn p i s n

,ptwnn

W d h

,n33 Ninw no bsv m o i a n onwyi w"?wn nonpnn m«33 .b>ys3

no ny3

»so'

nnsnb»«

io3

-iwbk

.D'tinsono

to^on I'kw n«T pwb'n no ni-iws« íniDsyn ^B3 , n o n i - i w B « ,b» y b 3 « s e

,

o'3-i

bwbow

-®maion 6

n3

i3i33

n«Tn

n i o 2 f y 3 i ' ? i

n o « p

w b n ib>

. » T a >«* u n p - » » í m n p n 5

.'au-iam nn.?s3no

dni ;«inn

«b» w n o n y 3 n w b « n 3 3 n o «

-i»p-iiO , iriDDn->"P-'->'* TE S «

NO«»

^ 3 « ;NO

NO«

N 3 3 N O « RRN'

.bbo Dn'no "73 . - I D I N P NO ' S 3 KIN N O N P N N N«R H N 3 3 UH N T N ' P NOI NN-IOSYA

«IN

NO«N

NINN

,ID2SY3

NNTT>BNNI

NNTPSNNT?

,-I3N

UDD

N 3 3

, - M

HINT?

N33

NO

NMSNRW

N N T F B « N N'N'T? -IB>BNI , P V M E N NNT^TT» I N S Y 3 - I P B N -VINTYNTP 'NJM - I W P

B>DB>3 -ITPBNTI> NOXN I ^ T O , U D D YIN " I 3 N 3 N^RO

. L O X Y S N N T P B K N N ' N ' NTPTATP ,-IRJ NR"?I .N 1 ? OC^A ^ 3 P O N I

RVRPW NOIB> N M 3"N*

-M

1

N'N'P

1

, 7YB3N:!CO'N 7TI>NDNY3-ITT>3K-I33 ? - J N X ' N ' P S , I D S Y 3 N N » S « N NVNT? NN

' 3 , N O RIYS N Y J

N ' N ' P UPAN

NRN O W B N D O D ' N M

^IRTYN

bzpo

IONS

.NYJ INVN

. A X Y 3 - N Y N N N 3 D KIN NANEAN NORM

' W N P^»NNA ]IB>*AN P - I B 3 N M P N N N A N 3 N N U

TFONCNTT» N » 3 .NNONO

.•> »01 » VBV [K^EN - » («SO'®) - 1 NAN [NRJ 4 [^5>D3 MXD' - » M'N'] -Q37

.I * A P I R MATO (OS&AA) - = I NWSN® I * (NMAN)- 1 « 3 » N'N [NN'NS

NN INTVI - 1 = NA [NO6

>» P I * INVI NONPNN 'AI KIN - » NO VAI [NOI 9 -

= "^N3AN®BNNÍ'[NA3NN®BMR!»II 1

.I ' [-»ON»] T N W - ' -HPBK313 •WON [N'N'] - E VAP' 17 0 3 ) - I VOWB >*AI Í®N»:» 19

.P'^ VYOA « S " « » BYNB TER

."NRWSNIIO

.I NON CBD) - = [TVN O] «IN

NVI» [N'N'®I2

NAS [KIM NNFEXN»

M

.•> A ' W » A"IN' [A N' - » 'VN'TF ' INVNP [NRN» 16 > [DM3] 0XJÍ3 ' DM3 [DXJJ3 18

.IIAPNIIP

.P^-MP^NO-HI'IRA--'

PROPOSITION XXIII

311

at some time it may not. The proposition, therefore, has no more meaning than the statement that man is man.5 It may be rejoined that the statement 'and in whose essence there is a certain possibility' means, to affirm that the subject of the potentiality [after its realization] has a possibility [of continuing] to exist or not. To be sure, the expression 'a certain possibility' would not seem to warrant such an interpretation, for were the statement to refer to [the continuance of] the existence of the subject of the potentiality, the use of the expression 'a certain' would be quite inappropriate. Still supposing this to be the meaning of the statement, then the conclusion 'may at some time not exist in actuality' is entirely inappropriate, inasmuch as that subject has already come into existence.4 What seems to us to be the correct interpretation of the proposition may be stated as follows: 'Everything that is potentially something else, and the possibility [of becoming that something else] is inherent in the thing itself...' s The implication of the last statement is that the possibility involved in a thing which is potentially something else may either inhere in the thing itself, thus, e. g., black has in itself the possibility of becoming white, or be dependent upon something external to itself, thus, e. g., the sun has the possibility of turning an object black provided the recipient of the action is moist.6 Referring, therefore, to the case where the possibility is inherent in the thing itself, Maimonides states that at some time it may not exist in actuality, that is to say, it may be non-existent.7 The reason for this is as follows: When the possibility is said to be in the thing itself, and not dependent upon anything external to the thing, then it must be in matter which is susceptible of change. Consequently, it may at some time be non-existent, for changeful matter is the cause of privation in any corporeal substance.* This interpretation of the proposition will agree with the use the Master makes of it in the first chapter of the second part of The Guide.*

312

CRESCAS' C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E

i v y

n j m K n

pnsn

^bon

n a a « i n t o n o ^ a t f n n o i « n o n t p y i ty"?B>n n o n p n a .^yea «so1

nn'pna

n o n y a n a > s « n a a , n o n i n t h s « m i o x y a 1*71

n x d ' p ntt>s« - i n s nan , p aa ' y a i p n p n s a dip n o « a n 'B1? nan "pap1?

l o a r y a I1? na>« . n n n v o n m s n"?ira ^ y s a

ia n«tw m o w n

«"71

, n i «

o o n n i n n t p y i y a n « n n i o n p n a n « r n n n y n n "?IE>n n a a i

.TON

nnraa

'J . ^ y e a

.'tf'Wn no«oa

NXO' «"?tt> na'aya p x v

oca

n a mpna o n t p y i m n .nninppa psD j w

nyniNn p i s n n a a « i n t p n o ^aa; m o w n

.jitwnn

o1?!«!

.ontpyi

DP n « a a i . m x n

^ a n

ontpyi y a n « n nonpnn

ni«aa

. • " n y 1 ? n o n a « i n n i n t p s « n ' a , m a n a i o n "?ya « i n n n « n a n « i n t p not? n n

.anpe? n o a y n o s y a n n « i a o n « r n n o n p n n

D«i ,nn«n oy n«ttn nan « n a n'n'P a " m v n n « nan naa na3'« n m x n t p , n o n n » i n l a n n nrtp n o i , n n « n a n « i n n ' n « " ? .D^iy 1 ? n o n a « i n nintt>s«ntp n o « n ' n r ^ i « t f i a a no«'ti> 0 « , n n t t > s « n t y

no 1 ?

o

. n n « nan nvn^ naa

.nmynaty - p *

D"?i«i

n o « ' ® o « i ,n«aar n ' n ' t » nti>s« nt^nan noinnf n o « n i " ? « a , « x o a n .neman n o n a

V i n ' P n t p s « n«aarn n o « n

i^to

,nnyan

«naa

. « x o a a ntt>« n i n t p s « n nra n a n a n nan n«D [n«tn i 3 n'ai f a n .1 -W114

.» naa nan) 4

>' n"ai I'D 7-8 . » ' o inn 11

j "

.» KXDJ rrrr * NXD: nmpna» * nmpna

DIP ] W 9

0

rrrr [NXD'3

naipnn [nimpna

mxn mm)8-9

.» n"ani Tan

nam n'n N1? DNI 1 NN«Ninma-tn n'ntubDNI " P ^ - i n N - o i K m n'n N1? QUI 14-15 .* nowuip >= -niyrintzM7 nnwsK 20

.'»=' n r « - » nnxmis

"itojKtn»< ntcutn - 1 ' Kin® m

1

•3

n'n' [rrms P 'D

wwa [twin 19

in«n «in '-iKur is

PROPOSITION XXIV

PART

313

II.

of the twenty-third proposition, which reads: 'Whatsoever is in potentiality, and in whose essence there is a certain possibility, may at some time not exist in actuality.' Again, in view of what has been said above in the seventh chapter, [Prop. X, Part II], a body may exist in actuality without any proper form and, though having within itself the possibility of receiving form, will never be without actual existence, inasmuch as the corporeality always stays with it. 10 The same criticism may be urged also against Propositions XXIV and XXV. As for Proposition XXVI, we shall examine it in Book III, God willing, wherein we shall show that there can be no doubt as to its falsity. EXAMINATION

PROPOSITION XXIV P R O O F of the twenty-fourth proposition, which reads: 'Whatsoever is potentially a certain thing is necessarily material, for possibility is always in matter.' 1 This proposition is self-evident, being the sequel of the proposition preceding. For whatsoever is potentially a certain thing, must be the subject of that potentiality," and it must remain with that 'certain thing' [even after the latter has become realized], for, Were it not so, it would not be the same thing.» Anything answering to this description is matter, inasmuch as form has not the potentiality of becoming a certain thing. It is thus true to say that possibility is always in matter. We must, however, observe that inasmuch as the term possibility may apply either to an existent subject, thus, e. g., bronze as matter may become verdigris,4 or to a non-existent subject, thus, e. g., verdigris may settle on the matter bronze, s in this proposition the term possibility is to be taken with reference to an existent subject. 4

314

CUESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE • H & y i mwDnn p i s n

osyn

rn^nnntp

nsn

mown

ontpyi

^ o n conn

nonpnn

* n ^ a o ntPB« ' « i . n n i x n i n o n n

m«aa

.'t^xn

n o m on

y j o n K i m . n n i x n b>apb» w o n n e w n y « » u n y a n y a o noi"? y a o n i n y i a n a j v y n nrD a ' n n n , n o n a n nDiai

nom1? j'oon

a n n ' t ? n o nr "?aa n « a n n n a a i

n a r r a n n o n p n n K'n n « n

.wioxy y r

,anpn

.yyianom

t ó nonn o

,U3Dn«

•litwnn y a o n o npn1?

nwaon

n m s m n o n n nvnb> o . n o x y a m s u o n « r n

nonpnn

n m n ' n a n n t p n a n a íanawi , n a ! ? í o x y ' a s a n n « b o n'jita ntps« w

n « u o Kin ,]Dnrn n a n n r « o « V i . n a n o

o'» m^nnn r n pbn p

ompn

yao

nnynn

n'n

.nmx tsa^i nmx bips' oni

;nnuini

nonn

nnana - p s « m » nobv

n ^ i t a nts>B«

d'nsoj

. o ^ i y ^ n«tt>a

nroxyn

.nnpoa « m

oxyn

.mVnnnn

n « u o « i n , n n n v o n n m s n ^apb» n o n n

d V i k i . m ^ n n n a naoa l a w , n a n n D x y o y a o n n'ni .iniosy y ^

noW

.Vyis

noinntp no1? , i î d o o ^ o n j w

« ' a o y a o a ivyntp n « u o « m

,nyiana yyiano1? i n i o x y a

no1? yao

.yyiriDai nyiana jvyn a » n ' » '«» a"in®-» ho [^>336 raxya c:b3) - a nntfl] i n n 10 Kin i r o n » «

.•> a'^rv

a"im5

jnon Vy [jrjar® s

,>p p [mm*"" p [nVnnmi3 ."pi nyunam

.» 1 in 7 .= c q i d m i

.lapn^n (-«nm r > rrai [roui .'»i?11«*

."p-nS oniDxya) - < an 1 ? [no1? 17

PROPOSITION XXV

315

PROPOSITION X X V PROOF of the twenty-fifth proposition, which reads: 'The principles of any individual compound substance are matter and form, and there must needs be an agent, that is to say, a mover which sets the substratum in motion, and thereby renders it predisposed to receive a certain form. The agent which thus predisposes the matter of a certain individual being is called the immediate mover. Here the necessity arises of inquiring into the nature of motion, the moving agent and the thing moved. But this has already been explained sufficiently; and the opinion of Aristotle may be formulated in the words that matter is not the cause of its own motion. This is the important proposition which leads to the investigation of the existence of the prime mover.' 1 This proposition is self-evident. For inasmuch as matter and form do not each exist separately without the other, and we perceive that while one thing is generated from another thing 2 it is not generated from anything casual, 3 it is manifest that the process of generation and corruption would be impossible without the assumption of a permanently residual substratum capable of taking off one form and putting on another. 4 Consequently the essential principles of any individual corporeal substance 5 are matter and form. Though the privation which precedes 6 [form] is included among the principles, it is a principle only in an accidental sense.7 Then, again, inasmuch as the process of generation necessarily implies the existence of a mover whose function is to render matter predisposed to receive its proper form, it is likewise manifest that the process would be impossible without the assumption of an agent.' As that agent, however, does not constitute an essential part of the substance, it is not numbered with the principles. Still, the assumption of such an agent is inevitable, for matter cannot be the cause of its own motion,» and, furthermore, it is by means of motion that the mover acts essentially upon the thing moved. Consequently, the speculation concerning the mover leads to speculation concerning motion and the thing moved.

NOTES to the

Twenty-five Propositions of

Book I of the Or Adonai

NOTES INTRODUCTION TO BOOK I. 1. Hebrew nvnnn rmiDNn bab nVnnn Ninp prom m»a. "Of the first root which is the beginning of all the scriptural beliefs." The term CI®, like its synonym "lp'JJ and its Arabic equivalent is used in mediaeval Jewish philosophy in the general sense of fundamental principles of religious belief (cf. Neumark, Toledot ha-'Ikkarim be-Yisrael I, pp. 1-5). Crescas, however, uses it as a specific designation for the beliefs in the existence, unity and incorporeality of God, and it is contrasted by him with all the other fundamental religious beliefs which he designates by the expression "Scriptural Beliefs" nvnn rvuiDN. The latter is subdivided by him into (1) n n i D ' i n i i B , fundamentals, (2) nvnoNnijn, true opinions, (3) nnao, probabilities. (See Or Adonai, Ha^a'ah, p. 3.) Hence my expanded translation of this passage. 2. Hebrew vwa ra'jy "won' noipnnc. Similarly Hillel of Verona begins his commentary on the Twenty-five Propositions with the statement: nianpnn i1?« i w a a pan -]1? - p s o TIN y-n 'jp. "Know, my brother, that thou or any one else who wishes to understand the meaning of these propositions must needs have recourse to the explanation of two things." The two things enumerated by Hillel, however, are not the same as those mentioned here by Crescas. 3. Or Adonai I, iii, 1. 4. Hebrew innoto w m j y 1B1N. But later: iWt •,ene>n by TiDyb. The Talmudic expression by ID]), to understand, is used in mediaeval Hebrew as a translation of the similar Arabic expression to pause at, to pay attention to, to understand, to form an opinion of. (Cf. Ginzberg, Geonica, Vol. I, p. 25). The expression . . 3 lay is used by Crescas in the same sense. Literally: "how we know the truth of this principle." 5. The term n^ap is used by Crescas in the following three senses: (1) Tradition as distinguished from speculation, in which sense it is used here and later in III, i, 5, p. 70a: ni?ap3 «aw no 'sa HT3 rvtPN-u n o t o j?rr nya iN'som ltrvn yvrva torn. In this sense 319

320

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[13I

it is the equivalent of man, as used in Emunot we-Deot, Introduction: xb a n n v m vhvz w i n l a a i n ' y a i -|»d Dir^y laroi riJDNJn rrnnn «mi vrw, and III, 6: ruotun rrnnn Vup"? mpn crVatra w. (2) Rabbinic tradition as distinguished from min in its wider sense of Bible, as below at the end of this preface: r w o n -fi£» n^>apa nD«rui nnnn v"?y mints' nDa and in I, iii, 6: mo^w i«iao Kin ^ n nana «a naa memo . . . n^apm mwn i s d nrn tmtt>n. In this sense it is also used in the following passage of Ifobot ha-Lebabot, Introduction: n^apm ainam l?awn id nnsxn nDann avn'b man] niwoi (J^iJlj). (3) Prophetic and Hagiographic books of the Bible as distinguished from mm in its narrower sense of Pentateuch, as later in II, i, 1: "73 'a idn ,nr by D'aina nam idd .rtapn n«ED om 'n ttnn rnaa1?. In this sense it is used in Emunot we-Deot II, 10: nprnn by abs waDn (J^-JL*) Vaipom ainam Gannon® 'mtu® ivai ]VD"in. Cf. Mishnah Ta'anit II, 1: naaa1? ljnp «in n*?ap3i n a n a ^«l. 6. Hebrew nvyau. The term nvyau is used by Crescas both with general reference to Aristotle's writings on the natural sciences and with particular reference to his Physics, as in the following passages of the Or Adonai: (a) III, i, 1: nyion® nvyaaa -ltonn® 's1? myunatp nmipn kyi pnynn. (b) Ibid. ' o w n man® nvyataa -mann® •'sb •b -]sn i'«. (c) III, i, 3: nvyatsa pyi» 'ob ivy tayna marr iaatt>. (d) IV, 4: nniD'n D'y» D'D-un® nvyaea -itunn® 'sb djdni. Of these four passages only the first and third may refer to the Physics proper. Aristotle's own terms vaiKa and ra irepi 4>iiareojs are also sometimes to be taken as references to his general writings on the physical sciences (cf. Zeller, Aristotle, Vol. I, p. 81, n. 2). In this place it would seem that Crescas has specific reference to Aristotle's discussion of the Prime Mover in Physics, Book VIII. 7. Here Crescas seems to be using the term D'jnn«, "later" (or "modern," "recent"), to distinguish the Moslem and Jewish philosophers from their Greek predecessors. Further down in this passage, however, he refers to all these names as the ''first" (or "early", "ancient") philosophers: n a n bblD D'mp1? on» '¡¡b O'JllPiOn Q'BlDl^'Bn, evidently in contrast to Maimonides. But the

NOTES TO INTRODUCTION TO BOOK I

321

term "ancients," DTimpn, is elsewhere applied by him to the preAristotelian philosophers (cf. Props. X, XV) and D'DTipn to Aristotle and his followers (cf. Book IV, 2). In another place he uses the term "later", O'ïnnN, with reference either to Averroes or to Gersonides (cf. Prop. I, Part II, n. 17, p. 409). Evidently Crescas uses all these terms in relative and variable senses. Shahrastani applies the term ancient, to the pre-Aristotelian philosophers and their followers, and the term later, ^¿-UJI, to Aristotle and his followers among the Greek-writing philosophers. (Cf. Kitab al-Milal wal-Nihal, ed. Cureton, pp. 253, 311). The Moslem philosophers, beginning with Al-Kindi, are considered by him as a distinct subdivision of the later. (Cf. Ibid. pp. 253, 349). Among these latter he considers Avicenna as the "first and foremost." Ibid. p. 312: ^ ^ j j ¿ . ^ ¿ b J l ,—U*. Maimonides himself, in Moreh 1,71, like Shahrastani, designates the pre-Aristotelian philosophers, especially the Atomists and the Sophists, as ancient (I'Dlpno1?« :D'ïmpn ,DWN-in) and refers to Aristotle and his followers as the later ( p i n n » ^ ,D':nn«n). Still within the Christian and Moslem theologians he distinguishes an earlier group and applies to them the same term ancient or first: D'lWNin D'"DlDn ¡ D ' H n o n ID (limp« 1 ?«) D W t n n D^NjjDP'n ]di D'-ixmDn OMvn p -*l

^

JlLlk..j'\ j ' l j

o*-»

L. J-ii

r^y 2®'nw no l a w aipDn nnn« Kin no nDN' oni

ipn wm ibdhn n j n .

Averroes, Intermediate

Physics

V I , 7: l^to inb'Tf1? nxd'» no 'a

p ® bs ,QHann i"?N3 psiDn law"? 'itnp nan 1 1 m v j s ^ v n » 'D3 o , _ m n n^nnn do'iot. Shahrastani, Kitab

al-Milal,

p. 312: ^

^

Shem-tob, C o m m e n t a r y on the Moreh I I , 1: Van ait?' v1?«, and I I , 4 : r b y dijdj Van a w

.—Jj Dann n y i D^lNl

-1®« no«n »pa1? nx-rtp '0 'a

v^n ntw « i m i b d h n - j - n " i W 'itn.

13. H e b r e w 'TiBlD u t a . Crescas uses the term HN3 in the sense of " p r o o f " in general, as in this expression and in the expression nonpnn HN33.

T h i s logical sense of TIN3, of which the A r a b i c

is is

to

be

distinquished

from

7IN3 in

the

sense

" c o m m e n t a r y " , of which the Arabic equivalent is

of The

term in its latter sense is used b y Crescas in Prop. I I , P a r t I I : yopn nsoV niK'33.

T h e term ilBID is used b y Crescas in

two

senses: (1) Apodeictic or demonstrative proof, as in this expres-

326

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[135

sion, which is the accepted meaning of that term in Hebrew. Cf. Millot ha-Higgayon, ch. 8. (2) The formal process of reasoning or the argument by which the proof is established. He thus speaks of a "llNa as containing several D'nsiD or of the nsiD of a n t a , as in the expression nrn n e w a n w a pia» no inn, p. 140. Etymologically, n t a and o'f. reflect the Greek ¿7r65«^ts a showing, and nsia and j*. reflect the Greek Ttnnypiov, a sure sign. In Aristotle both these terms are used in the sense of a demonstrative proof. Evidently the terms "TttO and o^*. have lost that forceful sense of demonstrative proof. The term "I1N3 is also used in Hebrew as a translation of the Arabic to designate a kind of reasoning which lies midWay between pure tradition n^ap, and demonstrative proof nsia, O^v-'.. Cf. Algazali, Mozene %edek, pp. 6-7: -|T13 nr nan1? ua-iNm inn»« mpm i1?« -nm ,-nton Vqj n"?apn "naiD la rbyi neian bua nViy rrn la. Mizan al-Amal, p. 3: ^'.j^. ^ J^J u ^ -l>- Ji\ xliJl (J'.-r^ ¿r® j .

14. Hebrew "im«n '¡33 rP!T nfa jvym. The Parma and Jews' College MSS. have here the following marginal note: 'B3 nxT n r r n ® n a n n riaiD. The Vatican MS. has the same note but without ¡urn». What Crescas means to say here is that in his criticism of the philosophers he, as interrogator or opponent, will press his respondents with consequences drawn from their own premises, even though he himself does not admit them, for his purpose is to show the contradictions to which their own premises might lead. This sort of argumentum ad hominem, as it later came to be known (see Locke, Essay Concerning Human Understanding IV, xviii, § 21), is one of the several forms of Aristotle's dialectic arguments as opposed to the didactic (see Grote, Aristotle II, p. 71). Didactic arguments are described by Aristotle as "those which syllogize from the proper principles of each discipline, and not from the opinions of him who answers" (De Sophisticis Elenchis, ch. 2). A dialectic argument, contrariwise, must

135]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART I

327

therefore be one which reasons "from the opinions of him who answers". The expression "iDlNn "lOND 'B3 thus reflects the Greek ¿k t&p tov iiroKpivofitvov do£wv (ibid. 165b, 2). TDl«n 1DND = J.UJI J ^ . The same expression is used by Averroes in stigmatizing the dialectic character of Algazali's arguments against philosophy, as in the following passages in his Happalat ha-Happalah: Disputation I: wxya pyn 'A3 n1? m i t a hdkd 'S3 rrvno nn. Ibid, i»xjn I'jyn 'B3 onyi V m nun ™ K'n o»k no^zrt npVneni -»inn hond 'B3 Disputation I I I : noiNn iomoo '3. Disputation X I : w a n 'bd vb omoNo 'B3 i i t u d nn. Cf. also Intermediate Physics IV, i, 1 , 9 : no1? D'3D0 wlTBn nn loxjn noN^i -loiNno nN-up. 15. Hebrew - p i ] W . Similarly later, p. 216: «1301 l:1?*« - | n I'Kl. The equivalent Arabic expression Jcr" used in Ifobot haLebabot I, 6, p. 47, 1. 2; p. 49, 1. 13, et passim, is translated by Judah ibn Tibbon simply by n^D' or "HPOK 'K.

PROPOSITION

I

PART I

1. The Hebrew version of this Proposition is taken from Samuel ibn Tibbon's translation of the Moreh Nebukim. 2. Hebrew l^» rv^sn Equivalent terms for ri^an are r t a n , nhsD ,«IID. Cf. Narboni, Ma'amar be-'Eçem ha-Galgal le-Ibn Roshd I I I : o>r:y >ssa TO«' n"?i30 ' r t a IJ-IDK®. Neveh Shalom VII, i, 3, p. 100b: n^>jnB ormx nvno 3"ino i^»3 nn n^iso viVa byo. Narboni's Commentary on the Moreh, II, Introduction, Proposition I : Q'^apD »]id ]'«i ^ s n '3 ,ran -ko wn "jid rum. Likkutim min Sefer Mefcor IJayyim III, 10: "iriN ^3 'oxy vn '3 n!?3n vbb o'swm tar« onixy on-mo o'oxyno.

328

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[135

3. Physics III, 4-8; De Caelo I, 5-7; Metaphysics XI, 10. The corresponding references in Averroes' Intermediate Commentaries which are the direct source of Crescas' summaries of Aristotle, are as follows: Intermediate Physics III, iii, 1-8; Intermediate De Caelo I, 7; Intermediate Metaphysics X. 4. Hebrew Viaa, i. e., nvrrno^ from sensible

X^P^TOV

aiadtjTwv,

separated

objects.

5. Hebrew HK3. The same designation of this argument is used by Crescas later, p. 174. Aristotle himself designates this argument by the term "logical" (XoyLKUTepov, De Caelo I, 7, 275b, 12). Similarly the first of the second class of arguments in this chapter is characterized by Crescas as "llta (below p. 150), whereas Aristotle calls it "logical", X071KCOS, in Physics III, 5, 204b, 4, and "general" (or "universal"), KaddXov in Physics III, 5, 204a, 34, and in Metaphysics XI, 10, 1066b, 22). Averroes calls it "general", Vra. in Intermediate Physics, but "logical", '31'jn, in Intermediate Metaphysics. The interchanging of these two terms may be explained on the ground that among the several meanings which the expression "logical" proof has in Aristotle there is one which describes it as consisting of abstract reasoning from "universal" or "general" concepts which have no direct and appropriate bearing upon the subject in question (cf. Schwegler, Die Metaphysik des Aristoteles, Vol. IV, p. 48, n. 5; Ross, Aristotle's Metaphysics, Vol. II, p. 168; both on Metaphysics VII, 4, 1029b, 13). Averroes himself similarly describes "logical" proofs as those "composed of propositions which are general and true but not appropriate to the subject under consideration. And therein is the difference between such propositions and essential propositions, for essential propositions are appropriate and pertain to the subject under consideration. And the difference between logical propositions and contentious propositions consists, on the other hand, in this: Logical propositions are true in their entirety essentially, whereas the contentious are false in part, and are not true in their entirety except accidentally." Intermediate De Caelo I, 7, Third Proof: pN i®« ,mpi«n m ^ o n mmpnn p m-oino Dm mmpnn» .nvosyn moipnn p i irrra Bnenn inn ,u pyon i m nnnvo mmpnn n1?« pa p ai ensrim .v1?« nia-ijni ia pynn j i d s nnnra nvosyn

135-137]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART I

329

mans nvnu'im Dxjn V33 mpnx in l1?«» nvms'in nionpnn pai nvarnnn mpoa dn '3 mp-nx p^ra. Cf. Sejer ha-Gedarim, p. 19a: m^iD vnionpn «in ,':van ts»pn monvo 'n"?3 on» ,mp-rca 6. Hebrew ]'», kind, class, section. The Sulzberger and Munich manuscripts read here ivy, Speculation. The term ivy, Arabic "ltH, as a designation of a class of arguments is found in the Hebrew translations of Moreh II, 1. Crescas himself uses it later in his criticism of this proposition. Most of the MSS., however, read here I'D. 7. Hebrew 1»« -13. Literally: "in the following manner. He said:" T h e word 1DN, "he said", is generally used in Averroes' Intermediate Commentaries to introduce the beginning of a translation or paraphrase of a text by Aristotle. Originally in Aristotle and Averroes the arrangement of the argument is as follows: (a) The infinite cannot be something immaterial, and of independent existence. Physics III, 5, 204a, 8-14, which is restated in Intermediate Physics III, iii, 4, 1 as follows: "We say that it is impossible that there should be an infinite existing by itself apart from sensible objects. For it would inevitably have to be either divisible or indivisible. If it were indivisible, it could not be described as infinite except in the sense in which a point is said to be infinite and color is said to be inaudible. But this is not the sense which those who affirm the existence of an infinite are agreed upon (lms'tP', cf. 31®' = ^ « above p. 325, n. 12), nor is it that which is the subject of our investigation." (Latin, p.452 v b, 35). .nwniD1? ' r n : i d x j q noiy 1V n'bon i'n -on n x d ' » h p s « ' w -iotui •?apD ' r t a n'n o«i . n ^ p ' k1? in npi^nn ^apa invno yjo' «V® nn n"33 N'n® nnpn -idk'ip i»3 vb an n"3a «intra -ikiit k1? n:n ,npi^nn npnap nao u'ni ,p o ' i d i n h l r r o ' f n1? nsn nn .yam 'n^a rontp n«-iD3i .v^y Cf. Metaphysics X I , 10, 1066b, 1-7, which is restated in Intermediate Metaphysics X . (b) The infinite cannot be an immaterial quantity, either magnitude or number, existing by itself. This refers to the views

330

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[137

of the Pythagoreans and of Plato, both of whom considered the infinite as a certain essence subsisting by itself, the former identifying it with number, the even, and the latter identifying it with magnitude. Their views are given by Aristotle in Physics III, 4. Physics III, 5, 204a, 17-19, restated in Intermediate Physics, loc. cit., as follows: "If it is divisible, it must inevitably be either an immaterial quantity or a quantity existing in a subject or one of the immaterial substances. It cannot be an immaterial quantity, for inasmuch as number and magnitude are inseparable from sensible objects it must follow that that which is an accident to number and magnitude must likewise be inseparable; and infinity is such an accident, for finitude and infinity are two accidents existing in number and magnitude, inasmuch as the essence of number and magnitude is not identical with the essence of the infinite." (Latin, p. 452 v b, 36). oxy rrrv 1« nxd: noa 1« ^-u: n»a Kin® .^ap1 •« t^i 'ni?3 "Yijwm nsDon rrn® in« ,Haj noa rrrre» ^aai .D^ian D'oxyno ,3'j *?na3 v t a -nj?®ni nsDo1? mp'P no ,TrrB> a"ino nri .»mo1? D'^naj ,-iiy®ni i&DDa o'nxoj nnpn ••yo n'^ann n'Vann 'a .rr^ann myna «mi rv^AN I'K® no mnn v t a ny®m IBDDH mno 0 Cf. Metaphysics XI, 10, 1066b, 7-9, restated in Intermediate Metaphysics, loc. cit. (c) The infinite cannot be an accidental quantity existing in something else. This refers to the views of the early Greek Physicists and of the Atomists, all of whom considered the infinite as an accidental quantity, either the magnitude of one of the elements or the number of the atoms. Their views are given by Aristotle in Physics III, 4. Physics III, 5, 204a, 14-17, restated in Intermediate Physics, loc. cit., as follows: "Since it is not a separate quantity, nothing is left for it but to be an inseparable quantity. It will then be something existing in a subject. But if so, that subject, and not the infinite, will be the principle, but this is something, to which they will not agree." (Latin, ibid.). run .^raj v t a nna rrrw -ww -taa run ,!?ia: rraa mrr N1?® nnw ,n!?nnnn «in N®un nr ¡TIT nan ,p nr rrrr» -into .Nina teen'® no n'n' .nra nv N1? cm n^an ft*® no

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART I

331

Cf. Metaphysics XI, 10, 1066b, 9-11, restated in Intermediate Metaphysics, loc. cit. (d) The infinite cannot be an immaterial substance, having actual existence, like soul and intellect. Physics III, 5, 204a, 20-32, restated in Intermediate Physics, loc. cit., as follows: "After we have shown that the infinite cannot be an immaterial nor a material quantity, there is nothing left but that it should be an immaterial substance, of the kind we affirm of soul and intellect, so that the thing assumed to be infinite, that is, described as infinite, and infinite being itself be one in definition and essence and not different in thought. However, if we assume the infinite to be of this kind, its essence thus being at one with its definition, then, as a result of its being infinite, we shall be confronted with the question whether it is divisible or indivisible. [In the first easel, if it be divisible, then the definition of a part and the whole of it will be the same in this respect, as must necessarily be the case in simple, homoeomerous things. But if this be so, then the part of the infinite will be infinite. For the parts must inevitably either be different from the infinite whole or not be different thereof. If they be different, then the infinite will be composite and not simple; if they be not different, then the definition of the part will be the same as that of the whole, for this reasoning must necessarily follow in the case of all things that are homoeomerous. Just as part of air is air and part of flesh is flesh, so part of infinite is infinite, forasmuch as the part and the whole in each of these are one in definition and essence. If a difference is found in the parts of homoeomerous bodies, it is due only to the subject, which is the recipient of the parts, and not to the form, for if we imagine the form of a homoeomerous body without a subject, the parts and the whole thereof will be the same in all respects and without any difference. [In the second case), if we say that the infinite immaterial substance is indivisible, which must be the case of an immaterial qua immaterial, then it cannot be called infinite except in the sense in which a point is said to be infinite. In general, the treatment of the existence of an immaterial infinite is irrelevant to the present subject of discussion". (Latin, p. 453 r a, 37).

332

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[137

any rvrrtp i«tw «V n:n ,Viaa 'n^ai Haa noa n'n'» uVaa® nn«i n'^an ]'« I»« mian nam n'np ny .Vattrn B®aa urn« ia«at2> laa .bnaa 'nVai ninai n n in« l a i ,n^an «!?a nwi .n'^an ]'«a i«inan V i Kin naa« , m 'sa wiaxy rrm ,p p:ya man iit>«a» «•?« ,ia«aa pVnnn o«i .p^nno 'n^a pb-nna «in» ia«at» 01 niana a"in ,n^an j w noa pya ,in« I'jyn nra una bom pVnn n a n\T run .p^nna «in» m a « no p*?n n'.i' iaa , p pyn n'n iti>«ai .D'pVnn D'ainan o ' m m i D'laia bib n a a nis^nna vn'P 0« iyaa' «V D'p^nn® nn .m'aai 11? rv^an ]'«» i1? n'^an i'« nD n'n ,o's!?nnB vn o«i .D'sVnna 'n^a 1« n^an ]'« «in its»« !?am pbnn n a n'n'tp a"in D'sVnna v t a rn d«i .bwb n'n' « h a a n a pbrw iaa .o'p^nn D'ainan o'lain Vaa a"nna ]'ay nrtt> 'b1? ,naa in« n^an i'«® no win i1? n^an na p*?n ]a ,ib>3 itpaa p"?m , t i s i'i«a D'p'rnn nie^nn Daa«i .oipaai n a a nn« oa bom pVnn n'n iti>«a ,1"? tjt'x .mixn 'asa D'p^nn "japan 'asa Kin D'ainan D'atwa D'Tisn bsa i n « Da "?am p"?nn n'n .«ana nVira o'p^nn nainaa Diwn m i x itv«a inaa1? a"nnan wm .npi^nn "?ap' ttb «in® una« d«i .«j^nna 'n^a nnpaa ia«'ip na i s by pi n^an "?ya 'n"?a «in® rby ia«' «1? ,^iaa «in 'nVa

n'^an }'« "?iaa l a i n i x ' x a a i a « a n W a a i

.nV n ^ a n ]'« « t i p

.naann n«r^ Dnra Cf. Metaphysics XI, 10, 1066b, 11-21, restated in Intermediate Metaphysics, loc. cit. In the Physics, it will have been noticed, parts (b) and (c) come in reversed order. Averroes, however, presents them in the Intermediate Physics in the order in which they appear in the Metaphysics. In his reproduction of these arguments (from the Intermediate Physics), it should be observed, Crescas has rearranged them in the following order: (a), (d), (c), (b), parts (a) and (d) being somewhat merged together. His reason for departing from the original order must have been in order to conclude the arguments with the rejection of the infinite as quantity on the ground of the inseparability of quantity from material objects, which would enable him to introduce the discussion about a vacuum. See below n. 12. 8. Hebrew npi"?n, diaipeais. (Analyt. Prior. I, 31). More fully *73tta npiVn (Epitome of the Physics III, p. l i b ) . By the analogy of purine in the expression p^nna '«an ¡£>pn, it is to be translated by disjunction, disjunctive proposition (judgment or syllogism).

1371

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART I

333

9. This is taken from part (a) of the argument as given by Averroes. 10. This is taken from part (d) of the argument as given by Averroes. The composite nature of this passage, consisting, as we have shown, of parts (a) and (d), explains the redundancy of raising again the question whether the immaterial infinite might be divisible immediately after it has already been concluded that it must be indivisible. The same difficulty has been pointed out by the supercommentators in the text of Averroes. But there at least the superfluity is not so obvious, since several passages intervene between (a) and (d). Cf. Narboni's supercommentary on Averroes' Intermediate Physics, ad loc. (f. 34a): "The question whether it is divisible or indivisible has already been discussed above [see above note 7 (a) and (d)], and he should have, therefore, taken up here only the possibility of its being indivisible, etc. Our answer is that the two alternatives are enumerated here again because above their enumeration was only casual, for an immaterial quantity is indeed indivisible. But here, [speaking of an immaterial substance], it is the proper place for the discussion of the question as to whether anything immaterial is divisible or not, and therefore he enumerates the two alternatives etc. Or we may say that [even here] he mentions the possibility of its being divisible [only to dispose of it], for an immaterial substance is certainly indivisible and its very essence compels us to think of it as indivisible." «•?« nwy1? rrn «Vi .nVyn1? nntry naat? ,pbnno 'n^a 1« p^nno «in® «in rntp npiVnn nr «'an® naont» ,Dn"? aitw .'iai pbnno 'n^a «in d« .npi^nn Vap' «I? "?naj noan® 's!? ,mpoa npi"?n na nrcy n^yaVt» maya maya» ,-kmo i« .'iai ]«a «'anV -10« onann nn'o« «'an i«aae> niayai 01 «'an .npi^nn "?apD irtw -ntr ímnoi npi^nn po 1:'« Via: oxynp .npi"?nn Vapo «in 0« p 11. A marginal note by a pupil of Crescas on the Parma and Jews' College MSS. reads as follows: "I am greatly surprised at the Master, of blessed memory, for all this redundancy. Having started above by saying that the infinite must inevitably be either an immaterial quantity or an immaterial simple substance and

334

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[137

having shown that it cannot be an immaterial substance and must therefore be an immaterial quantity, he had only to show now that it cannot be an immaterial quantity. What need was there for raising the question whether that quantity, which he has said must be immaterial, can be conceived to subsist in a subject? I t is possible that what the Master, of blessed memory, meant to say here is as follows: Hence, by the process of elimination, the infinite magnitude must be a quantity. But, then, it must be inquired concerning quantity itself whether it subsists in a subject or is immaterial. But it cannot be immaterial. It must therefore subsist in a subject. Hence an immaterial infinite is impossible. According to this interpretation of the text, his statement «ana «so: nan rrn oni, i. e., and if it [ = the infinite] were a quantity subsisting in a subject, should be understood as if it read 'and since quantity must subsist in a subject' etc." tsV»1 .rbyob no« «in» in« '3 .ma'-i«n nr ^>aa V'r a m n 'n«"?Bj 3"ino ron "71a: oxy «in® we> ^naa oxy 1« ^133 n»3 rrn'» n« ^-ran rivr t « i nna invn bush p i ib -i«im «^1 ,Vi33 noa n'n'® •?Tijn 'a I«®: ran .nr «in a m jun® -ie>b«i .«una «xjm naa Viaan mm .ina: 1« «win «x»3 «in d« loxya nnan in -npra .noa «in n'aan n'aa mm® «in np® .«»in «xdj mm» -i«b>' mn .bn33 mm® Vcn «in «xds «in noan® m«i -id« i^«a «in nan ,'iai n»a mn o«i n»«i .'iai «»133 What this pupil of Crescas is trying to do is to twist the text and read into it a new meaning in order to remove the redundancy. The redundancy, however, is due to the fact that Crescas has somehow rearranged the original order of the argument as given by Averroes and outlined above in n. 7. 12. The reason given here by Crescas for the impossibility of an infinite quantitative accident does not agree with the one offered here by Aristotle. Aristotle says: "Further, if the infinite is an accident of something else, it cannot be qua infinite an element in things, as the invisible is not an element in speech, though the voice is invisible" (Metaphysics X I , 10, 1066b, 9-11 and cf. Physics III, 5, 204a, 14-17). Cf. Intermediate Metaphysics X : "Furthermore, if that which they assume to be infinite is only of the accidental kind of beings, it cannot be an element of things qua infinite, as is assumed by

[139

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART I

335

those who affirm its existence, just as the voice is not an element of the letters qua its invisibility." HD' ¡TIT «V nan ,mpnn ]'»a «in rra inn':1 i»« nr rrn OK Ttyi 1 rrn' k ?® no ids ,u onoixn min'r® no 'D3 n"aa Kin» no ixo nurcDii .n«i: 'n^a «in» no ixd nvm«n mo' "?ipn Cf. also above n. 7 (c). Crescas has purposely departed from the original text in order to form a natural and easy transition from the problem of infinity to that of vacuum. 13. Hebrew rrn' 133. The use of 133 with the imperfect, which does not occur in Biblical or Mishnaic Hebrew, is common in Crescas and in other philosophic Hebrew authors. It is undoubtedly due to the influence of its Arabic equivalent which is used, with a variety of subtle distinctions, both with the perfect and the imperfect. With the perfect the Arabic means not only, as the Hebrew 133, already, but also now, really, expressing the fulfillment of an expectation. With the imperfect it means sometimes, perhaps. Some of these usages of the Arabic may be discerned in the use of 133 in mediaeval Hebrew, but in the case of Crescas its meaning has to be determined independently from the context. According to Ibn Janah the basic meaning of both and 133 is the emphasis of certainty and the affirmation of truth. Sefer ha-Shorashim, p. 211: '31jn 133 niBl i«'2fDn^i i3in on ,'aiya ipi 'iaya 133 V'i .ni^on 'nen ip. This is in agreement with what is cited in the name of Arab grammarians. See Lane's Arabic-English Lexicon, p. 2491. 14. Hebrew » i n n by "]!}». The expression ennn by naiyo (see below p. 186) is the'equivalent of ^y-WJl s^UaJl, t6 ipXVS airtiadai, petitio principii, begging the question. (Cf. Joel, Don Chasdai Creskas' religionsphilosophische Lehren, p. 22, n. 1). The Greek expression means to assume the very thing propounded for debate at the outset. In the Latin form of the expression the term principii is a literal translation of e£ aPXV*More accurately it should have been quaesiti or probandi, as in the English rendering (see H. W. B. Joseph, An Introduc-

336

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[139

tion to Logic, p. 591, n. 3; Grote, Aristotle I, p. 225). In the Arabic and the Hebrew renderings, apxvs is accurately rendered by WTI, which are the technical terms for quaesitum. As for the Arabic «jjUa«, its root means, in addition to return, proceed, issue, result, also demand with importunity, and hence it is a justifiable translation of the Greek aireiadai, which, meaning literally ask, beg, is used in logic in the sense of assume, postulate. Thus also the Arabic translates the Greek aXrrma, postulate, (literally, request, demand) in Euclid's Elements (See below p. 466, n. 109). But how the Hebrew rDiyo came to be used as a translation of the Arabic both in the expression Pinn "?J? roiy» and in the sense of postulate in Euclid (see below p. 466, n. 109), is not so obvious. An attempt has been made to explain it on the ground that the Hebrew rDiyo has also the connotation of asking, demanding, begging (see Moritz Lowy, Drei Abhandlungen von Josef B. Jehuda, German text, p. 16). It seems to me, however, that the use of roiyo as a translation of »J- 3 ^" is due to its synonymity with 110. It has been shown that the Arabic j-iU» is often translated by its homophonous Hebrew word TID, though the two have entirely different meanings. (Examples are given by Moritz Lowy, op. cit., pp. 10 and 6. n. 1). As a result of this the Hebrew 110 has acquired all the meanings of the Arabic J S u c h Hebrew words with Arabic meanings are numerous in philosophic Hebrew. The translation of S j j U . by "ttd would thus be quite usual. But as n o in its original Hebrew sense is synonymous with roiyo, the Arabic thus came to be translated by l"D"iyD. It is not impossible also that the Arabic has acquired for the Hebrew readers the original meaning of the Hebrew TID and and, without knowing the underlying Greek term for • they took the expression wj_jikJl ^ e ¡jjlyaJl t 0 mean "arrangement of an argument on the question" and thus translated it by BTnn by rD")J?D. That rD"lJ?0 was taken in the sense of TTD may perhaps be gathered from the expression BTnn Vj? roiyo TID nm used by Crescas in I, ii, 1, p. 190.

I39-I4I

N O T E S TO P R O P O S I T I O N I, P A R T I

337

A similar modern case of the failure to identify the Greek term underlying the Arabic in this expression and of taking it in one of its ordinary senses is to be found in the rendering of this word by the German Zurückgehen (cf. Haarbrücker, Abu-l-Fath Muhammad asch-Schahrastdni's Religionspartheien und Philosophen-Schulen, Vol. II, p. 225, ed. Cureton, p. 357). 15. Quantities are divided into "magnitude" and "number." "Magnitudes" are said to be "measurable" but not "numerable." Again, "magnitudes" are said to be "small" and "great" but not "much" and "few." If a vacuum is "measurable" and is said to be "small" and "great," it must be a magnitude." Cf. below p. 418, n. 33. 16. Hebrew V31, reflecting the Greek o'Lovrai used in the corresponding passage in Physics IV, 7, 214a, 24. 17. Cf. Physics IV, 6. 18. Averroes divides Aristotle's arguments against the existence of a vacuum into five. Crescas, in his turn, groups these five arguments into two main classes, one which may be termed elenchic and the other deictic. 19. Cf. Physics IV, 8, 214b, 12-27, and Averroes: ,TD ,'j?2ttJN yav ptwnn nswn ,n"s ,3'3. 20. Hebrew ü'ntw, literally, bodies, i. e., O'aws D'om, simple bodies, by which Aristotle generally calls the elements. Cf. airXa 3pD, literally, de^afiepr], btKTUiov. But here it probably represents the term X&Pa (see above n. 33) which also in Latin is sometimes translated by receptaclum instead of spatium. Cf. Physics IV, 2, 209b, 11-12: ho Kal I I \ a 7 w Tyv v\r}v Kai tt)v X&pav ravTO (fr-qaiv elvai tv rw rt/xatw. "Idcirco etiam Plato in Timaeo materiam et receptaclum ait idem esse." 35. Hebrew TTO nnv Physics.

nr TiNai. Not found in the Intermediate

36. Hebrew ^Upn prn ~inv Aristotle would have said that air being more attenuated than water will impede the motion less than water (see Physics IV, 8, 215a, 29). 37. Cf. Elements, Book V, Definition 14. This reference to Euclid is not found in the Intermediate Physics. 38. Cf. Physics IV, 8, 215a, 31-215b, 21. 39. Hebrew n"33n n"an Dira ODITB> o'^apon ':t£>a -iNiao KIM, literally, "the ratio of a finite to an infinite." This statement is not found in Averroes. He only says: "But inasmuch as in a vacuum there is no recipient, motion will have to be in no-time, that is, in an instant." Aristotle has here: "But a vacuum has no ratio by which it may be surpassed by a body; just as nothing (¡jLrjStv) has no ratio to number" (Physics IV, 8, 215b, 12-13). nnya V'n ,pr nVira nynnn rrnriw a"in, Vapo mpna p« rprr® no"? "73«. 40. Hebrew pr nhr, axpovov. 41. This last statement is not found in Averroes. It is based upon the Aristotelian principle that time, motion and magnitude are continuous quantities (Physics IV, 11) and hence divisible (.Physics VI, 2). Cf. also below Propositions VII and XV. 42. That is to say, both these arguments are based upon the proposition that there cannot be motion in empty time. The argument referred to is found in De Caelo I, 6, 273a, 21-274a, 18, and is reproduced later by Crescas in his third class of arguments. The original passage of Averroes reads as follows: n'33 V'ja na NXD' DNE> HOD I^V -\m nsran RO ins loxya riaion nn 'japon umn itrto ,nn .]or nVin UDD yyiirion yvurv® 3"iir» ' » ^ v n

342

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[147

$pj»n d î t nyunn n y i n n on 1 ran .»i^nna y i s m m a ,D'yasn '3® i'a dtp i«aa n«®: ,naa n"aa D'jrion ' w d i n « i:ron h p î o nn«a Vapnn up'jD n&ta i s vai .pr n^ira nyunn n'nnt» u d o 3 , v m ' nan .dit rnyun yip ]'a nvr n^w 3"in' ,-rn« jm-n .rnnta vruram myinn 'ntp In Gersonides' supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics, (1ad loc.), Averroes' passage is paraphrased as follows: pN TON'l n"aa jrw na «s»'1 dnb> u»o ~itt>« nsinn na Kin neion ni row -ran ltJDH« n « a nan nn .pr 'nVaa udo yyunon yjnjrp» 3"in'» ^ v n o ^ i y m o'ni&n - i s d s . Evidently the text here is based directly upon Gersonides. The expression nsion n3, vis demonstrationis, nervus probandi, refers to the formal arrangement and the cogency of the reasoning which shows the inference of the consequent from the antecedent. Thus the Figure of a syllogism is its na. Cf. Averroes, Kol Meleket Higgayon, Ni^uah, p. 58a. ruiora KPpn na ma idno Kim rroton. Shem-tob's Commentary on the M or eh II, 14: nr nai b1?»' vb ,-nynn nn« ctayn Vyis dn :n«inn nr Vy «in nsion 'iai i»Viw 1« "7j?is nvn!? D'tunn "73 îo^tw See below n. 77. nan .jnon ^

43. Cf. Physics IV, 8, 216a, 12-21. 44. Cf. Physics IV, 8, 216a, 26-216b, 12, and Averroes: 'yacs Jîûtf '»'»nn nsion ,n"B ,3"a ,yd ,'jrent*. 45. Hebrew Hnn nna. Cf. Matthew 17, 20. Averroes has here inn nru, a grain of millet, and refers to Aristotle : ûViyn D333 nvn iBD'n« nn«1® i»a inn nana. The expression is to be found in the Physics IV, 12, 221a, 22-23: nal ô ovpauos tv rfi KeyXPV ore yàp i} néyxpos éariv, t o r t /cat ô ovpavbs. The Greek Ktyxpos, a grain of millet, is usually translated by the Hebrew ]nn. It is thus rendered in the following Hebrew translations of Averroes' Intermediate Physics: (1) Serahiah ben Isaac, MS. Bodleian 1386. (2) Kalonymusben Kalonymus, MSS. Bibliothèque Nationale, Cod. Heb. 937 and 938. The same term is also used in the following supercommentaries on the Intermediate Physics: (1) Gersonides, MS. Bibliothèque Nationale, Cod. Heb. 964. (2) Narboni, MS. Bibliothèque Nationale Cod. Heb. 967. Cf. also Narboni on the Moreh II, Introduction, Proposition 2 : inn i r u a nn« !?a n'n'i.

147-1491

343

N O T E S TO PROPOSITION I, PART I

The expression S n n "ITU, however, is found in Ibn Tibbon's translation of the Moreh I, 56: O'aaan W?ll ' m n n "Vm O D'DinD D'D"pn. Cf. Emunah Ramah II, iv, 3, p. 63: "vnjrtP l y m^nsn b&i "?-nnn -itud -)-n by It is also found in the following works: (1) Isaac ben Shem-tob's second supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics (loc. cit.), MSS. Munich Cod. Heb. 45 and Cambridge University Library, Mm. 6. 25; and (2) his third supercommentary on it, MS. Trinity College, Cambridge, R. 8. 19(2). (3) Abraham Shalom's translation of Albertus Magnus' Philosophic Pauperum, MS. Cambridge University Library, Mm. 6.32(6), p. 3la, 1.9: VlD "?mnn mao VaVjn. (4) Joseph ben Shem-Tob's translation of Crescas' Bi^ul Ifykere ha-No%erim, 5. (5) Both these expressions occur in Profiat Duran's Iggeret Al Tehi Ka-Aboteka: MD'P ]DKn Kin "itPBK DKl inm bmn *vnn i"?3 ohyn. The two terms occur also in the Intermediate Physics, in the passage corresponding to the above-mentioned Physics IV, 12, 221a, 22-23: idj? k x m « i n n a n a Kin® i a n o « 1 n a m n \ T iVk® n n 1 inn u-u dj; ikx»' -oa» 'b ? "p-nn u t a d'diot ivp T3ai. 46. Hebrew

n:n

DDipD n'O'tf

on3

,13ns "iipbk

Kh q'dim di'k» no1? Averroes has here: D'pnmiP

o'Kitw o n p D

dk

nn

l«ua

n'n

p

o ' p m n ® n n « 0 3 nan 0 0 m mpn 1 ? i p ' T «Vi ud'w d s n" 1 « m p n n Dn - w h d d s j ? 3 D n p o a r m n o 3 l y y u n ' kV.

Aristotle says: "In a vacuum, however, this is impossible; for neither is a body" (Physics IV, 8, 216a, 33-34). 47. Hebrew Vua np®. Again later HDK itki '113 Kim (p. 194, 1. 18), '113 np» Kin (p. 198,1. 2). Similarly in Moreh Nebukim I, 73, Prop. X, Note: np»n (1) ' n a n t o p n inn: (Harizi's translation: aron atmon), Arabic: aisab-N y-inao"?«. In all these expressions there is an allusion to the difference between an "impossible falsehood" and a "possible falsehood." See Shem-tob on Moreh Nebukim, loc. cit., and cf. the following passage in Metaphysics IX, 4, 1047b, 12-14: "For the false and the impossible are not the same; that you are standing now is false; but that you should be standing is not impossible." 48. This statement refers to the two views concerning the existence of a vacuum maintained respectively by the Pythagoreans

344

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[149

and the Atomists. According to the former, the vacuum exists outside the world. According to the latter, the vacuum exists within the world, comprehending the atoms and separating them from each other. Cf. Physics IV, 6. This concluding remark does not occur in the corresponding passage in Averroes (Intermediate Physics IV, ii, 5), but it occurs later in IV, ii, 6, and it reads as follows: "Thus it has been established that a vacuum does not exist either within the bodies or outside of them." .onV fin n't) D'ntwn -pn tecoj mpnn naann naa ran Crescas has purposely taken it out of its original place and put it as a conclusion of the arguments against the existence of a vacuum, because he is later to contend that the arguments fail to prove the impossibility of a vacuum outside the world, whatever their validity with reference to the possibility of a vacuum within the world. See below pp. 183, 185. 49. These two additional arguments occur in Aristotle and in Averroes in reversed order. Cf. Intermediate Physics IV, ii, 5, Fifth Argument: "It may also be shown that there is no vacuum from the consideration that a vacuum is an immaterial dimension. The argument is as follows: Dimensions are nothing but the extremities of bodies, an extremity qua extremity is indivisible, and an extremity cannot be separated from the object of which it is an extremity. This is self-evident, unless you say that accidents can be separated from the subjects in which they exist. The geometrician, indeed, does abstract a line and a plane and a body. He does this, however, only in discourse and in thought but not in reality. Furthermore, a body requires a place only because it possesses three dimensions by virtue of which it is a body. Now, since it is only because of its possession of dimensions that a body requires [other] dimensions in which to rest, then [immaterial] dimensions, [were they to exist], would require [other] dimensions, and so it would go on to infinity, thus giving rise to Zeno's difficulty about place." trpmnw nn .bin: pnn mpnn® no nsn nipn rec»' m r naai .p"?nnD v b i n'^an Kin® r r a n'^anm . a w n nv^ano nnv nan qj'n q« n^n .loxya yiT p y nn .rr^an i1? «in -ipn nan1? Vnar® n^ani no«oa D!otti nat£>m lpn n u n ^ n bib®' o j o n i .D'npnn i^nav® nPBN rn

149]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART I

345

D'pm ^ya «inw noa Dips b»« " p a r own o n y i .niN'XDa t ^ i naisnoai ^ya «inw i x d otwn "ptaxn dm .Da dim «in d i s k n'n it»« irw nvbv 'n^a p y n -j^i ,o'pm D'prnn laic«' ,oa mr o'prn o'pm .Dipoa 1'ir pso a"in'i ,n^an For references to Aristotle see below notes 50, 51. Crescas has purposely reversed the original arrangement of the two arguments in order to be able to conclude with the statement "Hence the existence of an immaterial extension is impossible," which, according to him, is the chief basis of Aristotle's rejection of infinity. 50. This argument is based on Physics IV, 8, 216b, 12-21. 51. This argument is based upon the following passage: "For these fancy there is a vacuum separate and per se . . . . But this is just the same as to say t h a t there is a certain separate place; and t h a t this is impossible, has been already shown" (Physics IV, 8, 216a, 23-26). 52. Crescas characterizes the argument here as mpain nfllD. Later in his criticism of this proposition he calls it again mpain, according to the Munich and Paris MSS. and the printed editions. T h e Vienna and Oxford MSS. read there mpainn without the definite articles. Both mpain and mpainn occur in Isaac ben N a t h a n ' s translation of Altabrizi. In the anonymous translation the term used is painn nsio. T h e Arabic original for these terms is l»r agreeing without a remainder. T h e Hebrew m p a i and the Latin applicatio appear as translations of the same Arabic word, probably in Fons Vitae II, 14: "Locus autem non est nisi applicatio superficiei corporis

346

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[149

ad superficiem corporis alterius." Cf. Likkufim min sefer Mefcor Hayyim II, 21: "TIN «]1J ntwo »pi new nipan a"n' Dipon. 53. Hebrew: n'a «in iw« ipn rapa nn« rrnpio l^nnm. Literally, "and we begin from a point at the end of the line which is finite." Crescas' argument as it stands would seem to imply that only one line is infinite in one direction whereas the other line is infinite in both directions. In Altabrizi, however, both lines are assumed to be infinite only in one direction (see next note). 54. The proof as fully given by Altabrizi is as follows: If an infinite were possible, let AB be infinite at b B and finite at A. Take any point C in A C B AB and draw line Cb, again infinite at b and finite at C. AB is, therefore, longer than Cb by AC. Let us now apply Cb to AB so that C falls upon A. The question is would b coincide with B or not. If they do coincide, it would contradict the assumption that AB is longer than Cb. If they do not coincide, then Cb would have to be finite at b, which, again, contradicts the assumption. Furthermore, if they do not coincide, Bb would have to be equal to AC, and so AB would have to be finite, which contradicts the assumption. Hence, no infinite can exist. The text of Altabrizi reads as follows: n ' ^ n !?j?a v b i apona pmn rrn 11?« .nr «in nipann hdtd dVi« pnnan n n '« mipi «'n n^nnnn « n ' 1 p rrr» rrn dn ,mpn 1« nVaa ,3 3 x n» laa a"« ip ltapii .n^un 'n^a - ^ i n^an "?jn 'n^an lyan nan ,'j nmp: ktti ,na« mjwa nnipa nn« ipn nra nnn« rmpj n^i •?ya 'n"?a 'a nxai n'"?an ^»573 '« nxa m i a"« ip Dn» nn«n ,cnp •'TD no .n'^an 'rya v t a 'a nxai n'"?an "?ya 'j msa p dj «mi a"a ip 'J»m ,n^an .n'bon 'Vyan o'ms '«no nn«n by ona nn« mpan i:nati>naa uran nw«ai jwtnn p^na '« nxa a"« lpa jwkti p"?nn na»naa V'apw mpann nr pyi ,n^an v t a •?« p i 'P'Wa w b m p^nm 'J»a 'awn p"?nm 'j nxa a*3 ipa ?Dn,3»a nn« -|nn' 1« "jinn 'nVaa •b n'^an ]'«ts» no V« n'^apo la^'n ipa a": ip by «pu a"« ip n'n .«pun laa nDnn rrn ,«•? d«i ,ban iip«nm .n^an ^ya n'n'i nDnn ipn «in n'n' -pron» jjiti .'jpn * w nan .3"«

N O T E S TO P R O P O S I T I O N I , P A R T I

347

DJ nvp «in NN ,no« ny® NIM ,n'"?an Vya nytra v^y «pu DID« «pirn nasi ,'3 i m n'Van "?ya n'Vsn "?y3 v t a mion ipn n'n'i .n'^an byz p n"?ir •?« twsno prno nrano 3'in nasi .ban nr .n^an "?ya 'n^a irrunn .n-nn inn .^aaio n'"?an Vys «in !?3 n:n .Vbs yaoj n'n'i ,"?öa ¡rVan The same proof, somewhat differently stated, is given by Algazali in his Kawwanol, Metaphysics (Makafid al-Falasifah II, p. 126f). n'Van i'«i .a'« lp lpn nr n'n' nan n'Van '"?A lp -KPD« D«P :n'i2>n n'tnn T P « 3 n:n ,n'Van Vya 'a "?« 'no n'n a«i ,'-N 'J nnpj I?« ro-ui ,'a nxa iV , , Vya 'nVa 'a V« 'nn n'n D«I ,n'Van l?ya a": n'n I"J vby «pu n'n o«i ,n'Van bya a": n'n m vVy «pu -itwo n:n n'Van by a"n natpnoa upan •« n:n ,n'ban Vya 'nba 'a V« 'no n'n'® nn« nn ,'w '"?a '3 ~K3 nn' ia^'0 o« ran ,3"j 3"aD a"i nxp •«! ,3"» oyo mi' a"n '3 ,3-1^ m® oyon a"n n^an1? yan naai nmy n"p a*) -I«®JI vnnn man "?yan Y: ny®3 «V« rl?y «|'DV «V a"n ,'a TXO imana Vyaa rv^an Vyan by «pw noi ,n,!?an Vyaa n'^an .mans n'Van "?ya «in n:n ir^an The proof is also found in Shahrastani, p. 403 (ed. Cureton), Emunah Romah I. 4. They both seem to have taken it from Avicenna's Al-Najah, p. 33, reproduced in Carra de Vaux's Avicenne, p. 201. A similar argument is given also in ffobot haLebabot I, 5. A similar argument by Roger Bacon is referred to by Julius Guttmann in his "Chasdai Creskas als Kritiker der aristotelischen Physik," Festschrift zum siebzigsten Geburtstage Jakob Guttmanns, p. 51, n. 2. 55. Cf. above n. 5. 56. Hebrew 'iio^ l« n'n 'ötw. The Intermediate Physics uses here the terms "physical" 'yata and "mathematical" mo1?. Aristotle uses the terms "intelligible" and "sensible" ovre VOTJTOV öftre aidd-qrhv. (Physics III, 5, 204b, 6-7; see also Metaphysics XI, 10, 1066b, 24). The Hebrew translation of the Physics with Averroes* Long Commentary (MS. Bodleian, 1388), reads in one place niVa®lD3 1« D'Tin^a, i. e. "mathematical or intelligible" and in another ®mo «Vi "?aena «V, i. e., "intelligible," "sensible."

348

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[151

57. Cf. Physics III, 5, 204a, 34-204b, 10; Metaphysics XI, 10, 1066b, 21-26; and Averroes p ^ n n , T s ,3"D s y x a x 'JDB J W '"d jotfln -irw n» ,'iwn. Cf. also Milhamot Elohirn VI, i, 11. 58. Averroes has here' n"3 niSD ^O run, i. e., "everything numbered,"which is quite different. See below Prop. II, P a r t I I , p . 219. See also Emunah Ramah I, 4. 59. The designation of the succeeding arguments as "physical" (vaiK(bs—0"JDB) is also found in Aristotle and Averroes (cf. Physics, loc. cit. and Metaphysics, loc. cit.). Averroes designates them also as "appropriate" D'tm'D in contradistinction to the preceding argument which he calls "general" and "logical." See above notes 5, 55. 60. Cf. Physics III, 5, 204b, 10-205a, 7; Metaphysics XI, 10, 1066b, 22-1067a, 7; and Averroes: ,TS ,J*3 ,1*» ,'JJXD« 'JDB yav '"d ,'yxDKn jnon -in«» n» ;]iB>N-in nsion p"?nn. 61. In the original of Averroes the argument is as follows: The infinite must be either simple or composite. A. If composite, it could not be composed of an infinite number of elements, but would have to be composed of a finite number of elements, of which either (a) one or (b) more than one would be infinite in magnitude. B. If simple, it would have to be either (a) one of the four elements, or (b) some neutral element outside the four. Crescas, as will be noted, reproduces only the main alternatives, A and B, leaving out the subdivisions (a) and (b) under each of these, but he seems to allude to these subdivisions in the expression rvrrtp "po, which accordingly is to be taken to mean not only "and in either case," i. e., whether simple or composite, but also "and however that simple or composite infinite body is supposed to be," referring to (a) and (b). Following is the text of the Intermediate Physics: "First argument. Every infinite tangible object must be either simple or composite. If it were composite, inasmuch as the elements of which it is composed must be finite in number, for it has already been proved in Book I of this work that nothing composite can be made up of an infinite number of elements, it would follow that

I5ll

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART I

349

either one or more than one of its elements would be infinite in magnitude, for if not, the composite object could not be called infinite. But if one of the elements were infinite, it is clear that the other simple elements of which the composite whole is made up would become resolved into that element, inasmuch as elements are contraries, and they persist together only by that uniformity of relation ['W, aequitas], and equilibrium ["IE>1\ mediocritas] which exists among their forces. And even if the force inherent in one particle of that infinite element were weaker than the force inherent in a corresponding particle of the same size of the finite element, just as we may say that the force which is in a portion ["]t£>D, tractus] of air is weaker than the force which is in a similar portion of water and earth, still this would not refute ["linD', prohibet] [our argument] that the infinite would bring corruption to the finite, for if we multiply t h a t weaker particle to infinity the result would necessarily be something more powerful than the finite total of the stronger particles. And if more than one of the simple elements were infinite, it would follow that one of them would fill the whole place and there would remain no room for the others, for inasmuch as a body is extended in all dimensions, i. e., the six directions, it follows that an infinite body, by virtue of its being a body, is infinite in all directions. The same conclusion must necessarily also follow, if we assume that only one of the elements is infinite, namely, that no room would remain for the rest, be t h a t finite or infinite. Since none of these alternatives is possible, there can be no infinite composite body. He further says that there cannot exist a simple, tangible, infinite body whether it be one of the four elements or something intermediate between them,—as has been assumed by some physicists in order to avoid the difficulty confronting them that an infinite element would bring corruption to the other elements, —or be it an element additional to the four elements, even though it would seem that there is no other element outside fire, air, water and earth. The argument is as follows. If there existed in this sublunar world a fifth element, it is clear that all the composite objects would be resolved into it, for if we assume an element, qua element, to be infinite, all the other elements must suffer corruption, and thus the entire world would be changed

350

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[151

into the nature of that element, inasmuch as an element is an element by virtue of the contrary qualities which exist in it. By the same token it would follow that that intermediate element, which is assumed by some people, would, by virtue of its being an element, have to contain something contrary, and thus, if it were infinite, the other elements would have to suffer corruption." (Latin, p. 453 r b—v b). BI®B DN «in ran rr^an

'n^>3 ®®IBB no D»J "?3® ,]i®«in neion

N^AN 'VYA 33IIN Dna I®« nniD'n VM ,3311A n'n D«I .3311A D«I AA-NOA ISDB3 N^AN }'« nniD' NWXA ywna I«ann® N» 'sa ,IBDB3 1« H i u n"AA ana in« n'n'® 3"in' ran ,iBDn nro ii®«in IB«B3 DIB IN« D3 N'N ON "73« ,n"A 'n"?3 «in» 331103 IA«I

D«I ;in«A inv

IS» R1?« 3anon nn» i3in lit»« O'tawsn I«® IIDS'® 'TA «in ,n"A 'n^A n'n D«I .crrmna I'a IT»« I®rni 'litsa N«®' Q]B«I .D'asn nniD'n® no pi?na «SAN nana tyi^n inv i1? rv^AN i'«® IIDMO in« p^NA «saan nan it»« nana IA«3® IAA ,n"A 'n"73 HD'B I®« p^nn nr!? NI®n N"3n iiD'n ia nnD' «"? , p « i o'aa in« -pan i®« nana »l^n i n r i'i«na in« -|®B3 ®i!?nn p"?nn nr UL?SA I®«3 u«® 's1? ,n*an TDS' n"3 'n^an n'n'®3 NAI nr .ni3n3 n"3n p^nns prn inv «in® na uao p p n ' N^AN 'nl?a

nan

«"?A' ii»« «in Dna in« N'N'® 3"in ,in«a inv N'twsna n"A 'nban vn O«I "?A I?« -|®an «in n'n® NO"7 D®jn®'S1? ,oipa O'I«®JV I«®' «"71 ,oipan ^AA n"33 DOT «in cua« n"33n O®jn n'n'® 3"in ,mr\ m«'sn V I ,D'pmn Dipa I«®^ n'n' vbw IY ,n"33 Dna I3^> in« nrana 3"in' nn .M«'Bn «*'« ran ,nij?3Bj mpi^nn I1?« *?A vn I®«AI .n"33 n'n'® I'3 n"3 n'n'® I'3 .n"a 'n"73 asna d®j «xb'® in« n'n'» ]'a n"33 ®®IBB di®B D®j «XB'® i®b« '« «in® n y ibi«i mis'? D"j?3on nxp imn'2'® na 'sa ,Dn'J'3 'j?xb« i« njm«n nniD'na ,njm«n nniD'n *?y «pia IID' n'n' 1« ,i«®:n TDBB n'n'® on1? a"nn' i®«B 1«33 n'n i1?«® nn .p«ni o'am i'i«m ®«n 'n^a n c i'«® n«u n'n D«i IID' limn i®«a® 'b^ .v1?« lanv p® masnan p y n n«u n'n ,'®'Bn n c ctayn nr ran®'i ,nniD'n i«® IIDS'® 3"in ,HD' «in® nea n"a 'n"?3 nrln .13 m«2fan nvasnn nva'«3 n o ' «in DJB« iiD'n '3 .no'n WIN yaw o«i .IID' «in® IXB nvasn ia vn'® o'®a« inin':' i®« yxiaan n c a 3"in' .•'i«®3n HDB3 n"3 'n^»3 n'n 62. A v e r r o e s h a s h e r e iBDn nra ii®«in ia«B3 i«3nn® no 'S3. r e f e r e n c e is t o Physics I, 4.

The

I5I-I531

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART I

351

63. This is an allusion to alternative B(b) given above in note 61; that is to say, no element can be conceived as being neutral and without qualities. 64. Averroes employs this argument in refutation only of A(a) and (b) given above in n. 61. From Crescas' use of the definite in«n, which undoubtedly refers to 3"33 vnniD'O in« m a m n'n Vim, it appears that he applies it to all the alternatives included under both A and B. 65. Cf. Physics I I I , 5, 205b, 24-31; Metaphysics X I , 10, 1067a, 23-29; and Averroes: neinn swn pbnn ,TB ,3"D ,)"D ryxm 'jnta yo® '"D ,'yxm yam in«» no ¡'»'VIKI This argument, which Crescas advances as tfte second of the physical arguments, is the third in the original texts of Aristotle and Averroes. Crescas has omitted here the original second argument; but he has inserted it later in his third class of arguments. See below n. 91. 66. Hebrew ll'^yn Dlpnn 10 Han. In one text of Kalonymus' translation of the Intermediate Physics (Paris, Cod. Heb. 938) the corresponding passage reads p'^yn rnpon 13DD Hail, i. e., "the upper place would be separate from it." In another text of apparently the same translation (Paris, Cod. Heb. 943), it reads )V^yn OlpDn HOD I'ly'l, i. e., "the upper place would be greater than it." Without the original Arabic text before me, I venture to suggest that this difference must have arisen in the uncertainty of the reading cM"3 or J - ^ in the original Arabic text, the former meaning "to be greater" and the latter "to be separated." The copy used by Crescas evidently read 1MO HaJl iv'jyn mpon, which he has changed to iv^yn rnpon p "713:1. A similar uncertainty on the part of the same translator as to the reading of J ^ or J ^ may be also noted in two corresponding passages in his translations of the Intermediate Physics and Intermediate Metaphysics (quoted below in n. 71 (a). In the former it reads QipDna vb awn '3, i. e., "the body cannot be separated from place." The context, however, would warrant here the reading "the body cannot be greater than place." Cf. Physics III, 5, 205a, 35: oirt TO acbfxa fxel^ov rj o rbiro nyi in« 131 n'n'w ir!?an byn vi^aa prr «^i .vby o'sia loipo tib® .mpaa «I'pD «in» nxo ,13»d "?na nnv «in nan1? nsia «inw no o nsna b b j .n^an ^ya v t a o ^na -inv ¡rn ,n^an 'n^an "?y nan nsa d«i .ia nn 74. Hebrew Doipnon. The MSS. read ooipon and so it reads also in Part II of this proposition (p. 198, 1. 15). But the form Doipnon occurs also in 'Olarn Safari I, 3, ed. Horovitz, p. 15: Dlpo ]'«t!> 's1? Dip» ^ a noipno v«i ooipna '^a, and in Albalag quoted below Prop. I, Part II, n. 23 (p. 414). The term reflects the Arabic ¿r (cf. Horovitz, ibid., p. XIV) = to TOTTOP KARIXOV< corpus locatum (cf. Husik, Judah Messer Leon's Commentary on the 'Vetus Logica', p. 115). 75. Cf. Physics IV, 4, 210b, 34-21 la, 5: "First, then, we should think that place comprehends that of which it is the place, and that it is not anything of that which it contains. And, again, that the first place is neither less nor greater than the thing contained in it; and also that it does not desert each particular thing, and is not inseparable from it. Besides this we should think that every place has upward and downward, and that every body naturally tends to and abides in its proper place." Cf. Intermediate Physics IV, i, 1,6: "First, place surrounds the object of which it is a place. Second, place does not exist in place and is separable from the object and is no part thereof. Third, first place is equal to the occupant, is neither greater nor smaller than it. It is not smaller, because it surrounds the occupant. It is not greater, because, by virtue of its being the first place of the occupant, it cannot receive another body in addition to it." 'n^a Dipontf ,rr:tpn .oipnn i"? «in -kpn nam *pp' mpon® ,nn»«in nw jvwnn oiponw .n'P'Wi .ijod p"?n i:'«i l1? "7133 «lmn mpoa noiyn «in® 'o^ ,pp mv 13'«» nn .]cjp m r «"?i 1300 ^na -inv 13'« ,oipon !?ya

356

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

no - a » -inn am isj? •jap'»

[153-515

^b"? ,Vra mi' « h ,mp»n byj? *pp' .lltPNT DlpD «in®

76. "First place" is defined by Aristotle in the following passages : "With respect to place also one is common (noivbs) in which all bodies are contained, but another proper (LSLOS) in which any thing primarily subsists" (Physics IV, 2, 209a, 32-33). "And such is the first (Tparos) place in which a thing subsists" (ibid. 4, 211a, 28-29). Cf. above n. 69. Aristotle's '¿5ios TSTOS is reflected in Ibn Gabirol's JJTVn DipDH (Lifcku{im min Sefer Mekor Ijtayyim II, § 23, 24). Cf. Fons Vitae II, § 14, p. 48: "locus cognitus;" p. 49: "loci noti." 77. Cf. Physics IV, 4, 211b, 6-9: "For there are nearly four things of which it is necessary place should be one. For it is either form or matter, or a certain interval between the extremes of a thing (TUIV €ii) of a thing. Metaphysics V, 8, 1017b, 25-26: "And of this nature is the'shape or form of each thing." (2) It is the substance (ovaLa) and essence (ri fjv elvai) of a thing. Ibid. VII, 7, 1032b, 1-2: "By form I mean the essence of each thing and its primary substance." (3) Furthermore, it is an end (riXos) and hence a final cause (oS evena). Ibid. V, 4, 1015a, 10-11: "And form or essence, which is the end of the process of becoming." Ibid. II, 2, 994b, 9: "Further, the final cause is an end." (4) Finally, form is that which defines and circumscribes (•opiap.bv), for matter is indefinite (abpLCFTOv). Ibid. VII, 11, 1036a, 28-29: "For definition is of the universal and of the form." Ibid. 1037a, 27: "For there is no formula of it with matter, for this is indefinite." With all these passages in mind, Averroes therefore argues here: (1) Form is not n'^an in the sense of'¿nnxne> noum n,!?an n m (2) Form is primarily the ovaLa and the TL fjv elvai of a thing, "lain oxy nirmn N'n (3) Still it is called irepas, n'^an ra not« OKI, but only in the other senses mentioned by Aristotle, as follows: (a) ovaia and rt rjv elvai, rumn N'n - m n oxy, (b) reXos and ov evena, lain n'^an inn ton® 'B1?, (c) tlSos = p.opcf>ri, inasmuch as it is an opicrfids, in^'aini. In accordance with this interpretation, the passage of Averroes is to be translated as follows: "The truth is that form is not a limit but it is rather that which constitutes the substance and essence of a thing. If we call form a limit it is because it furnishes the final cause of a thing and defines the thing." Crescas' restatement of this passage here is also translated accordingly. 85. This sudden reference to Aristotle would seem to be rather out of place in a passage which is entirely a paraphrase of Averroes' restatement of Aristotle. This reference to Aristotle occurs originally in the Intermediate Physics after a lengthy digression in which Averroes gives his own views on the impossibility of identifying space with the vacuum. In its original context, therefore, the expression "And Aristotle says" is the equivalent of saying, "Let us now resume our exposition of Aristotle." Here, Crescas

360

CRESCAS' C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E

[l$S

could have omitted it, inasmuch as he had not reproduced Averroes' digression. The retention of the phrase was simply due to an oversight and to the mechanical copying of notes of which this part of the Or Adonai is composed. Cf. Intermediate Physics IV, i, 1, 8: "What remains for us to explain is that place is not the three dimensions between the limits of that which surrounds, i. e., length, breadth and depth. The opinion that place is those three dimensions and that those dimensions are separable from bodies is subject to formidable doubts, even though it had been maintained by many of the ancients. Indeed, there is a great plausibility in its favor, for at first thought one would be inclined to believe that place must be a certain emptiness and void which becomes the recipient of a body, for, if place were a body itself, then two bodies would occupy one place at the same time. This kind of reasoning is almost identical with that which leads to the belief in the existence of a vacuum, as we shall explain hereafter. Furthermore, from the fact that the empty space within a vessel is successively filled by different bodies, they came to believe that emptiness itself is something which has independent existence and is capable of receiving different objects in succession. But Aristotle says . . . "

,«l'p»n nvbon p -10« ' n crprnn ia'« nipon» "i«a!? lr^y -iwm -itt>« run nt^tsn D'prnn i^>« «in mporra na«an o ,pnym annm -|-n«n p n n " r i .•'aianpn ID d o t ia n a « naai ,mpsDn prn na«a «in o'^na: o n n rrrpw wvn-onaiy naisnan ni?nnna atwv oipant!>'s1? , p nr s o t ma«i ^>ap' i»2ijn -rn«n oipan n'n D«i ;otwn ^>ap' r«i p m 'las mpan niN'xaa no«an «'an IIP« natpnan n'nn® tjyaa rramon n«n .in' trot» o w n i«ia'® rrn» nai? .^aa -10« m r o -nyi .nr -in« n«aa2> iaa ,nipnn wia1» o w n Vap' ,a»p lasya in« nan «ine> la Dn1? naiT ,nr m « nr v"?j> . . .-ID«' IBD ,_ I«I

.nr M «

n r V!?Y

86. Hebrew Dipaa oipan rrrrBn D'yjnma moipan vn1®. So also in Averroes' Intermediate Physics. In Gersonides' supercommentary, however, the passage reads: il'ri'l D'jjjrona m a i p a n vn'B? Dipaa Dipan. "That the places would be movable, and so one place would exist in another place." Gersonides' reading reflects more closely the Greek, which is as follows: "And at the same time, too, the place will be changed;

157)

N O T E S TO PROPOSITION I , PART I

361

so (&VT') there will be another place of place" (Physics IV, 4, 211b, 23-24). In Ikfcarim II, 17, the reading is likewise ¡rn'l, as in Gersonides. Cf. Commentaries Shorashim and Anafim, ad loc. 87. Hebrew, lrrtHD', a literal translation of the Arabic J - ^ . Cf. Munk, Guide des Egarés, I, p. 185, n. 2; Mélanges, p. 102, n. 4; Kaufmann, Attributenlehre, p. 380, n. 30. Averroes has here I1? i n " Kim imn" -\m pnnn •$?, the interval to which it particularly belongs, and which particularly belongs to it, instead of Crescas' "l.TTHa' which it occupies. But the term t t b 1 occurs later in Averroes in the same passage. In Gersonides' supercommentary the term D'p'rrtD in the following passage D'prra ^ z n u o'p'rno on hpk orrprn oy o'on 'p^n i d b ' p a n r r KT^y ipny no« annan seems to be, like n n a ' , another Hebrew translation of J»*. Cf. Dlpa p'lno in 'Olam %.a\an I, iii, p. 13. 88. I have rendered the expression onV niDlpo on "1PN as if the pronoun on1? referred both to D'on 'p^n and to D'pmn ny on^ D'inVDn, thus proving at once the untenability of the two aformentioned conclusions. In the original text of Averroes, this passage applies only to the first of the untenable conclusions, trying to show that one and the same thing would have many places at the same time. This is clear from the fact that later Averroes takes up the same illustration and uses it in refutation of the second untenable conclusion, introducing it with the following words: "From this, too, can be shown the impossibility of the second conclusion, namely, that the places would be movable and that they would exist in other places." mnipon ipnyp Kim ^en ip®n avn p dj nro 'iWi niDipM lrru'Un. Crescas, however, has changed the phrasing of the last part of the passage so as to make it applicable at once to both the conclusions. The original passage reads as follows: "So also would be affected the parts of the water, that is to say, they would be translated together with their intervals, which are their respective places, to other intervals, with the result that, beside and simultaneously with former places, those other intervals would also become places of the parts of the water."

362

CRESCAS' C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E

[157

dd ,D3 D'lnvon nrrprno ay ipny onf ,D'on 'p^n wjp p .D'jwtan nimpnn oy an1? mnipo p en vm ,Dnn« a'pmo .an1? maipo 89. All the terms used here by Crescas in his definition of space are to be found in Aristotle (see above n. 75). Still it is not an exact translation of Aristotle's formal definition of space as given in Physics IV, 4, 212a, 5 - 6 : TO 7repas rov TrepuxovTos GUfMaros. An exact translation of it is to be found in Intermediate Physics IV, i, I, 8: Tpnn D»an n ^ a n «in Dipon. Crescas' version of Aristotle's definition here occurs, however, in Narboni's commentary on the Kawwanot ha-Pilosofim I I I : Hints' Dlpan "TO n:n m® I'pn fi'^on. (Similarly in his commentary on Moreh I, 73, Prop. 2). Narboni adds that according to Aristotle space is to be further qualified by the statement t h a t it is "immovable essentially:" oxya yyuna 'nba no«i «qioa i n « ^nan my n'Din ibdhni Cf. Physics IV, 4, 212a, 18 ff. In Crescas' paraphrases throughout these passages we may note two variations from the original. (1) Crescas has substituted here as well as elsewhere the term nu®, surface, for the term n'^an, limit, which is used by Aristotle. (2) Without exception (but see p. 176, 1. 20), he uses the expression 1'pon n'^a/in, the surrounding limit, (similarly «J'pon ncawn, the surrounding surface), instead of Tpon il'^an, the limit of that which surrounds, as the phrase runs in the original definition of Aristotle. The substitution of the term "surface" for "limit" occurs also in the reproduction of Aristotle's definition, quoted anonymously, by the Iljwan al-Safa: " I t is also said that place is the surface of the containing body which bounds that which is contained in it." Cj ^c ^kv o ^ - J l ¿I J^ 5 (Dieterici, Die Abhandlungen der Ichw&n es-Safa, p. 30; German translation in Die Naturanschauung und Naturphilosophie der Araber im X. Jahrhundert, p. 9). It is also used in the definition quoted by Algazali in the name of Aristotle: " I t is a term signifying the surface of the containing body, I mean, the inner surface, contiguous to that which is contained." if s >*-> .—Jl ¿^»Ul jtkJl JJ. I jjUJl (Makafid al-Falasifah III, p. 246). In one anonymous Hebrew translation of the Mafca$id (MS. Adler 1500), the definition is rendered as follows:

1571

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART I

363

.«I'pon a » i n rttatra n x ' ^ a « i n » . In another anonymous translation (MS. Adler 978), the last part of the definition reads: « p a n Dip» « i n » 'D'Jsn rtD»n ' i n n . Evidently neither of these translators had in the Arabic text the reading « p a n p'rriDn 'D'jsn n u » n

Narboni, in his commentary on the Kawwanot ha-Pilosofim points out that Algazali's definition tallies in every respect with that of Aristotle's: "Towards the end of his discussion, Algazali cites the definition of place, saying that it is the inner surface of the surrounding body. This is identical with the definition we have cited, for 'surface' means here 'limit.' The statement that it is the 'inner surface of the surrounding body' means to say that it is that which touches or that which is separate, inasmuch as it is the surface of the surrounding body. And it is equal, inasmuch as it is the inner part of the surrounding body. And it is that which surrounds. Hence place is a surrounding, equal, separate limit." ,1'pon o r a l » w a n mv

«in» m « nan

rwn

«in® -i»«'i m p o n t t j «]1D3 « ' 3 ' n « o m a « i

n t a » ' 3 ,["7132 mtt> . r ^ - ^ 1 C-^" (M. J. Müller, Philosophie und Theologie von Averroes, Arabic text, p. 66). A justification for the substitution of the term "surface" for "limit" may be found in Aristotle's own statement in Physics IV, 4, 212a, 28-29: Kai 8IÄ TOVTO honet kiriirebbv TL elvai. A peculiar definition of place is given by Saadia in Emunot weDeot I, 4 (Arabic, p. 51): "The true essence of place is not what our opponent thinks, but it is the meeting of two contiguous bodies and the locus of their contiguity is called place, or rather either one of the contiguous bodies becomes the place of the other." tnp'i owonon crown w i s «in .ntprw ids lim oipon nno« '3 .nanV aipo ana in« bo a w ba« ,aipa atwo oipo Similarly in II, 11 (Arabic, p. 102): "Furthermore, that which requires a place is a body, which occupies that which meets it and becomes contiguous to it, so that either one of the contiguous bodies is the place of the other." n^m ,w»oi inwsw no «"?oo «in -IB>« otran «in oipo "7« -p-an o -njn .nn«^ oipo üwonon p in« bo That Saadia's definition is Aristotelian is quite obvious, for its purpose is to show that place implies the existence of one body in another. The expression "contiguous" is only another way of expressing Aristotle's irepUx^v, as we have seen in the quotation from Algazali in this note above. But there would seems to be the following difference between Saadia's definition and the definition of Aristotle as generally understood. According to Aristotle, the body containing another body is the place of the contained body but not vice versa. According to Saadia, the two bodies, the containing and the contained, are each the place of the other. But

N O T E S TO P R O P O S I T I O N I, P A R T I

365

we shall see that according to Themistius' interpretation of Aristotle the contained body is as much the place of the containing body as the containing body is of the contained body (see Prop. I, Part II, notes 54, 59, pp. 432, 443). Saadia's definition, therefore, reflects Themistius' interpretation of Aristotle. (But cf. discussion of this passage by the following authors: Kaufmann, Attributenlehre, p. 63, n. 117; Guttmann, Die Religionsphilosophie des Saadia, pp. 78-79; Efros, The Problem of Space in Jewish Mediaeval Philosophy, pp. 63-64.) 90. Cf. De Caelo I, 5-7: Averroes, Intermediate De Caelo et Mundo I, vii ('r i d k d syxoHn D^iym D'OBTi). In the original the arguments from circular motion come first. 91. This argument does not agree with the first argument from rectilinear motion found in De Caelo I, 6, 273a, 7-21, and given in Averroes as the first part of the first argument. It is in the main the second of the physical arguments found in the Physics III, 5, 205a, 8-205b, 1; Metaphysics XI, 10, 1067a, 7-25; and Averroes no nsion ,a"n ,Ys ,3*3 ,j"d ,'ysoN 'yata yav '"0 ,'jreDN y a a n i n « t » and Emunah Ramah I, 4; which has been omitted by Crescas above (see above n. 65). Part of the original argument of De Caelo is reproduced later (see below n. 104 and 107). This argument contains also an interpolation taken from Gersonides' supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics (see below n. 100). 92. Hebrew lmrpn. The same term occurs also in the corresponding passage in Averroes. The term ordinarily would mean "individuates it," in which sense it is also used later, p. 200, 1. 7. But here I prefer to take it in the sense of "properly belongs to it," as the equivalent of on1? D'lnvDn used above, p. 156, 1. 4. The underlying Arabic term was probably < — w h i c h means both "to impart something as a property or peculiarity to something" and "to be the property or peculiarity of something." The Hebrew i n ' may thus also have been used in these two senses. Cf. the use of the word i n " in the passages quoted above, n. 87, and below, n. 94.

366

CRESCAS r CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[157-159

93. I have added this, because in discrete bodies the part exists in the whole as in place, the place of the whole thus not being the place of the part. (See quotation from Aristotle below p. 444). 94. I. e., up or down. Averroes has here: "In the case of everything that has motion, i. e., rectilinear motion, and rest the place of the whole and of a part is the same in kind, for the place of one clod of earth is essentially the same as the place of the whole earth, namely, the lower region, and the place of one spark is essentially the same as the place of the whole fire, namely, the up, and it is to that place which is appropriate to the whole that the part is moved and in it does it rest." nn .paa inn pbnm ^on Dipo ,mt2P njron

,mri yyvrw

no

oipon Kin - m p « n Dipo «injiDjcjn in« [cod. 943: run wu 01pao .ntyon «in 10« ®«n ^o Dipo «in lasjn nn«n f i s n oipDi vrt .ma' lai p!?nn yyun' ^ n in" ntw mp»n ni 95. Hebrew O'p^nn nmno. Averroes has here: D'p^nn nmnoi l'D3 m«o i n n o'p^nn noino 'n^a 1« ]'D3 nn« n\Ti. See quotation below, n. 96. 96. The Hebrew text here is obscure. In Averroes, the main outline of the argument is as follows : (a) The fact that the place of the whole and the part of an homogeneous body is the same, would make every part of the homogeneous infinite be in its proper place wherever that part might happen to be. (b) Again, the place of an infinite must be infinite. And so, the place of the infinite body cannot have the distinction of up and down. (c) But for a body to have rectilinear motion implies two things: First, an ability to be within its proper place as well as without it. Second, a distinction of up and down in the medium through which it moves. (d) Consequently, an infinite body cannot have rectilinear motion. It will have either to be permanently at rest or to move in a circle. The text of the Intermediate Physics III, iii, 4, 2, Second Argument, is as follows: "Having laid down these two propositions as true, we resume our argument: The infinite body must inevitably

159]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I , PART I

367

be either of similar parts and one in species or of dissimilar parts and more than one in species. If it is simple and of similar parts, it is moved by nature either rectilinearly or circularly. But if it is moved rectilinearly, then the place of a part and of the whole of it will be essentially one and toward it the body will move. And if the place of a part and of the whole of it is one essentially and is infinite, the body occupying it will not be moved at all by nature. Thus the infinite will not be a natural body, for every natural body is movable. That it will not be moved at all is evident from this. Since it is assumed to be infinite, its place will be infinite, and if the place of the whole is to be infinite, there will be no place in which the repose of the part would be prior to [or "more proper than") its motion and a place wherein its motion would be prior to [or "more proper than") its repose, inasmuch as there would be no two places in one of which the object would move and another in which it would rest, as is the case of the simple bodies. And if we assumed that all its parts were at rest by nature, there would then be no natural rectilinear motion, inasmuch as the whole would have either to be at rest or to be moved circularly. But sense perception testifies as to the existence of rectilinear motion. Since rectilinear motion exists, the body endowed with that kind of motion must be finite, for the cause of rectilinear motion is the division of the ubiety of the movable body into a part that is natural to it and a part that is unnatural, and that division of the ubiety is made possible only by the fact that it is finite, and the finitude of the ubiety necessarily determines the boundary of the body which occupies a place in it. In the same manner it can be shown that rectilinear motion would not exist if we assumed the existence of an infinite having circular motion. All this having been made clear, we may resume our argument, that if there is rectilinear motion there can be no simple infinite body, for if an infinite existed, it would have to be infinite in all its diameters, and thus it would either rest in its totality or be moved circularly in its parts. But rectilinear motion does exist. Hence there is no simple infinite body." (Latin, pp. 453 v b M— 454 r a A B). n1? n'aan awn® nowi a n .mmpnn i1?« 'nw ir^N motvin run .]'D3 nriKD mvi nmno 'nVa 1« .pos in« ¡rrri noma rrrr -itwo jj:d'

368

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[159

nyirn i« m ® ' nyin y a o a yyinn n'n'® d« ,nomo uwb n'n' dni i'V«i ioxy3 i n « ijoo "?3m pVnn nipa n'n ,m®' nyi:n yyuno n'n 0« "?3« n'n' «"7» 3"in ,n"aa Kim .loxys in« una Vsrn pVnn oipa o«i .yyin' djdki .yyi:na 'ysa o » j bjw's1? ,'yaa d®j n'n' «V ran .y3tn bbj yyuno n^jn iaipa ran ,1V n'"?3n i'« n'n® no 'sV '3 . W j yyin 1 «"7® 3"in' inv 13 pVnn nnuo mpo ]«33 n'n' «"7 n'Van ]'« Van mpo n'n dki «V® '£>V ,wm:aa iNaj nnyi .B yxorci ]o ON ran m»'n nyinn Vsn .n'auDna DN mtf'n nyiwo 1« nip1? .isDoa D'Vana ra«n ':'o 3"« .yxowi VN 1« n'n' NV MOSS N"33 Dno in«n n'n DNP .niosn 'Vano Dnrn DVINI . C mana nun ,-|sn IN nVyon VN ntsono nyunnt» nyi .D'ro ra« ]D ITOA .I1? n'Van ]'« no VN - p u n -pii' NV 'a ,Va:IID on'rap no n'N'» nVyoV nr D"ya[3n o'taitysn iVN mpo n'n'tp nowty a'A ib>BN 'NI .D Dn'3E»i D'on Dipao nVyoV t»«n Dipotp no i s Vy ,n'Van NV VN nn ,nro ,nc30 NVI oVmo nVyo ran n'n' NV ,p l a i n n'n oNty ,nVyoV D'yymno nyi .YXON I1? n'Van I'NB> noa I'NI ,1!? n'Van I'N Van VTU n'n'T» 3"in' ' 3 .mo33 Vara ra«n n'n'» n r r ,cnpit> 10a ,ra«n pVnnts> 101. Hebrew yxoNn a'aD N'n n'auoni. This expression is not found in Gersonides (see above n. 100B). It seems that Crescas has added it in order to give the argument a different turn. 102. Hebrew yxoN ]Naa n'n' NV Dtran 'pVn pa n"33 Viu ]toa n'n c m This is based upon Gersonides' statement Van VlU n'n'ti» 3"in' '3 yxDN lV n'Van ]'n® noa )'Ni lV n'Van I'N. (See above n. 100D). It certainly cannot be a repetition of Crescas' own previous statement: Vina n"aa ona i n « n'n'f a"in i s o o a n"aa vn DNI. The expression otwn 'pVn )'3, I take in the sense of Dtwn 'pVn V30.

I59l

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART I

373

103. The meaning of this passage is as follows: W h a t has been shown so far is that there cannot be more than two kinds of motion, centrifugal and centripetal. But there still remains to be shown that these two kinds of motion cannot be infinite in number. For, why should we not conceive the universe to consist of an infinite number of concentric spheres? The motions in the universe would then be finite in kind, that is, centrifugal and centripetal; but there would be an infinite number of centrifugal motions, since there would be an infinite number of peripheries. These centrifugal motions, would indeed each be limited in extent, but they would be infinite in number. It will thus be possible to have an infinite number of different elements without having an infinite number of different kinds of places. This argument is taken from Gersonides, quoted above in n. 100D. It is also found in an anonymous commentary on Averroes' Epitome of the Physics (MS. Bodleian 1387), where it is made still stronger by pointing out that the different proper places of the elements must not necessarily be different in kind. Fire and air, for instance, have each a proper place of its own, but their places are one in kind, that is, above. "If one should raise an objection arguing that even if there were only two kinds of motion, namely, from the centre and toward the centre, we might still maintain that there could be an infinite number of simple elements one above the other in the same manner as the four elements are supposed to be arranged according to the Philosopher, even though we see that he has enumerated only two kinds of motion for these four elements—-the answer is as follows: Inasmuch as reason conceives a kind of motion which is round the centre, from which it is deduced t h a t there must be a simple element [i. e., the fifth element] which is endowed with that kind of motion, it must therefore follow t h a t there exists an absolute up which is limited, namely, the periphery, and an absolute down, namely, the middle or centre. Hence the kinds of motion between these two, namely, the up and down, are limited and finite." yxnun p am nyiin t o m p i vn' i n '3 no«' '3 "wwn n W ^ki nbyob nr dibdd 1 ? n ^ n n d ' b w s d'oc: vrr® idnV ^oh ^ni njDiNn inW? '3 'rvtni ,nj?3if ' p ^ n D t t x w v nwBM ' « « i n ® w

v

vn

d«i

»'«a

dtbddV

n'^an

drb

-i«an'» nD» «in ' a ,oViym o'DPn

i w nsca

.tma t r » nhyn See below p. 474, n. 128, 130. 104. This bracketed passage occurs in the printed editions and in the MSS. as part of the succeeding argument, where, however, it is entirely out of place. I have inserted it here, because it seems to belong here. The passage is taken from Averroes' Intermediate De Caelo I, 7, corresponding to De Caelo I, 6, 273a, 7-15. It is the first part of the original first argument from rectilinear motion (see above n. 91 and below n. 107). The passage in Intermediate De Caelo I, vii, reads as follows: "Of the four elements, one moves absolutely upward, and that is fire, one moves absolutely downward, and that is earth, and two move relatively upward, and these are air and water, for water moves downward in relation to air and upward in relation to earth, and similarly air moves upward in relation to water and downward in relation to fire. Since the motions of those two elements of which one moves absolutely upward and the other absolutely downward are contraries, it follows that their places must be absolutely contrary to each other, and that is absolutely up and absolutely down. If one of these places is limited, then the other place must be limited, inasmuch as it is a contrary, for it is necessary that either one of them must be most distant from the other and that their distance from each other must be the same in either direction. As this opposition between these two places is known to us from the fact that they are contraries

I59_165L

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART I

375

and as it is clear that the lower place is limited, it follows that the upper place must also be limited." (Latin, p. 279 v, b, K - L ) . na Dnoi ,tswn «im ,niuVrn rhyzh yyirw na nna ,ny3i«n D'OKO Ti«n Dm ."pys nVya1? yyurv® na Dnai , p « n «im .mts^na nan1? yyun1» p i .p« 1 ? -py3 n^yan ^>«1 Ti«n ^K -pin no»!? a'yyimn D'ano .D'am mjrian vnw into .mb -pys nan ^>«1 o'on V« -pya n"?ya^> yyiin1 i'i«n ,nv3sn mc&na nan1? in«rn mt^na n^yo^ D,ib i n « y y w i®« o'arci ^ n n'n' D«i .nmVna nam n"?yo «im .rm^na D"3sn ommaipa vrw ' i « i .•pn «in® na ixa ,vm 'wn oipen mm® ' i « i , n u nioipa 'j»n n"?«o i n « pirn apim mm®i ,pnm n^ana liana ana i n « mm® a'Tirr® nn .Qosn on® no i x a nioipa ':®n n^« pya INUB nnimnn nr mm®3i ,in« iv^yn DipDn mm® nisns ' i « i ,-rm «in» bsvn Dipon pyn n « u mm .nu 105. See Categories

6, 6a, 17-18:

r a yap

SUCTI)libra TWV iv rco aurai ytvti ivavria Cf. Metaphysics X, 4, 1055a, 5.

ifkeicTov

opifovrat.

¿XXIJXCOJ'

106. Cf. De Caelo I, 6, 273a, 21-274a, 18, and Averroes: O'awn 'r ^ 3 ' « IO«D ,'yxa«n oViym. 107. See above n. 104. 108. See above n. 105. 109. Hebrew 1JBD Via: liy inmai. In Averroes: n"33n DOTH ]D "»'1311 v^y o®-m. 110. Hebrew p a nyun ^3®. In Averroes: "For every finite magnitude traverses a finite distance in a finite time, as has been shown in the sixth book of the Physics." Cf. Physics V I , 7. no 'B!? n"3 pra n"3n pman yyuna «in rr^an "?y3 ny® "?ya T?3» .ya®n ISJDD '»®n ia«aa i«aru® 111. This last conclusion is not found in Averroes. 112. Cf. De Caelo I, 7, 274a, 30-274b, 32; and Averroes D'B®n 'f ,'« i a « a ,D^iym. 113. Hebrew l®®am®. In the Physics following terms: T6 a/xa simul at once Xwpis

separatim

separately

V, 3, Aristotle defines the in'. D'llM.

376

c r e s c a s ' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

airrecrdai

tangere

fiera^v èe^rj s kxbptvov s«i ,isi« "?3 "?y vnnn iip« o'pmon bs by *|'pa orp»> f a iv"?y pma "73 d « ' 3 ,in« pmoa n " 3 3 n o'pmen p i « "73 by «]'pa n ' n ' i n « pma k x b ' » « x b ' » i p s k n'n i®« nn« pnioa n"33n D'pman i«xa'B> i » 3 « n'n' 3"in' nr !?x«i ,n"33n D'pmena 0^3310 n'pmo «in djdk ,in« pmaa prima a'tranj o'pme i«xa'® 103« nr nn« i«sdi '3 .nviB&snrn lpDB1» "73« .«i^n nr .o^aaian D'pman am« «im nra inv «"'«w naa mv nn« ipb« n^ari 'n^a "7« nsDinn» i'»n win by D'pmna nvitapsnn i«»n o'pman Dm« "73 by *i'pn Dn'J® i'3 i n « pma r« «xa'® anna n:n ,mana •I'B'po ' h t j ]'3 ipin invn Dy n ' b a n 'n^a p d« pman mi« n'n'i ,n"33n .ip» nr (b) Anonymous translation, which is much clearer: 103« n'n n'^an 'Vya D'pimn vn on® nn .'d^idh nsian nny ia«i nra nr lpnin 1 » i s a nn« nVnnna d'«st B'pmo na»an rrai 3i»m® «xia nn"n no« pnn by on1^« »"iy n r y dsw ,013 inva ny® "?y pmi3 .a'pman d ' t o n y n m n mo« to nr'nn i»«3i ,na« pmi arna on'ra® ,ixn nr by o'pmoa myion i'«» m s n a yii'n p i .n^an «"7 V« p 103 ]3 "|ii«3 "?'i ,o'3®2Mn D'pman nyip '33 Tana DiTa pnnn n'n o«i

382

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[171

.arrna nw« ,nann pman oy n^an 'n^aa D'teca: crpmam ,arrna ]'« on'ra» pman n®« -in« ,mana l1? n'^an )'« pma on'i'a rpn' o n n y i d h o t n d ^ o j D'ip '3» p nxjni nrou invn »pixa ,rr^an rnana a"N ,rfaa rrn'i D'lpn on» a ^ u n now n'n'» np»n inn .win .rfaa uran -wn dp1? n^an n'n' «n^an iV dni ,n^an 1!? nvn a ' w It will be noted that Altabrizi's proof is reproduced only in the last part of Crescas' proof and is introduced by him with the words D'lp "?aa nr a"nrr ram. Originally in Altabrizi there is no indication of the connection between this proof and the Aristotelian proof reproduced by Crescas from Averroes. But Crescas must have surmised that Altabrizi's proof was merely a modification of the Aristotelian, the difference between them being merely that whereas the Aristotelian proof is connected with the rotation of an infinite sphere, Altabrizi's proof argues from the existence of any two infinite lines. Crescas has therefore reproduced it as another version, more general in its application, of Aristotle's proof. On the margin of the Vatican MS. there is the following note: "This argument is taken by the author from the commentary of Altabrizi where certain doubts are raised against it and are answered by him." mpBD -iNan' laipaai neiaa vnann nana nanan inp1? ntn nsion ran .n-i'nm rhy na 134. Hebrew 1033 miD n'aai «pa invna na«an 'a. In Isaac ben Nathan's translation of Altabrizi it reads: iTITl -\pv nr .1'S'pa 'j®n p ipia invn oy n"aa a"a pman inw. In the anonymous translation it reads: "1D«3 n'n'® nptsn inn n"aa rrm o'ipn Dn» o^iaaa. 135. Hebrew ranana D'trevn, proceeding from the centre. Altabrizi: nnx n*7nnna nwrev, proceeding from one beginning. 136. Cf. De Caelo I, 5, 272a, 7-20; and Averroes: D^iyni OD ' Wn '3»n nsian ,'r Vba ,'n -\ma ,'yxawn. Averroes again introduces this proof by preassumed propositions. In Averroes this proof is divided into two parts. The first corresponds to the last part in Aristotle (De Caelo 272a, 11-20). The

171-173]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART I

383

second corresponds to the first part in Aristotle {De Caelo 272a, 7-11). Crescas reproduces now only the first part of Averroes' proof, (see below note 141). 137. By Averroes' first preassumed proposition, in which reference is given to the Physics (i. e. VI, 7): "First, every object that is moved in finite time is moved with a finite motion over a finite distance. This has been demonstrated in the Physics" (Latin, p. 278rb, E). n"a nyim yyurio «in n'a pra yyurv® yyiWD "73® ,nnxn 'yacan yno>a i t o n : 133 nm nn .n'a pmoav 138. Averroes' fifth preassumed proposition: "Fifth, if from the centre of the infinite circular element we extend a line and cause it to pass through it, the line will be infinitely extended. Similarly, if we extend a chord through the infinite circular body, the chord will be infinite at both its ends" (Latin, p. 278rb, E). rvtP'Dnm, .n'^an 'n^a i1?' ,13 in-rajm ,ip i d t o n'ximo ,n"aan 'aiaDn Dtwn» vnixp two rv^an 'n^a ^ a"j -in'o ia N'xwa pi. 139. Averroes' fourth preassumed proposition: "Fourth, the circular body completes its revolution in finite time" (Latin, p. 278rb, E). n"a p n d u o abw maon ownt» .rrya-im. 140. Averroes illustrates this proof by the following diagram: Let C be an infinite circle. Let CD be a radius infinite at D. Let AB be a chord infinite at A and B. Let CD revolve on its centre C. CD will complete its evolution in a finite time, during a part of which it will intersect AB. Therefore, CD will pass through AB in a finite time. But an infinite distance cannot be passed through in a finite time. 141. This proof is of a composite nature. Its phraseology and construction are borrowed from Averroes' third proof, corresponding to De Caelo I, 5, 272a, 21-272b, 17. In substance, however, it is the second part of Averroes' second proof (see above n. 136). A similar proof is given by Avicenna in his Al-Najah, p. 33, which is

384

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[173

also found in Algazali's Makafid al-Falasifah II, p. 126, and in Altabrizi, where it is called ilinian nsio (anonymous translation: "naun DBia), "the proof from parallel lines." It seems that Crescas' object in putting here this proof in place of the original third proof of Averroes was in order to be able afterwards to refute it by an objection raised against it by Altabrizi himself (see below p. 468, n. 117). The following are the texts illustrating this note: (a) Averroes third proof: "Third argument. He introduces this argument by two propositions. First, if two finite bodies are parallel to each other and are placed alongside each other, and each one of these bodies turns on a pivot (literally: is moved) in the opposite direction of the other, or one body is moved and the other remains at rest, both these bodies will cut through each other in finite time and then part from each other. There is no difference whether both bodies are moved or only one body is moved, except that in the former case their departure from each other will begin sooner. Second, if of two magnitudes of this description, i. e., parallel to each other and alongside each other, one is infinite or both are infinite, and one is moved while the other is at rest or both are moved opposite to each other and then become parted, they will have to cut through each other in infinite time. For it has already been shown by a demonstration in the sixth book of the Physics, [ch. 7], that if an infinite distance is traversed it must be traversed with an infinite motion and in infinite time. Having laid down these two propositions, if we now assume that the celestial sphere is infinite, it will follow that the celestial sphere will traverse a finite distance in a finite time, for we observe that it traverses a section of the earth in finite time. It will thus follow that two magnitudes, one infinite and the other finite, will traverse each other in finite time. But this is an impossible absurdity" (Latin, p. 278vb). .rnmpn W v cripn «in neion nn .'t^Wrr nsion , m by rami inxV 'no: ann man ,n"a D'otw vn'BO Kin ana nn«n Dno in«n yynnnw in ,nan nyun1? "nam ix1? onn in« bo yyunm BTra man ]'w . h o d i t s ' i n"a p a nan ynn ono nn« Vats' ,ra - m m .mno ini' o-nsn n'n' nan nyun nau ]no in« Va yinrvtio ,nra

385

N O T E S TO P R O P O S I T I O N I, P A R T I

I73l Dno nn«rtw

,-i«nn nr "?y ny® ^ y a 'as vnnto «in n'B>n nmpnm

yjrunm ,n"aa on 1 »» i n n ' a a o n o i n « n'n'i ,ina:i n a n n x "?y

ran

3 " n n ' i n a n n ' i i m o - n r ' » m u o k » , n a n b y i n ' l y y i m n i « , i n « n roi d h d -jnn' 0 « n ' a a n p m a r w y o » n -iddo w n

. n ' a a p r a l1? l a n n ¡Trr© nro

-Mora n a a » n n 1

- i o « o a -iKans» n o ' s ? n ' a a p n i n ' a a n y o n a i n n ' djdh .'jjaon

i n n ' » a"nn'

,n"aa ' y p - t n Dirarw y ^ i

11?«

,mmpn

w m w i

p « n 10 n a n n n lVVaa - | n m W t i »'j-u u r n « » n ^ a n V y a p r a n ' a n p m a n m « Va ,n"a n n « m n ' a a a n a

nn«n

,-ny» .-ipbk

,(

?ya

'« ipv

iann'®

a'Tvr

,n"a p t a

n n ,n"a p r a n a n 1 ? Dno

(The term 'nan represents here the Arabic S-^y, parallel, which occurs in the quotation from Algazali given below in this note. Cf. also below n. 142. The expression n x ^y raio, literally, placed

beside it, s e e m s t o m e t o m e a n also parallel

and to be an

attempt to give a literal translation of the Greek term which means beside of one another. The Latin translation renders 'nan by "obuius" and m *?y raw by "iuxta positus.") (b) The second part of Averroes' second proof: "Furthermore, everything finite has a beginning. This being so, then the intersection of the radius CD and the chord AB (see diagram above in n. 140) must have a first point and that is the point at which the two lines first meet and come in contact with each other. But if we assume these two lines to be infinite, they can have no first point of intersection. For when the two lines described in the diagram meet, they cannot first meet at some point in the middle. It is quite clear that they must first come in contact with each other at a point at the extremity of one of the lines or of both. But an infinite line has no extremity. Hence no infinite line can come in contact with another line and can have no first point of intersection. But the assumption is that the infinite lines in the diagram meet at a first point of intersection. Hence an impossible absurdity. Since it has been shown that in the circular body under consideration the two lines must have a first point of intersection by reason of the fact that the time of the intersection has a beginning, it has thus been demonstrated that a circular body moving circularly cannot be infinite" (Latin, p. 278va—b).

386

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

ipV j*n ip nannV v ,p iain cki .nVrtnn iV w n'Van Vya Va» nyi ana in«n pan'i ,o'ip '»»n na ras1» niwN-in rrnp:n nwi ,nVnnn a"« rawtn rrnpj DnV n x » ' » -ipsn n'n' nV ,ri"aa D'ip '»»n yago -]« .in«a 'jad nyxnn n«r Vy nyunn 'dV iims' i » n o'ip 'apn» nn .n'Vy íann'® paT® ' i n t p a"« Nin h n u b nn ,yxaNa ntt>N nmpn nn«a ítws'® n"'n n'n® Vy .nxp i1? ]'« n'aan ipni ,cma>a in wxpa i»« mipu nn«a ana nn«n .i1? nxd: «in» yxin naai ,-pnnn nVnnn íV nxb' nVi nan o pan' nV p nxb'0 iKrin nra -©n 'anón otran pya - » a r a naa® ' » a .-ipbn 'nipw nn iNaro mn -nVnnn -pnnn prV nxb'® 'isa D'ip '3®n rbab -pnn nVnnn u .n'aa yxBNn a'ao yyunan uuDn otwn nxb'p -ipsn w no«an nra (c) Algazali's proof in Kawwanot ha-Pilosofim II (Maka$id al-Falasifah II, p. 126): ,ona nn« .nvtn 'roa jrna nan o'pmana n'Vann piVo nnp» oVin a*n ip» nx V n 'n Viaya a"« íp íayam ,n'Van 'Va ra íp unan ib» íanaN» .mana n'-wsN nyn nt n'n ,inaaa a® ny a iaaa na-npn nx "7« naiana muyan iVi / \ \ n w i N'n nmpa i r a no-p® 'nVaa N"'N nan I A -in® nan' nr -in« -ny .mna-in nrnpan \ ** / naan V n n'Vana ninanna aww ny nmpm / T n'taa nyi® ok» 'bV ,np® nn .nn«n nxna * Visn nram® 'bV ,np® nranm ,-ip® Nin n:n ,nrai 'nVaa nvnaans vVn .mwtn N'n mipa n'VanV ya' nV -m ípn Vy )'ni ,nmpa Vy [nai®NU n'asV® na nrani naa n'nnt» 'n^aa n:n nran1? nrain nnipa *?ai n'!?an tn» na raí' «b»» nyn Va N'n nann n"?i .mana nV nrann omp neia nn .npty «mi ,nraun mip: N'n raitmn nmpj na n'n' n1? ny .i1? .mpnV in 'íVa1? n:in nw n'Van 'Va pnna orp nnptfa 'Dnjn -jmn (d) Altabrizi's versión of the proof in Isaac ben Nathan's translation: n"aa íp n'Van Vya 'nVan pmaa n'ii «ton» nnmx mnian nsia dVini ,n'Van Vya 'nVan ipV 'na: n"a íp iranaa nsv mía n'Mi .a"N ip Nim nina^j T) íp id ny nnan yyunn nu>Na ran .nr íaa íp Nini a M mipj a"N ipa ¡mrro 'nVaa ni^BN 'n ,iiíí«-i na: Vn a"N íp

Va« .itfNn na) nwjsn Dn'Vy iVs' nmp:n n'tfNn N'n nmo nVyaV nV dn u nnip: i'n 'a ,-ipw n"a 'nVan ípa nr mip nuvVyn nimpan oy i»ni naj ntf'jsni ,nnN nmp: íp V n n"a íp layan ntfto »a ,m:mnnn nmpin oy ne>'JBn wnmn i m o mn nnv n'nn nwVyn ninpin oy ttmnn nm n'irn nan a"« n'fNn N'n nmp: oso n'nn» nptpn iai .nVu Nim .m:innnn nmpn oy

173]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART I

387

w j'3 fiap nn .ntnsn V« nimasno ipn tid na"no rnn Van .nf'asn ^>ya lp injruni -iron nrano nioipna mumn *7a ^as .onniD ,n"aan ipn nran on .rnana yrr inno« -innn lp1? 'naa loino ri^on n'"?an "?ya rrrr» anrr nywi ran .Viaa rrm "itsan i-jy1? a"ino «in / p r n n mm In the light of these passages quoted the proof reproduced here by Crescas is as follows: Let C be an infinite circle. Let CD be a radius infinite at D. Let AB be an infinite line parallel to DC. Let CD revolve on C toward AB. Let angle D ' be the acutest angle formed a. "a*—j» 5s by the meeting of lines CD and AB. D' will thus be fust point of intersection of CD and AB. But since D ' is not the extreme of either CD or AB, it is possible to take any other point A' at which CD and AB would form a more acute angle than at D'. Hence angle D' is both the first point of intersection and not the first point of intersection. In restating the argument this way, I have drawn upon Altabrizi, whose refutation of this argument is made use of by Crescas later in his criticism. Cf. below p. 468. 142. Hebrew D"nai3 D'lp. The term TDU has several meanings. (a) Here in the sense of parallel it is a translation of the Arabic which occurs in the corresponding argument in Makasid al-Falasifah II, p. 126. See above n. 141. (b) ninau as the equivalent of the Arabic v^T, sine in trigonometry, has been noted by Steinschneider, Uebersetzungen, p. 516. (c) In the expression B>tnn nau, zenith, (see quotation from Altabrizi above in n. 141 and Sefer ha-Gedaritn, s.v.), the term nai: represents the Arabic • in '—1 In the same sense 1 is iwnn nay ? used in Cuzari II, 20. (d) In the following passage in Milhamot Adonai VI, i, 11, nos' p"?n Hoc rmnra -ww bow .iniro: by innnnna nos» ion n'n p*?n 13D» the phrase imrD3 by means in a forward direction. 143. Hebrew [TO) mum. The word n3 does not occur in any of the MSS. or printed editions. It is, however, required by the

388

C R E S C A S ' C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E

[173—175

context. In justification of its insertion here, compare the expression n: -in«ni ono inxn yyimn® 1« in quotation (a) above in n. 141. 144. Cf. De Caelo I, 5," 272b, 17-24, and Averroes: D^iym D W i "in nsmn ,'r bbo ,'« idno ,'j;xD«n. Averroes again introduces this proof by a formal statement of preassumed propositions. 145. Cf. Averroes' proof for his third proposition: "As for the third proposition, it can be demonstrated by what has already been said, for it has already been shown that if there exists circular motion there must also exist a body circular in form, whence it follows that if circular motion is infinitely circular, the circular form implied by the circular motion must likewise be infinite" (Latin, p. 279ra—b). ,mpv nao a*3 n-i«iaa n'tP'^n enow .nnxa '3ud dpi nxd'K" 'inn n'aiao nyim «xnn d«» n«anj naa d«® nn ntrenn n'aiaDn n-nxn® aiaDa n"33 rrauDn nyunn n'nn d«® «in -i«i3» n'33 n'nn n1?. Cf. De Caelo II, 4, 287a, 4-5: " I t follows that the body which revolves with a circular movement must be spherical." 146. Hebrew D®"i, VTroypa^, descriptio, which is distinguished from ma, , opia/xbs, definitio. Averroes uses pn, , essentia. (MS. Paris, Cod. Heb. 947.) 147. Hebrew DlinD. Averroes has here 'H3®n (MS. Paris, Cod. Heb. 947). 148. Averroes: "As for the first proposition, it is evident from the definition of figure, inasmuch as figure is defined by the geometrician as that which is contained by any boundary or boundaries" (Latin, p. 279ra). pna ntnn [n"a mix t?DW=\ rroinn nonpnn chd« TP' nip« «'n® npna "n3®nn na no«' n®« «'n mixn® nn«® nn ,nmxn D'Tii w mi na. Cf. Euclid, Elements, Book I, Definition XIV. 149. In Averroes: "In general, finitude exists in a thing only by reason of form and lack of finitude by reason of matter" (Latin, p. 279ra). ri^ann n y m m a n -jxd nai"7 «xd' dm« n^ann ^ a a i noinn nxo. 150. Cf. De Caelo, I, 5, 272b, 25-28; and Averroes: oViym 0'n»n 'nn riDion ,'r ,'« -ib«d ,'j;x»«n.

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I , PART I

389

151. Hebrew itspn by liny nnn dn. In Averroes: rax: nnr.

ip tod N'nn

152. Hebrew n"a p n m a ip -pnrv® The phrase rfa pra is Crescas' own addition. In the original, this proof like the first is based upon the general proposition that no infinite distance is traversible, and not, like the second and sixth, upon the proposition that no infinite distance is traversible in finite time. That this addition was not intentional may be inferred from the fact that in his criticism he groups it together with the first proof (See below p. 466, n. 113). Averroes illustrates it by the following figure: Let C be an infinite circle with C as its centre. Let A B be its diameter infinite at both sides. Take any point E in A B outside C and draw through it infinite line E F at right angles with A B . Draw C D infinite at D intersecting E F at any point F'. Let A B and E F be stationary and let C D revolve on C. C D could never pass through E F , for E F is infinite, and no infinite distance is traversible. Hence, no infinite could have circular motion. The figure is given by Aristotle, who makes use of the line A B . In Averroes' Paraphrase line A B in the figure serves no purpose. 154. De Caelo I, 5, 272b, 28-273a, 6, and Averroes: D'Dim 'r V^o ,'N HDND •'jiym. The argument in the original has two parts. 1. If the heaven were infinite, an infinite body would traverse an infinite distance in a finite time. 2. Since the heaven is convolved in a finite time, it must be a finite magnitude. Aristotle calls the second part the converse of the first e n » « on» ,nr i e t d ' Dn nne> "tik» ? 1 1 DHpom .cmpo nypm nsDontp Kin yrrp 'nb -iKian -on ? i*oa in'in® tdi ? .«btijd o^ma 2. Hebrew p'SDD nsia. The term p'BD» reflects here the Arabic f as in Cuzari V, 2: nip'SDO ni'in ,n«ytup« (p. 297, 1. 2, and p. 296, 1. 1). Both the Hebrew and the Arabic terms mean "satisfying," but the Arabic means in addition to this also "persuading" and "convincing." In Zerahiah ben Isaac's translation of Themistius' commentary on De Caelo the Arabic term is Hebraized and taken over into the Hebrew translation from which it is rendered into Latin by persuasibilis. From the context it is clear that the term is applied by him to an argument which, on the one hand, does not establish the truth as it is, i. e., it is not a demonstrative argument, and, on the other hand, is not an eristic argument. Cf. Themistii in Libros AristotelisDe CaeloParaphrasis, ed. Landauer. Hebrew text, p. 88, 1. 9: no« wvn v t a njnpnn i s by ton did« ornm njnn nr 'a IDX. Latin text, p. 131, 11. 23-24: "Haec autem vestra sententia persuasibiliter (inquit Aristoteles) non autem vere dicitur." Hebrew text, p. 91, 1. 31: ns boo ]in:«n an« mm nn«n nn«on "?a« p y n n^u by y:pa nvriP B"jmi. Latin text, p. 136,11. 33-34: "Alius autem sermo est sermo sophisticus, tametsi prima fronte persuasibilis videatur." In this last passage of the Latin translation the term contentiosus would be a more accurate translation of

l8l]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

397

than sophisticus. For JHpo the term y'HD (other readings: D'Jao and JJ'IDD) occurs on p. 8,1. 34. The precise technical meaning of the term p'BDD, yapD, may be gathered from Algazali's Mozene Zedek (ed. Goldenthal, 1838; Arabic original Mizan al-'Amal, Cairo, A. H . 1328). Algazali enumerates first three classes of arguments: (1) contentious and litigious, npl^nom m m , s^-kUJtj J-^-l, ayamariKhv Kai kpuTTinbv, (2) demonstrative, nsion ¿ A « ^ ' (see above p. 326, n. 13); (3) rhetorical, roNDa^Nn, ^ =ns'?n, cf. Millot haHiggayon, ch. 8. The last one is described by him as an argument the purpose of which is to persuade. Hebrew text, p. 170: t!>D:n a»'1?, Arabic text, p. 159: 1 —»J' J 1 . Later he designates the rhetorical type of argument by the term ".persuasion." Hebrew text, p. 172: yiupN Nim a^rinm; Arabic text, p. 162: Hence the terms .p'BDO nam ,ae"nn nyjpn, all mean persuasion and refer to the rhetorical argument which is known as ns^n. The connection between these two terms is to be found in Aristotle's definition of rhetoric as "a faculty of considering all possible means of persuasion {indoLvbv) on every subject." (Rhetoric I, 2, 1355b, 26-27). T h u s J»p», p'BDO is 7ndavbv, nyipn and a»vin are it tans. This contrast between a demonstrative and a persuasive argument underlies the following passages in the Cuzari: I, 13: "Because they are arguments of which some can be established by demonstration [Nrrty NUTO ,nsw bt^j; Toyn1?] and others can be made to appear plausible by persuasion aiP'nn® nan o a ip'BD'] Nn'B iiy:p' .vty njnn]. I, 68: " T h u s far I am satisfied with these persuasive [nyjpa^N .nip'SDOn] arguments on this subject, b u t should I continue to have the pleasure of your company, I will trouble you to adduce the decisive [nyoNp^N ,mp'DB»n=n'Dmnn] arguments." 3. Hebrew mrn n&arn tayo itn ntyw nra® 'th. By a similar statement Aristotle introduces the problem of infinity in De Caelo I, 5, 271b, 4 - 6 : "For the existence or non-existence of such a body is of no small but of the greatest consequence to the contemplation of t r u t h . " Cf. Themistii in Libros Aristotelis De Caelo Paraphrasis, ed. Landauer. Hebrew text, p. 14,11. 19-21: Tipn1? ' a n « i n » "OKI

398

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[l8l

o^iyn an idi^d .trwyn "?aa »piann nD«n nijrpa bra mjpw '3 ,nr by jv"?an byi v t a «in n^an byi. Latin text, p. 22, 11. 4-7: "Necesse autem est, ut de eo inquiratur, videlicet utrum mundus sit finitus an infinitus, quia magni est momenti ad veritatis cognitionem, quam omnibus in rebus quaerimus." The expression bj?d l r « , no small, which is the reading here according to all the MSS. instead of ^rn, great, in the printed editions, reflects the Greek ov tl ¡xiKpov in the corresponding passage of Aristotle quoted above. The expression 'taya 13'« is again used by Crescas in Or Adonai I, iii, 1: 'DJ?D pSD ^IB' p i . 4. An allusion to Crescas and his argument here is found in two identical passages in Isaac ben Shem-^ob's first and third supercommentaries on the Intermediate Physics IV, ii, 5. "There is some one who raises here a question, saying that those who admit the existence of a vacuum do not maintain its existence on the ground of its being one of those enumerated causes of motion but rather on the ground that it is necessary for motion, even though not a cause thereof, just as there are many things without which some other thing could not exist even though the former are not the cause of the latter. Consequently, even though he has demonstrated that the vacuum cannot be any one of the causes, this does not make it impossible for it to be something necessary for motion." «in® ^'ara 'is» Hint» no«' mpna onDwi® ion'i W ' » en ,ruD u w B"yt* n1? rnaio «in» ,nnann maDn nn«o nap nyun^ .niao Dj'Kt» '"By« .on^ir »«an1? "73' ir« nam® o'ai onan wv ma .nyuri^ maio n'n't» nr 'jbd yx>y .rvoDno nnx ran -i«ae> '"sj?« Pico Delia Mirandola refers to this argument in Examen Doctrinae Vanitatis Gentium VI, 6: "Negat et eos qui vacuum astruxere id ipsum causam motus asservisse, praeterquam ex accidenti, ne videlicet fieret corporum penetratio." 5. Hebrew D"ionDi nrtppnm nvnsDni -pnnm nn'DxnD p Da nra nryn Dnn«. In Physics IV, 6 and 9, Aristotle reproduces a number of alleged proofs for the existence of a vacuum, all based upon various natural phenomena. Averroes has grouped them into five classes. Intermediate Physics IV, ii, 2: "Those who affirm the existence of a vacuum support their view by five examples . . . .

l8l]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

399

locomotion . . . . motion of increase . . . . rareness and denseness . . . . weight and lightness . . . . augmentation and division."

'jbd . . .n&Dn O'iDi n n en1? n n m p n n niN'xna n o « ' h p « did«i

-nana . . . nvaiBom nv»pDnD . . . nn'Dsn nyun 'jsd . . . pnynn nyun p^nni 'lamD ...ni^pm. In referring to these proofs, Crescas quotes only the first three, and alludes to the others by the phrase "and other illustrations." The term "pnnm is not found in the original. Crescas has added it apparently for no special reason, except out of the habit of coupling the terms nri'DX and "]inn together, as in the expression nanm nrrnx.. As for the meaning and use of the terms ,"]inn .nvaiBD ,nV2>pD nn'DS, the following observations are in point: nn'DX and its synonyms ^m and ¡ma are the Hebrewequivalents of the Greek avi-rjais, Arabic , used in the sense of natural growth and increase, as in the following examples: Intermediate Physics I V , ii, 2: nn'BJcn nyun USD (Kalonymus' translation), nyun 'JBD i ? n i n (Zerahiah's translation). Altabrizi, Prop. I V : VilK '3 ^ n i tnp'i 'yata naa v1?« i n « dpi lannna mm ~iaa nsDinn (Isaac ben Nathan's translation); v^>« i n « *)u nnannna ntpyn nsDinn mm 1« n n ' B X « i p j nr...'ya£J naa (Anonymous translation). ]nom n ' i b «in® ninaa nywi1? (Hillel of Verona, Prop. X I V ) . "linn or nann is the Hebrew translation of (a) J ^ w » ' or J.r. dicrts, and (b) J ^ * " , ava\vto - a m - p i t » n»s«ts> nai .yjian

ynan on' «in nyiann

nyiann Dn1 n\T® nra a"in' «Vi .n'yaen

«im ,ivoi irya p y «in ,naaia« na«'» laa ,-iin'xn V« mn'«n dit ^3« n^Da nyiann nni«i ,nn« p n nn« nyian p i yyianaa t w

«"?» ^ a a nvx

•'»»a n « v r -itroo nts©« nr^i .nn'nai nn'«a n«in' l^Vaa prn im«i on' «in nm«n nyiann "?« niyiann w n nn« Dn' n'n'® D'u^nna D'yaia .iBDn nra 'yawa *?aip nan nn .yuan •?« yuan

B. Gersonides' Supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics, loc. cit.: §1. "From the following it will appear that a stone can have no motion in a vacuum, for the medium is a condition in the existence of this particular motion of the stone, in view of the fact that the medium has something of the nature of a terminus ad quem, that is, we claim that the medium does not merely accelerate the motion or retard it but rather it is a condition in its existence The motion of the stone in air is said to be faster than that in water in the same sense in which we say that the keenness of iron is more cutting than that of bronze, which does not mean that there can exist a keenness without a subject. Similarly here, the relation between one speed and another is said to be equal to the relation between one medium and another without implying that there can be motion without a medium, for it is the possession on the part of the medium of the nature of an incomplete terminus ad quem that is the cause of the motion of the stone. §2. Avempace, however, in his treatise argues in the manner stated above, namely, that it is the relation between one kind of retardation and another that is equal to the relation between one medium and another, and that there exists an original time. To illustrate by the example of two ships §3. But Averroes says that all this is an impossible fiction, for the retardation is not a motion added to the original motion in

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

407

the manner illustrated above by the movement of the ship, so that by the elimination of the retarded motion there could still remain an original motion. Quite the contrary, if there had existed a natural, original motion, it would have already been destroyed by the retardation which accrues to it, for there is only one kind of motion in the movement of a stone in air and in water, and consequently, if an original motion is assumed, it will have to disappear completely, and an entirely new motion will take its place, and this new motion as a whole will be related to the medium; as we say, for instance, in the case of the motion of a fatigued person that his motion as a whole bears a certain relation to the fatigue rather than to the retardation. To illustrate: If Reuben's rate of motion is one mile per hour, but when he is slightly fatigued his rate of motion is one-eighth of a mile per hour, we then say that if he is twice as much fatigued his rate of motion will be one-half of an eighth of a mile per hour but not that the relation between one state of fatigue and the other will be equal to the relation between one degree of retardation and that of another, for that would not be so. But what we do say is that the relation between one rate of motion and that of another is equal to the relation between one impediment of the motion and that of another, as is accepted in Book VII of this work. a. Says Levi (Here follows an argument against Averroes' refutation of Avempace). b. But the real refutation of Avempace's objection here is Averroes' contention that the medium is a condition in the existence of the motion. This is true and beyond any doubt. Consequently Aristotle's reasoning here is well established. §4. Similarly Averroes' argument in refutation of Avempace, that if an original motion were assumed to exist in a vacuum, it would follow that the same object would traverse the same distance in equal time both in a plenum and in a vacuum, is subject to the following difficulty. a. First b. Second c. Hence Avempace's objection here is to be answered only by Averroes' contention that the medium is a condition in the existence of motion. Let us now return to where we were."

408

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[183

'ton ynonn® *E)b ,nyun mp'-ia p« 1 ? n'nn® nws« »«® n « T nrrai 1 § y n o o n ® now® , i ' ^ > « ® n o y a u d 1 3 ® n d a nyunnn«rm«'xoa i n y m ® no«' m m "?aN rtniN'xoa 'tun «in ^a« ,m«o in nyunn m o o ^ n a a n®« nnnn® -io«3® no nx by D'aa n®«o m ' n o m i ' - h « 3 i ® « ton' p ,«®u nVia nnn o ® n'n'® n ® s « n'n'® vb ,n»raa n®«o -pin inv •i®b« n'n'® ynDDn ynoon Dn' Kin nn'non I»« rvrvnon Dn'® n n nao «in ynooa n ® « -non 'n^an 1 ^ « ® no yaca 'a .yxioon n^ira nyirin •ia nyunn

Dn'a nn«n

nn«n Dn' :onp® ioa lyio td«03 naaia« d:o«i 2§

. . . . jiu'BD t w o btsD ,'®n® |or ®'i ,ynoon V« ynoon by riBDU nyun -nn«n t « ® 'ab 'ion 1V3 nr® nwn p -io«'i 3 § ~i®bk n'n'® ny .ro'SDn nyuna i^>®D3 onp® no nx by n'®-i®n nyunn nyun i«aa nn'n l 1 ?«® 'd1? ,n'®n®n nyiann -i«®n nin«n nyun p^nona» nyuna 1*03 i>« '3 ,mp' n®« -nn«n oy m o s : naa nn'n n'yau n'®n® . n ^ a a n'®n®n nyunn p^non nrh ,nn« nyun d« ' 3 d'03 ik -vi«a p « n 103 ,ynoon !?« nV^sa na Dni'n m n « nyim n«r n'nm ,nn'H® n'n d« .mirW? tub myrn "7« n ^ a a Dnvn y r n » ' » t n n y i : n a to«j® n'nn no m y r y r n'n' n®«3i ,nn« ^'0 ny®3 pi«-i nyun n'nn® ia V®om n y ® 3 wyun n'nn ^»B3n nro y r n'n ok® now n n ,^'0 n'j'D® n y ® 3 lnyun ,nn«n 1?« -nn«n on' m y r n m y r n Dn' n'n'® now® «"? .b'D n'j'D® 'xn ,ynon yiion dh' Kin nyunn Vn nyunn Dn'® now ^ 3 « ,n®e« viVa nr 'a

.TBDn nro ' a nr !?aip'® 103 . . . 'iV no« a 'ton y n o o n ® no«'® no «in ,ns naaia« psob 'oxyn "7iuan ojok b .ns ibdh« arn no«n' nrh ,n3 psD i'« no» «mi .nyunn n w x o a ,mpna n ' ® n ® nyin ]toa nnun dn , t ® t pt< u « n n®« psDn p mi 4 § p avnn n n n n ,m® ^apoai mp'na y y a in«n yyunon nyun n'nn®

:ioi«® no pDDn ...n^nn dn a '3®n poDn D"?INI b p « "10«'® no «in ns naaia« psD inD' i ® « 3 no«»' no nr^i .ia u n n *i®« "7« ai®ii

c

.nyunn n w x o a '«an y r p o n ®

14. Hebrew yaon yiT, known to nature. According to some readings 'yaan ^2£« y i T , known to the natural philosopher. M y translation of this phrase, however, is based upon the following consideration: The existence of an "original time" of motion is explained by Crescas later (p. 205) as being due either to the medium ('JKDM,

185]

N O T E S TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

409

here : ^apD, receptacle) in which motion takes place or to the nature of motion itself ( p a nyunn nvn man"? or nynnn n«so). When, therefore, Crescas argues here that even by eliminating the medium or receptacle there will still bé an original time on account of the fact j a a n "tcn $?it nrnoxy 1 ? p r a " n n nyunn», the alternative reason he offers here must correspond to the alternative reason he offers later. The expression yatsn y v r is thus equivalent to the expression yatsn y i T Dira which occurs in Prop. IX, Part II; cf. also Prop. XII, Part II, n. 6 (p. 612). 15. Hebrew nxpoa. The qualifying term nxpaa is rather misleading. Crescas has borrowed the theory of an "original time" of motion in its entirety from Averroes, who quotes it in the name of Avempace. 16. The reference is to Averroes' answer that has been refuted by Gersonides. See above n. 13, B, §3a, §4a, b. Thus relying upon Gersonides' refutation, Crescas dismisses Averroes in this summary fashion. As for the expression •'aio D'TaT rami, see Ecclesiastes 6.11.

17. The reference is to Gersonides rather than to Averroes, though Gersonides' answer is based upon Averroes. (See above n. 13, B, §3b, §4c. Cf. also Narboni on the Kawwanot, Physics, On the Vacuum: "The learned Averroes has solved this difficulty by explaining that the relation of one motion to another is equal to the relation of one medium to another, for the medium is not simply an impediment as was thought by Avempace." "vnn "Ttsn p Danni 1'« ' a ,ysn»Dn b « jjsiDon Drra nyunn "7« nyunn Drrtp n u t r a psDn nr

-oauN at»niy idd ym ysioon. The expression yw yxiDDn, the medium is . . . impediment, reflects the Greek to ¡xtv ovv 5i' ov éptrai. ALTLOV 6TL T F I I R O Ò I ^ T L in Physics IV, 8, 215a, 29. 18. That is to say, the difference in the motion of the same object by the same agent in two media, in air and in water, for instance, is not due to the fact that water offers a greater resistance than air to a hypothetical original motion, but rather to the fact that motion in water is essentially different from motion in air, for the medium is an inseparable condition of motion. Averroes compares

410

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[185

motion to the keenness of the edge of a blade. The fact that the edge of an iron blade is keener than one made of bronze, he says, does not imply that there exists an original keenness, independently of the metal, which in varying degrees is dulled by the metal in which it inheres, and by bronze more than by iron, but what it means is that the keenness of the edge of an iron blade is essentially different from that of a bronze blade, the metal being an inseparable condition of the keenness, as there can be no keenness without metal. So also in the case of motion, there can be no motion without a medium, i. e., without space. See above n. 13, A. 19. Hebrew v"?«(f nob yntJ mmsn 1 ? nn. This explanatory remark is not found in the corresponding passage in Averroes. It reflects the following statement of Gersonides quoted above in n. 13, B, §1: no jneiD up noa nyonn n«r j w x o a 'tun yxioonp u nyinn naD «in jraiaoa -ton - m i 'rtan v^np no yao o . . . v W . What Crescas wants to say here is this: The medium is an essential condition of motion, because when an object moves toward its proper place, it is not the object alone irrespective of its medium that moves, but rather the object in so far as it is in a certain medium. Every point within the medium which the object has to pass in order to reach its goal is in itself a relative goal and acts upon the object as a terminus ad guem. The medium itself thus becomes charged, as it were, with a certain power to carry the object toward its objective. If that medium should be eliminated, the object would cease to move. Consequently, there can be no motion in a vacuum. 20. The purpose of this passage is to prove that the medium is not a necessary condition of motion and that motion is possible in a vacuum. Crescas, however, does not attack the problem directly. He starts rather with a flanking movement, arguing that weight and lightness need no medium, and seems to leave it to ourselves to supply the conclusion that whatever is proved to be true of weight and lightness must also be true of motion. Such a conclusion may be properly supplied. For according to Aristotle, weight and lightness are only other terms for downward and upward motion. "But I call that simply light which is always naturally adapted to tend upward, and that simply

185]

N O T E S TO P R O P O S I T I O N I , P A R T II

411

heavy which is always naturally adapted to tend downward unless something impedes" (De Caelo IV, 4, 311b, 14-16). We may therefore infer t h a t if it can be shown that weight and lightness are independent of a medium so will also be upward and downward motion. In showing that weight and lightness are independent of the medium, Crescas advances a theory which dispenses with the necessity of an inner striving of the elements towards their proper places. This is not original with Crescas. It is reported by Aristotle as the view of the ancients, Plato and the Atomists. According to Plato, as reported by Aristotle, the difference in the weight of bodies is due to the difference in the number of "triangles" of which all things, he says, consist. According to the Atomists, the difference in weight is due either to a difference in the number of void interspaces a body contains or to a difference in the size and density of the atoms of which bodies are composed. (Cf. De Caelo IV, 2.) According to these views, as may be inferred, the difference in weight is due to a difference in the internal structure of bodies. Crescas, therefore, characterizes them by saying " t h a t the moveable bodies have weight and lightness by nature" (Compare the account of the different theories of gravity and levity as given by Plutarch in his De Placitis Philosophorum I, 12). 21. T h a t is to say, the theories of weight and lightness just stated might be said to deny altogether the existence of absolute lightness. There are according to these theories only different degrees of weight. This interpretation suggested by Crescas agrees with what Aristotle himself has said of those ancient views: "Of those, therefore, who prior to us directed their attention to those things, nearly most spoke only about things which are thus heavy and light, of which both being heavy, one is lighter than the other. But thus discussing the affair, they fancied the discussion was about the simply light and heavy" (De Caelo IV, 2, 308a, 34308b, 2). 22. This correctly describes the explanation of upward motion as given by Democritus and Plato. According to both of them, the less heavy bodies move upward not on account of their own nature b u t by the pressure of the heavier bodies. (Cf. Zeller, Pre-

412

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[185

Socratic Philosophy, Vol. I, pp. 701, 713; Vol. II, p. 420; Plato, p. 376, n. 30). This view is also quoted by Avicenna and is attributed by him to some unnamed philosophers. Al-Najah, p. 41, quoted by Carra de Vaux in Avicenne, p. 193. Pico Delia Mirandola, in Examen Doctrinae Vanitatis Gentium, VI, 6, discusses this argument of Crescas as follows: "Et praeterea nihil efficere eas quae sunt excogitatae contra vacuum rationes, et fundatae super motu recto, quando intermedium nullum sit necessarium: et dici queat gravitatem et levitatem naturaliter corporibus inesse mobilibus, nec ea mediis indigere. Dici etiam possit omnibus corporibus inesse gravitatem, eaque vocari levia, quae videlicet gravia sint minus, eaque ipsa moveri sursum ex eorum, quae magis gravia sunt impetu et violentia. Ac memini etiam ex nostris theologis, qui causam quod ligna supernatent aquae, referant in gravitatem atque, quae minus gravibus sua parte natura non cedit. Sed quod attinet ad Hebraeum omnia corpora gravia non negat, et aerem descensurum, si terra loco moveretur affirmat, ob gravitatem verius, quam ne vacuum detur." Cf. the following statement in op. cit. VI, 18: "Negaret alius fortasse etiam in ipsis corporeis authoritate Scoti, decernentis gravia et levia se ipsis moveri. Cui videtur assensus Hebraeus Hasdai." 23. This argument is not unanswerable. Aristotle has forestalled it by the theory that all elements, except fire, have gravity in their own place. "For all things, even air itself, have gravity in their own place except fire" (De Caelo IV, 4, 311b, 8-9). "But as earth, if the air were withdrawn, would not tend upward, so neither would fire tend downward; for it has not any gravity in its own place, as neither has earth levity. But the two other elements would tend downward, if that which is beneath were withdrawn; because that is simply heavy which is placed under all things; but that which is relatively heavy tends to its own place, or to the place of those things above which it emerges through a similarity of matter" (op. cit. IV, 5, 312b, 14-19). Cf. Gersonides on the Epitome of De Caelo IV: "This is an indication that air has some gravity in its own place. Aristotle cites here another illustration for this from the fact that, when water or earth is withdrawn, air is easily attracted to the lower place,

185]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

413

but the contrary does not happen, namely, when air is withdrawn, earth and water do not tend to move upward." noo'iK] -»«'I . l o i p o a n o n n a s -pin 1 ? m i ' » n o o n n mod nDinio .mVpa bBtvn mpnn i?« - m n "|»an nr by n'Ktn id p dj •nnn« -it»Dn ,-mn nDinttotp .'ran ,-|sna pyn tre»' n^i , p « n 1« d'dh The same illustration with the inference that the descent of air is due to the impossibility of a vacuum is given by Gershon ben Solomon in Sha'ar ha-Shamayim I, 1: "It may further be made clear to you by the following illustration. If a man makes a digging in the ground, the air will descend into that digging and fill it up. But how, then, is it possible for the air to move downward against its own nature, seeing that it does not ordinarily descend but rather ascend? The explanation is that its descent is due to the fact that no vacuum can exist, for which reason the vacuum attracts the air and causes it to move downward against its own nature, for there can be no vacuum at all." m ' s r a -ran i t ypipa rn'sn d i n - i i s i t dne> junV bow mj? rrrTn 13no nn» ,ijnt3 t u -nan i t 7N1 .nnw N^nm «'nn f i n w i n n n i D i - n u n mpnn roKno mpn i'«® u s d ?n"Vyn n x d : mpnn 'jbd . i j d b d This view that motion is due to nature's abhorrence of a vacuum is quoted in the name of Avicenna by Shem-tob in his commentary on Moreh II, Introduction, Prop. XVII: " I t has been said by Avicenna that all motions, whether violent or natural, take place on account of [the impossibility of] a vacuum." n-onn i n s d ' .nryaa nrrnan .myunn bjv w d p mx Tan .mpm t mjnnni Another explanation for the descent of air into a ditch is given by Albalag in his comments on Algazali's Maka$id al-Falasifah III, On Place. According to him the descent of air under such circumstances is not locomotion but rather a form of expansion, that is to say, it is not local change but quantitative change: "Says the translator: Inasmuch as the place of water is the inner surface of air and as the nature of each element is to tend toward its own place and not toward the opposite direction, would that I knew why it is that, when we withdraw, for instance, half

414

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[185-187

of the water from a ditch, its place is taken by air? This evidently cannot be explained except on the ground that the air moves toward the water; but, if so, the air will then have a downward motion. One would rather expect the water to move upward toward the air, inasmuch as it is the object which moves toward its place rather than the place toward its object. The answer is that the motion of the air in this particular instance is not due to locomotion. It is rather due to the rarefaction and expansion of the parts of the air with the result that they spread over and occupy a larger area. It has already been explained by Algazali that this kind of motion belongs to motion in the category of quantity." yyimn1? -tidti j?3bi . ' c a n tinh nrn «in D'Dn oipn dk .p'nyan -10« -pi .n^yra D'»n 'xn í t o j í o vijrr p ' '0 . u d «V .loipo ' f t a ,0'Dn 'bVs lyyunro dn '3 -mpsn nr '3 ,D:nDn Ti«n t1 ia nyi .nWen T f i ^>y «in® .ni^aDn n i n o a «in nia®non ia lintf'w nni ,-ioi«n .p-rcn nn®s«a c m o'-iniDn 'j®n 'a Cf. also Moreh ha-Moreh I, 73, Prop. V I I : p « pviyn .ny® ri^K'S y-i«i 'D .p'nyn1? p m .nan ' k i ,a"nn a^ea p i .¡ran '3«i ,]ian. 31. The implication of this statement is that by defining place as a vacuum it does not mean that there is no difference in the use of these two terms. It rather means that what is called vacuum when it contains no body but is capable of receiving a body is called place when it does contain a body. This is in accord with the following statement of Aristotle; "For those who assert that there is a vacuum consider it as it were a certain place and vessel. And it appears to be full when it possesses the bulk which it is capable of receiving; but when it is deprived of this it is void; as if a vacuum, plenum, and place were the same, but their essence not the same" (Physics IV, 6, 213a, 15-19). A similar statement is found in Plutarch's De Placitis Philosophorum I, 20: "The Stoics and Epicureans make a vacuum, a place (rbirov) and a space (x&pa.v) to differ. A vacuum is that which is void of any thing that may be called body; place is that which is possessed by a body; a space that which is partly filled with a body, as a cask with wine." Similarly the Brethren of Purity explain that

418

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[189

those who define place as a vacuum (U^l, Dieterici: Weite) call it vacuum when considered apart from body but place when considered as possessing a body (Cf. Dieterici, Arabic text: Die Abhandlungen der Ichwdn Es-Safd, pp. 30-31; German translation : Die Naturanschauung und Naturphilosophie der Araber, p. 9). 32. Cf. below Second Speculation, Third Argument. 33. I. e., it is said to be "small and great" but not "much and few," because it is a continuous quantity. Cf. Physics IV, 12, 220a, 32-220b, 3: "It is also evident why time is not said to be swift and slow, but much and few, and long and short: for so far as it is continuous it is long and short, but so far as it is number it is much and few." Pico Delia Mirandola restates this argument of Crescas as follows: " quas explodi miratur cum magni et parvi nomine donentur, et per eius partes queamus illas dimetiri" (Examen Doctrinae Vanitatis Gentium VI, 6). 34. Hebrew naa p^na -ij>i®a wni Crescas evidently uses this expression here to prove that a vacuum must be a continuous quantity. Abraham ibn Daud, however, uses it only as a definition of quantity in general and not necessarily of continuous quantity. Emunah Ramah I, 1: l"?a HPS«® "Ul boa «xa' pj? «in naam i"?a u -ijron |Dp p"?n uaa ma'® ne®« new 'mjn otwn inn .uaa p!?na p^nnoi pama d t b ' » naam. Cf. Isaac ben Shem-fob's first supercommentary on Intermediate Physics IV, iii, 4: UDD p"?na -ij?m> -lam «in naan "nn. Gersonides, on the other hand, uses it as a definition of continuous quantity. Milbamot Adonai VI, i, 10: WBU "iNUn Kin® -ia«ii .noan D^UDD on® ,m® -rbi i« m® u -IB«' naa® nn ,naana «in prn o -ua 'a .pannan naana «in® -MUD «in n n ,«in nDana pVn nr«a d^I«! «!? nnna i»a p*?n «in® naa I'ra nyi®' «in® nj?i .ispi i n « u ID«1 pa-man naan m^UDa nn ,jnt33. Crescas himself, in another place, uses this expression as the definition of quantity in general. Cf. Or Adonai III, i, 4, p. 67b: -inr «in» ;rn •« n"aa -IDIK® nn 13bd p^na nyi®' -i®« «in® naan. All these definitions of naa are reproductions of Euclid's definition of the multiple of a magnitude, in Elements, Book V, Defini-

X89]

N O T E S TO P R O P O S I T I O N I , P A R T I I

419

tion 2. " T h e greater is a multiple of the less when it is measured by the less." I t will be noted, however, t h a t this Euclidian definition, which in Book V is applied to magnitude, i. e., a continuous q u a n t i t y , is in Book V I I , Definition 5, applied also to number, which, according to Aristotle, is a discrete q u a n t i t y . I t is possible t h a t in citing this definition Crescas merely m e a n t to reason from the fact t h a t a vacuum is measured (~ij)lt2>n) and not numbered ("VIED), on which account it m u s t be a continuous q u a n t i t y . See Metaphysics V, 13, 1020a, 8 - 1 1 : "A q u a n t i t y (TO ls'p' am bov no d^ini D'tpnion D'awino nrrip1?. Isaac ben Shem-tob refutes Crescas' objection in his second supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics, loc. cit.: "By a

igi)

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

425

proper understanding of the minor premise of this syllogism one may solve the difficulty raised by Ibn Hasdai, viz., the opponent may dispute the truth of the proposition laid down by Aristotle here that every body is surrounded by a surface or surfaces, for, believing as he does in the existence of an infinite body, he does not admit that every body is surrounded by a surface or surfaces. But the answer to this is as follows: We have already shown that every body must be predicated as being either circular or notcircular, inasmuch as these two predications, circularity and noncircularity, are contradictory to each other after the manner of the contradiction between a positive and a negative predication, and in such cases, when the subject ordinarily may be either one or the other of the predications, it must necessarily be either one or the other. Consequently, since the mathematician has defined a circular body as something which is surrounded by one surface and a non-circular body as something which is surrounded by many surfaces, the aforesaid difficulty disappears." no® Kim /«iDn '] n»y» paon nnv »pnn nra mopn noipnn -n«33 ran ¡TIT® .n'ncj» 1« not» u Tpo o»i V3» nmpnn n « a nan D'VIDIHDH« -ion» ^3» rnv «V .n^an viVa ^yan D»ia -ibn «in» nn ,3'nn Vys nr Vy p"?in "73 pnxn» 3"inD «in» ran u-idnss> 103 '3 nn .D'na» in nav 13 ^p» D»j I'jpni ,-nynni ppn npi^n nip^in on» in« 'n^a in ^uy «in» d»j i«xd'» nys Dna «so'» lamD» «»in ana nn« p n r » 3"in» mynni o»n»i ,m« no» 13 *]'p' n»« -unn «in»3 Vuyn o»an ma nio?n» nr V« . ^ 3 pBD *i«»' «"7 ,D'3n o'nto» 13 is'p' n»« «in hay 'n"?3n See also his first supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics, loc. cit.: "Some one has raised an objection, arguing that this syllogism is a begging of the question, for he who admits the existence of an infinite body claims also that there exists a body which has no surface; and so, how could Aristotle refute the opinion of his opponent with a premise which the latter does not admit? Our answer to this objection is that this premise is self-evident and the opponent could not help but admit it." iv .'i3i ' 3 1 3 D n ' n 0 « n n « nov 13 V P ' n j n o » j bs

inns n'33 wi TDi«n» «nsnyon ^y wn «in »pnn nr» no«i n»pn» 'o ^3131 .»tod «in» nmpnn oy myn nnD 7« 3"«i ,mv «"73 d»i »'» no«'? .i"3i 'B1? .noxya nn«i3D «mi imVap1» on1? mn man nmpnn n«r» at'&nV 41. Cf. below Proposition II.

426

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[193

42. Hebrew nrno 'n"?a moipno. One would naturally take nrno as the active participle nnlo. But the expression "admissive premises" is as awkward in Hebrew as in English. While the passive participle nma does not occur in Hebrew, as far as we know, still by taking it here as a passive participle, we get the right expression "inadmissible premises." The term nrno occurs in a Hebrew version of Algazali's Maka$id al-Falasifah as the translation of the Arabic and both of which, to judge from the context, are to be vocalized as the passive • 1 and — I n two other versions the same Arabic terms are translated by the passives ni^aipo and niD^ttno. Cf. Maka$id alFalasifah I, p. 68: U - J I o U o i J l l*. j ( j j L J I j.1^11) »

%

.fU-ji ¿y ¿ s ¿ ¿ ¡ j djfc v ji U j j r u i dUi Anonymous translation, MS. Jewish Theological Seminary, Adler 398: [read: oanm noann 10 nrno n r n n oni n w t n vn' t b v dm Anonymous translation, MS. ibid. Adler 978: nimwn vn1 N1?® ONI nana ni^aipn ru"nn Isaac Albalag's translation, MS. ibid. Adler 131: loi^n ]0 mo^iflD ]ne> N^« m » t n 'n^a vn' IK. See use of D^fTD in quotation from Isaac ben Shem-tob's second supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics above n. 1, p. 395. 43. Cf. Physics I, 7. 44. This criticism has been anticipated by Narboni in his supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics, I, ii, 2, 2: "Shouldst thou say that our contention that principles must be known is true indeed according to him who maintains that the principles are finite, but according to him who believes that the principles are infinite, they need not necessarily be known; quite the contrary, they cannot be known, inasmuch as the infinite is not comprehended by knowledge—the answer is as follows: Aristotle's statement that the principles must be known, is based upon his belief that in order to know a thing perfectly it is necessary to know it according to its causes and principles, as we have stated at the beginning of this work." 'o n'nnan ''n niyiT n:"nn® nnana a"irr niVnnnn» mo«® no n"«i nr'nn® a"i!T vb n"aa niVnnnn® no«® 'o Va« ,n"a on mVnnna no«» . h j t t ia «]'pn nV n'aa Hint? no 'a ,nijnr n r n n a"in' "?3N ,myrr

193] MA^®A

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

427

jnv®V -mrrc> 'fl^ myrp nrnrw 3"IIT ni^nnnn® TDK® no® .iBDn n^nna i:TDN® IDS vm^nnni rnuD1? jnr® 'itn

The same question has also been raised and answered in an anonymous supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics I, ii, 2, 2, fol. 99v (MS. Adler 1744): " ' B u t the principles must be known.' Who has told you that the principles of being must be known? We answer that the reason underlying this statement is the view that nature does nothing in vain, for inasmuch as nature has implanted in us a desire to comprehend all things and these things cannot be comprehended by us except through their causes and principles, it follows that the principles must be known." '3 a'tw .myrr rmnn ni^nnnn '3 i1? Tan 'd .rai a"nr mbrinnn "73« mi 1 ? p®n m )ru «in '3 .rbm^? nan n®jr vb yarn® n a ,n«r «'n naon niVnnnn p DK .OM^nnni oniaDa ON 'a NI'B'NB' "7313 N1? nnaim ,nnain "73 .myiT nrnn® a"in' Shem-tob Ibn Shem-tob, in his supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics, loc. cit., answers Crescas as follows: "It is for this reason that Rabbi Ibn Hasdai raised here an objection, arguing that it is a begging of the question, for he who believes that the principles are infinite claims that the principles are unknown. Either one of two answers may be given. First, Aristotle is addressing himself here to a man of good sense. Now, it has already been demonstrated in Book VI of this work that when we are deprived of the knowledge of something, we have a longing for it, and no sooner do we come into the possession of that knowledge than the longing disappears. Hence we do know that we have a knowledge of the principles, inasmuch as that knowledge causes our longing for it to disappear. [Second], or we may answer it in this way, which indeed is something very subtle. Aristotle will first force the ancients to admit that they possess a knowledge of things, and then he will use their admission as an argument in their own confutation. For they claim that, because the existent objects are infinite, the principles must be infinite. Thus we do know that the principles are infinite, and this, perforce, constitutes a kind of knowledge. But, then, if, as they claim, the principles are infinite, they could not have that knowledge." TON® 'd® nn ,®mn "75? roiyo «in® -idni w o n '1 a m n®pn nt"?i :niai®n '3D nn« "b nr"?i .myiT I'N ni^>nnnn® TDIN ,n"aa m^nnnnw

428

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[193

n®«3 m .riBiDa neon nro "a n«3i ,"73® ay -n-p ibdh«® ,'«n m o u ny'Tn w n n®«3i ,i'V« ppin®j a » « no nsn nyn' iiob na^y: .^bo npi®n ny'Tn nm« nn« u"? nn«®j «"7 n®«3 uyn'® i:yn' md«i ,npi®nn cryni'® n'nanp1? na«1? «'3' nnsns urn ,n«a pi -an Kim ,10«!? f?3u 1« D'-onn® 'sh ,n"33 m^nnnn® nnai« on® .nriVuna nana «'3' 3*«i .o'nsnn m^nnnn o«i ,ny'Tn «\n n«n ,n"33 Dn® uyn' 133 3"« ,n'33 D'«x»in .ny'Tn n«r iyT® «"« ,n'33 an A veiled refutation of Crescas' criticism is also found in Isaac ben Shem-tob's second supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics, loc. cit.: "He who is inclined to be skeptical may raise here a doubt and contend against the first argument, wherein Aristotle states that principles must be known, that it is a begging of the question, inasmuch as the opponent disputes its truth, for he who maintains that the principles are infinite claims that they cannot be known." ,na d'^ididd'-in "ibn® na® nn®«nn raytan iu3 na«'i psD'® paoob ®' :phn®i pVina , i m n Vy nsnya «in® ,niyn' nrnn® a"in niVnnnn ^3« b>ys v t a ]n m^nnnn® nai«n® nn ,3'in !?ys v^y [Cambridge MS.: .myiT nrnn® n®s« v t a «in® to« 1 ,rv^3n Two indirect answers to this criticism, one like the answer given by Shem-tob Ibn Shem-tob, are found in Isaac ben Shem-tob's first supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics, loc. cit.: "The principles must be known, that is to say, inasmuch as the knowledge of anything becomes complete by a comprehension of its causes and principles, and, furthermore, inasmuch as many of the existent things are known to us, consequently we are bound to admit that we have a knowledge of their principles. Or we may say that any agent who performs a certain thing must have a knowledge of all the principles out of which he has produced the thing Gersonides, however, explains it in another way." v/roD ny'T3 nsbm nsn "733 ny'Tn® ."rn .myn' nrnn® 3"irr .mVnnnn yna® 3"nr i : ^ « myn' nw«Din ]D n3-in® nn« 3"«i .vni^nnni mVnnnn *?3 yT® 3"in' 1 3 1 ^ys'® "?yis V3® 'bV «in n n oycan® na«] 1« .nn« oyci nt3 «'3n ii"3l?nim=) !?"nm — n s n n ini« n®y ona® 45. This is an argument against the rejection of an infinite neutral element. See above p. 348, n. 61. The reason given by Averroes is that an element in so far as it is an element must possess qualities

193-1951

429

N O T E S TO P R O P O S I T I O N I, P A R T II

different from those of other elements. Crescas' contention is t h a t the unqualified and formless infinite element would be the subs t r a t u m of the four elements into which they would never have to be resolved. 46. Cf. De Caelo I, 3. 47. I. e., the argument t h a t sublunar substances would be destroyed by the infinite, does not obtain if an infinite existed outside the world of the four elements, which is the view held by the Pythagoreans. See above n. 7. 48. This question is discussed by Narboni in his supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics I I I , iii, 4, 2: 'We m a y object to this by arguing t h a t the assumption of an infinite body does not necessarily require t h a t the infinite should occupy all the room in all the three directions, for b y assuming the infinite element to be a magnitude infinite only in length b u t not in breadth there will be room for the other elements, even if we say t h a t such an infinite magnitude exists. T o this we answer t h a t such an assumption is untenable. For we observe t h a t when a body increases by natural growth it increases in all its directions. By the same token, if we assume an infinite magnitude, it will have to be infinite in all its directions. Hence there will be no room for any other element." 3"nrr

n ' a a dot n m n »

: "DI

- p i N m m ,n"33 "j-m « i n » u m n a w ' s ^

a n « » : 1 ? m p n rrrr ,rahvr\ n w s n

d'ni vbon

rrrr»

D n w A i Dipo n \ T " 0 3 ,n"33 'niii n x s ' ® IONS? '"syN 3"m , a n n , v i D i p ^ 3 3 n o s ' . n o * ' -IB>N Dtpjnip n t o : i»ra> 'B1? ,-KPSN ' r t a rro, DH1? a'tw n b v 3"« 3 " n n n

.vntflip Von n"33 ,T;TE> « i n 3 " i n o n"33 "7115 - c t o z o d"ki oipD rrrr

Cf. Averroes, Epitome of the Physics I I I , p. 10b: " T h a t the infinite must be assumed to be infinite in all its directions is made clear by him by the following a r g u m e n t : Inasmuch as a body is t h a t which extends in all the three dimensions, it must necessarily follow t h a t if anything is assumed to be infinite qua body t h a t it must be infinite in all its directions. For if one of its dimensions were supposed to be finite, then infinity will be only an accident of t h a t body and not essentially necessary, for the same reasoning t h a t makes it possible for t h a t one dimension qua dimension to

430

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[195

be either finite or infinite must equally apply to all the other dimensions. Hence the infinite must necessarily be infinite in all directions." iKiaa «in n n ,inup "733 n^an Vjn 'rta rai'» 3"ina «in» d"71«i 3"nrr .ni^tm crprnan V33 -]»a:in sin own n'n» - r a j » .now naa ^33 n^3n byj, v b z n'n'» ,o»j «in» n»3 n ' ^ n iV ]'«» n:in 0« ,m3ra mpD3 11? n'^nn n y n n'n ,Dno -rn«a rr^an iV »'if rain -i»«3 '3 .map «V 1« n ' ^ r a pmo «in» no -ixd ,m« pma by i'in '3 ,'rn3n v t a i ri'^an f?j?a v t a «xa'» msna 3"nn' nrVi .D'pnnan bo Vj? p .rvbon .map "?3a Gersonides paraphrases Averroes' passage in his commentary on the Epitome of the Physics, loc. tit., as follows: "That a body assumed to be infinite must be infinite in all its three dimensions may be shown in this way. If a body is assumed to be infinite qua its being a body and it is a body qua its three dimensions, it follows that it must be infinite in every one of its dimensions. For if one of its dimensions were assumed to be finite, then infinity would be only an accident of the body and not essentially necessary, since to assume the contrary, i. e., that infinity were essentially necessary, would imply that the body is infinite qua its being a body, and hence it would necessarily have to be infinite in all its dimensions. Furthermore, the very same nature of the body which makes it necessary for it to be infinite in one of its dimensions will also make it necessary for it to be infinite in its other dimensions, for the same reasoning must hold true for all the dimensions. Conversely, the very same nature of the body which makes it necessary for it to be finite in one of its dimensions will also make it necessary for it to be finite in the other dimensions." ,n»b>»n D'pmn ^33 n"33 ¡tit» ,n"33 o»n mm q« ,3"ina «in® d^ni d»i torn ,o»i «in® na3 n°33 dot n'n d«» nn .-ran nra -i«iao nr ~ m .D'pmna i n « I733 rf33 raw 3"ina «in» -i«iaa «in ,D'prn nwbw «in» naa , , m3n v t a i mpa3 l1? n'Vann n y n n'n ,D'pmn p in«a rra nam d«» nn .o»j «in» nas n"3a n'n'» a"ina n'n ,'man i1? n^snn -nyn n'n d«» n'bonn n y n ll? 3"n' n»« ystan '3 nyi .vprn !?33 n"33 n'n'» 3"in' nrh .nn« £3B»an '3 ,o'-i«»n D'pma n'bonn n y n a"n' «in D'pmn into n'"?3nn 1 b s"n' nna nn«3 n'bonn 11? a"n'» yaan» ,3"j nr i s m .D'T«»J3

195)

431

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

Cf. also Isaac ben Shem-tob's first supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics III, iii, 4, 2: "An objection may be raised that his statement that an infinite body must be infinite in all its directions is not true of a natural body qua its being natural which is here the subject of our investigation, for in the case of a natural body qua its being natural one body may differ from another and in the same body one dimension may differ from another, and this indeed must be due to its being a natural body and not simply a body—for if the equality of dimensions were true also of a natural body, then all bodies would be equal in their dimensions and all those dimensions would be of equal size. In the same way we may argue here that this body under consideration qua its being natural will have its length infinite while its breadth may still be finite. To this we answer that even though what has been said is true and that in natural bodies qua their being natural the dimensions may differ from each other, that difference will be only relative, that is to say, even though in natural bodies qua their being natural one body may differ from another, still any given difference between them must be relative to the other difference between them." Kin» 'B^

noa

dkq

,nr n o « i r

no«n' «!?

«V

,'yaa

nr® t o n 1 ? ! D®aa w f

«l^rar i » x y a -in«n o®ia ,-in«n a a b ,otw « i n ® i x o aw

o®n

nD«n® ,o"j?au ,-in«n p

«V

,'yaa

nt® i s o ®

'"aim®

did®3 o n ® i n «

]«aa

\

i n «

«in

1

?

«in

urry®

o®3 ^ n r v

.n"a

u i m

nt o'o®an

^aa iDa

rraa. ,'jno

Kin» noa

on® vrr

n"aa p m n

dim

o'awn

n'n'®

prnon

!?a

a'«®

a"nir

'yaa

iiVrotn n o « ®

o ® j " p ^ n - j ® » ' y a t a n n x o ® >"bj?«® ,"7*1 , " d i t

o®i

own»

n n ,"in«n prno1? i n « n

.on'pmoa

nro

;vpmo

eh

-i«aa

a'ji

a'®: nrV

ixd

b

dim «in® n x o nvr

now

-io«ji

wpn nm

^ n

loa n'n'

/ - i n « n «]i^nn o y D n 1 1 1 ? n ' n 1 «ji^nn i n i « nr ^ a

«in nt 05?

49. Cf. De Caelo I, 3. Similarly Bruno argues against Aristotle that the infinite would have neither weight nor lightness. Cf. De VInfinito Universo et Mondi II, p. 328, 1. 24; also p. 335, 1. 12; De Immenso et Innumerabilibus II, iv. 50. The printed editions as well as all the MSS. read here IDlpo® wnnjjp no® «in, its place is the surface of its concavity. But this is impossible, for it does not agree with any of the views on this

432

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[195

question reproduced below in n. 54. I have therefore ventured to emend the text by introducing the word 1X0. It will be noted that innnyp r r n IXD is fittingly counterbalanced by liWUJ nxni. 51. Hebrew lnnHyp. Above (p. 188,1. 6) Crescas uses the adjective 'inyp. We should therefore expect here the form invmyp. But n m y p is used by him later (p. 196, 1. 9) and the same form also occurs in Emunah Ramah I, vi, p. 28. 52. As for the special meaning of the term "centre" DID used in this connection, see below n. 70. Hebrew WU'UJ. By analogy of the Biblical 1331 and the Post-Biblical luna, we should expect here inrciru. But the MSS. read here lDiraj with which w r n j in the Ferrara edition is practically in agreement. Similarly later (p. 196,1. 2) the form mi'Uj is used. Some MSS. read there nvjaa. 53.

54. The implication of this statement that according to Aristotle there is a difference between the outermost sphere and the other spheres as to their places needs some qualification, for it touches upon a controversial point. Aristotle himself has only the following general statements on the subject. "And some things indeed are in place essentially; as, for instance, every body which is moveable, either according to lation, or according to increase, is essentially somewhere. But heaven (ovpavSs) is not, as we have said, anywhere totally, nor in one certain place, since no body comprehends it; but so far as it is moved, so far its parts {¡xopiois) are in place; for one part adheres to another. But other things are in place accidentally; as for instance, soul and the heaven (ovpavbs); for all the parts are in a certain respect in place; since in a circle one part comprehends another" (Physics IV, 5, 212b, 7-13). Aristotle's commentators are divided in their opinion as to the meaning of this passage. The cause of their disagreement seems to lie in the vagueness of the term ovpavos which might refer (a) to the universe (TO TTOLV) as a whole, mentioned previously by Aristotle, or (b) to the outermost sphere, the parts thereof thus meaning the inner spheres, or (c) to all the spheres indivividually. The discussion is reproduced in the texts accompanying this note. It will be noted that it is only one interpretation, that

195]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

433

of Themistius, which makes the distinction, implied here in Crescas' statement, between the outermost sphere and the inner spheres. According to Alexander Aphrodisiensis the • outermost sphere, which he believes to be immovable, is not in place at all. According to Avempace and Averroes, all the spheres without distinction have the "centre" as their place, though the former calls it essential place and the latter calls it accidental place. The following texts are illustrative of this note as well as of the succeeding notes. Averroes, Intermediate Physics IV, i, 1, 9, in which only his own view and that of Avempace are given: "As for the univocal applicability of this definition of place to all bodies that have locomotion, it is something which is not so clear. For if place is the limit of the surrounding body, then every body which has some other body external to itself is, as Aristotle maintains, in place. But as it is only the rectilinearly moving sublunar elements that require the existence of something external to themselves, would that I knew what is the place of those bodies which have by nature circular motion, [and hence do not require the existence of something external to themselves], as, e. g., the celestial bodies? Aristotle, however, solves this difficulty by saying that a body which is endowed with circular motion, as, e. g., the celestial bodies, is moved only with reference to its parts, in consequence of which it is not necessary to look for a place for the whole of it but only for its parts. This is a rather plausible explanation. Still the following inquiry is rather pertinent: Those parts which are considered to be moved essentially in the circularly moving celestial spheres must inevitably have as their place either the convexity of a spherical body about which the sphere of which they are parts revolves or the concavity of a spherical body which encloses the sphere of which they are parts from without. If we assume that the place of the parts of the celestial sphere is the concavity of another surrounding sphere, then it will follow that every such sphere will have to be surrounded by another sphere, and this will go on ad infinitum. It is therefore necessary to assume one of the following alternatives, namely, either we must say that not every body that has locomotion is in place or we must say that the place of the circularly moving celestial spheres

434

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[195

is the convexity of their respective internal spheres about which they revolve. But the first alternative must certainly be dismissed as false. Hence the second alternative must be accepted. Evidence for this . . . (Rest of paragraph is quoted below in n. 70). Hence it is generally true that place is the limit of that which surrounds, but in the case of the rectilinearly moving sublunar elements the surrounding body is from without and in the case of the circularly moving celestial spheres the surrounding body is from within. That the centre must be something separate . . . (Rest of paragraph is quoted below in n. 70). It cannot be contended . . . (Rest of paragraph quoted below in n. 72). But the universe as a whole is not in place except in so far as its parts are in place. This is what Aristotle has meant by saying that it is in place accidentally. For a thing is said to be in place potentially or actually, essentially or accidentally. Now, the universe is not in place actually, inasmuch as there is nothing which surrounds it from without. Nor is it in place potentially, inasmuch as there is no possibility that such a body surrounding it from without will ever come into existence. Still less is it in place essentially. Hence it must be in place accidentally. But to say that something exists accidentally may mean two things: First, with reference to some accidental property, as when we say, for instance, that the white man is a physician, if the physician happens to be white. Second, with reference to a part of the thing, as when we say, for instance, that the man sees, when as a matter of fact only a part of him sees, namely, his eye. It is evident, then, that the universe is not in place accidentally in the sense that it happens to be a quality of a thing which is in place essentially. Hence, we are bound to say that it is in place because its parts are in place. Aristotle, however, uses terms rather loosely, sometimes applying the term accidental in a general sense and sometimes in a specific sense. What we have just stated with regard to the place of the circularly moving celestial spheres represents the view held by Avempace and before him by Alfarabi, namely, that they exist in place essentially, their place being their [so-called] centre (see below

195]

N O T E S TO P R O P O S I T I O N I , P A R T I I

435

n. 70). Accordingly, the term place is used in an analogical sense with reference to the celestial spheres and with reference to the sublunar elements endowed with rectilinear dimensions. I t seems, however, that it would be truer to say that the celestial spheres, whose place is the [so-called] centre which they enclose, are only accidentally in place, for that which is in place essentially must be surrounded by its place and not vice versa surrounding it. The surrounding limit corresponds to the surrounded limit. But it is only accidentally that a surrounding body is said to exist in that which is surrounded by it; so that when a certain body, as, e. g., the celestial spheres, does not exist in a body that surrounds it, it is not in place essentially; it is in place only by virtue of its existing in that which is surrounded by it, but that means being in place accidentally. This is the view of Aristotle. Avempace, however, does not see the homonymy between the place of the circularly moving celestial spheres and the corresponding place of the rectilinearly moving sublunar elements. Inasmuch as a thing is said to be in place accidentally on account of its existing in something which is in place essentially, this must be the case of the celestial spheres in their relation to their [so-called] centre (see below n. 70), the [so-called] centre itself being in place essentially. This, according to my opinion, is the meaning of Aristotle's statement that the heaven is in place accidentally, that is to say, it exists in the elements which are in place essentially, for when a thing is said to be in place on account of its parts it is not the same as when a thing is said to be in place accidentally. This interpretation agrees with what appears to be the opinion of the author as well as with the truth itself." hod «in pnynn nyun lyjmiv -it»« o w n bjb nun nr n»3Dn DJD«I mo fin aw bs ran .«vpon own n^AN «in oipan n*n DNP nn .nspp'® n®« «in - o n Dno p n n®« D'owni ,Dipna «in .IDD'-I« ID«'® ins , ~ o i

312D3 para D'yjnmon mown mpo nD jn«i in1 'DI ,mw nyin onyun 1 D'DTPH 'D-U 1D3 LYYURR • » « ,O'a»n '»na 103 .aiaoa YYUNONRA ,nm ANR IBDH« 'ra«

.'i«n -inv nn .vp^nV ^>3« ini^a 1 ? mpo ^ en-n1? prr «*? p"?i ,rp^na n'n'P j m t b ,qxj?3 'aiaDn owa o'yyiwD i«*»' -ib>« .D'p^nn l1?«» ^3«

436

CRESCAS' C R I T I Q U E OF ARISTOTLE

[195

. p r o i s i r r n n a i n « DIM a u p in ,aiaD' r"?y n n a otw n ' a m j dh 1 ? o i p o n ,1113 i n j b z b ,t.tb> 3 " i n , i n « - i n s a n p « i n : a ' j ' j y 'jtî>o i n « n r a n n n«r own ri'juaj «in i n s n

a"in'B> n o nrVi

rnn

' p ^ n aipo uran d«i

.n'Van ' n ^ a "7« p y n nr -|i?'i

Dip» now® o«i ,Dipo3 pnj?j ^ 3 i'«t» io«at& d «

. 3 " i n o '3t»n ran ,"703 «int» 3 o t

1 3 3 ]ity«ini ,3i3D' v ' j y 1 0 « . . . nrV t j p 1331

1

1

D'aiaD ? d « i p n D D'ltP'n D'otpa ? d « «i'pon n ^ a n «in b b o n o i p o n nan .D'3sa . . . a " i n ' D i o n » 030«i . . . n a « ' » ioi« 1 ? i'«i ran

it»« i n n . n i p n a v p ^ n t r a «•? dm ,Dipoa i r « 1 ^ 3 3 D^iyn D30«i

n a a 0 « Dipoa « i n » n o « ' n a i n » nri yin ] ' « » ^sb i33'«i

,"?j?isa Dipoa i r « D^iym

. m p o a d«i o x y a d « . ^ y i s a d « i

.o») 1300 p n i ' n y a «xo'tv « '«tt>'s 1 ? , n a a Dipoa i33'«i

m p o a ® not? «•?«

idd,i«

. m p o a Dipoa «int» n o « 3

, i a i 1300

. m p o a Dipoa n'n'tp «"?« i « p j k1? ran . o x y a a i p o a a ' j

« s u 1 ? n i p n » « 3 « s u p ^ n o ,io«3B> 100 ,3'tyon i x o a n o i n « :o'3'o '3» n«n

D3o« « m i

,n«n

Di«n¡» io«3tt> 103 . p ^ n n '330 n n « n i

n i p ' «íntf ' a s o , m p o a Dipoa i r « Dbnyntp i « i a o i ' j s o x 1 ?« Dipoa «intt> ía no«3ty i « t w «"7 nan

.p 1 ? n'n't»

. t r y torn ,1300 p"?na nai1?

. o x y a Dipoa «ini

l l

a y s i m 7 733 m p o a ^ n o n t ? y a y a » ,mot03 bp-* i o d ' i k i

.Dipos vpVntp .nn"a

i x 3 i a « i a'* 1 ?« ia i s s u «

i3D i f « «in m a n

Dipo Vy pi3D3 n o « ' Diponi

Dipoa i n i 3 i o « i » «

nn

. i r a i o a V ' i .oatys Dipoa «înt» " r i

.vas1?

. D ' p m o n ntf'n otwn Dipo Vyi n n s n

otrai

Dipo3 13 *)'p' is»« 1 0 1 0 3 n i 3 n ' 3 n o « ' » ' n o « i n v n n ' n ' » h o t "73« b^pa

Tpom

.13'po «V i a ^ p i o « i n Dxya Dipo3 it»«» ' a s o

,no dim n ' n n t w o o

,13 « p í o s «intp io«'t£>

fptb

n p i o s Dipoa «in D30K1 . D s y 3 m p o a ia'« n3n ,ia T p D a 133'« . n i p o s « i n Dipoa « s o s d « ' o w n

Disant» n o « n 3"«

Dtwm ' a i s D n Dtwn i ' 3 i f « ^pntpn r ^ s '

,mp03

n i p 1 ^ 3 « ,13 " p i o ^ ran

13313« D3o«i

flwn

ina

. m p o a n n ,ia . i d d ' i « n y i inn

. i n « a *?'apo o n o i n « 3 Dipon n'n't¡> itP'n «int» '330 nr i a n o « ' D30« m p o a Dipoa «íntf 13 no«'!» n o n'nt? no"?i Dipo3 « i n it»« V 3 i o o y n i D n i'3y nr n ' n ' f 3 " i n , o x y 3 Dip03 « i n n a i a n n i D ' a o n » V i , m p o 3 Dipos D'otsns» i d d ' i « i o « o p y

inn

.oxya

n o ' n ^ s v p ' j n a Dipoa « i n » v'yy ion'b> n o » '3 1 ? , o x y a Dipo3 o n it»« . n i p o s Dipo3 « í n f r"?y i o « ' f . i o x y 3 no«"?i i o i « n o n«i3¡p no"? d ' 3 d o ¡¡ni'sn n n

195]

N O T E S TO P R O P O S I T I O N I, P A R T II

437

In his Long Commentary on the Physics, loc. cit., in his exposition of the various interpretations of the Aristotelian passage, Averroes reproduces also the view of Themistius, which is of particular importance for us here, as we shall find allusions to it in Crescas. We quote parts of it here from the Latin translation: "Themistius vero dicit respondendo quod corpus coeleste non est in loco secundum totum sed secundum partes, scilicet secundum orbes, quos continet maximus orbis sed quia corpus altissimum, v. g., orbis stellarum fixarum, non continetur ab aliquo, concessit quod hoc corpus est in loco propter suas partes intrinsecas tantum, scilicet quae sunt in concavo eius." (p. 141rb-va.) Cf. Themistius in Physica (ed. Schenkl), p. 120. "Et etiam secundum expositionem Themistii, cum Aristoteles dicit quod coelum est in loco per accidens, intendit quod alterum coelorum est in loco, s. orbium; et illud quod apud Aristotelem attribuitur alicui propter suam partem est aliud ab eo quod attribuitur alicui per accidens: et ideo omnibus expositoribus, ut dicit Themistius, displicet ut coelum sit in loco per accidens et dicunt ipsum esse in loco secundum partes." (p. 141vb.) Narboni on the Kawwanot ha-Pilosofim III, Motion, probably based on Averroes' Long Commentary on the Physics, gives a complete account of all the views: "Know that Averroes in the Physics has discussed five views with regard to relation of place to the heavens. We shall briefly restate their essential points. First, the place of the outermost sphere is the potential vacuum [which exists outside the world). This view is to be rejected with the rejection of a vacuum. Second, the view of Alexander, according to which the outermost sphere has no motion and does not exist in place, for it does not change its place nor is it divisible, in consequence of which its parts cannot be described as having motion, and so it does not exist in place. Third, the view of Themistius, according to which the outermost sphere has motion with reference to its parts but not with reference to its whole, that is to say, the celestial body as a whole [is in place] on account of the individual spheres, all of which are in place with the exception of the outermost sphere. As for the outermost sphere it is in place on account of its concave parts

438

CRESCAS' C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E

[195

which are in place, for the convexity of the sphere which is within it, being enclosed by it, equal tQ it and separate from it, is in place essentially, and is the subject of the outermost sphere. Aristotle's statement that the heaven is in place accidentally is to be explained by the fact that that which is said to be in place on account of its parts is not in true place. Fourth, the view of Avempace, namely, that the place of a sphere qua its being a sphere is the convexity of the object which occupies a place within it and about which it revolves, and that Aristotle's definition of place as a surrounding, equal, separate limit must be understood with reference to the rectilinearly moving sublunar elements to mean an external limit but with reference to the celestial sphere an internal limit. If some of the celestial spheres happen to be also [externally) surrounded [by other spheres], it is to be considered only as an accident. According to this view, the outermost sphere is moved essentially and is in place essentially. The fifth view is that of Averroes, and it is composed of the views of Themistius and Avempace. From Avempace he borrows the view that the fact that most of the circularly moving celestial spheres happen to be [externally] surrounded by other spheres should be considered only as an accident. From Themistius he borrows the view with regard to the outermost sphere, namely, that the convexity of the [so-called] centre (cf. below n. 70) should be considered as the place only of the concave surface of the sphere which surrounds it, for it is only that concave surface which the centre equals and not the surrounding sphere in its entirety Thus, according to Averroes' interpretation, the natural bodies are in the opinion of Aristotle of three kinds: First, those which exist in place per se, namely, the rectilinearly moving sublunar elements. Second, those which are in place per accidens, namely, circularly moving celestial spheres. Third, those which are in place on account of their parts, namely, the universe as a whole. Themistius, however, considers the case of the [outermost] celestial sphere as similar to that of the universe as a whole." -rcpn .D'Dwn DIPDH DPI' pjj» mjn van yatsa i m p '3 jrn .iDWi DI":J> n n

195]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

439

,mpin "?iB33 Vra Him .roa 'usn «in px'pn oipon® ,]iw«in in'« ,Dip»3 yyiwo utk px'pn •un® n y i «in ,':i®n .•ipoa m1« nrV>i , n y i m p m o'p^nn n«irp «V nr"?i ,p^nrv «Vi îoipo t b b 'B'o®n a-un ,i"?33 «V vpVra yyiwo «in® .DVDDon n y i «in vp^n® ':bb pxpn d«i .pxpn i3^?a ,Dipo3 vpbnw nos [ DipD3 «im ,«®in Kim ,"713:1 m®i u isinn îsiru i®« V ^ n i r n n j '3 ,aipB3 D"3i3pn 'sea i«in' i®« ]'«i ,n~ipaa mpaa D'a®n® t b « i b d h n i .axys oipoa «im .'no« oipa3 «in vp^n «m ,Tn3 «in nn3 m s n Dipa® torn ,13313« n y i «in ,'y'3in ni® Tpa rvVan «in®3 oipaa ibdh« tij®i ,3i3D' vVy i®« ,13 ooipon nxp r n o«®i ,D'M3D n n 3 3 i ,pnn «in®3 i®'n died pi'® 'i«i oxys yyuna pxpn W>in ran .an1? m p m p a nr .D'epia D"B'B»n D'Bun .Dxya Dips iVi .133 i3«i DvcîDon n y i a 33110 «ini ,i®i p n y i «in .vrann nyim np'i ,ipiD invn i1? mp® «in m p a s u r a yyunanw i33i3«a np' «in '3 u u p n ncjeb p i Dips ir« Dion 'Jina® «ini .lix'ps no«® no DVtJDana Tpan bb's1? ,13"? iV m® «in o .vVy I'pana 1 Dipa3 l'a : t r r o n® ?® w i « bxx D"y3Bn o w n n ,i®i |3 n y i 3"« ran .l'p^n ' » a nipaa j'Di ,o"3i3Dn am m p a s Dipas i'ai ,D'i®'n am oxys .aViyn "?3 inn .nViyn Wo1? "B'B®n amn b d » o ni®' DVUDom In the Epitome of the Physics IV, p. 16b, Averroes mentions still another view, t h a t of Avicenna: "Avicenna's statement with reference to circular motion t h a t it is not in place a t all b u t only in position is past my understanding. I surmise t h a t he meant thereby t h a t circular motion is translation from one position to another without changing places as a whole. If this is w h a t he meant, it is t r u e enough. B u t if he meant to say t h a t circular motion is in position itself, t h a t is to say, in the category of position, then it is not true, for position has no existence b u t in place. Furthermore, we shall show t h a t there can be no motion a t all in position." 3X83 «'n djb«i DipD3 nr« «'n i®« ¡ r a u o n nyura ks'd p « t b n b i 'nbao 3x0 i?« 3x00 pnyn «'n® n n nxi'® 13 3i®n«i ini« i'3« «"? ran nnyirn ' 3 toi 1 ? n x i o « i j i b « «in ran ,nr n'n d«i . r b b 3 3 oipon I'Vn'® 3xsn 13 D"prr® noo i n « '3 ,na« v'« nan ,iB«an «in i®« ,i®s: axaa .hbs nyun 13 i'« axan '3 i t o i n n p on ,oipan «in Cf. Proposition VI, p. 504, n. 6.

440

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[19S

Gersonides' supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics, loc. cit.: "Says Levi: It seems that Aristotle's statement reads only that the sphere is in place accidentally. This term 'sphere' was taken by Avempace to refer to the universe as a whole, and the reason for his taking it in that sense is because he believes that [every individual] celestial sphere is in place essentially. Averroes, on the other hand, according to my understanding of his discussion before us, took the word 'sphere' in Aristotle to mean that [every individual] celestial sphere is in place accidentally. For were Aristotle's own statement explicit on this point, Avempace would not have understood from it that every [individual] celestial sphere is in place essentially." naaian 1 » » I'XN ,mpD3 Dipaa IRON® LTADNX -MAT? HOT, cnantp awn' NTO's1? uaa nr rrm . l ^ a a oViyn WD m a n nr ¡TIT» Dun» ,na«an nra awn«» na ••¡¡b ,]on Ya D^IKI .osya Dipaa 'Erawi naauN )'3D n'n nV ,*iNiaa nr itoDn« not«: n'n om ,mpaa Dipaa 'e'epn .oxya Dipaa OTKI -inan n'n'» IDD,_IN ~iot yaion noi ,nB«i ni by pao nt»« ,'«iDn '] a m pso by auw nrai onaiN on« 'a .«I'pan otwn /rVan iaipa rrn t w o d o t w d'tbi« dtikw Vn pny: «ini

natwi o"p «inn oipon n ' n laipaa own pnyj -i»«a 'a

o'pman n ' n laipaa otwn pny: n»«a 'a ,o'pman 'Vya n a « ' p ,-in« mpD .D'pVnno i n « "?a p i ,Qipo i"? r m ,ann« D'prno traVi nVnna imps on -it»« mxp j'a o'pman [oyi n«iM nswn pnj» naatp '"sy« 'a n«-u u« 'a n y i ro -©to® 'sV nn .npya psDn !?taa r m a n n«r p i n -w«a "73x1 ,'Van D'yVan omcsj o'pman vn'tp main mana a"in ,Dni« «Vai o'pmaa Dtwn m ® nai .an « s ' « j n « i p ' 'b ,p «V D«ts> ,'Vaa hen o'an 'pVn Vaai nana Vitaana a"j nr ,'Van pnyn nn« D'pmo w

n « t w 'Van Dipaa D'«n

m a n a 'Van dbj? i p n j w a"j a " i m .a'prna ot? i-i«»'(t> a " i n u t n p .Drnao 1 ?

.ia lyVan

mca: naap n n «

It has been forestalled by Gersonides in his supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics, loc. cit.: "This objection cannot be raised against our view, for we maintain that it is the vessel, i. e., the place of the water, that is translated and that the water is only accidentally translated with it. Essentially the water always remains at rest within the vessel, never leaving its place, which place, as defined, is the limit of the body that surrounds it. The water and its parts thus never move essentially, for they are always in a place which is part of the place of the occupied vessel." Dipa «in .'Van® t b k j urm® nn ,psDn nr a"nrr «V lira« mo«i «V® nn« ,'Vaa oxya o'm D'Bni ,mpaa n'an lay lpnyji pnyi «in ,o'an ,Dxya lyyiri' rpVni wonv tub ,Da Tpan dot n'Van «im .oaipa itb' .«Van 'Van DipanB pVn «in oipaa nn® 'flV

197)

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

443

It has been adopted by Joseph Albo in 'Ifcbarim II, 17: "This impossibility will indeed follow if the dimensions were capable of motion, but if we say that they are incapable of motion, and that it is only the body and its parts that are moved from one set of dimensions to another, this impossibility will not follow at all." .o'vyiwo raw n»tu DN .D'yymo o'pmn vn ON nr 3"nnn n n .Viz bntn run a"nrv .o'pmn Vk o'prnoo D'yyuriDrt on vp^m Dtwrwi 58. Similarly Bruno argues that Aristotle's definition of place does not apply to the place of the outermost sphere. Cf. De I'Infinite) Universo et Mondi I, p. 309, 1. 16 ff.; De Immenso et Innumerabilibus I, vi, p. 221 ff. 59. Here again Crescas argues from Themistius' interpretation, according to which the places of the inner spheres are the concave surfaces of the spheres which respectively surround them, whereas the place of the outermost sphere is the "centre" round which it rotates. He therefore calls the places of the inner spheres essential whereas that of the outermost sphere accidental. No such distinction exists according to the other interpretations of Aristotle. See above n. 54. 60. In this argument Crescas will try to show that even the places of the sublunar elements cannot meet all the three conditions which are considered by Aristotle as essential of place, namely, surrounding (*]'PB> Trepicxw»') the object, equal (nw, Laos) to it, and separate (^"u:, x^ptards) from it. Cf. Physics IV, 4, 210b, 34 ff. and 211a, 24 ff. 61. Hebrew nxya. The term oxjd is used here advisedly. For some parts are moved essentially with the whole, while others are moved only accidentally. The former is true of homogeneous bodies, the latter of heterogeneous bodies, as for instance, to use Aristotle's own illustration, the parts of the body and the nail in a ship. (Cf. Physics IV, 4). Speaking here of the simple elements, Crescas emphasizes the essentiality of the motion of its parts. In order to understand the argument Crescas is about to advance, we must quote here the particular passage in Aristotle against which it seems to be directed. "And that which is con-

444

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[197

tinued is not indeed moved in, but together with it; but that which is divided is moved with it. And whether that which contains is moved, or whether it is not, it is not the less moved. Further still; when it is not divided, it is said to be as a part in the whole; as for instance, sight in the eye, or the hand in the body ; but when it is divided, or touches, it is said to be as in place ; as for instance, water in a wine vessel, or wine in an earthen vessel. For the hand is moved together with the body, and the water in the wine vessel" (Physics, IV, 4, 211a, 34-211b, 5). The implication of this passage is that every part of air, for instance, by virtue of its being part of something continuous and homogeneous, is moved essentially with the whole and exists in the whole not as in place but as part in the whole. Crescas will hence investigate as to what is to be the place of that part. 62. Hebrew 1VDTI mmy. Cf. De Caelo IV, 3, 310b, 10-12: " I t is to its like (OPLOLOV) that a body moves when it moves to its own place. For the successive members of the series are like one another; water, I mean, is like air and air like fire." Cf. also Averroes' Epitome of the Physics IV, p. 14a: "For place is that toward which the bodies move according to a desire, when they are out of it, and, having attained it, rest in it according to an agreeableness and likeness." /odd pn vn -wso ,npwnn t x by vVn D'Dtwn ipny -1»« Kin mpon o p ' D "T m m 3 y n i s by .lma'tpn ntwo ,13 imri. See below n. 69. As for the meaning of many throughout this passage, judged by its usage in the passage n^ynn m i ' ttwn -ne» p® «l'poa iron many lb er> îxn nrn, it is to be taken in the sense of agreeableness, fitness, suitability, and seems to be used by Crescas as synonymous with mm«n. Cf. above n. 8. Were it not for that particular passage, one would be tempted to take it in the sense of mixture, i. e., the "mutual transformation" of the elements into each other. Cf. eis âXXrjXa fxera^oXr] in De Generatione et Corruptione II, 4, 331a, 11. It is in this sense that the term any is used in the following passage of Averroes' Kpitome of the Meteorology I (MS. Bibliothèque Nationale, Cod. Heb. 918, fol. 74r-v; Latin, fol. 404r-v): " I t is also manifest in the De Generatione et Corruptione that the elements exist one within another according to mixture and proximity But

I« 'yawn. MSS. 3,« read: 'yam loipoa d« ti«,i id 'j?xo«n p^nn djo«i . . .«in QKi ,hd«0 mm«nn •b if«. MS. 1 reads: loipoa «in® d« d"?oj «b Ti«n 1» 'yxo«n p'rnn o:o«i . . .«in d«i ,no« -1®« nvn«n 1!? 10« 'yawn. MS. x reads: loipoa «in» 0« abai xb -ri«n p yxoNn pyrin d»«i . . .«in o«i ,no« 1»« nini«n ib n®« nob yzan loipoa u'«® n« no1? 'yaan. Printed editions and MSS. o ,r read: "vi«n p p"?nn djo«i hp« nini«n ie>« 'yaan loipoa ir«» 0« 'yaun lDipoa «in» d« aba: xb . . .«in d«i ,no«. I have adopted the last reading, with the exception of mni«nn, and understand the passage to argue as follows: Take the element air, for instance. Its place as a whole is the concave surface of fire. This place indeed meets all the conditions. It is surrounding, equal, and separate. Furthermore, it is the proper and natural place of air, for there is a likeness between them. But then take any part of air from anywhere in the middle. That part of air will never move in the whole air; but will always move with it (see above n. 61). Consequently, that part of air will never reach the concave surface of fire; it will always be surrounded by air in which it will exist as part in the whole (see above n. 61). Crescas now raises the following question: According to Aristotle's definition of place, where does the part of an element, say the part of fire, exist? Does it exist in a place which is natural to it or does it exist in an unnatural place and out of its own natural

448

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[197

place? He seems to think that neither of these alternatives is possible. He does not tell us, however, why it cannot be assumed to exist out of its natural place. He tells us only that it cannot be assumed to exist in its natural place, and for this, too, he states the reason rather briefly, asserting only that, under this assumption, the place of the part will differ from the place of the whole, without telling us how they would differ. We must therefore try to reason the matter out for ourselves. The argument in full may be restated as follows: A. The part of air cannot be assumed to exist outside of its natural place. For if it existed outside its natural place, it would move in the whole as in place and not with the whole as part of it, for when elements are out of their natural place they tend to move toward it. But according to Aristotle the elements are homogeneous substances and any part of the elements moves with the whole as part of the whole and not in the whole as an object in place (see above n. 61). Hence the part of air cannot be assumed to exist outside its natural place. B. Nor can the part of air be assumed to exist in its natural place. For what would be its natural place? Two alternatives are possible. (1) The parts of air adjacent to it and surrounding it. (2) The concave surface of fire which is also the natural place of the whole air. But in case (1), the place of the part will be totally different from the place of the whole. Furthermore, the place will not be separate from the object of which it is place. In case (2), while indeed the place of the part will be identical with the place of the whole, the place will not be equal to the object of which it is place, and thus the place of the part will differ in definition from the place of the whole. Thus in either case, the place of the part will differ in some respect from the place of the whole. This argument seems to be underlying the following passage in 'Ikfcarim II, 17: "This view is obviously false, for as a consequent of it he will be compelled to say that the place of the part and that of the whole are different. Take, for instance, the parts of fire. They are not surrounded from without by a limit but are rather surrounded by parts of fire and air, and as the natural place of the element fire is the concavity of the lunar sphere, the place of the whole of fire will thus be different from the place of the part of fire. The same reasoning may be applied also to the other ele-

197]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

449

ments. Furthermore, he will be compelled to say that the elements abide in their respective places by compulsion, for the natural place of the element fire is the concavity of the lunar sphere which is above, and thus all the parts of fire, except those in the proximity of the surface of the [lunar] sphere, will be in their place by compulsion. The same reasoning may be applied also to the other elements." 1 D's^nna "?ani p"?nn Dipo» idi1? v ?» a"niv o ,nosnn -inub njnn nn 1 .dh'in IK D"t»N nnn« D'p^n n ?« pina «i'pa i r » n on1? j'n iwn 'p^n o 'pVn Dipa^ «j^nna Kim ,rn'n bibi -ijnpo sin »«n tio,i7 'yaian mpani D'rnaia m a i y nn nniD'nw nei1? i1? a"niv -nyi .nmo'n m r a p i ,iwn .ròyoh «intf rrvn W?a nyipa «in ttwn iid'V 'yaan rnpan 'a .oaipaa naw onaiyn 'nbnr D'maia anoiy tf«n 'p^n ba nr's!? v m .nnvrn -iNtya nr a"nrv p i The argument is also reproduced by Pico Della Mirandola in Examen Doctrinae Vanitatis Gentium VI, 4: "Hebraeus quoque Hasdai asserii multa contra loci definitionem, inter quae ilia, vitium non fuisse antiquis permultis, loci definitionem ab Aristotele tradìtam corporibus, quae motu recto perferuntur convenire : quoniam proprius partium locus, quae ad totius motum agitantur, non est superficies circundans aequalis adeo, ut seorsum habeat cum partibus loci convenientiam. Nam si (causa exempli) suprema pars aeris conveniet imae continentis et circum vallantis ignis, media tamen pars ei non ita conveniet, nec in suo naturali reponetur loco, qui si assereretur parti ipsi suapte natura congruere, tamen diversus habebitur a loco totius et integri corporis collocati." 67. Here Crescas has departed from Themistius and is arguing now from the points of view of Avempace and Averroes. According to both of these the places of all the spheres is the "centre" round which they rotate. But whereas Avempace calls it essential place, Averroes calls it accidental place. According to Themistius, the places of the inner spheres are the concave surfaces of the spheres which respectively surround them. See above n. 54. 68. An allusion to this argument is to be found in the following passage of Pico Della Mirandola; "Praeterea omnia quae collocantur corpora, suis congruere locis falsum esse aperiri, et ex supremi coeli circunferentia . . . " (Examen Doctrinae Vanitatis Gentium VIu4).

450

CRESCAS* C R I T I Q U E O F A R I S T O T L E

[lQ7

69. According to Aristotle, the elements air and water are each similar to the elements which are both above them and below them. Fire, however, has no similarity to the element below it, and its motion, therefore, is absolutely upward. Cf. De Caelo IV, 3, 310b, 11-13: "For the successive members of the series are like one another: water, I mean, is like air and air like fire, and between intermediates, i. e., water and air, the relation may be converted, though not between them and the extremes, i. e., earth and fire." Still, though fire is not like air, the transformation of fire into air is possible, according to Aristotle. Cf. De Generatione et Corruptione II, 4, 33la, 13 ff. Hence the following statement by Maimonides in Mishneh Torah, Yesode ha-Torah IV, 5: "Similarly in the case of fire, that part of it which borders upon air is transformed and condensed and becomes air." nil1? "paon nrccpD B>«n p i n n nit>ini wan»i nan®». Cf. also Intermediate Physics IV i, 1,10: "It is further clear that by introducing this element into the definition of place he is enabled to explain why each of the natural bodies tends to its proper place and rests there, that is to say, why heavy bodies move downward and light bodies move upward. The reason for their moving toward the limits of each other is to be found in the likeness existing between them, that is to say, between the element that moves and the limit of the body in which it comes to rest, as, for instance, the likeness of the limit of the [lunar] sphere to fire, the likeness of the limit of fire to air, of the limit of air to water, and of the limit of water to earth. For in all these cases, the element surrounding is like a form and entelechy to the element surrounded, and the element surrounded is like matter. The discussion of this subject will be taken up in a whole book in De Caelo et Mundo." it?« naon «'an1? ^av oipan irab mnn -kp« -ran nratp ,7iy -i«ia»i "r-i ,13 mri invDn laipa "?« pnjr D"jnt3n D'Dtwno in« "?a rrn nnaya lpnjp ma« Dnttn .n^y»1? •'yyiinon D^pm ntJD1? D'yyunon D'naan o'Diwn hp« own n,(?3m pnj?n ]'a ,on'ra n®« nionnV nxp n^an "?« Dnxp n^am ,-m1? ®«n ri'Van mmm ,»«"7 W?jn n'Van ni»in i»a .mr la mD^m nnxn n m o a 11?« ^aa «j'ponp nn .p« 1 ? o'on n^am .a'»1? -n«n

I99]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

451

-»KM o^iym d'dbti nsDa nt - » a m .^vnn n m o a u ipiam .»ipio1? .ubv Cf. above n. 62. 70. The reference is to Aristotle's theory according to which the circular motion of a sphere implies the existence of another spherical body round which the circular motion of the former sphere is performed and it further implies that the other spherical body must be itself fixed and separate from the revolving sphere. It is by this theory that Aristotle proves that the earth must be spherical in form and at rest, existing in the middle of the universe (cf. De Caelo II, 3, 286a, 12-22, and II, 14). This separate, spherical and fixed body, round which the sphere moves, is called by Aristotle "centre" in a special sense, not to be confused with the term "centre" in the mathematical sense, which is only a point (cf. De Motu Animalium 1, 698a, 15-698b, 1). Intermediate Physics IV, i, 1, 9: "Evidence for this may be found in the fact observed concerning the celestial sphere that by virtue of its sphericity it must have a figure and also a convex stationary body about which it is to revolve, that body being called centre. This is something which has been demonstrated by Aristotle in De Caelo et Mundo, namely, that the circular motion of the celestial sphere would be impossible without a stationary body about which the circular motion is to be performed, which body is called centre and constitutes the place of the circularly moving sphere, and because it constitutes a place of the sphere, it must be stationary, for it has been shown that the place of a thing must be essentially at rest. Furthermore, that centre must be something separate from the sphere, that is to say, it must not be a part of the sphere, and being thus separate it must be a body [i. e., it cannot be a mere point], for that which is indivisible [i. e., a point] cannot exist as something separate and by itself. Since every celestial sphere must have such a separate, stationary centre, which centre is its place, it follows that [the place of the spheres] is the convexity of that [so-called] centre which is the limit of that which surrounds the celestial spheres from within." -irn nvto n»3 yaaa - p a r m ® -man pyo pint» no nr1? t j p -oa> itoD'it* n i o "Qi nn .rain t n p n Kim ,313d' v^y m 'jua: dpi nron ,3130' vVy ro ow 'nVao n1? rvauDn njrunrw Vn .D^iym D'OWI -IDD3

452

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[199

133» 'sb ,m n'n nr^i ,nj>i:nn n«r3 yyinon mpo «in i»« ,Dinn «ini b m n'n't» 3"irr roían o nyi .oxy3 ra n\Tt¡> 'i«i aipantf itunn «"? p^rr

n o » 'B1? . r r a i a d¡m "7133m ,mo

pbn

i r « mn 1 ® "?"i

Dinn n'Jiiu n:n ,Dipon n"?uD N'n n«n ,ra ana 1*7 1113 "?3 n'n i s m o i .-in33 D'JB30 Tpon ivVsn «ín Cf. 'Olam Katan I, 3, p. 11: "We say that the sphere has circular motion, and everything that is moved with such motion must perform its motion round something stationary Furthermore, a circumference cannot be without a centre Hence the moving circumference is the celestial sphere and the stationary centre is the earth." J?J?ino ^CTB» ID«: nr 1«3nni "?'«in p 0« . . . .upw1? 3'3D yjíian» Kin n«D njrun yyunn "731 ,nspnn nyiin p « n «'n napwn mipm ^ a n «in Tpnn yyunon rrn\ Cf. also Moreh Nebukim II, 24: "Again, according to what Aristotle explains in natural science, there must be something fixed round which the motion takes place; this is the reason why the earth remains stationary." n'J?3Bn n»3n3 lDD'i« niysn» lljn n'nntp 3"nnn nr^i .nyiann n'nn i3'3D o"p 1 3 1 'rtan ni3n3 iipb« w no'p p«n. It is because the earth is the stationary and separate centre of the spheres that Avempace and Averroes consider the surface of the earth to be the place of those spheres. See above n. 54. The special text against which Crescas' criticism here is directed is the passage quoted below in this note. In this passage Averroes tries to prove that the centre round which a sphere rotates must be a stationary body. The language of the passage is rather misleading, as Averroes uses there mathematical terms which, however, as has been pointed out by Gersonides, he could not have meant to be taken in their purely mathematical sense. The argument may be restated as follows: Let C. be a sphere rotating on C. k Draw a radius from C to A in the periphery. Let CA revolve on C. Any point taken in the radius CA will describe circles concentric with the periphery of the sphere. The last point C in CA, therefore, will likewise describe a circle concentric with the others. That circle will have to be somewhere, that somewhere being either a plenum or a vacuum.

199)

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

453

But a vacuum does not exist. Hence, it must be a plenum. Now, that plenum must be at rest, for if it rotated the same reasoning might be repeated and the thing would thus go on ad infinitum. Hence, C is a magnitude and at rest. It is against this proof of Averroes that Crescas raises his objections. He argues thus: If the last material point on the bar at C must describe a circle on a stationary magnitude, then the radius CA at C must be implanted in a stationary body. But that is absurd. Intermediate Physics IV, i, 1, 9: "That the centre must be something separate and stationary may be demonstrated as follows. If we draw a line from the centre to the periphery [of the sphere! and imagine that line to move on its centre until it returns to its original position, then every point assumed in that line will in the course of its motion describe an arc similar to that great arc described by the further end of the line upon the periphery of the sphere itself. This being so, then all the parts of the line must of necessity perform movements all of which are related to the movement of the whole line in exactly the same way, so that the point at the end of the line [at the centre] must inevitably describe a circle similar to the circles described by all the other points in the line. Now, that circle must inevitably exist either in a spherical body or in a vacuum. But the existence of a vacuum will be shown to be impossible. Hence it must exist in another spherical body. But that other spherical body, again, must either be at rest or move in a circle. In the latter case, if that other spherical body were assumed to move in a circle, then by the same reasoning applied in the case of the former sphere, there will have to be still another spherical body [and that would go on ad infinitumJ. Hence the celestial spheres must needs have a stationary body round which they are to perform their circular motion." •otciin - r o t a uk ntPNa " i n u d nr irai Ha: rrrv» 3 " i i t o i n r w djoni mip: run .V'nnn itott awtp ty yymo imr»-n .^pnn bx ra-innn ip lnenrr "i£>N ^mn n»p"? n»n nwp nnjruna »inn nti nan ,ipn nr by rrn .Maa yjnno ipn nn ,p nr rpn -kmoi .Toxy -iron «vpoa ipn ¡"^P mana »inn ipn n'^an K'n -ipn nnpjni ,in« Dn' lyywv vpVn Vai

454

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[IQg

dkd nsdd -11»«» yion n®?i3yn nniN ran .m^ayn n«»1? non nVuy 1 aw «sn ® a« n-ora ran Kins? -wan' mpn niK'soi .mpi w n n a ,iw«-n 3"irr& no3 ia 3"in 313D3 yyuno n'n DNI .yyuna ONI rn "-ira .3i3D' v"?j; ra dim n r o n dim1? n'n1® n-om ran In his supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics, loc. cit., Gersonides argues that Averroes could not have used his term centre in a strictly mathematical sense, for the mathematical centre of a moving radius does not describe a circle, contrary to what is implied in Averroes' discussion. He suggests that Averroes must have used the term centre in the sense of the convexity of the enclosed sphere. "Says Levi: His conclusion is inconsequent, for while that line as a whole will indeed move on its centre, its extremity at the centre, which is the centre, will not be moved at all But if by centre here he does not mean a centre in the true sense of the term, but rather the convexity of another sphere enclosed within it, then he is justified in arguing as he does." iMOin niwo un -itMw -IN13D n r . . .-ins1? ^-do rrntp 3"irr Duon» moni n'n' 133 ipn nr» 'sV ,p-nx vbz avnn nr nm .'i1? ton Diana lp liu»n pNty -idk dni —yyiano r t a a inn mn -ipn inun ln^ani yj?i:no prac dki .d'jeod nnsn 3up ^3« n»«n -|-n by d i d ran did nota . . .VTDH2 See above in this note on Aristotle's use of the term "centre." 71. The expression vp^n p DN l s n s m , used here by Crescas, is suggestive of the identical expression used by Maimonides in describing the Mutakallimun's explanation of the revolution of a millstone in accordance with their atomistic theory of motion. See Moreh I, 73, Prop. 3: 3i3Dn dj> vp^n ixnsrv Drawn nn'ni. The Mutakallimun, in order to defend their theory of atomistic motion, were forced to assume that during the circular motion of a millstone the parts of the millstone separate from each other. Crescas, therefore, challenges here Aristotle, or rather Averroes, as follows: If you say that the place of the world is a stationary centre of a certain magnitude, and on this centre the spheres perform their revolution, then like the Mutakallimun you will be forced to assume that during the rotation of the spheres the centre will fall apart.

199]

N O T E S TO P R O P O S I T I O N I, P A R T II

455

72. The meaning of this passage is as follows: In Averroes' proof, C is nothing but a mathematical point and is thus the ideal centre of the sphere and likewise the ideal extremity of the radius. As such it is neither in motion nor at rest by itself and does not therefore describe any circle that would have to be "somewhere." It is on this ideal point that the sphere is in rotation. Thus the earth itself rests on the ideal centre of the universe, which is a point, as in place. But an ideal point cannot be place. This objection has been suggested by Averroes himself, in Intermediate Physics IV, i, 1, 9: "It cannot be contended that the centre is only a point, for a point cannot be described as being either at rest or in motion except accidentally and in so far only as it is the extremity of something at rest or in motion, as will be shown in Book VI of this work. Avempace has already refuted this view in his work on the Physics, where you may find his discussion on the subject." nnuoa iKinn n1? rrnp:n '3 .naVa n p mnntp no«'® now1? i'ni no 'S3 yirunna i n ma n x d : n'^an «in® no -ixdi mpoa d k o nywn n s o a nrn n»«on r s 1 ? « p n a a i a N i n D n a s i . - i s d h ntn w a ntun'® .n»N Din ,j)Dwa Simplicius, too, has raised the same question and answered it. Cf. Simplicius in De Caelo II, 3, ed. Heiberg, p. 398, 11. 20-24; Taylor's translation of De Caelo, p. 176, n. 2. T h a t the centre is only a point is also asserted by Gersonides in his commentary on Job, ch. 27, in mynn n a n "lltO: y i N n r 3 1 d by u?tw «in '3 ,inin by a w n -wk psxn nun D®n o ruyw nyiip "rn .no'^a by p « n n"?ini , m i p i • « ' 3 i j ' n n®« .nvyatsa -inann® ina ,m»D fin nana n1? .nrana «'¡hp m i p n by naoDn 73. Cf. Physics VI, 10, 240b, 8 ff. 74. See above n. 55. 75. Similarly Albo concludes his arguments against Aristotle's definition of place by setting up against it a definition which identifies place with the vacuum. 'Ibbarim II, 17: "But if place is identified with the void or vacuum into which the body is entered, none of these impossibilities will arise." Kin Dipon dn Van D'htaan "iai a"nrv k1? ,o®in la du'» mp-im 'ljon.

456

C R E S C A S ' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[igQ

76. I. e., if place is the intervals of a body, and wherever happens to be that is its proper place, natural motion longer be explained by the alleged tendency toward the place. What the cause of motion would according to the theory be is expounded by Crescas above, p. 410, n. 20.

a body can no proper present

77. Hebrew Dip» p « n 11D'1? w p a "ltwo. The phrasing suggests the passage from 'Olarn Kiatan quoted above in n. 64. 78. This would seem to argue from the assumption that the place of the earth is the centre, thus reflecting the view of Joseph ibn Zaddik in 'Olam Kafan quoted above in n. 64, with which the phrasing of this passage has some resemblance. See preceding note. However, it is possible that the argument is here incompletely stated and is to be carried out in full somewhat a s follows: If we were to determine the place of the earth by the same reasoning a s in the case of the other elements, namely, by the consideration of its absolutely downward motion, it would have to-be the absolute below, that is, the centre. B u t since the centre is only a point and cannot therefore be place, Aristotle will have to make the adjacent surface of water a s its place. B u t then the place of the earth will not be what it should be by reason of its downward motion. This interpretation of the argument will make it correspond to the following passage in ' I ^ a r i m II, 17: "And if the place of the element earth is the surface of the element water which surrounds it from without, the place of the earth will not be the absolute below, as has been assumed by him, for the absolute below is the centre." rivr i6 ,pino m Tpon D'on t i d ' ma «in p « n i i d ' mpo oni anon «in Lj^nioa naantp 'sV ,«in rm® ioo »taVnina neon p « n Dip». Pico Delia Mirandola reproduces this argument a s follows: "Praeterea omnia quae collocantur corpora, suis congruere locis falsum esse aperiri, et ex supremi coeli circunferentia et etiam ex terra, cui locus assignatur non superficies sed punctus imus, cui loci nomen iure non congruit" ( E x a m e n Doctrinae Vanitatis Gentium V I , 4). 7 9 . H e b r e w IX

D'ODOl loxy 1 ? n y n o « n n ' n nrVi.

Cf.

Analytica

Priora I, 32, 47a, 8: Set yap irav T6 ¿Xt?0cs abrb ¿avTtp ¿fioXoyovntvov tlvtu ir&VTy. This Aristotelian formula has many

199)

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

457

different Hebrew translations and paraphrases, a collection of which was made by Steinschneider. (Cf. Monatsschrift fiir Geschichte und Wissenschaft des Judenthums, Vol. 37, (1893), p. 81; Uebersetzungen, Endenote 11; ibid., p. 56, n. 75b). 80. That is to say, the place of a thing taken as one whole must be equal (mtP 'Laos) to the place of the same thing when broken into parts. But if you accept Aristotle's definition that place is the boundary of that which surrounds, the place of a two-foot cubic block for instance, will be twenty-four square feet, whereas the place of the same block cut into eight one-foot cubic blocks will be forty-eight square feet. This argument is thus the nucleus of the following passage in 'Ikfcarim II, 17: "Similarly he will be compelled to say that one thing will have many places differing according to great and small, for if a body is broken up into parts, its parts will require a greater place than that required formerly by the whole, and the same will happen if those parts are broken up again into other parts, and the other parts into still other parts. But this is contrary to what has been laid down by Euclid in his work on Weight and Lightness [a pseudo-Euclidian work; see Steinschneider, Uebersetzungen, p. 503, n. 20] wherein he says that things which are equal occupy equal places." c a n maipa l1? ¡tit in«n oraitp nai1? i1? 3"nrv p i mv Dipo V« vpVn u i d s ' . p ^ r m o intci otwn o ,pipi Wua o's^nna n n .D'p^n^ o ' p ^ m D ' - m w y b r b v p ^ n i p ^ n r r o j p i . r t b n r a -ibno ^ h j

o'wn crotwn '3 a® m m .ni^pm nrosn nsD3 dit^pn urn® no -|an maipD i« 1 ?»'.

diw

The commentary Shorashim on the 'Ikkaritn has failed to notice this similarity, and describes it as one of the original arguments of Albo which was not borrowed by him from his teacher: 1'Din «in ,'isi pVnn oipa ¡ t i t » Dm 3"n« T3nan ncpnv nvenp '3 ^ 3 « m rvenpa u'«i n'bna. 81. Hebrew u n a na«n p : urn. The term w t j or e>pi3a is the technical Hebrew word for the thesis, or that which is to be proved quaesitum, probandum) as contrasted with rn"?in, , which is the conclusion already proved. See Makafid al-Falasifah I, p. 30.

458

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[199-20I

82. Crescas is indirectly alluding here to some implied difference between his definition of place and that of Aristotle. According to Aristotle, place is different from form (see above p. 155). Again, according to Aristotle, there is a difference between general space and proper place (see above Part I, n. 76, p. 356). Furthermore, according to Aristotle, Crescas has already tried to show, there must be a difference between the place of the whole and that of the part (see above p. 197). But if the place of a thing is identical with the vacuum occupied by the thing, it is like the form of the thing. There is no distinction between general space and proper place. Nor is there any distinction between the place of the whole of the thing and that of the part, except that the latter is part of the former. 83. Cf. Shebu'ot, 7b. 84. Cf. Mekilta, Ki Tissa, I (ed. Friedmann, p. 103b). For this reference I am indebted to Prof. Louis Ginzberg. Cf. W. Bacher, Die Exeg. Terminologie der jüdischen Traditionsliteratur I, p. 8. 85. Cf. Horayot, l i b . 86. This is an allusion to Maimonides' explanation of the term "place" as meaning "degree" or "position." Cf. Moreh I, 8. 87. Cf. 'Abodah Zarah, 40b. 88. Hebrew: oipon n j n Vyi unjn by dn '3 -jniK a ' j r a m un -)njn by td. This is evidently a composite quotation made up from phrases in the following passages: (a) Shebu'ot 29a: "|njn by N^tP jnv 'in ira n j n lanjn by nVn im« i'jpa&D m. (b) Shebu'ot 39a: y w 'in ]H rva njn oipon njn td« -jm« ^yapo un -|njn by nW. (c) Nedarim 25a: 'njn by «"?« nan« jrat»» 'jn oanjn by nbv D'jnr nn dipon n j n byi. 89. Genesis Rabbah 68, 9, and elsewhere. 90. Isaiah 6, 3. 91. Referring to the three times that the word "holy" occurs in the verse.

20l]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

459

92. In David Kimlji's commentary on Isaiah 6, 3, the threefold repetition of the word " h o l y " is said to refer to God's separation from the three worlds, which are named as follows: (1) The world of angels and souls. (2) The world of spheres and stars. (3) The terrestial world: ]vbj7n D^iy .mohj? vbv tud enip O'aye e>?® ion o^iyi .D'asiam o ' W t i ttim iio'nn D^iyi , n w m Dotoon oViy Kim D^iyn nr Nim ^Dtsri. A similar interpretation of the verse is given in Solomon ben Immanuel Dapiera's Batte ha-Nefesh (Hebrew translation of Abu 'Imran Moses Tobi's Al-Saba'niyyah with commentary, ed. Hirschfeld in the Report of the Judith Montefiore College, 1894), p. 45: . t m s n HD3 etaa enpji vbvo vbw sfom n"?y:i o^iyi D'^aVan D^iyi DON^nn nbiy on® nio^iy 'na n^ya1? «in® o » n » n m c n d^ij? 3"j Nip: Kim ^stpn. From the entire tenor of Crescas' discussion here, however, it would seem that he has reference to the Cabalistic Sefirot and their threefold division. As preliminary to the understanding of this passage the following remarks are pertinent. The term TQ3 in the Biblical expression 'n 1133, the glory of the Lord (Ex. 24, 16), was taken from earliest times by Jewish philosophers to refer either to the essence of God or to something emanating from His essence (see next note). In the Cabala the term TQ3 was appropriated as a designation for the Sefirot. Cf. Azriel, Perush 'Eser Sefirot, p. 5a: TI33 nitnpj niTSDn ^3 '3 jn. The ten Sefirot were divided into three worlds, as follows: (1) The world of mind, "?3®n ohj?, (2) The world of soul, »311 O^iy, (3) The world of body, «1111 O^iy (op. cit. p. 3b). All the Sefirot, with the exception of the last, have both an active and passive quality, i. e., they are both emanating and receiving. In the language of Cabala these two qualities are designated as the masculine and the feminine qualities. Cf. 'I^aritn I I , 11: D'Vs® 'rn p i n « b-by n'twis 'O'd or l?3 iDn" nVspn 'Dsn» 'b^ ^3®n Kinw ]nn«n bovnv liotn jyitdd o^i^yn i m p ! .n'mntci nay-iru raw imp'® nn'wyn ni'BDn Kim Vjnsn bom «im n ' f y n n'n1» i n « teco: tdiVs ,nr )3 n"? n'n «Vi m ^ n e m na na® nab 'n' 'n ni«®® i j i nana yena n'n'® D'Vawn in®3 Kin® ia3i laxjn laiy bov jiyswa n^i nysznai napa km In view of these considerations, Crescas uses the expression 113yn TID\ the element of impregnation, as a designation of the emanative process whereby the Divine influence is extended to

460

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[201

the terrestial world. Ordinarily, it may be remarked in passing, the term nay refers to metempsychosis, as in the expression "Tiayn HO in Bahya ben Asher's commentary on the Bible, Ex. 34, 7: naymiD inr dvq by man py ipis. Deut. 3, 26: 'a 'n nayn'i -Tiayn no1? rm. Crescas' interpretation of the verse, therefore, is as follows: Though God is exalted above the three worlds into which the Sefirot are divided, still through the emanative quality of His Glory, i. e., the Sefirot, He is present in the terrestial world. It may also be remarked here, that the term TID' in Cabala is the name of the ninth Sefirah which in the figure of the Adam Kadmon, irpurbyovos, represents the genital organs. Cf. Azriel, Perush, 'Eser Sefirot, p. 3b: T i l naa nViy 11D\ It is not impossible to find in the expression "TOyn "llD1 here an allusion to this. Similar uses made of this verse to prove the presence of the Divine influence in the terrestial world is to be found in many places, as, for instance, in Sefer ha-Bahir 48: 'n Dip tmp 'in 'NDl imp ,]i?,t niVnnnn) into the following three classes: (1) Axioms ( ^ J HWin) or Common Notions {noival evvoiai, KOLval 56£cu, mjm: nijTT. In Albalag's translation:

466

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[209-2II

n j r r ) . (2) Hypotheses ( ^ j ^ j r nno tpiitp, Albalag: nno np'y). (3) Postulates ( a m j / x a r a , sIj-jU^., rDiyo, Albalag: noipn). The force of Crescas' reasoning here may become clearer in the light of Aristotle's statement that a hypothesis, unlike a definition, assumes the existence of the thing defined and reasons from that assumption. Cf. Anal. Post. I, 10, 76b, 35 ff. 110. Hebrew n w « m n i y m p «in®, literally, one of the axioms. But see preceding note. Cf. Euclid, Elements, Book I, Postulate I. 111. Similarly Bruno contends in connection with another of Aristotle's arguments that when an infinite acts upon another infinite or upon a finite the action itself will be finite. Cf. De 1'Infinite Universo et Mondi II, p. 340,1. 32 if.; De Immenso et Innumerabilibus II, vii. 112. Hebrew u " n o i v x n p pirn ¡rn d«i. By t v x here is meant IVOin "IVX.. Cf. Averroes, Intermediate De Anima I I I : NT3D 13001 )VOT 1300 ^>303 "IVXH '3. The statement here is based upon the discussion in Moreh I, 73, Proposition X, where the problem from the Conic Sections referred to above by Crescas is also mentioned. Maimonides discusses there the difference between imagination and reason: "And the action of the imagination is not the same as the action of the intellect," p o m tye jw, and concludes: " I t has consequently been proved that things which cannot be perceived or imagined, and which would be found impossible if tested solely by imagination,are nevertheless in real existence." "ttQnn 133 run i"?2tt< yaw «in "?3« ivom v i w «I71 noiT «"7® no nvrxo. Cf. Phys. I l l , 2, 202a, 2-3: xa^e7rrjv fxtv iSetv, evSexofxtpriu 8' elvat. As for the use made by Spinoza of Crescas' discussion of this argument, see my paper "Spinoza on the Infinity of Corporeal Substance," Chronicon Spinozanum IV (1924-26), p. 101-3. 113. Originally "sixth," 'in, in all the texts. But the sixth proof is based upon the impossibility of an infinite to be passed through in finite time and not upon the general proposition that no infinite can be passed through at all, and should thus be grouped together

211—2I3]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

467

with the second proof which is taken up next by Crescas. The fifth proof, however, is originally in Averroes based on the proposition that no infinite can be passed through at all. See above p. 389, n. 152. 114. Originally "fourth," 'Tl, in all the texts. 115. I. e., as in the third argument from circular motion in the Third Class of Arguments (above p. 173). 116. I. e., as in the second and sixth arguments from circular motion in the Third Class of Arguments (above pp. 171, 175). 117. In order to understand the meaning of this passage, it is necessary to summarize here part of Aristotle's discussion in the sixth book of the Physics. He shows there how in motion three things are to be considered: that which changes, i. e., the magnitude; that in which it changes, i. e., the time; and that according to which it changes, i. e., the category of the motion, as, for instance, quality, quantity, place. (Cf. Physics VI, 5, 236b, 2-4). He also shows that in none of these three respects can motion have an absolutely fixed beginning. He puts it as follows: (1) "That there is not a beginning of mutation, nor a first time in which a thing is changed" (Physics VI, 5, 236a, 14-15). (2) "Neither in that which is changed, is there any first part which is changed" {ibid., 27-28). (3) Nor is there any first with reference to motion of place or quantity (cf. ibid., 236b, 9 ff.). He then concludes with the following statement: "Everything which is moved must have been previously moved" (Physics VI, 6, 236b, 32-34; Metaphysics IX, 8, 1049b,35 ff.). The upshot of all this is that there is no absolute beginning of motion. No beginning which we may assume of motion, either with reference to its time, its magnitude or its place, can be definitely designated by a fixed, irreducible quantity, since motion is infinitely divisible in all these respects. Whatever quantity we may assume to designate the first part of motion, we can always conceive of a smaller quantity which would have to be prior to that alleged first part.

468

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[213

With this in mind, Crescas now endeavors to answer the second, third and sixth arguments from circular motion in the Third Class of Arguments (above pp. 171, 173, 175). He first tackles the third argument. His answer may be paraphrased as follows: You say that CD cannot meet AB at D' without having met it first at some point A'. This indeed would be true if D ' were a definitely fixed point on AB. But D' is a point in infinity. The argujy & ment therefore falls down. A A. This refutation of Averroes' proof is taken from a tentative objection raised by Altabrizi against the corresponding proof by himself (see above p. 384, n. 141). The final answer by which Altabrizi justifies his own proof does not apply to the Averroesean proof adopted by Crescas. The refutation as given by Altabrizi is as follows: "Against this proof many objections may be raised, of which the recent philosophers had no inkling. It may be argued as follows: Why do you say that the sphere in the course of its rotation, when its radius ceases to be parallel to the other line and is about to meet it at the vertex, that the former would undoubtedly have to meet the latter at a point which is the first point of the points of intersection ? Why should it have to do so? Their meeting at the vertex cannot come about except as a result of motion, but, inasmuch as motion is potentially infinitely divisible, a first meeting at the vertex with the infinite line will be impossible, seeing that the extremity of the finite line which is moved along with the motion of the sphere is potentially infinitely divisible so that we cannot assume any point of the points of intersection without the possibility of assuming another point before it The result is that the meeting of the two lines at the vertex cannot be effected but by motion, which is potentially infinitely divisible, and similarly any parts of the lines that meet must be infinitely divisible. Consequently we cannot assume that any point is the first of the points at which the lines meet." iron® om»N nab : m t w Kim .Dnnnnnn d w nV mprn mpsD r'pjn n'aan ipa ttmir® psD )'« twin nm nmsn r o n o nD ny yyunn nwso

N O T E S TO P R O P O S I T I O N I, PART II

469

msM a m » pa w n n ro: n»'jsn® nn 1 mirasn nvnpn n'tftin ton rmp: nsj n^asn np» n'n1 nan .roa n^iy1? npVnno nyunni ,nyurn mnnn pbnno D^iy1? unan nyuna yyinisn n'an ipn nsptp oy .rraan ipa »tan rnn« rrnpj nran -iipskp n!? o n ntp'jsn niTipjD nmpa nran -ipbn w ,naa npi^ni? n^apn torn .nyuna yan own »«nn naa nswsnv jnan ran . . .n1»1? n'Ptn ton nnpa nran ran ,ipn ]a indent? no p i ,naa n'Van 'nbas .e>mn naa a nwasan nniprt 118. Hebrew n'3 nyiia, in a finite magnitude. 119. In this part of the passage he means to answer the second and sixth arguments. These two arguments are based upon the impossibility of the infinite chord AB to be passed through by the revolving line CD in finite time. '^j^0 Crescas' answer may be paraphrased as A i \ £ follows : I I Point A', a t which C D first meets AB, is V J indeed a point in infinity. But A ' B ' which V • is part of AB forming a chord in the circle generated by C D is finite. It is therefore, only a finite distance that is traversed by C D in finite time. 120. Hebrew i»r n^ra nyiann n^nnn nxp man1? nn. This passage is misplaced. Logically it is an explanation of the previous statement n P ' i s n D naitwo rnipa m t c m a ' w n1? ran. One is tempted to emend the text here as follows: pVn myaon -wann® no1? n m niN'XD a"nJT k1? ran .yyiann naa yyiana b w a"in¡£> no1? .nyiana ]wto «:'« nr1?! .pr n*7ira nyiann n^nnn nsp man1? nn .ntneno nawtn nnpa n*3 nyiana n"3 ny¡ta ipn ernsw pirn. "Since, however, it has been shown that there can be no first part of motion, because every object that is moved must have already been moved, it does not follow that there would have to be a first point of meeting, and this indeed because of the fact that the extreme beginning of motion must take place in no-time. It is not inconceivable, therefore, that the infinite line [in question] should meet the other line in a finite distance with a finite motion." The meaning of this statement is as follows: The reason why there can be no absolutely first part of motion is that an absolutely first part of motion would have to take place in an indivisible instant. But motion is infinitely divisible and cannot take

470

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[213

place in an instant, except qualitative motion in a certain aspect (see above n. 101). To quote Aristotle's original statement upon which this statement of Crescas seems to be based: "But that, in which that which is changed is first changed, is necessarily an indivisible" (.Physics VI, 5, 235b, 32-33). Cf. Epitome of the Physics VI, p. 32a: "No part of motion can be called first, inasmuch as motion is infinitely divisible. But the same is not true of the end of motion, for that is called end which refers to something that has already come into existence and is completed, so that a certain definite time can be assigned to it, and of such a nature is the entelechy which is the end of motion. But as for the beginning of motion, it exists in an instant rather than in time, on account of which it cannot be definitely designated in the same way as the entelechy, for the latter is the limit of [a completed] motion and not, as in the case of the former, the limit of something that does not yet exist." pVnrp2> no VN npVnno K'n 'a raon p"?n treo'TP -IB>BN nyonm no rv!?an npb: dwn «in o ,p 13 p y ]'« ran .nyinn jv^an oVwi .Ton «in -ww nioWn - p i nr o ,pr VVn h o t » -IPBN n'm .d^IWI tesoj -iaatt> mVi .pra k^i nnya nniN'x» ran .nyisnn n^nnn d^iw .nynnn n^an ,nyunn n'Van «in URN ninVtsa nr -WAN» ina .V1?« IDTB -WON .n"?nnna paya p i y NS»' tbv no n'Van 121. All the MSS. and the printed editions read here "fifth," 'nn. 122. Similarly Bruno argues against Aristotle that the infinite would be without figure. Cf. De VInfinite Universo et Mondi II, p. 326, 1. 29; De Immenso et Innumerabilibus II, x. 123. This argument has been anticipated by Averroes in his Intermediate De Caelo I, 4: "It cannot be argued that the existence of circular motion implies only the existence of a body that is capable of circular motion but not necessarily the existence of a spherical body, seeing that fire and air, for instance, are by their nature capable of circular motion. The answer may be stated as follows " (Latin, p.273vb, L). a"nn' noi1? din"? tmn i»a ,"-ina o n t6 aiaoa yyurio otn ON 'a nuuDn nyunn nurso» . . .nn .aiaoa on1? cryyiwn nn» oriyn ntn' -KPN -num.

215)

NOTES TO PROPOSITION I, PART II

471

124. A suggestion of this argument may be discerned in Isaac ibn Latif's Rob Pe'alim, 60. He first makes the following statement: " T h e rays furnish an argument for the non-existence of a vacuum and so does also the visibility of the stars, for the sun's ray coalesces with them gradually until they reach the sense of vision." nsiD D3 niXIXJn p w n ppta Da -ra^no 'vnwn p x n o .o'aaan r r t n p i ,mpin ^lt»1? msnn twin1? I'jnot? (The term "D^nn here seems to reflect the Greek n i d «in dni .pDiKn ^y a r m v i t b o ,-rnNO -inr o y i t i d'pdp d ' j d h rrvn ioa .on^ira m i m

tap'»

D'awrin o ' w n v n cro-iia

n o 'B1? run

m w ^ap'if a " n r v n n , p nNT® 'D n y i V , 0 ' a a a n nxpi , m v n n m i N ^ap'®

•Viyn D ' a i D'aaia n«~utf p r c i w m m n n w ^ i y n ]'a® no Similarly the refutation given by Crescas of this argument in Book IV, 2, is the same as here, namely, that the impossibility of a vacuum outside the world has not been conclusively demonstrated.

. D n n « m n ^ i y a in

474

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[217

The second argument against the existence of many worlds is somewhat as follows: If there were other worlds, they would all have to possess the same nature as this world of ours. The elements of those other worlds would, therefore, have to possess upward and downward, i. e., centrifugal and centripetal, motions, the same as the elements in our world. Furthermore, the centre from and toward which all those elements would move would have to be one in all the worlds, that is, it would have to be identical with the centre of our own world. Consequently, if there were other worlds, the earths in those worlds would all tend toward the centre of our world and the fires in those worlds would move toward the periphery of our world. But that is impossible, since in that case the earth and fire in those worlds would move away from their own respective centre and periphery. Cf. De Caelo I, 8. 129. Ecclesiastes 6, 11. 130. The meaning of this argument may be stated as follows: It is true that the elements in all the other worlds would have to have two kinds of motion, upward and downward. It is not true, however, that their motions would all have to be from and toward the same centre. For our knowledge that those elements would have to possess two kinds of motion is based only upon the assumption that they would have to be of the same nature as our elements. But what does that assumption mean? Certainly it does not mean that those elements would have to be a continuation of our elements. It only means that, while they were distinct from our elements, they would have to present the same characteristics, namely, some being light and some heavy, some warm and some cold, etc. Or, in other words, those elements would be the same as ours in kind but not in number. By the same token, when we say that those elements would have to move upward and downward like ours, it does by no means imply the same upward and downward, from and toward the same centre. It is therefore possible to conceive of many worlds, each with a centre of its own, from and toward which their own respective elements have their motion. The motions of the elements in all those worlds would thus be one in kind, i. e., centrifugal and centripetal, but many in number, i. e., with reference to different centres.

2X7]

475

N O T E S TO P R O P O S I T I O N I, P A R T II

This criticism is found in Gersonides' commentary on the Epitome of De Caelo I: "One may argue that if many worlds existed, the elements in those worlds would exist in their respective natural places and their movements would follow the order of the movements of their respective worlds, without necessarily giving rise to the conclusion that the natural place of the parts of the same element would not be one. The only conclusion given rise to by such an assumption would be that the below would constitute the place of the heavy elements, that is to say, the heavy elements would sink beneath all the other elements that exist together with them. Nor will it follow from the principle that contraries are those things which are most distant from each other that the places of the parts of an element must be one in number. That this is not to follow can be illustrated by the following example. Take a certain black object that is undergoing a gradual change from blackness to whiteness. Then take other black objects which are likewise being in the process of changing to whiteness. This does not mean that the whiteness into which all these black objects are being changed and which constitute the opposite of the terminus a quo in their changing process is one and the same in number. What it implies is only that they are all changed to colors which are one and the same in kind. Similarly if there were many worlds, it might be said that the element earth in every one of those worlds would move away from the above and downward toward the below, but this would not mean that the above from which the different terrestial elements moved would be one in number; it would rather mean that they would be one in kind, that is to say, it would be the concavity of the circularly moving celestial sphere." . D ' a i ma'jiy i«:sd3 dne>, To«'» toi« 1 ?

•Dipoa d t o nniDM rn

nn

3"HT nVi .nViyn nriai mjmnn -ihd i s "?y itittido Drrnijruni .'yaan rrrrp a"in'B> no "?a« , i n « DDipo ¡rrr vbv m « n d d t i *p^na nr ':bo . i n ' onoy D'Nxajn o w n

^a i«b> nnn lyptw "?"i ,noDn o n a a n Dipo

.»'«a D'in« rn1® , p m o n rrbona D'asnn nvn avn ' » a , p a: a"in' «Vi lyyurr i » « a i ,pi^n uoo i®«

ia «in itwt mirroro yyixr n n ^ n 'a ,nr bvoi

-[Ann ,pibn bn n'n'P a"irr

n y u n n i o n 1 ia oj ]a

,pi^n

V« o m w

D'lai

i«p

.]'Ba i n « n'.Tf 3 " v t » n o *?a« .iBDoa i n « ,nyunn

nixiKn ono lyyin' i»« n'yyon n'n'P n1? ,naon

nVyona «in p « Vaa

476

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

yyuno Kin® noa aiaoa yjrnnon map mm

[217-2I9

in« «in km ,nBDaa in« •3UD3

A similar refutation of this argument of Aristotle against the existence of many worlds is found in Bruno. Cf. De I'Infinito Universo et Mondi IV, p. 365,1. 31 ff. 131. Ecclesiastes 1, 14. 132. tfagigah l i b .

PROPOSITION

II

PART I

1. The Hebrew version of this proposition is taken from Isaac ben Nathan's translation of Altabrizi. 2. This entire proof is a paraphrase of Altabrizi. Aristotle proves the impossibility of infinite number by the following argument. Physics III, 5, 204b, 7-10: "But neither will there be number, so as to be separate and infinite; for number or that which possesses number is numerable. If, therefore, that which is numerable can be numbered, it will be possible for the infinite to be passed through." (Cf. Metaphysics XI, 10, 1066b, 24-26). This Aristotelian proof is faithfully reproduced by Abraham ibn Daud in Emunah Ramah I, 4, p. 16: "For when you say that things which have number exist in actuality, it means that their number is an actually known number. But when you say they are infinite, it means that you cannot arrive at the end of their number. Consequently, he who says that an infinite number exists in actuality is as if he has said: I have completely enumerated that which is infinite and I have come to the end of it, despite its being endless." yvr -IBDB DIBDDP M V "?JN£N D M N : D'JM ona-i - P A « 'a -i»iNni .tnsDO yan"? ^um nnw *?>? mv ri'Van Vya v t a -potn v t a Nim ,ixp ly 'n«a -iaai 1*7 n^nn ptw nn 'n'w laa no« 1*7*0 ,nt .rvbon *7ya

NOTES TO PROPOSITION II

477

PART I I

3. This proof, taken directly from Altabrizi, is to be found in the following sources. Algazali, Happalat ha-Pilosofim I (Tahafut al-Falasifah I, p.9, 11. 23-24; Destructio Destructionum I, p. 19va): "We say number is divided into even and odd, and it is impossible that anything should be outside of this distinction whether it be existent and permanent or non-existent." rrntp p

,npi!?nn lra «rt2> «in nptm .man air !?« p"?ir nsDnn ino« .rta i« -i«m «xa: nam

Averroes, Intermediate Physics I I I , iii, 4, 2 (Latin, p. 453rb, E ) : " I t can likewise be demonstrated that every actual number is actually numbered and everything numbered is either even or odd. Consequently everything numbered is finite." jir «in ran msD Vji ^yisa hsd «in nan 'iyisa nsoo biw -itarT1 pi n^nn HE3D 3 ran . l i s : 0«. Epitome of the Physics I I I , p. 10b: "Again, every number is even or odd. Either one of these two is finite. Consequently every number is finite." .n^sn Vya o ^ n l1?«» nn« boi ,ms: n«i nr «in a« nsoo bo p cui .rvbori BYI ISDO "7D p D« Gersonides, Milhamot Adonai VI, i, 11; "We may also say that number is finite, because every number is either even or odd, and this constitutes its finitude." ,-ns: D« rr •« «in NSD» bsw 'sV .N^JN ^YA «in nsDonip NO«) pi .wbon inr Cf. Proposition I I I . 4. The reference is here to the view held by Maimonides and Avicenna that infinite number is impossible only with reference to things that exist in space but that immaterial beings, such as disembodied souls, can be infinite. From this Crescas infers that they do not admit that infinite number must be subject to the division of odd and even. Cf. Proposition I I I , Part I. 5. The reference is to the passages of the Intermediate Physics and the Epitome of the Physics quoted above in n. 3. The argument does not occur in the corresponding passage of Averroes' Long Commentary on the Physics.

478

CRESCAS* C R I T I Q U E O f A R I S T O T L E

[221

6. Crescas' argument is especially directed against the passage in Physics III, 5, 204b, 7-10, quoted in Prop. II, Part I, p. 476, n. 2. Aristotle, it will be recalled, argues that "number" (apidfids, HDDD) is the same as "that which possesses number" (to '¿X apidfxdv, nBDDn and that both are "numerable" {apLOixyjrbv, nsD'tP D3no) and that both "can be numbered" (¿vdexerai apid/irjaai, ^Jiisa USD), and consequently neither of them can be infinite. Crescas is attacking here the original assumption that "that which possesses number" is the same as "number," arguing that while the latter cannot be infinite the former may be so. OV

7. The implication of this argument is that the fact that number must be divided into odd and even does not by itself prove the impossibility of infinite number, for unless it is established independently that number cannot be infinite, it is possible to assume the existence of an infinite number of dyads no less than of monads. This argument must have been suggested to Crescas by the following passage in Milfyamot Adonai VI, i, 11: "The same can be demonstrated with regard to number, in the following manner. Seeing that every number must be finite, it follows that every even number must be finite; and the same must be true with regard to the even-times even number and the even-times odd number." (Cf. dprid/as aprtos and ¿.priams irepL bp® -pyn ma mn nsDon Dy - n a m nr1? vv inwiom mipn mas' n S pr «so'® ipsn 'tw ids® nn J?"73 psD n«ra »6 rprnw a"nn' ]3 am ,ms2 in air 1« nvr nsDO nxd'® "wbk p ioa .B^nna npnx noipnn nw

PROPOSITION

III

Part I

1. T h e Hebrew version of this proposition is taken from Isaac ben Nathan's translation of Altabrizi, with the following exception : Altabrizi reads n^an n1? for n ^ a n 'n'ra.

480

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[221

The term "i«130 in b>ltnn 1«12D is to be taken here in the sense of "demonstrably" rather than "evidently" (Munk: évidemment), for in Moreh I, 73, Eleventh Proposition (quoted in the next note) Maimonides speaks of the impossibility of an infinite series of causes and effects as having been demonstrated by proof, "i«3nn neiDa. 2. This introductory comment is based upon Altabrizi: "The verification of the first and second propositions is not sufficient in establishing the truth of this proposition, for what has been ascertained by the first two propositions is only the fact that things which have position and place, i. e., bodies, must be finite. Causes and effects, however, may sometimes be not bodies but rather beings free of matter and body and independent of them, called Intelligences . . . . Hence Maimonides has made of this inquiry a separate proposition." .nDTpnn n«r nnotu npsDD rrnn «•? rvxrn m w i n nmpnn nnoNi oipoi nran or6 o'rjy rrVan nyjn «in dm« moipn 'rwn orrauj yrrn o d w b i d o'kssm ViT !?3« ,D'on ivr «V d'djjd D'Vi^ym mVym , d w c t oni nTp n ; i Q® nr^i D'bo» wnp'i ,om nVra v t a .moraii loinno .niasya r m s : noipn The same distinction between magnitudes and causes is made by Maimonides himself. Moreh I, 73, Eleventh Proposition: "It has been already shown that it is impossible that there should exist an infinite magnitude, or that there should exist magnitudes of which the number is infinite, even though each one of them is a finite magnitude, provided, however, that these infinite magnitudes exist at the same time. Equally impossible is the existence of an infinite series of causes, namely that a certain thing should be the cause of another thing, but itself the effect of another cause, which again is the result of another cause, and so on to infinity, so that there would be an infinite number of things existing in actuality. It makes no difference whether they are bodies or beings free of bodies, provided they are in causal relation to each other. This causal relation constitutes [what is known as] the essential, natural order, concerning which it has been demonstrated that an infinite is impossible." I'« o ' d k i niN'xo IK rrbon )'« -tn« 0») rm'XD yaon itann -aa o 11?« rrrf 'iurai .n^an "?ya w : on» in« bow 'b Vy «]«i chbdd 1 ? rv^an

22l]

N O T E S TO P R O P O S I T I O N III

481

,-\pv rp^on on1? i1« rn^y niK'so p i . p n nrr d ' n x o : n^an on"7 j w ,rby nVy"?i ,mnn n^y Kinn nai^i ,in« I'ay1? n^y - a i rpn1» in D'otw vrr ^yioa o'trcoj on1? iv^an 1'« d,vud rn'» l y .n^sn jnon nsioa -iNsnn -iipn '»xyn 'jnan mDn inn .nnxp1? n^y onxpp k1?« .13 lb» rrbon tke> no In the foregoing passage we have Maimonides' own commentary on his first three propositions and the source of the statements here by Altabrizi and Crescas. Maimonides first divides the infinite into infinite magnitude and infinite number. The latter is subdivided by him into the number of co-existent magnitudes and the number of causes and effects. Then, again, he describes the relation between the causes and effects as an essential, natural order. The term essential is used by him as the opposite of accidental which he proceeds to explain and which is taken up by Crescas later (see p. 494, n. 19). The term natural is meant to be the opposite of what Altabrizi and Crescas call here order in position. The expression ")HD '^»ya, without any qualifying term, occurs in Emunah Ramah I, 4, p. 16: "It is also impossible that there should be an infinite number of actually existing things having order." "inD ^ y a ^yisa o m o j d ' j m o n s i i n s d ' ® ' n p dji it'pan ' ^ y a 'n^a. Judged from the context, however, the expression "having order" here may mean both "order in position" and "order in nature," for the author seems to deal both with coexistent magnitudes and with causes and effects. When he argues, for instance, that "the things which have order are those things which have a first, an intermediate or intermediates, and a last," 1 *]idi D"yxa« i n yxDNi n^nnn Dn ? om« on i n o ,(?yan ' 3 , he seems to be quoting phrases from Aristotle's proof for the impossibility of an infinite series of causes, quoted below in n. 4. Equivalent expressions for 32M53 T I D are nran3 m n n (Altabrizi) and "DlE>n TID ( M i f a l o t Elohim IX, 4, p. 62). 3. This last statement contains Crescas' own explanation of the expression "order in nature." A similar explanation of the expression is found in Kawwanot ha-Pilosofim II (Makafid al-Falasifah II, p. 125): "For the order between cause and effect is necessary and natural, and should that order between them be eliminated the cause will cease to be a cause." Vi"?yni n^yno nnon® 's1?

482

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[223

It is on the basis of this interpretation of the passage that I have connected it with the statement preceding it rather than with the statement following it. rfoy i n v n ^csa p^iD o n , ' j d b ' m a n .

4. The proof for tjie impossibility of an infinite series of causes and effects reproduced here by Crescas is based directly upon the proof given in Altabrizi, which in turn is based upon a proof found in Avicenna, which in its turn may be considered as a free version of Aristotle's proof in Metaphysics II, 2, 994a, 1 ff. Crescas himself refers later to Altabrizi as his immediate source and describes the proof as having been suggested "in the eighth book of the Physics and in the Metaphysics" (see Prop. Ill, Part II, p. 225). Again, later, after refuting this Altabrizian proof of Aristotelian origin, Crescas quotes what he supposes to be another proof in the name of "one of the commentators." That proof, too, we shall show (p. 492, n. 16), is based upon the same proof of Aristotle, though Crescas unwarily advances it as something new. The original proof of Aristotle, as interpreted by Averroes, may be analyzed as follows (cf. Epitome of the Metaphysics III, Arabic, p. 118, §64; Latin, p. 383va; Quir6s Rodriques, p. 187; Horten, p. 140; Van den Bergh, p. 98): I. In a series of causes and effects, consisting of three or more members, that is called cause proper which is the first in the series and is not preceded by any prior cause. That is called effect proper which is the last in the series and is not followed by another effect. The intermediates are both causes and effects. They are causes only in relation to what follows from them; in themselves they are effects, requiring thus a first uncaused cause for their existence. Cf. Metaphysics II, 2, 994a, 11-15: "For in the case of an intermediate, which has a last term and a prior term outside it, the prior must be the cause of the later terms. For if we had to say which of the three is the cause, we should say the first; surely not the last, for the final term is the cause of none; nor even the intermediate, for it is the cause only of one." II. Intermediates will always be effects and thus require a first cause even if they were infinite in number. Cf. ibidem, 15-16: "It makes no difference whether there is one intermediate or more; nor whether they are infinite or finite in number."

223]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION III

483

III. Hence, there can be no infinite number of causes. For in an infinite number of causes all the causes would be intermediates, and intermediates, being also effects, could not exist without a cause which is not an effect. Otherwise, things would exist without a cause. Cf. ibidem, 16-19: "But of series which are infinite in this way, and of the infinite in general, all the parts down to that now present are alike intermediates; so that if there is no first there is no cause at all." Avicenna's version of this proof, in its fullest and most elaborate form, is to be found in his Al-Najah, p. 62, quoted by Carra de Vaux in Avicenne, pp. 269-271. It is to be found also in the following places: Algazali, Maka$id al-Falasifah II, p. 127, Tahafut al-Falasifah IV, p. 34, 1. 12 ff. (Destructio Destructionum IV, p. 71va, I; Museon 1900, pp. 376-377), Teshubot She'elot, pp. L I LII; Moses ha-Lavi, Ma'amar Elohi; Altabrizi, Prop. III. Though Crescas has taken his proof from Altabrizi, he does not follow him closely. Altabrizi's proof is more elaborate and is more like the original argument of Avicenna. It runs as follows: I. In an aggregate (Altabrizi: f21pD Maka$id al-Falasifah II, p. 127: of causes and effects, let each member be conditioned by a preceding cause. II. The aggregate itself will be conditioned. III. Now, the cause of that aggregate will have to be one of these three: (a) The aggregate itself. (b) Something included within the aggregate. (c) Something outside that aggregate. The first two, (a) and (b), being impossible, the third, (c), must be true. IV. But that external cause must be causeless. Crescas' statement of the proof, as may have been observed, is much shorter. It runs as follows: I. Within the aggregate (Q^Vd) of the infinite series of cause and effect, either all the members are conditioned or some of them are not. II. If they are all conditioned, there must be a determining cause. "Outside the series" is to be understood here.

484

[223

CRESCAS' C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E

III. If any of the members is unconditioned, the series is no longer infinite. The text of Altabrizi's proof reads as follows: bib)} minxyb i s p s « rrn 1 10« «xajntp : n a i p n n n«r nna« ^y n ' x i m 133 rrrr r« .n'Vsn 'n"?3 bn in!?y n^j? p i , p oj i « n n n n nn'n 0« wVyi w n i x a p i p a n nn .b\by i»s>« i n « "73 ,n"33 D ' W y i mVy p i p » j r n

"li'B'n rrn'ip ]it»«i i n r Vi'jyn iti>s'«n •"lpnntp sbtby ik>s'« 3"j n'n p i p » .voa p n i« ,13 D33:1311« .losy m m ? ok , p i p a n win n"?yi ,'ViVy .laxy by Dip' i 3 i m . W y n by n m i p n^yn ' 3 ,"?B3 j w t n n pVnni i»xy"? nVy n'n' «"? p i p o n wi«3 d » j Kin ib>« ' 3 ,Vd3 3"j p^nm nby n'n' «Vi ,np® nn in1?!? "?yi i»sy by o u p n'n' «in d«i ,wVyi? n^i vn' vp!?n "•yxmi i n « vp^n nby raw«i rrnn p i p a n rby o .pip» 1 ? wixa p n

i 3 i p i p a n nby

n'n't? « m i . ' P ' ^ n p b n n d"?i«i

.pip»1?

nby

1

na ^3 i:s3p 133 um«ts>'b^ , w y iis>s« n'n' n ? p n nti® ini« nan , p i p a n lies« n ^ ' «"? Dna p n «in its»« nan .mWWi&nn mi«3 biby i ® b ' n «in® 3"inn n'n' ^ y i®b« n'n 1 «!? i®« «xajm .13 o » j n'n' n'n o«i ,b)by om« vn' « h .on1? nxp «in r r r n .lVs« 1I73 mVyn mV®Vn®n ppm .imoxy1? n^y «in ,nn®«i nVy V« n ,( ?3n ^ y a vn' !?3« , n ^ 3 n ^ y s w ^ s m^yn . m m inn .niVyn p inn«® no1?

5. Hebrew ni®S33 1« D'^3®3. See at the end of the next note. 6. The question as to whether the infinity of disembodied souls is to be included within the rule of this proposition has been also raised by Altabrizi, who, though inclined to answer it in the negative, ends with the remark that God alone can solve such intricate difficulties. y i v D'nV«m ,ovp3i pi^ns m i s : n ' « i by i » i y u p y n "?3«. T h i s is

expressed in simpler language by the anonymous translator: pyni m m w yiv '"»m ,abyi n n . Unlike Altabrizi, however, Crescas, instead of relegating the problem to divine omniscience, tries to solve it with whatever help he could get from Avicenna, Algazali and Averroes. Algazali's view as to the infinity of disembodied souls is to be found in the following places: Kawwanot ha-Pilosofim II, i (Makafid al-Falasifah II, p. 125): "Similarly the human souls which are parted from the bodies at death can be infinite in number, even though they exist simultaneously, for there is not between them that order of nature the

2231

N O T E S TO P R O P O S I T I O N III

485

elimination of which would cause the souls to cease to be souls, for those souls are not causes of each other, but exist simultaneously without any distinction of priority and posteriority either in position or in nature. If they seem to have a distinction of priority and posteriority it is only with reference to the time of their creation, but their essences qua essences and souls have no order between them at all. They are rather all alike in existence, in contradistinction to distances and bodies, causes and effects." ,disdd^ rrVann pi^o itfSN moa mom» n m s n nvru«n nwon p i onvn lpi^D -\yw lV i r a yaan h i d na 'a ,in' o m a : vn oni 1 • m t n i nnnp 'n^aa ,-jit mxsoj on "73x1 .nxpV n ?}; onsp o ,rwoj •rrnrnxj; .Dttmn pra nrmm nnnpn non' ,tuo«i .yaum nrara «li^na .rm'XDa en® on

bbz oa h i d i'n run ,m»sn n v o x y on» i x d

-Vi^ym nVym ,DWH o'pmDn Happalat ha-Pilosofim I (Tahafut al-Falasifah I, p. 9, 1. 26 ff.; Destructio Destructionum I, p. 20ra, 1. 8 ff.; Horten, p. 29; Museon 1899, pp. 281-282): "Furthermore, we argue against the philosophers thus: Even according to your own principles, it is not impossible to assume that at the present moment there exist things which are units O'lnN; but Latin: eadem in m e ] qualitatively different from each other and still are infinite in number, namely, the souls of men which have become separated from the bodies at death , moa, hora mortis], and these are things which are not described as either even or odd . . . . This view concerning the infinity of disembodied souls is one which Avicenna has adopted, and perhaps it is the view of Aristotle." o'lin d'nsd: inxd'p nppn p urn oasm»'s 1 ? n n an1? i»tu m » w -nyi •'sunn m ' n a n o'twan nws: Dm ,Dn"? n^an pm -iNina D>jn»n onn« on® nitron if NnaDi -non aira cnNin» d j w on n m ¡nioa .ibd'-in r n a D N'n® ^ i n i ,tu'D '1 n a m a ® n t i

Cf. the parallel discussion in Happalat ha-Pilosofim IV {Tahafut al-Falasifah IV, p. 33, 1. 29 ff.; Destructio Destructionum IV, p. 71r; Museon 1900, pp. 375-376). Maimonides refers to this view of Avicenna in Moreh I, 74, Seventh Argument: "Some of the later philosophers solve this difficulty by maintaining that the surviving souls are not bodies requiring a place and a position on account of which infinity is incompatible with their manner of existence."

486

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[223

art* nnwMn nwen notwa psDn nt i-rnn d'sidi^sh 'mriN r a p djon .n^on I'xn om«'XD3 y»'® nmm Dip» on1? ¡rrr® O'atw The original view of Avicenna is to be found in his Al-Najah, p. 34, partly quoted by Carra de Vaux in his Avicenne, p. 203. Cf. Shahrastani, pp. 403-404 (ed. Cureton). It must, however, be noted that personally Algazali does not admit the infinity of disembodied souls. He advances it merely as an argument ad hominem. Crescas is following the general method of quoting in the name of Algazali views contained in his Kawwanot ha-Pilosofim, which Algazali himself later rejected. The expression r w s n 1« o^DBa "souls or intellects" call for some comment. The term "intellect" does not occur in any of the sources which we have reason to believe to have been drawn upon by Crescas for his information. Altabrizi has here only the term "souls," nmSCT 01« nwBn. So does also Algazali in the Kawwanot ha-Pilosofim: nismo n m s n nvsmn nitw»1? on1? rr^sn and in the Happalat ha-Pilosofim: o V o n nws: mna nisuno. It is quite obvious that by O'Va» here Crescas does not mean the "Intelligences" of the spheres, in which sense the term is used by Maimonides in the proposition. Such a rendering could not be construed with the context. It occurs to me that these two terms are used by Crescas for a special purpose. He wants indirectly to call attention to his controversy with other philosophers as to the nature of the immortal soul. According to Avicenna and others, it is only the "acquired intellect," TOpn hown, that survives. But according to Crescas, the soul as such is immortal in its essence (cf. Or Adonai II, vi, 1). Accordingly what Crescas means to say here is as follows: It is possible to have an infinite number of disembodied souls, whether these disembodied, immortal souls be acquired intellects (D'^ozo), as is the view of Avicenna, or soul essences (niiPBn), as is my own view. A similar indirect allusion to his controversy with the philosophers on the nature of the immortal soul occurs also in Prop. XVI, Part II. 7. Happalat ha-Happalah I (Tahafut al-Tahafut I, p. 10, 1. 6 ff.; Destructio Destructionum I, p. 20rb, 1. 26 ff.; Horten, p. 31): "I do not know of any one who makes a distinction between that

2231

NOTES TO PROPOSITION III

487

which has position and that which has no position with reference to infinity except Avicenna. As for all the other philosophers I do not know of any one who maintains such a view. Nor is it in harmony with their principles. It is rather a tale out of fairy land, for the philosophers reject an actually infinite number of forms whether it be corporeal or incorporeal, inasmuch as that would imply that one infinite can be greater than another infinite. Avicenna only meant to ingratiate himself with the multitude by advancing a view concerning the soul which they had been accustomed to hear. This view, however, carries but little conviction or persuasion. For if an infinite number of things existed in actuality then the part would be equal to the whole." I'jyn n n a x a i"? i'N® noi 3 x d 1*7 ®'® nn i'a ® n s ' i n « ynN n*?i

,-iDNon nt "idk on» in« yiN abs din 'ia -in® obin\ ^d p nnixD lp'riT D'sim^sn o .ni^son ^ano Kim .orvicntra irwb n w ¡ t i t ® tod a^nrp® ^sb dim 'n^a 1« dim rrnv r a Vyisa ib rrbjn y a p no lionn D"sb 1a pa t o p o^ini .i1? n^an ]'N® nan -inv 11? rv^an i'n® no i*?« 'a .Dvsni npsDn »y» i d n o n v j VaN ,®sn p y o ly»®1? l^a-nna» noa ."?an 10a p"?nn n'n onV n^an Vyisa Dnai inxd: (Cf. a similar refutation by Averroes in Happalat ha-Happalah IV; Tahafut al-Ta.ha.fut IV, p. 71, 1. 23; Destructio Destructionum IV, p. 71va, G). It is evidently this passage of Averroes that is restated by Narboni in his commentary on Moreh, I, 74, Seventh Argument: "Averroes objects to it, and argues Furthermore, it is a well recognized principle that that which exists in actuality cannot be infinite whether it be material or immaterial, and there is no difference in this respect between that which has position and that which has no position, as was thought by Avicenna. For if actually existent things were infinite, the part would be equal to the whole." «in® nD by rvVan nn® yvr ®nw p or mm p"?n pi iV® no pa nra Vian ]'ni .d'd®j 'n^a in d'd®j vn ni® ,yj»: Nin Vyisa n x o : ]'n Vyisa onan n x o j 11? '3 ,'3'D p N a®n® iDa nran b ]'N® no i'ai nran .Syisa n^an "?ya viVa Vn .Van 10a pVnn n*n onV n^an According to Narboni (Commentary on the Kawwanot, loc. cit.) Averroes' denial of the infinity of disembodied souls follows as a result of his denial of individual immortality.

488

C R E S C A S ' C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E

[223

"It behooves you to know that this philosopher [i. e., Averroes] objects to Algazali's statement that disembodied souls are infinite He says that this view is refutable It is not in agreement with Aristotle's view as to the immortality of the soul, for Aristotle does not believe that every man has an individual soul which is individual in its essence And consequently we do not have to adopt the view which Algazali was compelled to adopt. Ponder upon this. We further say that Algazali's statement here indicates that he has been following Alexander's view, who believes that the soul is only a predisposition and that it is created." manna n m s n rwsjn® -rarroN na^tta . . .p^n.. .osnn nre> jnn® i n n ,n-iNtwn icjonN njn 'sV nan nr . . .^an nn . . .dh1? rvVan I'N 1 na I'DNn ? 3"nro ...iaxya nV-n: vsi m « bib® -vod' t>b «in '3 njna nanu« »3 n«T run una® naa '3 latoi .nr jrn .nanu« lraNnp .nenina K'ntfi.. .-n1? n»n «'n »san '3 I'axn» -raos1?« 8. Crescas is misrepresenting Averroes' view in attributing to him the distinction of odd and even as an argument against the infinity of disembodied souls. It is true that Averroes denied the possibility of an nfinite number of disembodied souls, but his reason for it is not that attributed to him here by Crescas. He rejects it on the following two grounds: (1) No infinite number is possible, whether material or immaterial. (2) There cannot be an infinite number of disembodied souls because the individual souls do not persist after death (cf. above n. 7 and below n. 9). Crescas himself mentions Averroes' commentary on the Physics as his only source for the argument from odd and even (see Prop. II, Part II), and there is no indication there that the argument was directly applied by Averroes to the infinity of disembodied souls. 9. Crescas argument that the infinite by virtue of its being unlimited should likewise be indivisible into odd and even has been raised and refuted by Algazali. It is introduced in the following connection. Algazali raises an objection against the eternity of motion on the ground that every number must be divisible into odd and

223]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION III

489

even, whereas eternal motion would imply an infinite number of motions which could not be divided into odd and even. He then suggests himself that the eternalists might say that it is only a finite number that must be divisible into odd and even but not an infinite number (quoted above Prop. II, Part II, p. 478, n. 8). But he rejects this distinction and affirms that an infinite as well as a finite number must always be divisible into odd and even. Happalat ha-Pilosofim I (Tahafut al-Falasifah I, p. 9, 1. 23 ff.; DestructioDestructionum I, p. 19va, 1.11 ff.; Horten p. 27; Museon 1899, p. 281): "We say number is divided into even and odd, and it is impossible that anything should be outside this distinction whether it be existent and permanent or non-existent. For when we assume a certain number we must believe that it must inevitably be even or odd, irrespective of whether we consider the things numbered as existent or as non-existent, for even if they cease to exist after having existed, this [disjunctive] judgment does not disappear nor does it change." - m n .t.tip i'a ,npiVnn iro N r ® wn ipwi ,-nsn air"?n pVrp noDon u t o n «!?tpa I'Dtotp -u,l7j7 annnn ,nsDD wurwo nn .rfo in -in»: nxd: runn m y j OH '3 , i m a in d'nxzm o m s o n njHw® ]'a , - n w in nr invno bVo' .rurwn nVi m m n«r n y n nI? .riwsnn irtN Averroes, on the other hand, insists that it is only by virtue of its finitude that a number must be divisible into odd and even, be that finitude conceptual or real. Conceptual finites, however, as, e. g., future time, are only conceptually divisible into odd and even. The infinite, therefore, is not necessarily divisible into odd and even, inasmuch as the infinite has neither conceptual nor real existence, for it exists only in potentiality, and existence in potentiality is like non-existence. Happalat ha-Happalah I (Tahafut al-Tahafut, p. 9, 1. 3 ff.; Destructio Destructionum I, p. 19va, 1. 24 ff.; Horten, p. 27): "This proposition is only true of that which has a beginning and an end outside the soul or in the soul, that is to say, it is only then that we are intellectually bound to think that it must be either even or odd irrespective of the circumstance whether it has actual existence or it has no actual existence. But that which exists only in potentiality, that is to say, a thing which has neither a beginning nor an end, cannot be described as either even or odd

490

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[225-227

for that which is in potentiality is like that which is nonexistent." unvow "ri ,»oa i« vBib pn n^am n"?nnn bv riDa p i r dn nnKon nn ,raa K3£D3 Kin» hd dVini .lnwxo nyai m y n nya ns:ni am rV»y "73®n .. ."ne: «in» n^i air «in®

v"?j? pir

Kb ,wbjn t^i n^nnn l1? ]w

P a r t II 10. Physics VIII, 5; Intermediate Physics VIII, ii, 2. Cf. below n. 19. 11. Metaphysics II, 2. Cf. Prop. Ill, Part I, p. 482, n. 4. 12. See Moreh II, 22. 13. Crescas' argument here may be restated as follows: Suppose we have an eternal uncaused cause capable of producing more than one effect. Suppose again that these effects co-exist with the eternal cause and have order neither in space nor in nature. Under these circumstances, according to Maimonides' own admission, these effects may be infinite in number. Crescas now raises the following question: Why could not these effects be infinite in number even if we assume them to be arranged among themselves in a series of causes and effects? In other words, Crescas' contention is this. Assuming an uncaused eternal cause, with which its effects are co-existent, these effects should be possible to be infinite in number even if they form a series of causes and effects. As for the possibility of one simple cause to produce more than one effect, it is denied if the cause acts by necessity but is admitted if it acts by will and design (cf. Moreh II, 22). The point of Crescas' reasoning will become all the more effective when taken as being especially directed against section II of Aristotle's proof in the Metaphysics as reproduced above in Prop. Ill, Part I, p. 482, n. 4. It will be recalled that Aristotle makes the statement that intermediates would require a first cause even if they were infinite. Now Crescas seems to turn on him and argue: Why not assume an infinite number of intermediates having a first cause and affirm the existence of an infinite series of intermediate causes and effects?

227]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION III

491

14. Hebrew O'BnDDno nxp "one of the commentators" and not as the expression would ordinarily mean "some of the commentators," for the reference is here to Narboni. The term nxp is used here in the sense of the Arabic which means both some and some one. Thus in Cuzari I, 115, "JiVdVk ]>j)a is translated by DO^DnD in« "one of the kings," whereas in Moreh I, 74, Seventh Argument, «in «iSns risD« 1 ^« '-D«nD fya is translated by nxp nr n'fin O'SiDiVsn 'mn« "some of the later philosophers have explained this." It was the ordinary understanding of the Hebrew nxp as "some" that caused here the corruption of inn into lTfin in the printed editions and some MSS. 15. Hebrew JTJ'. The term ya1 throughout this passage and elsewhere is used in an additional sense which it had acquired from its Arabic equivalent of which it was used as a translation. Both the Hebrew and the Arabic terms mean reach, arrive, extend to, attain. But the Arabic means also be brought to an end, be accomplished, be limited. Thus in Hobot ha-Lebabot I, 9; JL-Jl j V 1 ^ ir^nro mjno niVyn, "the causes are limited a parte ante." Here I have translated it in each instance according to the requirements of the context but always in conformity with its original and acquired meanings. Shem-tob ben Joseph Falaquera evidently was conscious of the new use of the term JTJ' in philosophic texts but, unable to account for it, ascribes it to the intransitive meaning of the verb, which indeed is a good explanation as far as it goes. Reshit Uokmah III, 1, p. 62: ison nr nwipn a n a jno nba 'a njnV 71x1 n'yf] «si' una «ai ay"? iiwoi [' a av«i iDa ,-raiy bjns mn oipoa «xvn ai®m «npn »an®' bsb nr 'man ,n'aa n'a 'yjD i'n 'n «lev mpna iniym laiy. The influence of the Arabic t**^" reach one's aim, is also to be discerned in Samuel ha-Nagid's use of J?'jn in the following verse in Ben Kohelet: nip' m o ova oyn 1 ? ,D"l«o u^a Dn' itru«. See Yellin, "Ben Kohelet of Samuel Ha-Nagid," Jewish Quarterly Review, n. s., XVI (1926), 275 [6], and Yellin's comment on p. 273. For j r n as a translation of ¿1»., see quotations from Saadia and Bahya in the next note.

492

CRESCAS* CRITIQUE Of ARISTOTLE

(227

16. This passage is a verbatim quotation from Narboni's commentary on Moreh II, Introduction, Prop. III. This statement, however, is not original with Narboni. It is only a paraphrase of Aristotle's own words with which he clinches his arguments against an infinite series of causes upward, in Metaphysics I, 2, 994a, 18-19: "So that if there is no first there is no cause at all," and of the statement in Physics VIII, 5, 256a, 11-12: "And without the first mover, indeed, the last will not move." What Crescas, therefore, really does here after having refuted the Aristotelian proof of Altabrizi, is to quote again, this time via Narboni, another part of the same Aristotelian proof (see above p. 482, n. 4). Other paraphrases of this statement of Aristotle are as follows: Themistius in De Caelo I, 1, ed. Landauer, Hebrew text, p. 27, 1. 15: p » "?a mtrxn i'« Ton mnn'f nna rrn' "itw -cnn o nn -cn vVk nyunn a w n ' o n a - r n p - a i vVn y w -ipsn w no '3 .inVirn DH31H p . Latin text, p. 41, 1. 4: "Quod enim in continua generatione consistit, esse non habet, atque eo minus in alia turpe est enim existimare eo quicquam moveri, quo nunquam pervenire potest." Saadia, Emunot we-Deot I, 1, Fourth Demonstration: "For the mind cannot think backward infinitely and comprehend the infinite. By the same token, existence cannot proceed forward infinitely and complete an infinite process so as to reach us. And if existence could not reach us, we would not exist." nosy nVyn /ia -vnyni rbyab morion u nVyn nb ri'!?an iV r w noi yin n"? oni .uVxn (¿V.) j n y ia -iuym nan1? mnn u ymn .mm «V mnn Bahya ibn Pakuda, Ifobot ha-Lebabot I, 5, Second Proposition: "It has already been shown that that which has no beginning has no end, for it is impossible in that which has no beginning to reach at a limit at which one can stop." y r ^ -itPBN w ' a s .¡-tan i1? i1« rfrrtn 1V no bsa man: naa '3 .i^i:« m«n iiDy® Vna n"?nn 1 1 ? n a n a (¿J--D Judah ha-Levi, Cuzari V, 18: "For that which is infinite cannot become actually realized." "yyisn V« KS' n'^an 11? noi. Averroes' Epitome of the Physics VIII, p. 43b: "For if the intermediate causes go on to infinity, there will be no first, and if there

227]

N O T E S TO P R O P O S I T I O N III

493

is no first, there will be no last. But the last exists. Hence the first exists, and that is the self-mover." 1 1 n \ T «"7 - k w o i ,iiB>tn dip n'rv «"? .rvSzin k ? a"j?2CDKn o^n l ?« '3 1 Kim , k x d j iifNm ran . k x d j ¡ n n x n ^ a x . ] n n « av rrrr k ? |iPtn d p . m o yyuncn 17. The line of reasoning employed by Crescas in the arguments following bears some resemblance to Algazali's reasoning against the impossibility of an infinite series of causes and effects, in Ilappalat ha-Pilosofim IV (Tahafut al-Falasifah IV, p. 33, 1. 24 ff.; Destruction Destructionum IV, p. 71r; Museon 1900, pp. 375— 376). Algazali's arguments may be outlined as follows: I. According to the philosophers' belief in the eternity of the universe it should be possible to have a series of causes and effects which is infinite in the upward direction but finite in the downward direction, for of such a nature is time according to their own view. (Cf. Refutation of Altabrizi's proof in Prop. I, Part II, p. 423, n. 38). II. If you say that time constitutes a successive series whereas natural causes and effects are all co-subsistent, the answer is that disembodied souls are admitted to be infinite even though they are not in a successive line. III. If you say that disembodied souls have no order at all, neither that of nature nor that of position, whereas causes and effects have order in nature, the answer is: a. By admitting the infinity of disembodied souls, the philosophers have admitted the possibility of an infinite number at large. If they are now to deny any particular kind of infinite number, such as the infinite number of causes and effects, they must prove that by a special argument. b. It is not true that disembodied souls have no order. They have order in time. 18. That is to say, Narboni's statement might hold true only in case the causes are prior to their effects in time in addition to their being prior to them in nature. In fact, in the original application of this argument to the problem of eternity, as we have seen, there is the assumption of priority in time. The argument,

494

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[227

therefore, is insufficient to prove the contention of this proposition, namely, the impossibility of an infinite series of causes and effects where the priority involved is only that of nature. The reasoning in this argument, it will be noticed, is just the opposite of that employed by Algazali. Cf. above n. 17, II. 19. The distinction between essential and accidental causes with respect to infinity is described by Maimonides in the following passage: "Equally impossible is the existence of an infinite series of causes . . . This causal relation constitutes [what is known as] the essential natural order, concerning which it has been demonstrated that an infinite is impossible In other cases it is still an open question, as, e. g., the existence of the infinite in succession, which is called the accidental infinite, i. e., a series of things in which one thing comes forth when the other is gone, and this again in its turn succeeded a thing which had ceased to exist, and so on ad infinitum" (Moreh I, 73, Eleventh Proposition). Cf. above Prop. Ill, Part I, n. 2 (p. 481). Similarly in Algazali's Maka$id al-Falasifah II, pp. 124-5, the impossibility of an infinite series of causes is confined only to that which Maimonides describes as essential. "It follows that any number assumed to consist of units existing together and having order in nature and priority and posteriority cannot be infinite, and this is what is meant by infinite causes." ,-nrran nonpi jnea tid -jrv o'sscdj tr-inx rain ~ibdo fcw a"innm .•n"? ri'^an niVjn nn ,npz> udo "b ir^an pa? no nwxa nn This distinction is likewise discussed by Averroes in the following places: Happalat ha-Happalah I (Tahafut al-Tahqfut I, p. 7, 1. 30 ff.; Destructio Destructionum I, p. 18vb, 1. 7 ff.; Horten p. 21,1. 29-p. 23, 1. 5): "This [impossibility of an infinite regress] is true and is conceded by the philosophers if the prior motions are assumed to be a necessary condition for the existence of the posterior motions Accordingly, in their opinion, the existence of an accidental infinite is possible but not of an essential infinite." nw'SM 'ton mompn myunn vum dn o'DiDi^Dn Vxn «in "731pm no« nn .dsjn nb rnpoa i1? n'!wn I'N® na nwxD abxt< -i»bk rrm . . .nnntvion

227]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION III

495

Happalat ha-Happalah IV (Ta.ha.fut al-Tahafut IV, p. 70, 1. 4 ff.; Destructio Destructionum IV, p. 70ra, 1. 8 if.; Horten, p. 187): "According to the philosophers a series of infinite causes is in one respect false and impossible but in another respect necessary. They consider it impossible when the causes are essential and in a straight direction, if, e. g., every preceding cause is a condition in the existence of every succeeding one. But they do not consider it impossible if the causes are accidental and in a circular direction." yaw «in» nn . t x o 3"vtdi t x d jhdj r r a a mbyv

d'-oik d'didiVdh

'n^ai ,in«nnn mtrwa 'ton Dno cmp rrn ok ,n»vn ^yi oxya vnwa •aiaoai mpoa vneo aire« yaw Intermediate Physics VIII, ii, 2: "As for the existence of an infinite number of bodies one being the cause of the other, it is impossible both essentially and accidentally if they all are assumed to be at the same time; it is impossible essentially but possible accidentally if they are assumed to be not at the same time." npw nn ,-rrv dot» dm hud orixp n'^an '^ya v t a mou niK'xoi .mpoa t»bk osya nperia «in ,nn' Van ,imv® oni .mpoi Drya Throughout all these passages, it will have been noticed, in addition to the distinction between essential and accidental causes, a distinction is also made between successive causes and co-existent causes, the former being described in one place as being "in a straight direction" Ttl'n "?y. This distinction can be traced to Metaphysics 11,2, 994a, 1 ff. Aristotle states there that causes cannot be infinite either "in a straight direction," eis evdvwpiav or "according to kind," /car' eldos. Averroes offers two interpretations of these Aristotelian phrases: "By in a straight direction he means that the causes are coexistent, as if they were in a straight line, and by according to kind he means that the causes are one after the other and not together, after the manner of things which belong to the same kind, that is to say, that one individual exists after another individual and one group after another group, so that when the later comes into existence the earlier passes away. It is possible, however, that by in a straight direction he means that the causes belong to the same kind as, e. g., man from man, and by according to kind he means that the causes

496

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[229

belong to different kinds under one genus, as, e. g., fire arising from air, air from water, water from earth, for all these are causes alike in genus." (Quoted by Abrabanel in Mif'alot Elohirn IX, 4, p. 62b). rem ,-ie>' ip by an ,-iit n m n : ni^yn vrr® -itfvn - | t u nx-v •'Dnvon D'-rnn - j n by ,irr ab ,rnn«n in« nnx ni^yn vrr» i'on -in«nonft> by ,bbs i n « ^"731 i n n nn« i n « ono KHOW 'jixi ( in«n i'on 1?« 103 ,-in« i'dd dhd rent» no "wva recT® ^ u o ' i .o-npn i d b j « x o : -nmo jid nnn d ' d u j o'E^nno d t d o nno ren® no ]'on -jmai ,d-i«o d i n nvn

on obo nbt< '3 , p « n o D'om D'ono -n«ni Ti«no t»«n rrrrtp 103 ,in« .aiD3 m0'3D0 m^y Averroes' first interpretation is reflected in the following passage of Gersonides' Commentary on Averroes' Epitome of the Physics I I I : "Another difficulty has been raised against this view, which difficulty is based upon the proposition that an infinite number of causes and effects is impossible, whether those causes and effects exist together or not. This proposition has already been demonstrated in the first book of the Metaphysics, [i. e., Book Alpha Minor]." ]'« n'W?i!i m"?y rm'xo» by ' i n nn ,m« pso n n o'psiD» vn Tiyi - a s nonpnn n«n , i n ' i « * » ' 1« i n ' wsd'® ren d-isdo"? r p ^ n .jnan m«» noo j w i n -10K03 m«nnn A similar interpretation of that statement of Aristotle may also be discerned in the following passage of Algazali, Teshubot She'elot, p. xxxix: "Those causes must inevitably be in a straight direction, i. e., existing together, or in coming one after the other." v « a a d«i nn' mtreoj 'lien by vre® ay mfym nuDn Dm« ij?:d' tub .it nn« 20. The Hebrew text is rather vague. I take it as Crescas' own criticism of the foregoing distinction. He now argues to the effect that if an infinite series of accidental causes is possible, it will be necessary to advance a special argument to prove that an infinite series of essential is not equally possible. The reasoning here is suggestive of the reasoning employed by Algazali as reproduced above in n. 17, III, b. 21. As we have seen, the main point of Crescas' argument was, that, assuming an uncaused eternal cause, it is not impossible to have an infinite series of causes and effects coexisting with eternal

2291

NOTES TO PROPOSITION IV

497

cause. And so he now concludes, quite logically, that while it is true that this proposition does not prove the impossibility of an infinite series of causes and effects, and hence does not prove the creation of the world in time, still it proves that the world is not its own cause but presupposes the existence of an uncaused cause. There is in Crescas' conclusion the ring of a veiled challenge to Altabrizi's statement that the object of the proposition is to prove both (a) that the series of causes and effects cannot be infinite and (b) that they must culminate in an uncaused cause: "Now that you know this, you may understand that the purpose of this proposition is to prove that there must be an end to the series of causes and effects and that they must terminate at a cause which is entirely uncaused but has necessary existence by its own nature." m ^ n t m n^sn n t o Kin raipnn nam iroon® jn ,nr nj?T ntwoi nyiriD ¡rnn bax bbs n^by rrnn n"? n^jj onym nv^Sym rrbyn .losy1? nwxDn PROPOSITION IV 1. The Hebrew text of this proposition is taken from Isaac ben Nathan's translation of Altabrizi. 2. Hebrew 'DHD. The term n^wa is a literal translation of the Arabic o^^*- Both these terms are derived from a root originally meaning set free. They thus reflect the Greek atrbXvTos, which, from its original meaning loosed, free, came to be used in the sense of absolute. A still closer analogue of the Hebrew n^WD is the Arabic J-"./-*, which, literally meaning sent, is used in the sense of absolute in the spurious Theology of Aristotle (cf. Dieterici, Die sogenannte Theologie des Aristoteles, Arabic text, p. 108,1. 3). The term D^nio in the sense of absolute, which occurs often in Crescas (p. 152,1. 13) and elsewhere, is of Mishnaic origin and is to be considered as the equivalent of the Arabic and the Greek terms rather than a translation thereof. For the opposite of n^lfO and ta^niD there are several terms each of which designates a different shade of meaning of the term relative, (a) 'Bins in the various senses of the category of relation, 'puso, > — i r p o s TI, (Prop. VI, p. 238, 1. 9). (b) "|WM £». axdXovdos, consequent upon or incident to Prop. XIV, Part II, n. 9, p. 631; Prop. XV, p. 282, 1.

498

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[229

14; below n. 14). (c) nenpo, restricted, from a root meaning bind, as nial?nia dm rnenpo ON in Narboni quoted below n. 8. The expressions "TllTa ODD and aVnioa onD are used by Hillel of Verona in his discussion of this proposition. 3. Crescas endeavors to explain here why Maimonides has included substance among the categories of change, for, as we shall see in the course of this note, there had been two kinds of classifications, one which included substance and the other which did not. The distinction drawn here by Crescas between timeless change and change in time corresponds to the distinction he draws later, in Proposition V, between change proper and motion. The latter is always change in time. (Cf. Prop. I, Part II, n. 101, p. 463). What Crescas is therefore trying to say here is that Maimonides has used the term change in this proposition advisedly to include timeless change. This implied difference between change and motion and the further implication that the former includes substance and the latter does not has a history behind it, which I am going to trace here with some detail. Aristotle himself seems to make a distinction between change, fieraPoXr), and motion, nivqois. While in one place he says: "for the present we do not have to make any difference between the terms motion and change" (Physics IV, 10, 218b, 19-20), in another place he states explicitely that "change differs from motion" (Physics V, 5, 229a, 31). The difference between motion and change is expressed by him as follows: Motion is the change from a certain subject to a certain subject (Physics V, 1, 225b, 2, and V, 5, 229a, 31-32), whereas change may be from a subject to a non-subject or from a non-subject to a subject (Physics V, 1, 225a, 3 ff.). Accordingly, Aristotle denies that "there is motion in the category of substance" (Physics V, 2, 225b, 10-11), inasmuch as generation and corruption, he says, which constitute the changes in substance, are changes from a non-subject to a subject and from a subject to a non-subject (Physics V, 1, 225a, 26 and 32). Following out this distinction, Aristotle seems to be on the whole very careful in the use of the terms change and motion. When he uses the term change as the subject of his classification, he enumerates four categories, including substance. But when

229]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION IV

499

he uses the term motion, he enumerates only three categories, excluding substance. The following references to his writings will illustrate this point. I. Passages in which the term change is used and the category of substance is included: Physics III, 1, 200b, 33-34. Metaphysics VIII, 1, 1042a, 32—b, 3; XII, 2, 1069b, 9 ff. De Gen. et Corr. I, 4, 319b, 31 ff. The category of substance is also included in the classification given in Physics I, 7, 190a, 31 ff. and Metaphysics VII, 7, 1032a, 13-15, where instead of change the term generation, yeveais, is implied. In the first of these passages the categories of relation and time are also mentioned. II. Passages in which the term motion is used and the category of substance is excluded: Physics V, 1, 225b, 7-9; 2, 226a, 24-25; VII, 2, 243a. 6-7: VIII, 7, 260a, 26-28. De Caelo IV, 3, 310a, 23-24. De Anima I, 3, 406a, 12 ff. Here Aristotle speaks of four kinds of motion, but he gets the four not by including substance but by resolving the term quality into diminution and growth. Topics IV, 1, 121a, 30 ff.: "If, then, motion be assumed as the genus of pleasure, we must see whether pleasure be not locomotion (« n a « a a ' w n

509

mn ,-winn "?« n«inn p

- ^ m ia own

, ' w n 1 « n y u n n ® «inn - i a « a a no p i « a dm: n e « a V y nan mn ns»«a

o

i d » » ' i k t ® .nts^ma d«i m e n p a 0 « n y n Kin ' 3 .nan 1 ? n a nia^a> Kin n » « . ^ y i s n "7« nan p «raw

mn'

« x r n «inn nann ia - \ m nawaa

. n n o N o o n s d ' 'lapntp n a i d « » ,nanpnn n«ra nx-un inn

' w n ' 3 . o a x y a Dna « s b * p

dj ronn ' w n

, n n a « a ' i a «in

nann

.ona ia Da « s b 1 w n ran , n n a « a 'na tree: «im R i n n a n "i«nn yataa «in .nai«i nr k h s b

ram

m i x n n y n m n 1 ,nDsnm minn « m i o s y a «in n » n nn

.oxyn na«a

« i m ,min «np 1 nmn « ^

.n-iixn

n n « nttnnnan n n x n n r n a a i

' 1 » « i m .nDsn «np 1 m D B j n n n s n n r n a a i

¡nnnni

. m « ' x a "7« n w x o aba

niK'icDa 'irtf «np> m i x V« n m x o p n y n n r n a a i

w

.niN'xa «V

m«'saa

' » n ' n ' m ] w « - i n n i r n a n viBai ,nn« ' i » n mm n r n a n n«tai

. m x ' x a "?« .D"T»

.mV'apa myun

to

pi

. i n o n m n m a x n « i m ,naan n a « a a « s a ' i

.D'an o n p n cran a w a , m m a nuntrnn «im , m a ' « n n a « n a « x a n nyimn -io«n n a « a 'irE'n nr "ryi ,npnynn nyuri « i m ,ra«n n a « a a « s e n «inty na 1 ? n a « a n y u n ] ' « o x y n - i a « a a o«i

.V'raa D " w n -i«tt> ^yi t n s a .'OMS

B. A similar use of the terms "material subject" and "sustaining subject" is found in Narboni's commentary on the Moreh I, 73, The Third Proposition: "Know that motion is the entelechy of t h a t which is in potentiality, in so far as it is in potentiality, while it has that entelechy. Therefore the entelechy which is motion is an intermediate entelechy, that is to say, the material subject, i. e., the thing itself which passes from potentiality into actuality, is neither completely potential nor completely actual, but its realization is taking place slowly and gradually so that the potentiality cannot be distinguished from the actuality. If the motion, for instance, is that of place, it is the gradual consumption of distance. This is the material subject of motion, for the sustaining subject refers to the thing that is being moved." . n i a ^ n nr 11? n v n o y n a a «in n a n x a naaif na m a W « ' n nyimn ' a y r n a n n «¡run f«B> V n , y x i a a nia^iy «in nyunn «in n » « n i a ^ n nt n'n p ^ i , i a x y a V y i s n "?« n a n a « s v n «inn n a m V n

,maj ' r y i s a

«"71 n o :

naa

nyirn « ' n d«i

. ^ y i s n p n a n naa ' n ^ a iiE>«n ii»«n a y e taya y m «in "?a«

«in y y i n a n o

, n a n n «¡ran «im , i w n iitwo - p i n nyan « ' n nan ,ra«n .mayan «run

510

CRESCAS* C R I T I Q U E OF A R I S T O T L E

[231

C. Cf. also Narboni on Moreh II, Introduction, Prop. X X I V : "From this you may gather that the term 'possible' may be applied in general to two kinds of things: First, to that which receives, which may be named the sustaining subject, and an example of this is prime matter, which is potential with reference to form, and likewise body, which is potential with reference to accidents. Second, to that which is received, which may be named the material subject, and an example of this is the form [with reference to prime matter] or the accidents [with reference to body]." .TDjwn Ntran Kim .^apnn by .urn ^ by now HPBKn '3 nro -\b nN-m ran «in new ,cirai p 1031 ,nmxn "?K roa Kin ntm ,)i»Knn noinn Mini .•npan IK nmxn wni ,nonn wran mm ,"?3ip»n by noK'i ,DnpDn D. In his commentary on Algazali's Kawwanot ha-Philosofim III, on motion, Narboni quotes this distinction in the name of Averroes. "Said Averroes in the fifth book of the Physics that motion has two aspects, first, with reference to its matter, and, second, with reference to its form. The meaning of this is as follows: Motion has two subjects, (a) A subject in which it exists, and this is identical with that which is movable. It is with reference to this subject that motion is defined as the entelechy of that which is movable qua movable, (b) A material subject, and this is identical with that which is realizable in place or in quality or in quantity or in substance, if there be motion in the category of substance. It is with reference to this subject that motion is defined as the entelechy of that which is in potentiality (see about the two definitions of motion in Proposition V, p. 523, n. 5) Motion, then, when viewed with reference to its matter is to be included under the four categories But in general, when we consider motion only with reference to its form it is to be included under the category of passion, for it is the transition of a thing from state to another." nn«n ,mrna w n1? nyiwn '3 'yaw yasm '»'orn "ran p no« ia Ntzn: ,QWU >at> n1? nyiwn '3 ,nt niKai .nmix nro rva&m ,nnon nxo Kin noa yyiwon hid1?® Kin» t k q no«' na3 nr^i ,yymon Kim .niojm -I»K»3 rrn DK IK noa IK 7 « IK rata yuan Kim ,non KPIJI .yjruno -iti>K3 nyurin ran . . .nsat» no mo1?» rby no«' ntm Kim ,njron DXj?n N P ® ^331 . . .nnoKD yaiKa DDHJ nyiwn nrvn . . .man nro mruo

NOTES TO PROPOSITION IV

231]

- m n rninn

kti

o .^ysrw

tdkd3

511

nw3J N'n ran . . .la1? nmix nyiannD "wid

E. This distinction is made, without mentioning Averroes, in an anonymous supercommentary on the Intermediate Physics (MS. Adler 1744.2) V, ii, 4: " 'The contraries between which there is an intermediate etc.' If the question is raised that motion is known to exist in a category in which there is no intermediate between the contraries, as, e. g., the categories of action and passion, our answer is that motion has two subjects, a material subject and a sustaining subject, and that the motion which exists in the categories of action and passion is that with reference to the sustaining subject which we have mentioned. But in three categories, i. e., quantity, quality and place, there is motion, for these categories there is an intermediate between the contraries." 1'nb> -i»nd3 njnin nxdj -doi -i»sm QNi 'jjxD« on'J'a -i!£>n oosnn twij .D'wu rb nyunn Da'iw ^ y s r m ^ y s ' » t d n d 103 ¿yum om'3 .inDN -iz>so Toyon NPin ^so nih on3 wv nyiwm ,"royn 'lain |'3 ^"-i ,'yms on'j'3 o .nyinn toion .ratal -|'toi no33 Vn .nifotai .oosnn w F. The original statement of Averroes is not found either in his Intermediate Commentary or in his Epitome. It is found only in his Long Commentary on the Physics V, i, 3, of which the following passage is quoted from the Latin translation (p. 215ra, B): "Motus igitur habet duplicem consyderationem. quoniam secundum suam materiam est in genere eius, ad quod est motus, secundum autem formam, idest secundum quod est transmutatio coniuncta cum tempre, est in praedicamento passionis." There is no single passage in Aristotle to which this distinction of the two kinds of subjects in motion can be traced. But it can be shown that on the whole it reflects the main trend of his views: First, as pointed out by Narboni himself (quotations B and D), it is based upon Aristotle's two definitions of motion, which we shall discuss later in Prop. V, n. 5. Second, it reflects Aristotle's discussion in Physics V, 1, 224a, 34-224b, 16. Aristotle names five things which are present with motion, namely, the mover, that which is moved, time, that from which the motion proceeds, and that to which it tends. He then raises the question as to in which of these five things motion exists.

512

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[231

He eliminates outright the mover, time, and that from which motion proceeds. He takes up the remaining two and concludes that motion is in that which is moved ( t o mvovy.tvov, yjrunon.) As for the into which (els 0, v"?w no), he draws a distinction. Taking the change of a thing in its process of becoming white as an example, he says that whiteness (Xeu«6TT)S, p1?) is not motion, but becoming white (kevKavais, jia^) is motion {Physics V, 1, 224b, 15-16). Now, taking this last example of Aristotle, the change undergone by a thing in its becoming white, Averroes would call the thing underlying the change (to Kivovfitvov) the sustaining subject whereas the color that is becoming white (Xemavais) he would call the material subject. Third, it may be traced to the following passage in Metaphysics VII, 7, 1033a, 7-12: "But though what becomes healthy is a man, 'a man' is not what the healthy product is said to come from. The reason is that though a thing comes both from its privation and from its substratum, which we call its matter (e. g., what becomes healthy is both a man and an invalid), it is said to come rather from its privation (e. g., it is from an invalid rather than from a man that a healthy subject is produced)." Now, in this illustration, Averroes would call "man" the sustaining subject and "invalid" the material subject. Fourth, it reflects a lengthy discussion of Aristotle which occurs in De Generatione et Corruptione I, 4, 319b, 8 ff., and in Physics V, 1, 224b, 35 ff. I shall start with an analysis of the passages in the De Generatione et Corruptione and then correlate with them the passages in the Physics. In the De Generatione et Corruptione Aristotle enumerates the four species of change, belonging to the four categories of quantity, place, quality and substance (319b, 31-320a, 2). Each of these changes is from contrary to contrary, as, e. g., growth and diminution in quantity; front and rear in place; hot and cold in quality; generation and corruption in substance. In each of these changes, furthermore, there is a subject or substratum (iiiroKeLjatvov) which is receptive of both the contraries. There is, however, the following difference between the subject in the changes of quantity, place and quality and that of substance. In the first three, the subject is perceptible (319b, 11) and the contraries are

231]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION IV

513

each "an accident in the general sense of the term" (320a, 1). In the change of substance, the subject is imperceptible (319b, 15), being "matter in the most proper sense of the term" (320a, 2), and the contraries generation and corruption do not exist in it as accidents. Cf. Joachim, Aristotle on Coming-to-be and Passingaway, p. 105 ff. Aristotle goes further to say that in the categories of quantity, quality and place, the changes may be considered with reference to three things. First, with reference to the subject. Second, with reference to the categories to which the contraries, considered independently of their subject, happen to belong. Third, with reference to the contraries considered together with their subject, not as accidents but as forms of the subject. If we take, for instance, the qualitative change expressed in the statement "that the musical man passed-away and an unmusical man came-to-be, and that the man persists as something identical" (319b, 25-26), in that change three things are to be considered. First, man as the perceptible, persistent subject of the contrary properties musicalness and unmusicalness. Second, musicalness-and-unmusicalness as constituting a property or quality inhering in man. Third, the musical man and the unmusical man considered as two men. Now, says Aristotle, the changes will have different designations in accordance to each of these three aspects. First, "as regards man, these changes are iradrj" (319b, 29). The meaning of Tadrj here is uncertain. Joachim takes it, with some hesitation, in the sense of áXXocúaeis. But from Narboni's and Averroes' statements in quotations A and F, it is clear that in the Arabic and Hebrew translations of the De Generatione et Corruptione the term 7rádr¡ here was taken in the sense of TrcL i- e-> the category of passion. Thus, according to this interpretation of the text, the changes with regard to the subject belong to the category of passion. Second, with reference to musicalness-and-unmusicalness constituting "a property essentially inhering in man" (319b, 27), the change belongs to the category of quality and is therefore called alteration (cf. 319b, 33 and 30). Third, "as regards musical man and unmusical man, they are generation and corruption" (319b, 29), i. e., they belong to the category of substance.

514

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[231

By the same token, we have reason to infer, if instead of "musical" and "unmusical," we take the predicates "great and small" or "front and rear," with reference to man the changes belong to the category of passion; with reference to great and small or front and rear they belong to the categories of quantity and place respectively; but with reference to great man and small man or front man and rear man, the changes belong to the category of substance. But still, according to Aristotle, there is a difference between substantial change in this last illustration, which is only involved in the other three kinds of change, and substantial change which is a complete coming-to-be and a complete passing-away, as, e. g., the birth and death of a musical man. The former kind of substantial change may be called relative substantial change, or, to use Aristotle's own expression, it is "a certain" (rts: Physics V, 1, 225a, 14) change. The latter kind may be called absolute substantial change, or, to use again Aristotle's own expression, it is change "simply" (¿7rXcos, ibid.). We may express this distinction between the relative and the absolute kind of substantial change in still another way, also suggested by Aristotle. Relative substantial change is from a subject to a subject, by which terms is meant a perceptible subject. Absolute substantial change is either from a subject to a non-subject or from a non-subject to a subject, i. e., either from a perceptible subject to an imperceptible subject or from an imperceptible subject to a perceptible subject. Cf. Intermediate Physics V, ii, 3: "After it has been shown that motion is of two kinds, either from a subject to a subject, i. e., from a contrary to a contrary, or from a subject to a non-subject and from a non-subject to a subject, i. e., from being to non-being and from non-being to being, meaning by non-being here not absolute negation but rather privation which is inherent in matter, I say that motion cannot exist in change from a nonsubject to a subject and from a subject to a non-subject. It exists only in the change from a subject to a subject. Although it is true that of both these kinds of change we say that it is from a non-subject to a subject, the meaning of the term 'non-subject' is like that of the term 'non-being' in the phrase from 'non-being to being' when applied to the same two kinds of change. For the prefix 'non* is used in both these cases equivocally. Its proper

231]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION IV

515

meaning, however, is evident. In the first kind of change we mean by 'being' and 'non-being' that absolute being is generated from absolute non-being, as, e. g., man is generated from nonman. This is absolute generation, and its opposite is absolute corruption. But in the second kind of change we mean by 'being' and 'non-being' that being is generated from non-being which is a certain being, i. e., white is generated from non-white which is black. This is not absolute generation; it is only a certain generation, and in the same way its opposite is not absolute corruption but only a certain corruption. In general, these two kinds of change are differentiated from each other in two ways. First, the change from a subject to a subject contains something actual which constitutes the subject of the change, whereas generation and corruption contains nothing actual to constitute the subject of the change. The latter is therefore called absolute generation and corruption, whereas the change in the former case is called a certain generation and corruption. The second differentia is that the change from a subject to a subject is from an existent contrary to an existent contrary and from an affirmation to an affirmation, whereas the change from a non-subject to a subject is from privation to existence and from negation to affirmation." !?« -|sno "r-i ,«¡01: V« Ntrann on . d t d 13 'wni& irann 133® -into nyn nwxoD . « u n a « t t n j 'nbao 1« m ' r t a KBHOO 0x1 .-jen nxdjh n y n n "73« ¡amnion nirVwn i«33 - n j r a m n «Vi ,nwsD "?«-nynoi «ttru ' r t a n rprr 10« nunttra irnn® -ib>bn '« nyiinnt? now ,,!?vm «in® nn .«en: «tpi» ¡ t i t H£>>o rrnn d m 'n!?a "7« «ttnaoi 133» nDi1? nx-p a»K ,«b>ij ^ «an: 'nVnn n',T -1»«» w i t o ' » a mo« mosu 'nVs n"?o o «xdj 'n^io rrrro -\ame ids dn 'nVano rrrr ' r t a a «in® ii»«i3 tow 1:« '3 ,-i«uo WTsn ono 01 ,D'.pn «]iniP3 D3 N'n n«n ,di« n ' n ' d i « ti^so nose® 103 .amnios «soi n'rr aVrrm nsdj TDNi djd« 'lrcra m«n i'»n qbki .Bunion nosnn nssm na^mon mnn ,no «xo: «in -1»« p1? 'nVann ,«xoj rrn® no tetDJ T b i o «in® 13 u ion' D»« .uVnios nnnnn «in® 13 no«' t6 nn n'n' ,-nn®n 1 n n "7^331 .B^mo nDsn #b no i o d h m j r a no« ® 103 ,no nnnnn «in» T3i «®u «en» n'n' n®« ' i r o '3 ,'«n .dt'jjj '33 0^1310 c r w n '3 ^yiB3 ~art 13 ]'« iDsrtm rrinno 'sn i'Dm .ism «¡to «in -1®« ^yiss no

516

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[23I

«in® ' i r a notn .ta^mo iDsm na^mo nnn n ™ u -ion1 nr^i ,'iatirt nbtu 1 rivr djon w u nbtud n'n i f « to ':ti>n ¡nanni .no nosm n» n'm niN'xo Vk -nynn rrn 'an 'iawn ,avn ^ avnoi nümm -pn n x o j -pno .avn m'?l?n2>oi In the foregoing analysis of Aristotle I have purposely restated his views in such a manner as to form a background of Narboni. In Narboni's language, the VTOKei/Jievov of Aristotle is called ToyD Ktra, which he himself explains as TiDJtfl 13 Kin], "the subject in which the motion exists (or by which the motion is sustained)." We m a y therefore translate TDJ70 NtPlJ by sustaining subject. The accidents of quantity, place and quality which are predicated of the sustaining subject are called by Narboni n o n NtPU, literally, material subject, b u t preferably, subject matter. This subject matter is identified by him, quite properly, with "form and accidents" (see quotation C). It should be noticed t h a t throughout his discussion Narboni applies the expression sustaining subject to primary matter, i. e., to the imperceptible subject. He thus finds the distinction between the sustaining subject and the subject matter in all the four categories, including the category of substance. On this last point Crescas seems to depart from Narboni. I t will be impossible to explain fully all of Crescas' statements unless we assume t h a t he uses the expression sustaining subject with reference to a perceptible or, as Averroes calls it, actual subject, and the expression subject matter with reference only to accidents of quantity, place and quality existing in the perceptible subject. He does not seem to apply this distinction to absolute substantial change where there is b u t an imperceptible sustaining subject. 9. Hebrew "i«n V« -iwio mntmn pnyn. T h e term l«n here reflects the Greek irbJdos in De Gen. et Corr. I, 4, 319b, 8. But the Hebrew cannot be translated here by property, for t h a t would apply only to the category of quality (cf. Ibid. 319, 33), whereas Crescas uses it, as he proceeds to specify, with reference to the three categories of quantity, quality and place. The term "inn is therefore to be understood here in the sense of accident in general. Cf. ibid. 320a, 1: TTÍOOS FJ avuPefirjuos o\us.

N O T E S TO P R O P O S I T I O N IV

517

In Narboni (quotation A) the same term "tttfl is used also with reference to the category of substance. Accordingly I have rendered it there by state and stale of being. 10. We have seen above in n. 7 that while some authorities did include the categories of position, action and passion in their classifications of motion, none of them included all the ten categories, with the exception of Altabrizi who makes a general statement to that effect. Furthermore, Narboni, who is the immediate source of Crescas here, says definitely that change with reference to the sustaining subject exists in the category of passion, which, as we have shown, is based upon a dubious statement in De Gen. et Corr. I, 4, 319b, 28 (see above n. 8). Consequently, this statement of Crescas here is to be rendered either "and the other categories," thus reflecting the statement of Altabrizi, or "and the other categories [mentioned above]." Crescas himself later in Prop. V says that change with reference to the sustaining subject belongs to the categories of action and passion. Crescas' statement here, however, may perhaps reflect the following passage in Kawwanot ha-Pilosofim III (Makafid alFalasijah III, pp. 235-236): "As for its true meaning, it is wellknown that motion applies only to translation from one place to another, but by the common consent of the philosophers it has come to be used in a more general sense, signifying the transition from one descriptive quality to another . . . This transition from one state to another undoubtedly applies to all the ten categories, but motion does not apply to all the categories but only to four." oipo1? DipDD pnynn by n W n njnmrw DDIIBOH ran ,mn»NN O^wi na^nn Mini .raoo ^ l a mv pjjd ns'^a crtMNn nojDna nrvn ^SNI ,-n1? 1 -iwyn JTHDNDS DJDN py ? (JU> pyo pnynm . . . i«n ^ win .njn-tta .D^DO nymn ^lsn «"71 ,psD 11. The omission of substance is significant. Using the expression sustaining subject, as we have suggested (above n. 8), only with reference to a perceptible subject, Crescas similarly uses the expression subject matter only with reference to accidents which exist in a perceptible subject. Consequently, change with reference to the subject matter cannot exist in the category of substance.

518

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[231

12. Hebrew ' w n loin 13 t n loxoa Kin n«rn nrruai. Verbally this passage is undoubtedly a paraphrase of the following passage in Narboni (above n. 8, quotation A): «wun w r a a i ' w n n'n .-win -INW» u D»n pny TP« "win mm ,'ionn «inn "win 13 TM Tama. But it is used by Crescas in a different sense. Narboni's original statement means that change is named after the terminus ad quem. Cf. Physics V, 1, 224b, 7-8: "For change is more denominated from that into which, than from that from which, it is moved." Crescas' statement here means this: Change with reference to the accidents which exist in a perceptible substratum is to be found only in the three categories of quantity, quality and place. For it is only in these three categories that you have a perceptible subject receptive of contrary accidents, such as 'augmentation and diminution in quantity, blackness and whiteness in quality, front and rear in place. In substance, to be sure, there is generation and corruption, but these are not changes between accidental qualities but rather absolute substantial changes between being and non-being and there is no perceptible substratum there. Cf. Intermediate Physics V, ii, 3: "It is evident that there is no motion in the category of substance, inasmuch as motion is defined as the entelechy of that which is movable, but there is nothing actual that is movable in this substantial kind of change." MOB»» N'NW n n i a TDK'» IDS nyiinn nrvn® I N « nyiin U NBJ «im .^yiea KSD3 n:»nD i\on n a yyuriD i'«i .yjmnon Intermediate Physics V, ii, 4: "It is evident that there is no motion in substance, inasmuch as there is no contrary in it. Furthermore, substantial change, as we have said, has no actual subject, its subject being only potential." .Dsya w n '3 nyi .-|sn u j w nn« ,nyun oxya i'tt® 'I^j Kim .n33 Kin mefe 13 twin ojdni , , w t ? ^jjisa KBHJ 13 I'K ,in»tw ids 13. That is to say, the proposition deals with change in which a perceptible substratum passes from one accident to a contrary accident, as, e. g., from one size to another, from one color to another, or from one place to another, and then, too, with reference only to the size, the color and the place involved, i. e., the matter of the change, but not with reference to the substratum underlying the change.

NOTES TO PROPOSITION IV

519

14. It will have been noticed that Narboni, by taking the sustaining subject to include an imperceptible subject, i. e., matter, and by taking also the subject matter to include forms in addition to accidents (see above n. 8), had no need of explaining the inclusion of the category of substance by Maimonides in this proposition. Crescas, however, by using the terms sustaining subject and subject matter with reference only to a perceptible subject and accidents, has to look now for an explanation for the inclusion of the category of substance in the proposition. Crescas' explanation is expressed in the following statement: njn-iNrt i1?« a m i n " , n n D « o n i ^ x a i f « nyinV - p s : D s y a nt»« ' w n n'm rrnDND. In the English text I have given a literal translation of it. But what does it mean ? It would seem that the statement lends itself to three possible explanations: (a) Change of substance, according to Maimonides, is always preceded by changes of place and quantity and always precedes change of quality (see Prop. XIV, p. 281). Hence, argues Crescas, since Maimonides has enumerated here the changes of quantity, quality and place, he also had to mention substance, inasmuch as it is involved in all these three. (b) As we have seen above (n. 8), in every quantitative, qualitative and spatial change there is a relative substantial change. What Crescas, therefore, means to say here is this: Whenever there is a change of quantity, or of quality or of place there is always a relative change of substance. To take Aristotle's own example, when a musical man becomes an unmusical man, the change with reference to musical man and unmusical man and not with reference to man or to musical and unmusical is a relative change of substance. Now, argues Crescas, while indeed in absolute substantial change there is no distinction between sustaining subject and subject matter in the specific sense used by Maimonides, still he includes relative substantial change in the proposition because of its being concomitant with the other three changes. Similarly in Prop. XIV (Part II) Crescas points out that Maimonides deals only with relative generation and the term used by him there is the same as here, rDWM m n (see p. 282). (c) The statement may reflect the following passage in Metaphysics VIII, 1, 1042b, 3-5: Kal ino\ovdovyn m-io«»n bs by p-rcr ptptnn -mm .'jyisa» nm naa» nn ona The relation between Maimonides' definition of motion and the first definition of Aristotle is described by Altabrizi as follows: "They have already mentioned two ways of formulating the definition of motion. The first we have already reproduced [i. e., the transition from potentiality to actuality]. The other is mentioned by the First Master who says that motion is a first entelechy of that which is in potentiality in so far as it is in potentiality." no nn«m .mui-or® no d h d in« : o ' j d i k nyiinn njrnna r o r -aai .naa «in no ixn naa® no"? pron nyiinn ton o ,ptp«nn nobon

i-dtp

As for the significance of the expression "first entelechy," used by Altabrizi, see De Anima II, 1, 212a, 22-27. Unlike Crescas, however, Shem-tob Falaquera, after quoting "a certain learned man," probably Altabrizi, finds that Aristotle's definition is not the same as that of Maimonides, and points out the superiority of the former definition to the latter: Moreh haMoreh, II, Introduction, Prop. 5, p. 66: "A certain learned man said: 'motion is a first entelechy [of that which is] in potentiality in so far as it is in potentiality, and if you prefer you may say that it is a transition from potentiality to actuality.' The first definition explains more accurately the nature of motion than the second, for motion must exist potentially, being something inter-

526

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[233-235

mediate between potentiality and actuality It must combine both potentiality and actuality." io«n rrcm dni ,naa « w no - k d naa ]is«n mob® nyunm ,oan t o n i iriv nyunn i t a o ] w t n n riyni .]to .fysn Vk nan» n t w tvn o nV p •« . . .^ysni nan ]'a 'jjxdn nan torn ,naa nyiinn 'a ,,st>n pyno .^ysm naa® nao naa-no n'nn® in®: 6. Hebrew nioV®, J*—J", ivTeXexeia, completeness or actuality, as distinguished from ^JJiB J«*, evtpyua, which, strictly speaking, means activity or actualization. Aristotle, however, commonly uses these terms without distinction (cf. Zeller, Aristotle I, p. 348, n. 2). Both these terms are used by Aristotle in defining motion (cf. Physics III, 2, 201b, 31; 202a, 7; Metaphysics XI, 9, 1065b, 22-23), and they are both likewise used by Crescas in this chapter. I have translated both these terms here by "actuality," except in two places, where Crescas used both of them together, when I have translated them by "entelecheia" and "energeia." The Latin translation of Averroes renders HID^® by "actus (seu perfectio)." A discussion as to the meaning of the terms "energy" and "entelechy" as used by Aristotle in the definition of motion is to be found in Simplicius on Physics III, 1, 201a, 9 (ed. Diels, p. 414, 1. 15 if., and Taylor's translation of the Physics, p. 141, note). 7. Cf. above n. 5. 8. Cf. Physics III, 2, 201b, 27 ff. 9. Cf. Posterior Analytics II, 4, 91a, 16: "Now it is necessary that these [i. e., the definition and the thing defined] should be convertible." TOLVTCL 8' avkyn-q ¿.VTMRRPEFAIV. The Hebrew term nsion (Arabic ]Kma, cf. Steinschneider's Uebersetzungen, p. 54) corresponds to the Greek airoSeiKTiKr) and 7repi ¿iroSeil-ews by which the Posterior Analytics is called by Alexander and Galen respectively (cf. Zeller, Aristotle I, p. 68, note). 10. According to Maimonides' definition, motion is the transition from potentiality to actuality. As the definition must be convertible, it follows that every transition from potentiality to

2351

NOTES TO PROPOSITION V

527

actuality is likewise motion. Now, in the motivity of any motive agent there is also a transition from potentiality to actuality, in so far as it is first a potential motive agent and then becomes an actual motive agent. If every transition from potentiality to actuality is motion, then every motivity is motion. But every motion requires a motive agent (see Prop. XVII). Consequently, every motivity would require a motive agent, thus subverting Aristotle's contention as to the existence of an immovable mover. This argument, as will have been observed, contains two elements. First, the convertibility of definitions. Second, the impossibility that everything which moves should be moved. These two elements occur in the following discussions of the definition of motion: A. Physics I I I , 2, 201b, 20-22: "By some motion is said to be difference, inequality and non-being; though it is not necessary that any of these should be moved, neither if they be different, nor if they be unequal, nor if they be non-beings." This passage is paraphrased in Intermediate Physics III, ii, 5 (Latin, 450vb, L) as follows: "Among them there were some who said that motion is difference and inequality and others who said that it is non-being. However, if motion is difference, as they say, it will follow that whenever a thing becomes different it is moved. But while all things are changed into one another, they are not all moved." N'n» tdnip 'a onai 'iwn p r w n rvw nyrnn» -lew 'a one »up «in Dipa bs a^nnn ,na«» ias .rrw nyisnn nn»n .nssDi v t a .myyuna d^d t«i orapa onxp r w n m«xD3n Vai ,yymo mr® Upon this paraphrase of the Intermediate Physics there is the following comment in Gersonides' supercommentary: "Says Levi: Everything is clear until the end of the chapter, except the statement 'If motion is difference, as they say, it will follow that whenever a thing becomes different it is moved.' The explanation of this reasoning is to be found in the fact that a definition is convertible into the definiendum. Accordingly, since they say that motion is difference, this definition can be converted so as to read that difference is motion." nyisnn nn'n iVi :-idn® no .pusn *]1D ~iy t k q d nr sib nan n n roDn dVini .j?j)i3na rrrro n^ir rrrr» na bov a'»in ,na«» ids nvn^ir

528

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[235

"?« «in® ton nyunn nap na« nm .nun -|Dniv -ran® 'bV «in avnn .njran Kin nvnVir «in» no bop -jenn' niV»i .nvn^ir (In the foregoing Hebrew quotations, it will have been noticed, the second passage uses nvn^ir for fl'W of the first passage. Both represent the Greek ¿rep6rijj. The Latin translator evidently had before him the reading nvnVir, and being uncertain as to its exact meaning translated it according to the various meaning of the Hebrew word by the following Latin terms: "alietatem (seu non ens, seu nihil, seu aliud)." B. Physics III, 3, 202a, 21-31; restated in Intermediate Physics III, ii, 6 (Latin, p. 451r, B ff): "There is, however, a logical doubt If the motive agent is different from the movable object and their actions constitute together motion, I wish I knew whether their actions are one or two If their actions are one and the same, it will follow but this is absurd. And if their actions are different the question is whether motivity is in the agent and movability in the object or whether both exist together either in the agent or in the object And if we say that movability is in the object and motivity in the agent, seeing that they are two different things, i. e., two different motions, it will give rise to these alternative conclusions, namely, either everything which moves will be moved or that which possesses motion will not be moved." yyiwon 'nVa nai yjon n'n on ,jn«i irv'a .. .no pno nn rvo n'ni .niuo nn . . .nn« d« . . .n'n® 1« nn« on'mViys •« ,n$n:n in' on'mViysi •n'J® in ,"?ysnD3 niyjmnni ^yisa nj»n D«n . . .ms^nno on'mhys vn n«i njnnm ^yonoa myyunnm» ra d«i . . .!?ysn»a d«i ^jnsa d« nn' l«*»' n'n'» •« .D'j":^ 'an nn« a"nn' ,mjmn 'a ,onan 'a on» ,!?insa .yjrana 'nVa nana n«xna njmnn n'nnp d« yyiann jtjo This last passage is made use of by Gersonides in Milhamot Adonai VI, i, 24: "For while indeed it is true that every change is a transition from potentiality to actuality, as may be gathered from its definition in the Physics, it does not follow that every transition from potentiality to actuality is change. The reason for this is as follows: Change is a transition from potentiality to actuality only with reference to a passive object in its process of suffering action, but it is not a transition from potentiality to actuality with reference to an active agent in its process of carry-

235]

NOTES TO PROPOSITION V

529

ing out its action. This becomes self-evident from the definition of motion, which reads: 'Motion is the entelechy of that which is movable qua movable.' And in general, change exists in that which is moved and not in that which moves. Were it not so, the agent would be moved by the work it performs. Furthermore, if the transition from potentiality to actuality in the agent is change, we will have to say that every mover undergoes change, in so far as it is a mover." .j?DK>n 1DD3 i t i j o -mnrro i o j ,Vysn ron r w r xin ' w bo ' 3 ,nn Kin 'wnw nn .'imp "?5?sn nana ntwr Vd r r r w nr ' » a n"rr n1? ban Vysn nsnD nwirn .tysnn1? Vysnaa new tysn nsno nN'r -nstp nn .-run n n i d o t noo -wan nn .m^iys rwy1? Vyisa -wn «in 'utpn n:n ^ j u i .yyunn nti® noa yyiman mo1?» nyura now ¡ w r n dnb> "T1J71 .nsK^Dno yymo ^ y i s n n'n nf ,jntsa yyurm i s d ,mn®o jhd h i rrrrv •"in 1 » ion: run , ' w ^yisa Vyisn ^ nana .yyio tonv no It can be readily seen how these passages with their references to the convertibility of definitions and to the impossibility that every mover should be moved could have suggested to Crescas his argument here. There is also a suggestion made by Aristote himself that from his first definition of motion it might be inferred that every mover is movable. Physics III, 1, 201a, 23-27: "Hence that which naturally moves is also movable; for every thing of this kind moves, while being itself moved. To some, therefore, it appears that every thing which moves is moved. Whether, however, this be true or not, will be manifest from some other of our writings; for there is something which moves and is itself immovable." 11. See above n. 5. Cf. Averroes' Intermediate Physics III, ii, 3 (Latin, p. 450rb, E F ) : "Aristotle says also that motion is the entelechy of that which is movable qua movable. This definition becomes evident by reasoning inductively from similars and particulars. For building is the entelechy of that which is buildable qua buildable. Rolling is the entelechy of that which is reliable qua reliable. Heating is the entelechy of that which is heatable qua heatable. The act of building does not exist when the house is already completed nor does it exist when the house exists only in potentiality. The act of building is rather the passage from the

530

CRESCAS' CRITIQUE OF ARISTOTLE

[235

non-being of the house to its becoming a house in actuality and in complete reality. This being so, it is thus proved by this inductive method of reasoning that motion is the entelechy of t h a t which is movable qua movable. The justification for including the term 'movable' in the definition of motion is evident from what we have already stated, namely, that the genus of motion is relation. We have therefore taken the term 'movable' in the definition of motion, because it is more known than motion. This differentia, used in the present definition, though not the same as the differentia used in the first definition, being a differentia derived from the subject of motion, is still better than the differentia used in the first definition, for it does not contain that equivocation which is contained in the term potentiality. For potentiality may be found in all the ten categories, whereas the potentiality used in the definition of motion is the potentiality to be found in the four categories." 'lVa n a n nn .yyuna ton® naa yyunan ma1?» njwin® p m no«'i VuVm Nine» noa n a n nio"7® pun 'a nn .D'p^nm o'onn ®iona .•onnD wn» noa Donnon ma1?® oionm ,W>jrio Kin® noa ^¡rnan mo1?® .naa \xsni iran nvna p 03 n'nn «^1 ¡ran mo!?® oy rrnn «"7 n"jan 'a .niDWn ^yiea rva ni«'*e n u n -nyno -pn «in n"xan DJBKI Kin® noa yjnmnn nia^» nyinn® ttnsnn nro -i«iao , p nr n'n n®«ai naiD nyiann® .uanpn® no1? ' i ^ nyunn -ma yyunan unpVi .yymo .nyimna • JUT mv «in® 'S1? ,njmnn n a a yyianon unp1? Dao«i .«pajcnn ,]i®«-in -naa mpVn ^nann 'n^a n'n D«I ,-nan nra mpVn ^tann nn hy "nann nr * p y naa p Da «in nan ,«®ian nso ^nan «in® 'sV nan® nn .nan D®a n®« »]in®n ia i'«® ,ii®«nn TO mp^n ^nann «son nan «in did« nyimn to npi1? -1®« nam ,m®yn nno«oa «xaa .nna«a nya-i«a 12. See above n. 6.

PROPOSITION VI 1. In the Arabic original of the Morek and in its Hebrew translations there follows here the statement: "The latter kind of motion is a species of motion according to accident." noa I'D «mi mpaa®. (cf. below n. 3). I t is, however, omitted in Isaac ben Nathan's translation of Altabrizi, from which source the Hebrew

2351

531

NOTES TO PROPOSITION VI

version of this proposition is taken. Similarly, toward the end of the proposition, Altabrizi and most of the MSS. read whereas Ibn Tibbon and the editions read 131. 2. Hebrew nrsDa todd, Arabic riJ'BD1?« 'fl -inddd1?«, a literal translation of the Greek H TW IrXoiq) rjXos (Physics IV, 4, 211a, 20-21).

3. Aristotle has several classifications of motion or change. A. Physics IV, 4, 211a, 17 ff. : (1) According to itself or its own e s s e n c e , nad'

avrò

( 2 ) A c c o r d i n g t o a c c i d e n t , Kara

o-u/t/Se/S^KÓs.

B . Physics According to C. Physics According to D. Physics

V, 1, 224a, 21 ff.: (1) According to accident. (2) part, Kara fikpos. (3) According to itself. V, 2, 226a, 19 ff.: (1) According to accident. (2) part. (3) According to itself. V, 6, 231a, 10-11: ( 1 ) According to nature, K a r a

This accidental motion is subdivided into (a) what he elsewhere calls 'according to part,' illustrated by the motion of the parts of the body and of the nail of a ship and (b) what he elsewhere describes as 'inherent in the mover,' illustrated by the motion of whiteness and of knowledge (see B, C, E).

v